UN    3   19U 


I'.v.sioa   S(;C<z^ 


Seetlott 


76  ^:l 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2011  witii  funding  from 

Princeton  Tiieoiogicai  Seminary  Library 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/pilgrimsofliawaiiOOguli 


NIIHAU 


KAUAI 


OAHU 


H/ILrHV/l/        \  \puNAlUU 


australiaW;,!^, 


AJ"" 


X^^oior/ 


pafio" 

SOUTH 
Co/zTSV   AMERICA 


Va/paroi 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS 


Mdp  Compiled  for  (he  HdWdii  Promotion  Committee 
by    RDKiNQ  &  H.E.  Newton 


3cj/e.  in   Mdcs 


''''molokai 


^XJnSHX^ 


KAL/IOP/IPA 

nuKi/w 


Hi^S^^^ 


.MAUI 


KAHOOLAWE 


pap/fffLOA 
■/fJoia 

HAKHIAU 


KAILUA 
HOIUALOA 
KCAUHOU 
KCALEKCKU/^ 
HtPOOPOO 

HOOKE.NA 


WAioumu.  'WHLEhuWP^^ P^J^ 


THE    HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS 

The  group  lies  between  18  deg.  54  min.  and  22  deg.  14  min.  north,  154  dcg.  48  min.  and 
160  deg.   13  min.  west.     Eight  islands  are  inhabited. 

HAWAII  is  the  largest,  75  by  90  miles.  Area  4015  square  miles.  On  it  are  the  highest 
mountains  in  the  Pacific,  two  peaks  reaching  an  altitude  of  more  than  13,000  feet.  Hilo,  the 
chief  city,   is  second  in  population   in  the  territory. 

MAUI  contains   728   square  miles.     Haleakala  is  a  mountain  of  more  than   10,000   feet. 

OAHU,  with  Honolulu,  principal  city  and  capital,  2180  miles  west  of  San  Francisco,  con- 
tains  598   square   miles.      Pearl   Harbor   naval   station    is   located   here. 

KAUAI,    "The   Garden   Isle,"    is  rated   the   oldest   island   in   the   group. 

Intensive   cultivation    is   conducted   on   all    principal    islands. 


The  Pilgrims  of  Hawaii 

THEIR  OWN  STORY  OF  THEIR  PILGRIMAGE 
FROM  NEW  ENGLAND  AND  LIFE  WORK  IN  THE 
SANDWICH  ISLANDS,  NOW  KNOWN  AS  HAWAII 

With  Explanatory  and  Illustrative  Material  Compiled  and 

Verified  from  Original  SoimcES  ''v'Cx^S'^'^     '''  "''''*'£/a 


BY 
REV.  AND  MRS.   ^ 

ORRAMEL  HINCKLEY  GULICK 

(Children  of  Early  Missionary  Families) 

Introduction  by 
JAMES  L.  BARTON,  D.D. 

ILLUSTRATED 


New  York  Chicago  Toronto 

Fleming  H.  Re  veil  Company 

London  and  Edinburgh 


Copyright,  19 18,  by 
FLEMING  H.  REVELL  COMPANY 


New  York  :  158  Fifth  Avenue 
Chicago  :  1 7  North  Wabash  Ave. 
Toronto  :  25  Richmond  Street,  W. 
London  :  21  Paternoster  Square 
Edinburgh :     100     Princes     Street 


TO 

"^ije  ^atoaiian  JKisBi0n  (ttlfilbrtn'a  ^omfg 

The  Sympathy  of  whose  Members  has  been  a  continxtous 

Stimulus  to  the  compilation  of  This  Record  op 

One  of  the  Most  Successful  Missionary 

Enterprises  of  Modern  Times 


TO  THE  MISSIONAEY  FATHERS 

What  ho!  ye  stalwart  mariners,  now  whither  do  ye  sail? 

Your  eyes  are  bright  with  heaven's  light,  your  courage  doth  not 

fail. 
"The  heathen  cry"  they,  smiling,  said.    "They  call  on  thee  and 

me. 
We  sail  to  their  distress,  around  a  world  of  sea. 
What  though  there's  no  returning  from  off  that  island  strand? 
What  though  there's  no  returning  from  out  that  tropic  land? 
Where  summer  never,  never  dies,  strength  fails  and  so  may  we; 
But,  conscience  clear,  and  naught  to  fear,  we'll  sleep  beside  the 

sea. ' ' 
Lo,  many  years  have  vanished.    The  mariners  are  gone, 
Sailed  on  to  dream  in  brighter  day  beyond  the  beauteous  dawn. 
What  ho,  ye  sometime  mariners!     Ye  followed  well  the  gleam. 
The  land  ye  sought  in  sacrifice,  transformed  by  love  hath  been. 
Good  will  ye  brought  and  well  ye  wrought;  saU  on,  and,  happy, 

dream ! 

Mary  Dillingham  Frear. 


INTKODUCTION 

THE  story  of  the  beginning  and  development  of 
the  missionary  enterprise  in  the  Hawaiian  Is- 
lands must  take  its  place  among  the  most  ro- 
mantic and  even  startling  records  in  modern  Christian 
history.  I^ot  a  century  ago  the  islands  that  comprise 
the  Hawaiian  group,  called  today  the  "Paradise  of  the 
Pacific,"  were  inhabited  by  naked  untutored  savages, 
subject  to  degrading  practices  and  superstitions ;  human 
sacrifices  were  in  practice,  infanticide  in  its  most  re- 
volting character  was  common.  Into  and  among  the 
people  of  these  islands,  living  under  these  conditions, 
there  entered  in  1820  a  transforming  force.  It  came 
quietly,  without  ostentation,  with  no  boast  of  strength 
or  pride  of  power,  beginning  its  operations  through  a 
small  band  of  fourteen  missionaries  and  three  Hawaiian 
assistants,  who  sailed  from  Boston,  October  17th,  1819, 
but  who  did  not  arrive  at  Honolulu  until  the  last  day 
of  March,  1820.  For  nearly  two  weeks  the  pagan  king 
delayed  to  grant  them  the  privilege  of  taking  up  their 
abode  on  shore.  Only  forty  years  before  Captain  Cook 
had  there  been  slain  by  the  natives,  and  over  the  entire 
group  ruthless  and  uncompromising  paganism  held  ab- 
solute sway. 

Upon  the  arrival  of  the  missionaries  there  began  a 
mighty  conflict  between  evil  upon  the  throne  and  the 
forces  of  righteousness.    It  was  a  battle  royal  in  which 

5 


6  INTRODUCTION 

heathen  rulers  were  confronted  by  the  ambassadors  of 
Jesus  Christ. 

Little  by  little  paganism  receded  as  the  spirit  of 
Christ  gained  the  mastery,  until  Hawaii,  now  a  Chris- 
tian nation  and  people,  became  a  proud  part  of  our 
own  country,  over  which  floats  the  Stars  and  Stripes. 
The  story  of  the  transformation  of  these  people  from 
paganism  to  Christianity  surpasses  in  interest  every 
romance,  ancient  and  modern,  and  records  a  chapter  in 
the  story  of  the  Kingdom  of  God  on  earth  that  well 
may  stand  side  by  side  with  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

"The  Pilgrims  of  Hawaii"  is  the  record  of  these  mar- 
vellous events  in  human  and  divine  history,  by  which 
a  pagan  people  have  been  transformed  into  a  civilized 
Christian  nation.  But  it  is  of  vast  significance  that  the 
authors  and  compilers  of  this  story  were  born  into  the 
atmosphere  of  this  mighty  reformation  and  were 
familiar,  from  their  childhood,  with  the  traditions  of 
the  transforming  power  of  the  gospel  of  Christ,  as 
revealed  in  its  contact  with  Hawaiian  heathenism. 
More  than  this,  even,  they  have  been  active  participants 
in  the  work  of  transformation,  sharing  in  full  its 
burdens  and  its  triumphs. 

James  L.  Bakton, 
Foreign  Secretary  of  the  American  Board. 


CONTENTS 

PART  I 
Hawaiian  Missions 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  Hawaii  and  the  Polynesian  Race 15 

II.  The  Primitive  Hawaiians 18 

III.  The  Pioneer  Missionaries 23 

IV.  Early  Days  of  the  Mission 31 

V.  Organization  of  the  Mission 36 

VI.  Rulers  of  the  Hawaiian  Race 39 

VII.  Illustrious  Hawaiian  Women 48 

VIII.  The  Hawaiian  Mission  Children 52 

IX.  Boarding  Schools 55 

X.  Hawaiian  Missionaries  to  Other  Groups 58 

XI.  Stories  of  Life  in  Hawaii , 62 

PART  II 

Journals  and  Letters  of  Missionaries 

XII.  From  A.  D.  1820-1822.  Arrival  and  Settlement  of 
First  Missionaries.  Visit  of  the  Deputation  of  The 
London  Missionary  Society  from  Tahiti 71 

XIII.  1822-1828.     Progress  of  the  Work.     Visit  of  the  King 

and  Queen  to  England  and  their  Death  in  London. 
Arrival  of  New  Missionaries 65 

XIV.  1829-1834.     Governor  Boki's  Disastrous  Expedition. 

Attempted  Mission  to  Marquesas  Islands 121 

XV.  1834-1838.     The  Founding  of  Lahainaluna  School.  145 

XVI.  1838-1839.     The  Great  Revival 161 

XVII.  1839-1840.     Founding  of  Hilo  Boarding  School,  and 

of  the  Royal  School 173 

XVIII.  1840-1842.     Founding  of  Punahou  School.     Building 
of  Church  at  Kealakekua.     Death  of  Hoapili  and 

Kapiolani 187 

7 


8  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XIX.  1842-1847.  Official  Visit  of  Mr.  Richards  and  Hoalilio 
to  America  and  Europe.  Seizure  of  the  Islands  by 
Lord  George  Paulet,  and  Restoration  by  Admiral 

Thomas.     Bartimeus  the  Blind  Preacher 204 

XX.  1847-1848.  The  Measles  and  Whooping-cough.  Death 
of  Mr.  Wm.  Richards.  Mr.  R.  Armstrong,  Minister 
of  Public  Instruction 229 

XXI.  1848-1850.  Proposition  for  More  Permanent  Settle- 
ment of  Missionaries.    The  French  Demands.    Effect 

of  the  California  Gold-fever 245 

XXII.  1851-1853.     The  New  Constitution  and  Land  Titles. 

Missions  to  Micronesia  and  Marquesas 259 

XXIII.  1853-1859.  Death  of  Kauikeaouli  (Kamehameha  III). 
Arrival  of  The  Morning  Star.  Loss  of  the  Schooner 
Victoria, . . , , , , , , , , , 274 

PART  III 

Results 

XXIV.  Retrospect 297 

XXV.  Later  History 300 

XXVI.  Annexation 309 

XXVII.  Religious  Work 312 

XXVIII.  Education 317 

XXIX.  Language 322 

XXX.  Agriculture 325 

XXXI.  Commerce 329 

XXXII.  The  Twentieth  Century 333 

Appendix 341 

Index  ,,,,,,,,,,,,, 349 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

Map  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands Frontispiece 

FACING 
PAGE 

Diamond  Head  and  Waikiki  Bathing  Beach 16 

Rev.  Moses  Kuaea,  pastor  of  the  KaumakapUi  Church  during 

the  'eighties.     An  eloquent  preacher 20 

A  Typical  Hawaiian  Dame 22 

A  Statue  of  Kamehameha  1 42 

Princess  Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop.     Wife  of  Charles  R.  Bishop. 

She  endowed  the  Kamehameha  Schools  of  Honolulu 50 

Cocoa-nut  Trees  in  fruitage 54 

Kamehameha  IH;    William  C.  LunaUlo  who  reigned  King  of 

Hawaii  from  January,  1873,  to  February,  1874;    Queen 

Emma,  Wife  of  Kamehameha  IV;  Kamehameha  IV 56 

Canoe  Riding  the  Surf  at  Waikiki 70 

Rev.  Hiram  Bingham 80 

A  Primitive  grass  house,  with  a  modern  company  of  Hawaiians 

near  the  door 88 

The  first  framed  house  of  Honolulu,  which  was  landed  from 

Boston,  January  10, 1821,  and  which  stands  on  the  west  side 

of  King  Street 88 

The  PaU 96 

A  Papaia  Tree  bearing  perhaps  over  two  hundred  pounds  of 

fruit 118 

The  Hawaiian  Stone  Church,  Kawaiahao,  Honolulu 156 

Rev.  and  Mrs.  Asa  Thurston 168 

A  Lake  of  Molten  Lava,  as  seen  a  few  years  since  at  the  Volcano 

of  Kilauea,  Hawaii 192 

pauahi  Hall.    The  Academy  of  Punahou  College 214 

9 


10  ILLUSTRATIONS 


PACING 
PAGE 


Rainbow  Falls,  Hilo,  Hawaii 226 

The  Night-blooming  Cereus  which  adorns  the  stone  wall  of  the 

Oahu  College , 278 

Central  Union  Church,  Honolulu,  formerly  known  as  Fort  Street 

Church 304 

LunaUlo  Home  for  aged  Hawaiians,  Foimded  by  bequest  of 

King  Lunalilo 304 

The  former  Palace,  now  the  Executive  Building  of  the  Govern- 
ment    310 

A  Water  Buffalo  preparing  the  land  for  rice  planting 324 

Picking  Pineapples 328 

A  Japanese  Fishing-boat 330 

The  Maunakea.     Sample  of  Inter-Island  Boats 332 

Mission  Memorial  Building,  Honolulu,  1916 336 


FOEEWOED 

THE  year  1920  will  be  not  only  the  Three  Hun- 
dredth Anniversary  of  the  landing  of  the  Pil- 
grims of  New  England  at  Plymouth,  Massa- 
chusetts, but,  likewise,  the  One  Hundredth  Anniversary 
of  the  landing  of  the  sons  and  daughters  of  these  New 
England  Pilgrims,  become  Pilgrims  themselves,  on  the 
shores  of  Hawaii. 

There  are  many  points  of  contrast  between  these  two 
pilgrimages.  The  New  England  Pilgrims  were  not 
missionaries  in  the  modern  sense,  and  had  no  modern 
missionary  society  behind  them.  They  fled  from  the 
persecution  of  their  fellow  Christians,  and  their  work 
among  savages  was  subsequent  and  incidental  to  their 
main  purpose,  which  was,  as  has  been  sung,  "freedom  to 
worship  God."  Nor  did  they  realize  in  a  single  genera- 
tion any  such  marvellous  growth  of  civilization  in  place 
of  the  savagery  which  met  them  on  the  threshold  of  their 
endeavors,  nor  within  a  century  any  such  material  pros- 
perity for  their  children  and  their  children's  children. 

Yet  the  study  of  the  two  pilgrimages  is  not  altogether 
a  study  in  contrasts.  It  was  in  spirit  the  same  faith 
which  was  carried  from  Holland  to  New  England,  and 
from  New  England,  two  centuries  later,  to  Hawaii. 
The  hardships  of  the  Mayflower  passage  in  1620  were 
hardly  greater  than  those  endured  on  the  longer  journey 
by  the  passengers  of  the  brig  Thaddeus  in  1820.     And 

11 


12  FOREWORD 

great  as  has  been  the  part  played  in  the  story  of  the 
last  three  centuries  by  the  Pilgrims  to  New  England, 
who  shall  say  that  in  the  coming  three  centuries  the  con- 
sequences, so  far  as  the  shaping  of  the  world's  history, 
will  be  less  important  than  that  other  pilgrimage  from 
'New  England  to  the  central  islands  of  the  Pacific  sea  ? 
We  have  few  and  scanty  records  of  how  it  fared  with  the 
earlier  band  of  Pilgrims  on  their  hazardous  trip  across 
the  Atlantic,  or  of  what  were  their  first  impressions  of 
the  land  which  they  made  their  inheritance,  or  of  the 
years  of  that  first  generation  in  their  new  home.  Such 
records  as  we  have  are  rightfully  cherished  as  a  precious 
possession,  and  have  inspired  already  a  noble  contribu- 
tion of  poetry  and  romance,  as  well  as  more  prosaic  his- 
toric study. 

Fortunately  the  records  of  the  Hawaiian  pilgrimage 
•are  quite  abundant,  though  not  accessible  to  the  ordinary 
reader,  except  in  fragments  here  and  there.  Their  very 
fullness  prevents  a  full  publication  of  them.  But  there 
is  given  herewith  a  fairly  full  presentation  of  the  jour- 
nals and  correspondence  of  the  Hawaiian  Pilgrims, 
such  as,  with  the  notes  which  follow,  will  enable  the  at- 
tentive reader  to  get  a  good  impression  of  what  manner 
of  men  and  women  they  were,  in  what  spirit  they  came 
to  their  great  adventure,  and  what  marvels  they  met  in 
providential  preparation  for  their  work,  and  in  the 
extraordinary  success  of  the  work  itself. 

ROBEET    WhITAKEB, 

Los  Gatos,  Cal. 


NOTE 

The  several  portions  of  this  work  are  so  different  one 
from  another  that  it  has  seemed  best  to  separate  them 
into  three  parts. 

In  the  first  part  is  set  forth  the  location  of  the  islands ; 
the  coming  of  the  missionaries  and  the  beginning  of 
their  work. 

The  second  part  consists  of  quotations  from  the  let- 
ters of  the  missionary  fathers  and  mothers  mostly  ad- 
dressed to  the  officers  of  the  American  Board  of  Missions 
in  Boston.  The  freedom,  fullness,  and  frankness  of 
the  correspondence  with  the  officers  of  the  American 
Board  on  the  part  of  the  early  missionaries  is  remark- 
able and  truly  impressive,  indicative  of  great  respect 
for  and  confidence  in  the  American  Board  Secretaries. 

The  third  part  is  an  attempt  to  show  some  of  the 
results  of  gospel  teaching  and  the  present  conditions 
of  life  upon  these  favored  islands,  of  which,  in  the 
language  of  the  Prophet  Isaiah,  it  was  said:  "The 
isles  shall  wait  for  his  law." 

It  gives  the  authors  of  this  historical  sketch  special 
pleasure  here  to  acknowledge  their  indebtedness  to  a 
daughter  of  the  Pacific  seas — Mrs.  Frances  Gulick 
Jewett — for  her  aid  in  reading  the  proof-sheets  of  this 
history,  and  for  many  suggestions  enhancing  the  value 
of  this  record. 

Oekamel  Hinckley  Gulick. 
Ann  Eliza  Claek  Gulick. 

Honolulu,  Hawaii. 


13 


A  PROSE  POEM  ON  HAWAII 

No  Alien  Land  in  all  the  world  has  any  deep,  strong 
charm  for  me  but  that  one;  no  other  land  could  so 
longingly  and  beseechingly  haunt  me  sleeping  and  wak- 
ing, through  half  a  lifetime,  as  that  one  has  done. 
Other  things  leave  me,  but  it  abides;  other  things 
change,  but  it  remains  the  same.  For  me  its  balmy  airs 
are  always  blowing,  its  summer  seas  flashing  in  the 
sun ;  the  pulsing  of  its  surf  beat  is  in  my  ear ;  I  can  see 
its  garlanded  crags,  its  leaping  cascades,  its  plumy 
palms  drowsing  by  the  shore;  its  remote  summits  float- 
ing like  islands  above  the  cloudracks;  I  can  feel  the 
spirit  of  its  woodland  solitude ;  I  can  hear  the  splash  of 
its  brooks ;  in  my  nostrils  still  lives  the  breath  of  flowers 
that  perished  twenty  years  ago. — Mark  Twcdn, 


PART  I 
HAWAIIAN  MISSIONS 


HAWAII  Al^D  THE  POLYNESIAI^  RACE 

THE  Sandwich  Islands  are  now  known  as  the 
Hawaiian  Islands,  or  as  simply  Hawaii,  or  as 
the  Territory  of  Hawaii. 

These  islands  lie  2100  miles  southwest  from  San 
Francisco  in  the  mid-Pacific  Ocean  and,  roughly  speak- 
ing 4920  eastward  from  Hongkong  on  the  eastern 
shores  of  China ;  3400  miles  eastward  from  Yokohama, 
Japan;  4410  miles  north  by  east  from  Sydney,  the 
capital  of  !N"ew  South  Wales;  and  3800  miles  north  by 
east  from  Auckland,  "New  Zealand. 

Honolulu  is  but  a  little  further  from  San  Francisco 
than  San  Francisco  is  from  Chicago.  It  is  also  nearly 
as  far  from  San  Francisco  as  the  Western  shore  of  Ire- 
land is  from  Newfoundland.  By  the  fastest  ocean 
steamer  it  is  four  and  a  half  days  voyage  from  San 
Francisco,  though  the  usual  voyage  is  six  days. 

The  group  consists  of  four  islands  of  importance; 
first  Hawaii,  which  gives  name  to  the  group,  Maui, 
Oahu,  and  Kauai:  and  four  smaller  islands,  Molokai, 
Lanai,  Kahoolawe  and  ITiihau.  The  ports  of  conse- 
quence and  safety  are  Honolulu  and  Pearl  Harbor  on 
Oahu,  Hilo  and  Kealakekua  on  Hawaii,  and  Lahaina 
and  Kahului  on  Maui. 

15 


16  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Each  island  consists  of  a  mountain  or  mountains  ris- 
ing out  of  the  ocean,  there  being  no  extended  level  plains 
or  flat  land.  The  island  of  Hawaii  may  be  said  to  con- 
sist of  four  mountains,  the  highest  of  which  is  Mauna 
Kea,  13,825  feet,  being  the  loftiest  mountain  west  of 
the  American  coast  until  we  reach  the  Himalaya  Moun- 
tains in  Northern  India.  These  mountains  of  Hawaii 
are  seamed  with  valleys,  some  of  which  have  mountain 
streams  rushing  rapidly  down  to  the  ocean.  Parts  of 
the  islands  are  skirted  by  coral  reefs  upon  which  the 
breakers  continually  thunder  with  their  white  crested 
waves  which  constitute  a  beautiful  fringe  to  the  blue 
ocean.  But  on  parts  of  the  shores,  the  cliffs  rise  abruptly 
from  deep  water  to  great  elevations,  as  on  the  northeast- 
ern coast  of  Hawaii  and  on  the  northern  side  of 
Molokai. 

The  area  of  the  one  island  of  Hawaii  is  4015  square 
miles,  it  being  the  size  of  the  state  of  Connecticut.  The 
area  of  Maui  is  Y28  square  miles;  that  of  Oahu,  600 
square  miles;  that  of  Kauai,  544  square  miles.  The 
total  area  of  the  group,  including  the  four  smaller  is- 
lands, is  6449  square  miles. 

The  popular  belief  that  the  weather  of  the  tropics  is 
that  of  torrid  heat,  is  not  true  of  the  Hawaiian  climate, 
which  is  modified  by  the  coolness  of  the  surrounding 
ocean  currents,  and  prevalent  trade  winds  from  the 
northeast. 

The  most  widely  spread  aboriginal  race  in  the  world 
is  the  Polynesian.  This  race  has  peopled  the  Pacific 
Islands  from  Hawaii  to  New  Zealand,  including  the  in- 
termediary islands  of  the  Marquesas,  the  Society  Is- 
lands, Samoan  and  Fiji.    This  wide  distribution  of  the 


M 


X 

c 
o 

s 


HAWAII  AND  THE  POLYNESIAN  RACE     17 

Polynesian  race  over  tlie  thousands  of  miles  of  trackless 
ocean  is  most  remarkable  in  the  history  of  the  human 
race.  The  voyages  in  canoes  of  these  adventurous  peo- 
ple, unrecorded  in  any  history,  can  but  fill  us  with 
astonishment. 

Scientists  tell  us  that  the  affinity  of  language  is  the 
most  fixed  and  determinative  feature  of  a  race.  This 
being  the  case,  there  can  be  no  question  of  the  oneness  of 
the  Polynesian  race  which  has  so  widely  spread  over  the 
islands  of  the  Pacific.  Proof  of  the  great  similarity  of 
the  language  is  found  in  the  fact  that  when  our  mission- 
aries in  Hawaii  were  commencing  their  work  in  1820, 
Mr.  William  Ellis,  from  the  Society  Islands,  landing 
here  on  his  way  from  the  Society  to  the  Marquesan  Is- 
lands, and  detained  here  for  lack  of  opportunity  to 
proceed  to  the  Marquesas  for  four  months,  rendered 
great  aid  to  the  missionaries  in  the  writing  of  the 
Hawaiian  language,  having  had  experience  in  Tahiti, 
one  of  the  Society  Islands,  which  mission  had  been 
started  twenty-three  years  earlier.  Though  the  islands 
of  Hawaii  and  Tahiti  were  2500  miles  distant  from 
each  other  their  languages  were  so  similar  that  Mr. 
Ellis  was  at  once  able  to  converse  intelligently  with 
Hawaiians,  and  wrote  several  hymns,  one  or  two  of 
which  are  used  to  this  day  in  the  Hawaiian  worship. 

The  close  affinity  of  the  people  of  these  several  is- 
lands, one  with  another,  is  shown  not  only  in  language, 
but  in  physical  features,  in  habits  of  thought,  and  gen- 
eral characteristics   of   hospitality   and   teachableness. 

To  record  the  transition  of  the  Hawaiian  portion  of 
this  race  from  savagery  to  Christian  ciyilization,  is  one 
of  the  objects  of  this  book. 


II 

THE  PRIMITIVE  HAWAIIAl^S 

OF  the  interesting  question,  "Whence  came  the 
ancient  Hawaiians,"  we  can  only  say  that  their 
legends  tell  of  voyagers  coming  from  the 
southern  Pacific  and  landing  on  these  shores. 

These  islands  were  discovered  by  Captain  Cook,  an 
English  navigator,  in  1778.  He  thought  the  population 
of  the  islands  then  to  be  400,000,  which  was  probably  a 
large  overestimate,  as  he  had  no  means  of  judging  ex- 
cept by  the  multitudes  who  thronged  the  shores  where 
his  ships  touched,  eager  to  see  the  wonderful  ships  and 
the  strange  white  people  from  unknown  lands.  Follow- 
ing Captain  Cook's  discovery,  the  islands  were  visited  by 
several  distinguished  voyagers,  including  Vancouver, 
who  was  a  lieutenant  with  Captain  Cook,  and  Kotzebue. 

WTien  the  first  missionaries  arrived,  the  population 
may  have  been  120,000. 

A  people  who  have  no  written  language  can  have  do 
history  in  our  sense  of  the  word,  and  such  was  the 
condition  before  the  missionaries  arrived.  Hence,  the 
recorded  history  of  Hawaii  can  only  begin  with  the 
work  of  the  missionaries  on  these  islands.  But  we  may 
learn  something  of  the  life,  customs,  and  history  of  the 
ancient  Hawaiians  from  their  legends,  and  chanted  re- 
hearsals or  songs,  called  meles. 

18 


THE  PRIMITIVE  HAWAIIANS  19 

It  is  scarcely  possible  to  describe  to  one  who  has 
been  brought  up  in  the  midst  of  Christian  light,  the 
darkness,  the  crueltj,  and  the  ignorance  which  envelops 
a  savage  and  heathen  people. 

When  a  small  boy  my  parents  employed  a  Hawaiian 
woman  for  housework  who  had  killed  all  of  her  seven 
children  in  infancy.  When  speaking  of  her  children 
she  wept,  and  to  the  infant  children  of  her  employer 
she  was  kindness  itself.  Infanticide  had  been  very 
common,  though  maternal  affection  still  remained. 

"Can  a  woman  forget  her  sucking  child,  that  she 
should  not  have  compassion  on  the  son  of  her  womb  ? 
Yea,  they  may  forget"  (Is.  xlix:  15),  and  they  do  for- 
get under  the  oppression  and  darkness  of  heathenism. 
Rev.  Moses  Kuaea,  a  fine  preacher  in  the  Hawaiian  lan- 
guage, the  most  eloquent  of  the  orators  of  his  day  and  a 
noble  specimen  of  a  fine  race  of  men,  said  that  the  hole 
in  the  ground  had  been  dug  in  which  he  as  an  infant 
was  being  buried,  when  some  passer-by  rescued  him  and 
brought  him  up.  He  stated  that  he  took  the  name  of 
Moses,  probably  upon  the  occasion  of  his  baptism,  for 
the  reason  that  as  Pharaoh's  daughter  called  the  infant's 
name  Moses,  and  said :  "Because  I  drew  him  out  of  the 
water,"  so  he,  himself,  had  been  drawn  out  of  the 
ground. 

The  following  painful  representation  of  the  condition 
of  Hawaiian  households,  in  the  earlier  times,  we  take 
from  the  interesting  "Sketches  of  Life  in  the  Hawaiian 
Islands,"  by  Mrs.  Laura  Fish  Judd,  published  in  1880, 
and  recording  events  of  about  1831 : 

"It  was  but  natural  that  with  the  first  impulses  of 
maternal  love  we  should  turn  our  thoughts  more  directly 


20  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

to  native  mothers  and  children.  A  few  days  ago  we  called 
the  women  of  our  church  together  and  requested  those 
who  had  children  to  bring  them.  A  large  number  as- 
sembled, our  good  queen  mother,  Kaahumanu,  heading 
the  list,  although  she  had  no  children  of  her  own.  She 
brought  little  Euth,  an  adopted  daughter.  Kinau  pre- 
sented her  first  born.  Prince  David  Kamehameha,  a  boy 
fine  enough  for  any  mother  not  of  the  seed  royal  to  glory 
in.  Close  beside  her  sits  the  wife  of  our  deacon,  Ehu, 
with  three  young  children.  Several  mothers  presented 
their  offspring,  with  the  pride  of  old  Eoman  matrons. 
We  counted  the  number  of  those  who  had  living  children, 
and  then  requested  those  who  had  none  to  rise.  The 
scene  that  followed  I  can  never  forget.  Why  are  you 
childless?  we  inquired.  Very  few  had  lost  children  by  a 
natural  death.  One  woman  replied,  in  tears,  holding  out 
her  hands :  'These  must  answer  the  question.  I  have  been 
the  mother  of  eight  children,  but  with  these  hands  I 
buried  them  alive,  one  after  another,  that  I  might  follow 
my  pleasures  and  avoid  growing  old.  Oh,  if  I  had  but 
one  of  them  back  again  to  comfort  me  now !'  She  was 
followed  by  others,  making  the  same  sad  confessions  of 
burying  alive,  of  strangling,  of  smothering,  until  sobs  and 
tears  filled  the  house. 

"  'Oh,'  said  one,  'you  have  little  idea  of  our  heartless 
depravity  before  we  had  the  word  of  God.  We  thought 
only  of  preserving  our  youth  and  beauty,  following  the 
train  of  our  king  and  chiefs,  singing,  dancing,  and  being 
merry.  When  old,  we  expected  to  be  cast  aside  and,  being 
neglected,  to  starve  and  die,  and  we  only  cared  for  the 
present  pleasures.     Such  was  our  darkness.' 

"The  scene  was  painful.  We  tried  to  say  a  few  words 
of  consolation  and  advice,  and  to  commend  them  to  God 
in  prayer.  We  made  arrangements  to  meet  them  regu- 
larly once  a  month  for  instruction  in  maternal  and  do- 
mestic duties,  and  returned  to  our  happy  Christian  homes 
feeling  that  we  never  before  realized  how  much  we  owe 
the  Gospel.  *■ 


Rev.  Moses  Kuaea,  pastor  of  the  Kaumakapili 
Church  during  the  eighties.  An  eloquent 
preacher 


THE  PRIMITIVE  HAWAITANS  21 

''After  my  return  I  related  to  Pali,  my  native  woman, 
some  of  the  fearful  disclosures  made  at  the  meeting.  'My 
mother  had  ten  children,'  said  she.  'My  brother,  now 
with  you,  and  myself,  are  all  that  escaped  death  at  her 
hands.  This  brother  was  buried,  too,  but  I  loved  him 
very  much  and  determined  to  save  him,  if  I  could.  I 
watched  my  mother  and  saw  where  she  buried  him.  As 
soon  as  she  went  away,  I  ran  and  dug  him  up.  He  was 
not  dead.  I  ran  away  many  miles  with  him,  and  kept 
him  hid  with  some  friends  a  long  time.  My  mother  heard 
of  us  and  tried  to  get  us  back,  but  I  kept  going  from 
one  place  to  another  and  after  awhile  she  died.  I  have 
always  taken  care  of  my  brother  until  now.' " 

The  historian,  Prof.  W.  D.  Alexander,  in  his  "Brief 
History  of  the  Hawaiian  People,"  records  the  offering 
of  thirteen  persons  as  human  sacrifices  to  the  gods  by 
Kamehameha  I,  besides  the  statement  that  the  great 
king  after  dedicating  a  heiau,  or  enclosure  for  heathen 
worship,  in  Ewa,  Oahu,  with  human  sacrifices  in 
April,  1796,  moved  his  army  and  fleet  of  war  canoes 
to  Waianae.  He  also  consecrated  numerous  heiaus  at 
Lahaina  and  other  places,  with  the  usual  cruel  rites. 

How  near  to  our  day  was  that  day  of  heathen  hor- 
rors! How  little  do  the  sons  and  daughters  of  I^ew 
England,  who  now  enjoy  the  peace  and  plenty  of 
Hawaii,  realize  what  a  dark  land  of  dense  heathenism 
this  was  in  the  time  when  their  grandfathers  sent  the 
gospel  to  these  then  far  off  islands.  What  a  change 
the  gospel  has  wrought  in  ninety  years.  "Verily,  verily, 
I  say  unto  you,  he  that  believeth  on  me,  the  works  that 
I  do,  shall  he  do  also;  and  greater  works  than  these 
shall  he  do;  because  I  go  unto  my  Father."  John 
xiv:12. 


22  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Here  in  Hawaii  human  life  is  now  safer  than  in  any 
part  of  Christendom,  but  at  that  time  what  humble 
Hawaiian  could  be  assured  that  he  might  not  be  seized 
and  offered  to  the  gods,  before  night,  as  a  peace  offer- 
ing, or  to  insure  victory  in  tomorrow's  battle.  What 
misery,  what  darkness  shrouded  the  rulers  and  people 
alike.  Is  not  the  above  promise  of  the  Saviour  fulfilled 
before  our  eyes?  Are  not  the  changes  effected  by  the 
gospel  teachings  of  the  humble  missionaries  of  the 
cross  in  Hawaii  more  apparent  than  the  changes  ef- 
fected in  Judea  and  Galilee  where  the  Master  did  his 
most  mighty  works? 


A  Typical  Hawaiian  Dame 


Ill 

THE  PIONEEE  MISSIONARIES 

FROM  the  perusal  of  Cook's  voyages  around 
the  world,  during  which  he  discovered  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  in  1778,  Mr.  Carey,  a  very 
huinble  shoemaker  of  ISTorthampton,  England,  who 
later  became  a  distinguished  Baptist  minister  and  mis- 
sionary, was  led  to  the  thought  of  carrying  the  gospel 
to  the  heathen. 

In  or  about  1786,  at  a  meeting  of  ministers  held  at 
Northampton,  England,  Mr.  Carey  proposed  as  a  topic 
for  discussion:  "The  duty  of  Christians  to  attempt 
the  spread  of  the  gospel  among  heathen  nations."  The 
venerable  Rev.  Ryland  received  the  proposal  with 
astonishment  and,  springing  to  his  feet,  denounced  the 
proposition  with  a  frown,  and  thundered  out :  "Young 
man,  sit  down!  When  God  pleases  to  convert  the 
heathen  he  will  do  it  without  your  aid  or  mine."  A 
Mr.  Fuller,  later  a  great  friend  of  missionary  work, 
described  his  own  feelings  at  the  time  as  resembling 
the  unbelieving  courtier  in  Israel  who  said :  "If  the 
Lord  should  make  windows  in  heaven,  might  such  a 
thing  be."     2  Kings  vii :  2. 

This  suggestion  of  Mr.  Carey  in  1786  was  the  real 
beginning  of  modern  Protestant  missions  to  the 
heathen.    Thus  we  see  that  the  account  of  the  discovery; 

23 


24  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

of  the  Sandwich  Islands  by  Captain  Cook,  awakened 
in  Mr.  Carey  thoughts  of  compassion  for  the  heathen. 
So  missions  were  founded  in  England  by  Carey  and  his 
associates  who  sailed  in  1793  for  India.  The  London 
Missionary  Society  sent  missionaries  to  Tahiti,  in  the 
South  Pacific,  in  1797,  twenty-three  years  before  the 
first  missionaries  to  Hawaii  were  sent  from  Boston. 

In  the  United  States  the  idea  of  missions  to  the 
heathen  was  first  entertained  by  students  in  Williams 
College  in  1808,  which  led  to  the  founding  of  the 
American  Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign  Mis- 
sions in  1810.  Their  first  missionaries,  Adoniram 
Judson  and  others,  were  sent  to  India  in  1812. 

In  1809  Obookiah  and  other  Hawaiians  reached  New 
Haven,  Connecticut,  and  awakened  the  interest  of 
American  churches  in  the  Hawaiian  people,  which 
culminated  in  the  sailing  from  Boston,  in  the  brig 
Thaddeus  in  1819,  of  Messrs.  Bingham,  Thurston 
and  Whitney  and  others  with  their  wives  and  four 
Hawaiians  for  the  Sandwich  Islands,  where  they  landed 
at  Kailua,  on  the  4th  of  April,  1820.  This  was  the 
humble  beginning  in  the  Protestant  world  of  that  great 
work  which  is  now  considered  by  many  Christians  as 
the  great  work  of  the  church,  namely,  the  proclama- 
tion of  the  gospel  to  the  heathen.  This  was  the  be- 
ginning of  the  mission  to  Hawaii  which  was  reinforced 
by  companies  ranging  from  one  to  thirty-two  and  con- 
stituting in  all  one  hundred  and  fifty-three  persons  sent 
out  by  the  American  Board  during  a  period  of  74 
years,  namely,  from  1820  to  1894.^ 

The  first  company  of  missionaries  who  sailed  from 

1  See  Appendix  for  personnel. 


THE  PIONEER  MISSIONARIES  25 

Boston  for  Hawaii,  October  23,  1819,  were:  Rev. 
Hiram  Bingham  and  Mrs.  Sybil  Mosely  Bingham; 
Rev.  Asa  Thurston  and  Mrs.  Lucy  Goodale  Thurston; 
Mr.  Samuel  Whitney  and  Mrs.  Mercy  Partridge  Whit- 
ney; Thomas  Holman,  a  physician,  and  Mrs.  Lucia 
Ruggles  Holman;  Mr.  Daniel  Chamberlain,  a  farmer, 
and  wife  and  several  children;  Mr.  Samuel  Ruggles 
and  Mrs.  Mary  Wells  Ruggles;  Mr.  Elisha  Loomis, 
a  printer,  and  Mrs.  Maria  Theresa  Sartwell  Loomis; 
and  accompanying  these  as  helpers  three  Hawaiian 
youths  from  the  Foreign  Mission  School  at  Cornwall, 
Connecticut,  Thomas  Hopu,  William  Tenui  and  John 
Honolii  and,  also,  George  Kaumualii,  a  son  of  the 
King  of  Kauai. 

Rev.  Hiram  Bingham  was  born  in  Bennington,  Ver- 
mont, in  1789,  and  was  a  graduate  of  Middlebury 
College  and  Andover  Seminary.  He  was  a  man  of 
great  courage  and  energy,  and  was  located  at  Honolulu 
in  April,  1820,  which  city  ere  long  became  the  abode 
of  the  king  and  higher  chiefs  and  the  most  frequented 
port  of  the  islands.  The  earliest  missionaries  soon 
acquired  much  influence  with  both  the  king  and  chiefs 
and  with  the  common  people.  The  chiefs  after  learn- 
ing the  unselfish  character  of  the  missionaries  came 
freely  to  them  for  advice  in  matters  of  government 
and  of  dealing  with  foreigners.  Mr.  Bingham  acquired 
a  thorough  acquaintance  with  the  language  of  the 
people  and  his  great  industry  is  evident  in  that  he 
translated  a  large  portion  of  the  Bible  into  the 
Hawaiian  language  from  the  original  Hebrew  and 
Greek,  and,  also,  wrote  many  of  the  hymns  of  worship, 
some  of  which  are  today  in  constant  use. 


26  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Under  Mr.  Bingham's  guidance  a  very  large  tHatched 
building  was  erected  as  a  bouse  of  worsbip  upon  the 
grounds  of  tbe  present  Kawaiabao  Cemetery.  This  was 
tbe  first  cburcb  or  meeting  bouse  of  wbicb  tbe  writer 
bas  any  memory.  Tbe  present  Kawaiabao  Cburcb, 
a  coral  stone  building,  was  in  process  of  erection  when 
Mr.  Bingbam  left  witb  bis  family  for  return  to  tbe 
United  States  in  1841,  on  account  of  Mrs.  Bingbam's 
healtb,  baving  completed  twenty-one  years  of  most  suc- 
cessful missionary  service.  He  did  not  return  to  tbe 
islands.  Mrs.  Bingbam  was  a  model  missionary  wife 
and  was  a  most  important  factor  in  winning  tbe  love 
and  devotion  of  cbiefs  and  people.  Tbey  were  tbe 
parents  of  seven  children. 

Rev.  Asa  Tburston  was  born  in  Fitcbburg,  Massa- 
chusetts, in  1787,  graduated  from  Yale  College  and 
Andover  Theological  Seminary,  was  ordained  to  the 
ministry  in  Goshen,  Connecticut,  September  29,  1819, 
and  sailed  October  23,  1819,  for  tbe  mid-Pacific 
islands.  Upon  arrival  at  the  islands  he  was  located 
at  Kailua,  Hawaii,  which  was  then  the  headquarters 
of  King  Liholibo  (Kamehameba  II)  and  of  the  higher 
chiefs.  The  removal  of  tbe  king  and  court  from 
Kailua  to  Lahaina  and,  finally,  to  Honolulu,  was  effected 
gradually  during  the  Thirties.  Thus  Kailua  became 
one  of  tbe  most  lonely  stations  in  the  group. 

Father  Thurston  became  proficient  in  tbe  vernacular 
and  was  tbe  translator  into  the  Hawaiian  of  several 
portions  of  tbe  Bible, ^ 

He  was  not  a  man  of  many  words,  but  when  he  spoke 
in  tbe  mission  meetings  bis  words  were  of  weight.     On 

2  See  Appendix  A. 


THE  PIONEER  MISSIONARIES  27 

one  occasion  the  deliberative  body  had  long  discussed 
the  question  of  locating  a  member  at  the  remote  and 
needy  station  of  Hana,  Maui.  After  long  debate  Mr. 
Thurston's  thought  was  asked.  His  laconic  reply  was : 
"Give  no  place  to  the  Devil."  Thenceforward  for 
twenty  years  Hana  was  one  of  the  mission  stations. 

Rumor  said  that  when  in  Yale  Mr.  Thurston  was 
known  as  an  athlete,  and  that  was  long  before  athletics 
became  so  prominent  a  feature  of  college  life.  He 
never  returned  to  his  native  land  and  died  in  Honolulu 
at  eighty  years  of  age,  after  forty-eight  years  of  most 
efficient  missionary  service. 

Mrs.  Lucy  Goodale  Thurston  was  a  cousin  of  Rev. 
William  Goodale,  an  honored  missionary  of  the  Ameri- 
can Board  in  Turkey,  by  whom  she  was  introduced  to 
her  future  husband  one  month  before  they  sailed  for 
the  then  called  Sandwich  Islands.  Though  their  court- 
ship was  so  short,  their  union  proved  to  be  most  happy, 
each  being  filled  with  the  highest  possible  purpose  in 
life,  namely,  the  spread  of  the  gospel  among  the 
heathen. 

Mrs.  Thurston's  words  of  counsel  were  listened  to 
with  profit  and  pleasure  by  old  and  young  alike.  Even 
the  children  of  the  mission  loved  to  hear  her  talk. 
She  delivered  a  fine  address  in  the  Seamen's  Chapel  in 
Honolulu,  in  or  about  1860,  which  might  have  been 
entitled:     "Weep  ye  for  the  daughters  of  my  people." 

Mr.  Samuel  Whitney  was  from  Bradford,  Con- 
necticut, and  was  born  in  April  28,  1793.  He  was 
not  ordained  before  sailing  for  the  islands,  but  was 
ordained  in  Kailua  November  30,  1825,  five  years 
after  arrival  in  the  islands.     He  commenced  his  mis- 


28  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

sionary  life  at  Waimea,  Kauai,  July  25,  1820,  and 
closed  his  career  December  15,  1845,  having  completed 
twenty-five  years  of  effective  missionary  work  at 
Waimea  and  was  held  in  highest  esteem  by  both  chiefs 
and  people  of  Kauai,  whose  respect  and  affection  He 
won  in  a  remarkable  degree. 

Mrs.  Mercy  Partridge  Whitney  was  from  Pittsfield, 
Massachusetts,  and  lived  in  Waimea,  Kauai,  until  her 
death  on  December  26,  1872. 

Mr.  Samuel  Ruggles  was  one  of  the  pioneer  company 
who,  with  Mrs.  Ruggles,  embarked  for  Hawaii  in  the 
Brig  Thaddeus.  They  were  first  located  in  1820  with 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Whitney  at  Waimea,  Kauai,  and  after- 
wards on  Hawaii.  After  rendering  fourteen  years  of 
very  valuable  pioneer  work,  winning  the  esteem  of  fel- 
low missionaries  and  the  love  of  the  Hawaiians,  con- 
strained by  ill  health,  he  left  with  his  wife  and  children 
for  the  States  where  he  lived  for  many  years. 

Mr.  Elisha  Loomis,  printer,  with  Mrs.  Loomis,  were 
of  the  pioneer  company.  He  was  a  ready  writer  and 
is  supposed  to  be  the  author  of  a  journal  of  the  voyage 
around  Cape  Horn.  A  small  printing  press  must  have 
been  sent  out  in  the  brig  with  this  first  company  of 
missionaries.  The  first  lessons  printed  were  eagerly 
received  by  those  natives  who  had  learned  to  read  from 
manuscripts.  Tor  many  years  all  the  printing  on  the 
islands  was  done  by  the  Hawaiians  who  had  been 
taught  by  Mr.  Loomis.  A  few  years  later,  when  an- 
other printing  press  had  been  received,  the  first  machine 
was  taken  to  Oregon  by  a  successor  to  Mr.  Loomis, 
Mr.  Edwin  O.  Hall,  and  was  the  first  printing  press 
seen  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.    It  is  now  treasured 


THE  PIONEER  MISSIONARIES  29 

in  a  Museum  of  Mementos  in  Oregon.  Mr.  Loomis 
returned  to  the  States  on  account  of  ill  health  in  1827 
and  died  at  the  early  age  of  thirty-seven  years, 

Thomas  Holman,  M.D.,  Missionary  Physician,  was 
one  of  the  ever  memorable  company  of  pioneer  mis- 
sionaries to  Hawaii.  His  connection  with  the  mission 
was  very  brief  as  he  returned  to  the  States  four  months 
from  the  day  the  company  sighted  the  mountains  of 
Hawaii.    His  wife  was  a  sister  of  Mr.  Ruggles. 

Mr.  Daniel  Chamberlain,  wife  and  five  children, 
came  out  in  the  pioneer  company ;  it  being  thought  that 
much  might  be  done  for  the  people  through  instruction 
in  farming.  Mr.  Chamberlain  is  well  spoken  of  in 
the  correspondence  of  the  early  missionaries  as  a  man 
of  rare  good  judgment  and  as  rendering  much  help  in 
the  early  settlement  of  the  missionary  company.  But 
the  bringing  up  of  the  children  in  close  contact  with 
the  benighted  people  about  them,  soon  became  a  matter 
of  grave  solicitude.  To  save  the  children,  Mr. 
Chamberlain  was  released  from  connection  with  the 
Board  and,  returning  with  Mrs.  Chamberlain  and  chil- 
dren, left  the  islands  March  21,  1823. 

Besides  the  missionary  company,  who  sailed  in  the 
Thaddeus,  there  were  included  three  young  Hawaiians 
who  had  been  for  a  time  in  the  Foreign  Mission  School 
at  Cornwall,  Connecticut,  and  who  were  to  be  helpers 
in  the  missionary  work.  Their  names  were  Thomas 
Hopu,  William  Tenui,  and  John  Honolii. 

These  young  Hawaiians,  who  had  acquired  some 
knowledge  of  the  English  language,  were  of  service,  at 
the  first,  as  interpreters  for  the  missionaries  and,  espe- 
cially, in  securing  from  the  ruling  chiefs  permission 


30  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

for  the  landing  and  residence  of  the  missionaries  upon 
the  islands.  They  undoubtedly  gave  to  the  Hawaiian 
rulers  and  people  their  estimate  of  the  true  and 
benevolent  purpose  of  this  body  of  strangers  in  their 
mission  to  the  islands.  Thomas  Hopu  proved  to  be 
a  most  faithful  missionary  worker  among  both  chiefs 
and  people.  William  Tenui  (Wm.  Kanui)  wandered 
both  in  faith  and  practice  for  years,  but  later  returned 
to  the  fold.  We  find  no  special  mention  of  Honolii. 
In  addition  to  these  three,  there  was  a  fourth  young 
Hawaiian  of  the  company,  who  came  as  a  returning 
wanderer  to  his  native  islands.  George  Kaumualii,  son 
of  the  King  of  Kauai,  who  later  was  known  as 
Humehume,  and  who  proved  to  be  a  disturbing  element 
on  Kauai. 


IV 
EARLY  DAYS  OF  THE  MISSI0:N" 

THE  Hawaiians  had  developed  with  great  diffi- 
culty and  almost  infinite  patience  implements 
of  stone  and  shells  to  take  the  place  filled  in 
our  civilization  by  iron  and  metallic  instruments. 
They  also  had  the  art  of  manufacturing  a  coarse  paper 
called  haya  from  the  bark  of  a  shrub  which  constituted 
the  only  clothing  of  a  race  probably  as  scantily  clad  as 
any  portion  of  the  human  family. 

Think,  too,  of  the  labor  and  patience  required  to 
build  a  canoe,  fashioned  out  of  the  trunk  of  a  tree, 
without  any  metal  implements,  using  instead  a  stone 
hatchet  or  adze.  The  larger  canoes  were,  perhaps,  over 
thirty  feet  long,  the  body  being  one  piece  of  wood. 

Their  farming  implement  was  but  a  little  flattened 
wooden  spade. 

In  the  view  of  civilized  man  they  had  almost  every- 
thing to  learn.  The  missionary,  if  a  farmer's  son, 
taught  them  the  use  of  oxen,  horses,  ploughs  and  carts ; 
if  of  a  mechanical  turn,  at  the  carpenter's  bench,  they 
could  be  taught  the  manufacture  of  furniture  and  the 
erection  of  houses,  and  the  art  of  printing.  The  mis- 
sionary's wife  taught  the  arts  of  cooking,  dressmaking, 
and  housekeeping. 

SI 


32  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Anything  in  the  way  of  a  dwelling,  beyond  a 
thatched  house  without  a  floor,  they  knew  not  of.  The 
church,  the  school  house,  the  Town  Hall  were  all  yet 
but  in  the  imagination  of  the  missionaries.  The  first 
school  houses  and  meeting  houses  were  large  thatched 
structures  built  in  the  same  manner  as  were  the  huta 
of  the  people,  but  of  great  size.  Mammoth  grass 
houses,  without  floors,  doors  or  windows.  Thatched 
houses  are  seldom  seen  now  on  the  islands. 

The  earliest  missionaries  had  to  invent  for  the  people 
the  art  of  reading  and  writing,  of  which  most  of  them 
had  not  the  slightest  conception. 

A  missionary  once  sent  by  a  messenger  to  a  brother 
missionary  at  a  neighboring  station,  seven  melons,  also 
sending  by  the  same  messenger  a  small  package.  On 
delivering  his  burden,  the  messenger  was  asked  where 
the  seventh  melon  was,  and  insisted  that  only  six  had 
been  sent.  "How  could  you  know  there  were  seven 
melons,  for  I  was  not  in  sight  of  the  other  melons  when 
I  ate  the  seventh  ?"  It  was  inconceivable  to  him  that 
the  package  which  he  had  delivered  informed  the  re- 
ceiver of  the  number  of  melons  sent,  he  having  no 
idea  of  the  art  of  writing. 

The  first  endeavor  of  the  missionaries  was,  neces- 
sarily, the  acquisition  of  the  language  of  the  people. 
Their  influence  with  the  rulers  and  people  depended 
on  the  intimate  and  thorough  understanding  each  of 
the  other.  The  higher  chiefs  soon  recognized  the  value 
of  these  foreigners  who  had  come  to  their  shores  with 
a  different  purpose  from  that  of  financial  gain.  The 
love  and  compassion  of  the  missionaries  for  the  needy 
Hawaiians  led  the  chiefs  to  patronize  them,  and  afford 


EARLY  DAYS  OF  THE  MISSION  33 

them  great  facilities  in  meeting  the  people.  Of  course, 
at  first,  the  chiefs  could  not  appreciate  the  disinterested 
love  of  the  missionaries,  but  when  once  fully  con- 
vinced that  they  vp-ere  seeking  their  good,  opposition 
was  overcome,  and  when  individuals  of  the  chiefs  be- 
came ardent  disciples,  access  to  the  people  was  at  once 
secured. 

One  of  the  most  serious  problems,  that  of  writing 
the  Hawaiian  language,  was  successfully  overcome,  and 
we  have  reason  to  believe  that  great  assistance  came 
to  them,  in  the  solution  of  this  problem,  from  Mr. 
Ellis  of  the  mission  in  the  Society  Islands,  which  mis- 
sion had  been  in  progress  for  twenty-three  years. 

To  the  five  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  were  given  the  sounds 
of  these  letters  as  used  in  the  Italian.  These  five 
vowels  with  seven  consonants  were  all  that  were  needed 
to  express  every  sound  in  the  primitive  Hawaiian 
language.  Little  by  little  progress  was  made  in  teach- 
ing individuals  to  read  and  write,  and  the  men  who 
attended  the  teachings  of  the  missionaries  under  the 
advice  and  approbation  of  the  chiefs,  were  sent  forth 
to  teach  the  use  of  letters  and  the  arts  of  reading  and 
writing  among  their  own  people.  The  men  thus  sent 
forth  to  impart  to  their  scholars  the  magic  art  of  read- 
ing and  writing,  were  also  to  tell  the  wonderful  and 
joyful  story  of  the  gospel.  Such  teachers  returned 
at  stated  intervals  to  the  missionaries  to  receive  further 
instruction  which  they  in  turn  might  impart  to  their 
people.  Both  chiefs  and  people  were  wonderfully 
fascinated  with  the  thought  that  their  language  could 
thus  be  reproduced  on  slate  or  paper  or  other  plain 
surface,  conveying  ideas  for  the  enlightenment  of  the 


34  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

reader.  Later  followed  the  wonders  of  printing,  which 
vividly  impressed  both  the  chiefs  and  people  and  greatly 
stimulated  them  in  acquiring  knowledge. 

At  first  the  printing  was  in  very  small  leaflets. 
Later  followed  small  portions  of  the  Scriptures  in  leaflet 
and,  still  later,  in  pamphlet  forms.  From  these  humble 
beginnings  the  whole  people,  through  the  schools  estab- 
lished by  the  missionaries,  became  readers.  First  the 
Four  Gospels,  later  the  ISTew  Testament  and,  finally,  the 
whole  Bible  was  printed,  forming  a  version  of  won- 
derful beauty,  simplicity,  and  accuracy.  While  this 
fact  can  be  so  briefly  related,  the  process  required  years 
for  its  fulfillment.  The  translation  and  publication 
of  the  entire  New  Testament  was  not  completed  till 
the  missionaries  had  been  in  the  islands  fifteen  or 
Bixteen  years. 

The  writer  remembers  when  the  New  Testament 
completed  first  reached  his  father's  home  on  Kauai,  and 
he  remembers  the  arrival  at  the  house  of  a  woman 
from  a  distant  village  bringing  a  chicken  for  the  pur- 
chase of  the  Testament.  He  witnessed  her  as  she  took 
the  precious  treasure  in  her  hands  and,  with  tears  of 
joy,  placed  it  in  her  bosom  for  return  to  her  home. 
This  was  indeed,  to  multitudes  of  Hawaiians,  The 
Word  of  Life. 

The  cordial  subjection  of  the  people  to  the  com- 
mands of  the  chiefs  contributed  greatly  to  the  success 
of  the  missionary  work.  When  Kaahumanu,  the  queen 
regent,  gave  herself  to  the  art  of  reading  and  to  the 
study  of  the  Bible,  and  when  she  and  succeeding  chiefs 
told  the  people  to  listen  to  the  teachings  of  the  mis- 
sionaries and  to  learn  to  read  the  Word,  the  whole 


EARLY  DAYS  OF  THE  MISSION  35 

people  at  once  sat  at  the  feet  of  their  missionary 
teachers. 

The  fruits  of  this  spreading  of  the  word  of  God 
among  a  people  able  to  read  it  are  incalculable. 
Hawaii,  today,  is  a  Christian  country  in  consequence 
of  faith  in  the  teachings  of  the  word  of  God. 

Aside  from  the  instruction  in  reading  and  writing 
and  the  imparting  of  the  gospel  story,  the  mission- 
aries were  continually  called  upon  to  minister  to  the 
sick  and  the  destitute.  The  missionary  physicians  were 
able  to  assist  greatly  in  the  spread  of  the  gospel  by 
the  practical  alleviation  of  physical  suffering  among 
the  people,  and  in  stations  where  there  was  no  physi- 
cian, the  missionary  was  continually  called  upon  to 
administer  to  the  ill  and  the  suffering.  We  do  not 
claim  that  their  aid  would  bear  comparison  with  that 
of  a  regular  physician,  but  great  alleviation  was  often 
afforded  by  a  missionary  whose  medical  knowledge  was 
limited  to  the  administration  of  the  most  simple  medi- 
cine and  whose  practice  included  the  nursing  and  care 
of  the  sick.  The  people  soon  acquired  childlike  con- 
fidence in  the  benevolent  purpose  and  the  ability  of  the 
missionary  to  relieve  distress.  Much  of  the  sickness 
and  ailments  of  both  parents  and  children  was,  doubt- 
less, due  to  damp  and  unwholesome  conditions  in  their 
thatched  houses  which  were  never  furnished  with  board 
floors.  The  inmates  of  most  houses  simply  spread 
their  mats  on  the  ground  and  slept  upon  them,  while 
the  well-to-do  had  elevated  platforms  upon  which  to 
sleep  in  the  place  of  bedsteads. 


y 

ORGANIZATION  OF  THE  MISSION 

THE  company  of  Pilgrims  who  came  from  Hol- 
land and  England  to  the  shores  of  America 
in  1620  organized  themselves  into  a  body 
politic  at  a  meeting  held  in  the  cabin  of  the  Mayflower 
shortly  before  landing  upon  Plymouth  Rock,  Massa- 
chusetts. That  company  numbered  in  all  one  hundred 
and  one  persons. 

We  find  that  the  organization  of  the  first  company 
of  missionaries  to  Hawaii  into  a  mission  took  place 
February  23,  1823,  upon  the  adoption  of  a  single 
sentence  which  we  may  call  their  Organic  Act,  and 
which  reads  as  follows: 

*'We,  the  undersigned  ministers  and  missionaries  of  the 
Lord  Jesus  Christ  in  the  Sandwich  Islands  being  sent 
for  the  defence  of  the  truth  and  for  the  enlightening  of 
the  Gentiles,  agree  to  unite  in  an  association  for  mutual 
improvement  and  mutual  aid  in  laying  the  foundation, 
maintaining  the  order,  and  building  up  the  house  of  the 
Lord  in  these  Islands  of  the  sea." 

This  paper  was  signed  at  that  date  by  Rev.  Messrs. 
Asa  Thurston  and  Hiram  Bingham  and  Wm.  Ellis. 
The  successive  companies  arriving  at  irregular  inter- 
vals signed  this  Organic  Act. 

36 


ORGANIZATION  OF  THE  MISSION         37 

The  mission  as  thus  organized  continued  to  exercise 
control  of  its  members  and  act  as  a  unit  until  it  was 
superseded  by  the  organization  of  the  body  of  Hawaiian 
churches,  styled  The  Hawaiian  Evangelical  Associa- 
tion, in  1863. 

This  mission  was  a  democracy,  a  small  but  a  true 
one,  where  the  majority  ruled  and  where  no  dictator 
prevailed.  Every  vital  question  was  fully  and  frankly 
discussed  until  a  decision  was  reached  in  a  vote  of  the 
majority.  This  condition  was  modified  by  the  fact 
that  the  American  Board  of  Missions  in  Boston  had 
control  of  the  disbursement  of  the  funds  contributed 
by  the  churches. 

The  distance  of  this  missionary  colony  from  the 
office  of  the  American  Board  in  Boston  was  so  great 
that  self-government  was,  in  a  degree,  imperative,  leav- 
ing to  the  mission  the  settlement  of  many  vital  ques- 
tions, such  as  the  location  of  members,  establishment 
of  schools,  and  the  translation  and  printing  of  the 
Bible  and  of  Christian  literature.  In  some  measure 
these  questions  were  subject  to  the  final  approval  of 
the  Board  in  Boston. 

The  expenditure  of  any  large  amount  for  any  specific 
object  waited  on  the  approval  of  the  governing  Board 
in  Boston.  This  led  to  a  continuous  and  detailed  cor- 
respondence with  the  secretaries  of  the  American  Board 
and  insured  against  unwise  or  hasty  expenditure. 

As  President  Lincoln  once  said  that  the  voice  of  the 
50,000,000  was  to  him  the  voice  of  God,  so  the  members 
of  the  mission  were  wont  to  say  that  the  voice  of  the 
mission  was  the  voice  of  God.  The  substantial 
harmony  of  the  mission,  in  spite  of  the  variety  of 


38  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

temperament  and  occasional  sharp  differences,  was  re- 
markable. 

During  the  earlier  years  of  the  mission  occasional 
meetings  were  held  at  irregular  times  and  it  was,  per- 
haps, six  or  eight  years  before  the  regular  annual  as- 
sembly of  the  mission  was  established.  The  inter-island 
communication  in  small  schooners  was  so  uncertain 
and  expensive  that  it  might  have  been  thought  unnec- 
essary to  hold  annual  meetings,  but  the  harmonious 
conduct  of  missionary  enterprises  constituted  an  evi- 
dent call  for  such  meetings.  These  meetings  were  held 
in  Honolulu  as  being  the  natural  center.  Social  and 
spiritual  intercourse  could  be  insured  in  no  other  way 
and  was  of  vital  importance  to  both  parents  and  chil- 
dren. To  the  children  of  the  families  living  almost 
alone  and  having  no  playmates  beyond  the  brothers 
and  sisters  of  their  own  household,  the  annual  meeting 
was  the  great  event  of  continued  anticipation.  These 
meetings  generally  covered  from  two  to  three  weeks,  and 
the  voyages  back  and  forth  from  the  remoter  stations 
were  the  most  memorable  events  of  childhood  memo- 
ries. !N"ot  only  was  the  general  meeting  the  time  for 
spiritual  and  intellectual  stimulus,  but  it  was  also  the 
season  when  the  frugal  housewife  could  secure  the 
means  for  making  necessary  clothes  for  her  children 
and,  also,  for  securing  whatever  provisions  from  far 
lands  were  thought  necessary  for  the  health  and  suste- 
nance of  the  household. 


VI 

RULERS  OF  THE  HAWAIIA:N"  RACE 

IN  the  Marquesas  group  we  find  that  the  people  of 
each  valley  may  be  said  to  have  constituted  a 
self-governing  community,  or,  rather,  each  little 
group  was  under  the  control  and  dictation  of  the 
strongest  and  fiercest  savage  among  them,  and  no 
allegiance  was  accorded  to  any  one  outside  of  the 
specific  valley. 

Social  and  political  conditions  among  the  primitive 
Hawaiians  were  broader  and  more  comprehensive. 
The  country  was  divided  into  districts  varying  from 
perhaps  ten  to  fifty  or  sixty  miles  in  width,  and  the 
whole  people  of  such  district  constituted  the  feudal 
tenants  of  the  chief,  or  of  the  chief  family,  who  claimed 
and  exercised  the  power  of  apportioning  the  land,  the 
mountain  privileges,  and  the  ocean  privileges,  to  their 
tenants  at  will.  Such  chief,  at  his  pleasure,  could 
require  a  tenant  to  give  him  the  fattest  pig,  the  patch 
of  growing  taro,  or  anything  or  everything  he  pos- 
sessed. Upon  the  least  cause  for  displeasure  the  help- 
less tenant  and  his  family  might,  without  a  moment's 
warning,  be  ejected  from  house,  home,  land  and  every 
means  of  living.  Such  conditions  insured  the  most 
abject  service. 

Usage  gave  the  chief  the  right  to  call  out  for  work  all 
his  male  tenants  for  from  one-fourth  to  one-third  of  the 

39 


40  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

days  of  the  month.  Older  residents  will  recognize  the 
term  Konohiki  days,  Landlord's  days.  The  service  to 
which  the  landlord  might  call  his  people  might  be,  to  make 
a  road,  to  build  a  house  for  public  or  private  purpose, 
to  enclose  a  fish  pond  by  building  a  stone  wall  around 
a  portion  of  shallow  water  within  the  barrier  reef,  to 
erect  a  heiau  or  stone  enclosure  for  the  observance  of 
heathen  worship,  to  go  to  the  mountain  and  cut  down 
big  trees  with  a  stone  adze,  hew  out  a  canoe  or  canoes 
and  drag  them  many  miles  from  the  mountain  to  the 
shore.  The  tenant  might  be  required  to  take  his  life  in 
his  hand,  arm  himself  with  a  spear,  and  go  forth  to  war 
under  the  lead  of  his  chief,  with  neighboring  chief  or 
tribe. 

The  chiefs  and  people  were  frequently  engaged  in 
sanguinary  and  deadly  war,  whose  end  was  the  over- 
throw of  the  neighboring  chief  and  the  destruction  of 
his  tribe.  They  seem  to  have  taken  naturally  to  the 
game  of  mutual  destruction  without  having  had  before 
them  the  example  of  the  20th  century  enlightened 
European  nations  of  1914  of  the  Christian  era.  Or, 
was  it  that  the  nations  of  Europe  set  out  to  follow  the 
example  of  the  primitive  Hawaiian.  We  can  but  note 
the  coincidence. 

Capt.  Cook,  in  his  call  at  Kealakekua,  Hawaii,  made 
the  acquaintance  of  an  enterprising  young  chief  named 
Kamehameha,  who,  with  a  brother,  held  the  power 
of  chieftainship  in  Ka-u.  This  powerful  chief  quar- 
relled with  and  slew  his  brother  Keoua  in  battle,  made 
himself  king  of  Hawaii  and  later,  by  conquest,  became 
the  acknowledged  king  of  all  the  group  except  the 
more  distant  island  of  Kauai;  and  this  last  island  of 


RULERS  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  RACE        41 

the  group  came  under  the  sway  of  his  son  Liholiho  or 
Kamehameha  II  in  1821.  Thus  the  group  became 
consolidated  into  one  peaceful  and  united  kingdom 
under  the  one  reigning  family  of  Kamehameha,  which 
held  sway  over  the  united  Hawaiian  people  from  the 
completion  of  Kamehameha's  conquest  in  about  1780 
for  ninety-two  years,  or  till  the  death  of  Lot  Kame- 
hameha V,  December  11,  1872. 

Kamehameha  I  was  the  most  distinguished  of  all 
the  Hawaiian  chiefs,  and  was  possessed  of  marked  and 
strong  characteristics.  He  was  a  firm  believer  in  the 
powers  of  the  heathen  priesthood  of  his  time,  and  made 
Buch  use  as  he  pleased  of  their  occult  practices  in  win- 
ning his  way  to  power.  He  offered  many  human  sacri- 
fices upon  the  dedication  of  the  great  heiau  at 
Kawaihae,  and  at  Hilo  upon  celebrating  his  victory 
over  his  enemies  in  battle,  he  offered  a  human  sacrifice 
or  sacrifices  upon  a  huge  flat-topped  black  rock  which 
now  lies  in  a  lot  on  the  north  side  of  Waianuenue 
Street,  in  the  City  of  Hilo  and  near  the  Wailuku 
River. 

In  1807,  during  the  illness  of  one  of  his  wives.  Queen 
Keopuolani,  at  Waikiki,  upon  the  declaration  of  the 
priest  that  the  illness  was  the  result  of  some  one  having 
eaten  tabu  cocoanuts,  Kamehameha  had  ten  men  seized 
for  sacrifice,  but  as  she  speedily  recovered,  seven  of 
them  were  released  and  but  three  were  sacrificed.  It 
will  never  be  known  how  many  poor  victims  were 
sacrificed  by  him  at  the  behest  of  the  cruel  priests 
whose  pleasure  it  was  to  have  such  a  devotee  in  the 
person  of  this  great  king.  And  yet  this  same  king 
after  consolidating  his  kingdom  uttered  a  decree  that 


42  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAH 

the  traveller  might  sleep  unmolested  hy  the  roadside; 
that  none  should  harm  the  defenceless  one.  This  de- 
cree of  the  king  is  called  Ke  Kanawai  Kamamalahoa. 
Mr.  Dibble  gives  us  the  following  story  regarding 
Kamehameha,  illustrating  his  lack  of  any  knowledge 
of  letters: 

A  certain  captain  said  to  Kamehameha,  "I  can  put 
Kamehameha  on  a  slate,"  and  proceeded  to  write  the  word 
Kamehameha.  The  chief  scornfully  said,  "That  is  not 
me — not  Kamehameha."  The  captain  then  said,  "By 
marks  on  this  slate  I  can  tell  my  mate,  who  is  at  a 
distance,  to  send  me  his  handkerchief,"  and  proceeded  to 
write  the  order.  Kamehameha  gave  the  slate  to  a  servant, 
who  carried  it  to  the  mate  and  brought  the  handkerchief. 
Kamehameha  then  took  the  two,  the  slate  and  the  hand- 
kerchief. He  looked  at  the  writing  and  at  the  handker- 
chief, they  did  not  look  alike.  He  felt  of  the  two,  they  did 
not  feel  alike.  And  what  connection  there  could  be  be- 
tween the  one  and  the  other  he  could  not  imagine. 

Such  was  the  most  distinguished  man  of  ancient 
Hawaii,  sometimes  called  the  Napoleon  of  the  Pacific. 
His  enlightenment  was  in  a  measure  shown  by  his 
friendship  to  foreigners  settled  upon  the  islands,  some 
of  whom  exerted  a  valuable  and  helpful  influence  upon 
the  king  and  chiefs.  Among  these  may  be  named  John 
Young,  supposed  to  have  been  an  American,  and  Isaac 
Davis,  an  Englishman,  both  of  whom  were  seamen  who 
left  their  ships  and  allied  themselves  with  the  chiefs. 
Kamehameha  died  May  8th,  1819,  at  the  age  of  82 
years,  eleven  months  before  the  arrival  of  the  first 
missionaries  at  Kailua,  on  April  4th,  1820. 

Kamehameha  by  verbal  command  left  the  kingdom 
to  the  elder  of  his  two  sons,  Liholiho,  afterwards  called 


A  Statue  of  Kamchamcha  I. 


RULERS  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  RACE        43 

Kamehameha  II.  The  sovereignty  of  this  rather  giddy 
young  man  was  recognized  and  accepted  by  the  people, 
as  was  also  the  more  mature  and  steady  authority  of 
Kaahumanu,  the  younger  of  his  several  widows  of 
whom  we  speak  particularly  in  the  chapter  treating  of 
Illustrious  Hawaiian  women. 

Liholiho  was  more  addicted  to  strong  drink  than 
ever  was  his  illustrious  father.  His  reign  was  little 
short  of  five  years,  and  ended  by  his  sailing  for  a  visit 
to  England  accompanied  by  his  wife,  Kamamalu, 
Kekuanaoa,  and  several  other  chiefs.  The  party  em- 
barked from  Honolulu  in  November,  1823,  and  landed 
in  England  in  May,  1824,  and  both  the  king  and  queen 
died  in  London  of  measles,  early  in  July.  Thus  early 
ended  the  career  of  this  reckless,  daring,  and  intemper- 
ate young  man,  whose  departure  left  the  heirship  of 
his  throne  to  his  younger  brother,  Kauikeaouli,  and 
the  immediate  guardianship  and  administration  of  the 
government  to  the  most  remarkable  of  all  Hawaiian 
women,  Kaahumanu,  one  who  proved  herself  more  fit 
to  rule  than  any  inexperienced  youth  or  than  any  other 
then  living  chief. 

Kauikeaouli,  Kamehameha  III,  the  third  sovereign 
of  the  united  kingdom  of  Hawaii,  and  the  second  son 
of  Kamehameha  by  Keopuolani,  was  born  at  Keauhou, 
near  Kailua,  in  Kona,  Hawaii,  August  11,  1813.  He 
was  under  seven  years  of  age  when  the  first  missionaries 
arrived  in  1820,  and  was  but  ten  years  of  age  upon 
the  sailing  of  his  brother,  King  Liholiho,  for  England 
in  1823,  and  whose  death  in  England  July  14,  1823, 
made  him  at  this  tender  age  the  nominal  sovereign  of 
the  land. 


44  THE  PILGREMS  OF  HAWAII 

Says  the  Wise  Man  or  Preacher,  Eccl.  x:  16:  "Woe 
unto  thee,  O  land,  when  thy  king  is  a  child."  But 
as  when  Josiah  at  eight  years  of  age  became  king  of 
Israel,  the  Lord  raised  up  the  High  Priest  Hilkiah 
and  the  prophetess  Huldah,  who  guided  the  youth 
aright  and  helped  him  to  be  one  of  the  best  rulers  that 
Israel  ever  had,  so  Providence  directed  that  Kaahumanu 
should  be  the  Kuhinanui,  or  Prime  Minister.  Kaahu- 
manu, moved  by  admiration  for  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bing- 
ham, received  light  and  instruction  from  them  for  the 
years  that  intervened  from  the  departure  of  Liholiho 
for  England  in  1823  to  her  death  in  1832.  She  was 
of  incalculable  value  to  her  people  in  orderly  living, 
and  in  the  upbuilding  of  Christian  life,  character,  and 
civilization. 

Kauikeaouli's  reign  may  be  counted  to  have  com- 
menced at  the  death  of  Kaahumanu  in  1832,  and  ter- 
minated at  his  death  in  1854,  at  the  age  of  41  years, 
and  covering  a  most  eventful  period  of  22  years  of 
Hawaiian  history. 

Under  his  liberal  and  enlightened  rule  the  whole 
nation  may  be  said  to  have  emerged  from  a  condition 
of  heathenism  into  that  of  a  childlike  Christianity. 
In  personal  character  his  one  great  failing  was  frequent 
indulgence  in  strong  drink.  He  was  so  good  and  gen- 
erous  a   character   that   all   the   people   of   the   land 

Were  to  his  virtues  very  kind. 
To  his  failings  a  little  blind. 

He  told  his  people:  "Listen  to  the  missionaries. 
Do  as  I  tell  you,  do  not  as  I  do." 

Several  grand  events  and  enactments  mark  the  reign 


RULERS  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  RACE       45 

of  this  trulj  unselfish  and  enlightened  ruler,  which  we 
mention  here: 

First,  the  Great  Mahele  or  division  of  the  lands. 
The  unwritten  law  placed  all  the  land  of  the  islands 
in  the  hands  of  the  king.  All  was  his,  and  every  dis- 
position of  every  plot  of  ground  was  at  his  command. 

The  heart  of  our  gracious  king,  together  with  the 
advice  of  the  more  enlightened  chiefs,  all  under  the 
kindly  guidance  of  disinterested  missionaries,  led  him 
to  decree  the  division  of  all  the  land  of  the  islands  into 
three  parts,  one-third  for  the  government,  one-third  for 
the  chiefs,  and  one-third  for  the  Crown. 

This  great  enabling  act  laid  the  foundation  for  per- 
sonal property  in  lands  and  farms,  fields  and  houses. 

Second.  A  great  step  in  the  same  line,  and  promotive 
of  stable  possession  of  houses  and  farms,  was  the  grant- 
ing of  fee  simple  titles  to  every  individual  native 
Hawaiian  who  would  make  application,  and  meet  the 
expense  of  the  survey,  and  the  deed  for  his  residence 
lot,  together  with  such  taro  or  potato  patch  as  he  had 
been  cultivating.  A  land  commission  was  appointed 
to  assist  the  people  in  securing  these  fee  simple  titles, 
many  thousands  of  which  were  issued  to  the  incalcu- 
lable benefit  and  enrichment  of  the  rank  and  file  of  the 
people. 

Third.  Another  great  act  was  the  granting,  of  his 
own  accord,  of  a  Constitution  whereby  he  resigned  the 
arbitrary  power  of  governing  by  imperial  decree,  or 
personal  dictation,  and  granted  to  his  people  the  power 
to  elect  Representatives  to  a  Parliament  in  which  the 
Representatives  of  the  people  would  be  associated  with 
the  chiefs  or  Nobles  of  the  realm,  in  making  the  laws 


46  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

of  the  land.  Such  laws  to  be  of  force  upon  his  ap- 
proval. 

Fourth,  A  feature  of  his  reign,  and  one  of  vital 
importance  to  the  advancement  of  his  people,  was  the 
systematic  organization  of  the  Government ;  appointing 
a  judiciary  department  with  orderly  judges  of  differ- 
ent ranks  and  duties,  as  Chief  Justice,  and  Associate 
Judges,  of  the  Supreme  Court;  Circuit  Courts  for  the 
several  islands ;  and  District  Judges  in  each  of  the  more 
populous  centers  throughout  the  islands. 

There  was  also  a  constituted  Finance  Department 
with  a  Minister  of  Finance,  to  whose  care  was  com- 
mitted the  collection  of  the  taxes  established  by  the 
Legislature. 

But  perhaps  the  most  important  of  all  these  acts  of 
organization  was  the  appointment  of  a  Minister  of 
Education,  whose  duty  it  was  to  establish,  under  the 
provisions  of  law,  common  schools  that  were  to  secure 
the  attendance  of  all  the  children  of  the  land  and  to 
instruct  all  in  the  arts  and  mysteries  of  reading  and 
writing. 

At  the  head  of  this  Department  of  State  was  first 
placed  Rev.  Wm.  Richards,  one  of  the  early  mission- 
aries, who,  upon  his  death  in  1847,  was  succeeded  by 
Rev.  Richard  B.  Armstrong,  D.D.,  a  most  able  man 
and  the  father  of  General  Samuel  C.  Armstrong, 
founder  of  the  institution  for  the  benefit  of  the  colored 
men,  in  Hampton,  Virginia. 

This  machinery  of  government,  organized  during 
the  reign  of  Kauikeaouli,  was  so  complete  and  so  well 
officered  that  Mark  Twain  facetiously  said,  "It  was 
like  the  machinery  of  the  Great  Eastern  in  a  sardine 


RULERS  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  RACE        47 

tin."  But  for  all  the  light  criticism  of  the  humorous 
writer,  as  well  as  that  of  many  less  kindly  critics,  the 
government  of  Kauikeaouli  stood  many  hard  knocks, 
and  educated  the  natives  and  foreigners  alike  in  the 
great  wisdom  of  statecraft,  and  the  masses  grew  in  en- 
lightened life  under  law,  as  a  happy  substitute  for 
the  dictation  of  the  arbitrary  rule  of  the  past  ages. 
He  was  every  inch  a  king,  when  he  was  sober,  and 
in  his  right  mind,  and  was  the  most  thoroughly  beloved 
and  revered  by  his  people  of  any  ruler  who  had  occupied 
the  throne. 


VII 
ILLUSTEIOUS  HAWAIIAN  W0ME:N^ 

THE  position  held  by  women  of  exalted  rank  in 
Hawaii    was    unique    and    perhaps    never    so 
definitely   accorded   to   women   in   any   other 
heathen  or  pagan  land. 

Keopuolani,  a  wife  of  Kamehameha  I,  and  the 
mother  of  Kamehameha  II  and  III,  was  a  woman  of 
commanding  character  and  influence.  She  was  a  leader 
in  the  abolition  of  the  tabu  system,  advising  her  son, 
Liholiho  (Kamehameha  II),  to  break  the  tabu.  This 
step  led,  through  the  influence  of  a  portion  of  the 
priests,  to  civil  war  and  to  the  great  battle  in  Kona, 
Hawaii,  which,  in  a  large  measure,  ended  the  despotic 
power  of  the  priesthood.  All  of  this  occurred  within  a 
few  months  before  the  arrival  of  the  first  company  of 
missionaries.  Listening  to  the  earliest  instructions  of 
the  missionaries,  Keopuolani  became  the  first  convert 
and  received  baptism  from  Rev.  Wm.  Ellis  in  Lahaina 
on  Sept.  16th,  1823.  This  event  was  of  incalculable 
value  in  the  spread  of  the  gospel  among  a  chief  loving 
and  honoring  people. 

Kaahumanu,  a  younger  wife  of  Kamehameha  I,  be- 
came the  regent  of  the  islands  upon  the  departure  of 
Kamehameha    II    with    his   wife    and    accompanying 

48 


ILLUSTRIOUS  HAWAIIAN  WOMEN         49 

chiefs  to  England,  where  he  died  July  14,  1824;  her 
regency  continuing  during  the  minority  of  Kauikeaouli 
(Kamehameha  III).  She  it  was  who,  in  the  beginning 
of  the  reign  of  Liholiho  (Kamehameha  II)  had  the 
courage  to  propose  before  the  assembled  people  that  the 
tabu  system  be  abolished.  Keopuolani  seconded  her 
motion.  During  the  first  years  of  her  power  she  was 
haughty  in  her  manner  toward  the  missionaries,  holding 
out  her  little  finger  to  them  when  the  missionaries 
called  upon  her,  instead  of  giving  them  the  hearty 
handshake  which  she  was  most  happy  to  do  when,  in 
after  years,  she  had  embraced  the  gospel  teachings. 
She  then  became  very  friendly  and  was  the  most 
earnest  and  outspoken  friend  of  missionary  work  in  the 
islands.  She  made  extended  tours  of  the  islands,  ac- 
companied by  one  or  another  of  the  missionaries,  call- 
ing her  people  together  in  multitudes  to  hear  the  Word 
proclaimed  by  the  gospel  missionaries.  Her  rule  was 
supreme  and  her  influence  for  the  upbuilding  of 
Christianity  most  powerful  until  her  death  in  1832. 
A  third  distinguished  woman,  of  those  earlier  years, 
\vas  Kapiolani,  wife  of  ISTaihe.  She  it  was  who  visited 
the  crater  of  Kilauea  on  Dec.  22,  1824,  for  the  express 
purpose  of  overthrowing  the  superstitious  faith  in  the 
power  of  the  goddess  Pele  who  was  supposed  to  preside 
over  the  volcano  of  Kilauea  and  at  will  to  cause  earth- 
quakes and  to  send  forth  eruptions.  Setting  out  from 
Kona,  she  started  on  her  journey  of  150  miles  mostly 
on  foot.  The  people,  knowing  her  purpose,  sent  mes- 
sengers to  her  on  her  way,  entreating  her  to  desist 
from  her  foolhardy  expedition.  ISTothing  daunted,  she 
went  to  the  crater,  descended  to  the  brink  of  the  lake  of 


50  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

molten  lava  and  there  broke  the  tabu  by  eating  the 
sacred  berries  which  grow  on  the  volcano's  brink. 
Of  Kapiolani  Kev.  C.  Forbes  writes  July  22,  1841 : 

Our  beloved  friend  and  mother  in  Christ,  Kapiolani, 
has  gone  to  her  rest.  She  died  May  5th,  1841,  of 
erysipelas.  Her  last  end  was  one  of  peace  and  decided 
evidence  that  your  missionaries  have  not  labored  in  vain. 
For  24  hours  and  more  preceding  her  death  she  was  de- 
lirious owing  to  the  violence  of  the  disease  which  fell  on 
the  brain.  This  nation  has  lost  one  of  its  brightest  orna- 
ments. Her  life  was  a  continual  evidence  of  the  elevating 
and  purifying  effects  of  the  Gospel.  She  was  confessedly, 
the  most  decided  Christian,  the  most  civilized  in  her 
manners,  and  the  most  thoroughly  read  in  her  Bible  of 
any  chief  this  nation  ever  had,  and  it  is  saying  no  more 
than  the  truth  to  assert  that  her  equal,  in  those  respects, 
is  not  left  in  the  nation. 

A  fourth  of  these  distinguished  women  was  Kinau, 
a  daughter  of  Kamehameha  I  and  Hoapili  wahine, 
thus  making  her  a  half  sister  of  Kauikeaouli  (Kame- 
hameha III).  On  the  death  of  Kaahumanu,  she  be- 
came premier  and  is  frequently  spoken  of  as  Kaahu- 
manu  II.  Her  husband  was  Kekuanaoa,  one  of  the 
high  chiefs  who  went  to  England  with  Liholiho.  Two 
of  her  sons,  Alexander  and  Lot,  were  successively  kings 
under  the  titles  of  Kamehameha  IV  and  V.  Upon 
Kinau's  death  on  April  4th,  1839,  the  king  appointed 
Kekauluohi  or  Auhea  as  premier,  thus  keeping  up  the 
tradition  of  having  a  chiefess  as  Kuhinanui  or  Prime 
Minister.  Auhea  was  the  mother  of  King  Lunalilo 
who  succeeded  Kamehameha  V  and  reigned  one  year, 
until  his  death  in  1874  when  he  was  succeeded  by  David 
Kalakaua. 


Princess  Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop,  wife  of  Charles 
R.  Bishop.  She  endowed  the  Kamehameha 
Schools  of  Honolulu 


ILLUSTRIOUS  HAWAIIAN  WOMEN         51 

Emma  Rooke,  a  granddaughter  of  John  Young,  was 
the  adopted  daughter  of  Dr.  Rooke,  a  physician  of  long 
practice  in  Honolulu.  She  married  Kamehameha  IV 
and  with  her  husband  founded  in  1860  the  institution 
known  as  the  Queen's  Hospital  in  Honolulu. 

Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop  was  the  daughter  of  Konia 
who  was  a  daughter  of  Kamehameha  I.  She  was  a 
pupil  in  the  school  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Cooke,  founded  for 
the  benefit  of  the  young  chiefs.  She  was  a  person  of 
very  attractive  appearance  and  manner  and  became  the 
wife  of  Hon.  Charles  R.  Bishop,  the  first  banker  of 
Honolulu.  In  the  great  division  of  lands  by  Kame- 
hameha III  one-third  of  the  lands  was  taken  by  the 
king  as  crown  lands,  one-third  allotted  to  the  several 
chiefs  of  high  rank  and  the  remaining  third  consti- 
tuted the  government  lands.  The  higher  chiefs,  being 
childless,  one  by  one  made  Mrs.  Bishop  their  legatee 
upon  their  death,  thus  making  her  the  wealthiest  in- 
dividual land  owner  upon  the  group.  This  wise  woman 
provided  in  her  will  that  the  income  of  these  lands 
should  be  devoted  to  the  education  of  the  people  of 
Hawaii,  thus  founding  the  Kamehameha  Boarding 
Schools,  one  for  boys  and  one  for  girls,  so  widely  known, 
which  are  now  the  best  endowed  educational  institu- 
tions upon  the  islands. 

Queen  Liliuokalani  came  to  the  throne  upon  the  de- 
cease of  her  brother,  Kalakaua,  in  1891,  her  reign  con- 
tinuing until  the  establishment  of  the  Provisional 
Government  in  1893,  under  President  Dole,  which  re- 
sulted in  annexation  to  the  United  States  of  America 
in  1898.  She  is  still  living  in  Honolulu,  honored  and 
beloved  by  her  people. 


VIII 
THE  HAWAIIAN  MISSI0:N'  CHILDREN 

MR.  ELLIS,  from  his  long  experience  among  the 
natives  of  Tahiti,  warned  the  missionaries  of 
Hawaii  of  the  danger  that  their  children 
might  be  corrupted  by  free  association  with  the  heathen 
about  them.  Hence,  it  became  a  matter  of  the  utmost 
solicitude  of  many  a  missionary  mother  that  her 
children  should  not  learn  the  Hawaiian  language,  or 
associate  in  any  degree  with  the  children  of  the  natives 
about  them.  The  difficulty  of  carefully  guarding  a 
group  of  lively  children  from  the  acquisition  and  use 
of  the  language  used  by  every  domestic  in  the  family, 
and  by  ninety-nine  of  every  one  hundred  callers,  was 
simply  immense  if  not  crushing.  There  were  marked 
differences  in  the  different  families  in  respect  to  the 
strictness  with  which  this  interdiction  of  the  use  of  the 
Hawaiian  language  by  the  children  was  observed. 
And  yet  though  some  of  the  most  dutiful  and  obedient 
of  the  children  seldom  spoke  in  the  Hawaiian  language, 
all  who  remained  in  the  islands  till  in  their  teens  ac- 
quired full  command  of  the  vernacular,  and  were  pro- 
ficient in  the  use  of  it  as  soon  as  the  restraints  of  early 
childhood  were  removed. 

The  children  of  the  first  company  that  arrived  were 
sent  in  their  childhood  to  the  States,  there  being  no 
school  suitable  for  their  instruction,  while  the  time  and 
energy  of  the  parents  were  necessarily  largely  spent 
upon  the  people  about  them.     But  the  children  of  the 

52 


THE  HAWAIIAN  MISSION  CHILDREN      53 

missionaries  commencing  with  the  third  band,  were 
generally  retained  by  their  parents.  About  the  year 
1840  the  American  Board  learned  that  there  were 
several  large  families  of  children  with  their  parents, 
purposing  to  return  to  the  fatherland.  This  condition 
of  things  alarmed  the  officers  of  the  American  Board 
and  induced  them  to  make  a  liberal  grant  for  the 
opening  of  a  school  in  the  islands  for  the  mission 
children,  including  a  boarding  department  where  the 
children  from  the  distant  stations  could  be  assembled 
for  education.  Governor  Boki  gave  to  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Bingham  a  beautiful  piece  of  ground  near  Honolulu, 
which  contained  a  bubbling  spring  of  perennial  and 
wholesome  water,  which  was  named  Punahou.  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Bingham  presented  this  most  valuable  piece 
of  property  to  the  American  Board's  Mission,  and  here 
was  opened  in  1841  a  school  for  the  mission  children, 
with  Rev.  Daniel  Dole,  principal,  with  Mrs.  Dole,  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Rice,  and  Miss  Marcia  Smith  as  teachers. 
From  this  time  onward  the  American  Board  advised 
their  missionaries  to  look  forward  to  permanent  residence 
in  the  islands  with  their  families,  and  that  they  should 
seek  their  support  from  the  churches  which  they  had 
founded,  or,  in  other  words,  that  they  should  become 
pastors  of  the  young  churches  they  had  organized.  As 
a  consequence  the  mission  families  took  root  in  the 
land. 

Later  it  was  found  that  if  the  missionaries  were  to 
be  the  pastors  of  the  Hawaiian  churches  there  would 
be  no  room  or  support  for  a  native  pastorate,  and 
hence  followed  a  change  of  policy  and  the  fitting  of 
young  Hawaiians  for  the  ministry. 


54  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

In  1852  Rev.  Luther  Halsey  Gulick  returned,  with 
his  wife,  from  America  to  take  up  missionary  work 
in  Micronesia  under  the  American  Board.  He  was 
the  oldest  son  of  Rev.  and  Mrs.  P.  J.  Gulick  who  were 
of  the  band  of  missionaries  who  landed  in  Hawaii  in 
1828,  and  was  sent,  when  twelve  years  of  age,  to 
America  to  be  educated. 

At  the  time  of  his  return  to  Hawaii  some  of  the 
children  of  the  missionaries  were  engaged  in  business. 
The  thought  came  to  them  that  it  would  be  fitting  for 
them  to  support  Dr.  Gulick,  who  was  both  an  ordained 
man  and  a  physician,  in  his  missionary  work,  and  a 
society,  composed  of  the  children  of  the  missionaries, 
was  organized  under  the  name  of  The  Hawaiian  Mis- 
sion Children's  Society. 

As  their  fathers  and  mothers  were  all  missionaries 
there  was  a  very  strong  bond  of  affection  between  the 
children,  and  as  their  fathers  called  themselves  brothers 
the  children  spoke  of  their  society  as  the  Cousins  So- 
ciety. In  the  constitution  of  the  society  it  was  stated 
that  the  objects  were  to  preserve  the  bond  of  union 
between  the  children  of  the  missionaries,  and  to  sup- 
port a  cousin  of  theirs  who  was  going  to  the  missionary 
field  of  Micronesia. 

The  first  President  of  the  society  was  Mr.  Asa 
Thurston,  son  of  Rev.  Asa  Thurston  of  the  pioneer 
band.  They  met  once  a  month  for  a  social  meeting 
and  for  many  years,  as  long  as  Dr.  Gulick  remained 
in  Micronesia,  they  supported  him  and  his  family. 

This  organization  still  continues,  but  the  meetings 
are  now  held  only  two  or  three  times  a  year,  and  the 
funds  raised  are  used  for  various  missionary  purposes. 


fo 


H 


IX 

BOAEDIN^G  SCHOOLS 

IN  addition  to  the  founding  of  churches,  the  mis- 
sionaries established  permanent  boarding  schools. 
The  first  large  boarding  school,  and  the  most 
important  in  the  earlier  history  of  the  mission,  was 
the  Lahainaluna  Seminary,  which  was  commenced  by 
Rev.  Lorrin  Andrews  in  1831,  To  this  school  were 
sent  the  brightest  scholars  found  in  the  common  or  pub- 
lic schools,  with  the  view  to  higher  education  than  they 
could  acquire  in  the  common  schools.  This  institution 
was  maintained  in  an  efficient  manner  through  all  the 
years  of  the  continuance  of  the  mission,  but  was  finally 
transferred  to  the  government  in  1857,  and  still  con- 
tinues under  its  care,  though  it  does  not  now  hold  the 
prominence  that  it  once  did,  when  it  was  the  principal 
high  school  in  the  country. 

This  school,  during  the  first  fifty  years  of  its  ex- 
istence, furnished  the  best  school  teachers,  judges,  and 
lawyers  among  the  Hawaiian  speaking  portion  of  the 
community,  and  from  this  school  were  elected  those 
who  attended  the  theological  training  schools  to  fit  for 
the  ministry. 

Second  only  to  the  Lahainaluna  school  was  the  Hilo 
Boys'  Boarding  School  founded  by  Rev.  David  B. 
Lyman,  in  1836,  which  continues  to  this  day.     It  is 

55 


56  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAI 

maintained  under  its  own  trustees,  and  has  today  as 
its  principal  Mr.  Levi  Lyman,  grandson  of  the  founder. 
From  this  school,  for  many  years,  the  best  scholars 
were  sent  for  higher  education  to  the  Lahainaluna 
Seminary.  The  Hilo  Boys'  Boarding  School  was  the 
model  upon  which  General  S.  C.  Armstrong  founded 
Hampton  Institute  for  the  benefit  of  the  colored  races 
of  America. 

Tributary  to  the  Hilo  School  was  the  Kohala  Boys' 
School,  maintained  for  about  fifty  years  by  Rev.  Elias 
Bond. 

At  Hanalei,  on  Kauai,  for  many  years  there  con- 
tinued a  Boys'  School  under  the  guidance  of  successive 
missionaries. 

The  first  of  the  Girls'  Schools  was  the  Wailuku 
Seminary,  founded  about  1836,  by  Rev.  and  Mrs.  J.  S. 
Green  and  Miss  Lydia  Brown.  About  1840  it  came 
under  the  guidance  of  Mr.  Edward  Bailey  and  Miss 
Maria  Ogden,  who  carried  it  on  for  ten  or  twelve  years 
longer. 

Mrs.  Fidelia  Coan  conducted  for  a  time  a  small 
Girls'  Boarding  School  in  Hilo. 

Punahou  School  or  Academy  was  originally  founded 
for  the  education  of  the  children  of  the  missionaries, 
but  is  now  open  to  all  classes  and  races  of  our  island 
community. 

The  earlier  Hawaiian  ministers  were  prepared  for 
their  work  in  the  Lahainaluna  Seminary  and,  also,  by 
the  personal  teaching  of  individual  missionaries. 

At  the  request  of  the  higher  chiefs  a  Boarding  School 
known  as  ''The  Royal  School"  was  established  in  Hono- 
lulu by  the  Mission  in  1839,  under  the  care  of  Mr. 


Kamehameha  III. 


William  C.  Lunalilo,  who  reigned 
King  of  Hawaii  from  Jan. 
1873— Feb.   1874 


Queen    Emma,    Wife   of 
Kamehameha   IV. 


Kamehameha   IV. 


BOARDING  SCHOOLS  57 

and  Mrs.  Amos  S.  Cooke,  and  was  continued  for  about 
ten  years. 

In  this  school  were  educated  the  five  sovereigns  who 
reigned  over  the  Hawaiian  people  from  1855  to  1903, 
namely,  Alexander  Liholiho,  Lot  Kamehameha,  Wil- 
liam Lunalilo,  David  Kalakaua,  and  Lydia  Liliuo- 
kalani. 

Besides  these  there  were  ten  or  more  of  the  children 
of  the  high  chiefs. 


HAWAIIAN  MISSIO:fTAEIES  TO  OTHER 
GROUPS 

THE  Hawaiian  Group  lies  just  within  the  North- 
ern Tropics,  while  the  Marquesas  lie  between 
nine  and  ten  degrees  south  latitude,  and  the 
groups  are  2300  miles  apart.  The  latter  islands  were 
discovered  bj  a  Spanish  voyager,  Mendana,  in  1595, 
or  nearly  two  hundred  years  before  Capt.  Cook  dis- 
covered the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  twenty-five  years 
before  the  New  England  Pilgrims  landed  at  Plymouth. 
In  1833  two  families  from  the  American  Board 
Mission  to  Hawaii,  made  effort  to  secure  a  foothold 
for  missionary  work  in  the  Marquesas  Islands,  but 
after  encountering  great  dangers  and  privations,  re- 
turned to  the  much  larger  and  equally  needy  and  more 
promising  Hawaiian  field.  English  missionaries  also, 
going  from  Tahiti,  failed  to  gain  permanent  results 
in  the  Marquesas  Islands.  In  1853  Matunui,  a  chief 
of  Fatuhiwa,  Marquesas  Islands,  arrived  in  Hawaii, 
asking  that  Christian  missionaries  be  sent  to  his  islands 
that  they  might  share  in  the  blessings  which  had  so 
enriched  Hawaii.  This  appeal  so  stirred  the  Hawaiian 
Christians  that  liberal  contributions  were  made,  two 
ordained  Hawaiian  ministers,  Rev.  James  Kekela  and 
Rev.  Samuel  Kauwealoha,  with  their  wives,  and  two 

58 


MISSIONARIES  TO  OTHER  GROUPS       59 

deacons  and  their  wives  were  sent,  a  vessel  being 
chartered  to  take  them  to  the  Marquesas  Islands.  Rev. 
B.  W.  Parker  accompanied  them  to  assist  in  opening 
the  work  and  soon  returned  to  Hawaii,  leaving  them 
hopeful  as  to  the  future.  For  fifty  years  these  two 
heroic  Hawaiians  labored  for  the  Christianization  and 
uplift  of  the  benighted  people  of  this  most  difficult 
field.  Besides  the  above,  Messrs.  Kaiwi,  Kaukau,  and 
Hapuku,  S.  Kapahi,  and  G.  Haina  served  upon  this 
mission  for  longer  or  shorter  terms,  while  Rev.  James 
Bicknell,  son  of  a  missionary  to  Tahiti  and  afterwards 
in  missionary  work  in  Hamakua,  Hawaii,  spent  two 
or  three  years  of  his  early  missionary  life  in  labor 
with  these  Hawaiian  missionaries  at  Omoa,  Marquesas. 

Much  of  the  good  order  and  Christian  character  that 
may  today  be  found  upon  the  Marquesas  Islands  is 
attributable  to  the  faithful  work  of  these  humble 
Hawaiian  Christian  missionaries.  Descendants  of 
Rev.  James  Kekela  and  of  Hapuku  are  (now)  living 
upon  Hivaoa,  one  of  the  Marquesas  Islands. 

Ships  of  the  type  called  ^'Blackbirds"  were  known 
in  the  South  Pacific,  near  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth 
century.  These  were  simply  pirates  that  visited  some 
of  the  South  Sea  Islands  and  by  pretended  friendship 
decoyed  numbers  of  islanders  on  board  and  then  sud- 
denly getting  under  way  carried  them  off  into  slavery. 
These  kidnapped  people  were  taken  to  certain  ports 
on  the  coast  of  South  America  where  they  were  sold 
into  slavery  by  the  ruthless  pirates.  A  ship  of  this 
kind  visited  the  Marquesas  Islands  and  kidnapped  the 
son  of  a  Marquesian.  This  man  in  rage  declared  that 
he  would  kill  the  first  white  man  who  shoidd  fall  into 


60  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

his  hands.  Later  the  New  England  whale  ship  Con- 
gress came  into  the  port  of  Hivaoa  and  the  cj^ptain 
sent  his  mate,  Mr.  Whalon,  with  a  boat's  crew  ashore 
to  secure  water  and  fresh  vegetables  for  the  ship. 
Landing  upon  the  beach  Mr.  Whalon  was  seized  by 
the  aggrieved  Marquesian  and  the  company  of  his 
friends.  The  boat's  crew  fled  to  the  boat  and  returned 
to  the  ship.  Word  was  brought  to  the  missionary 
Kekela  that  a  white  man  had  been  seized  by  the  natives. 
Well  knowing  the  great  danger,  Mr.  Kekela  hastened 
to  the  scene.  He  found  a  concourse  of  people  and 
the  white  man  firmly  bound,  while  the  native  oven 
was  being  heated  for  cooking  the  captive  to  be  eaten 
at  the  cannibal  feast.  Mr.  Kekela  at  once  pleaded  with 
the  angry  Marquesian  to  spare  the  white  man  who 
had  done  him  no  injury.  "True,  but  his  people  car- 
ried off  my  son,  and  I  will  kill  and  eat  him."  The 
missionary  saw  that  all  his  pleading  was  without  avail, 
and  then  asked  at  what  price  he  could  buy  the  victim. 
The  Marquesian  said:  "Give  me  your  whaleboat  and 
you  shall  have  the  white  man."  "It  is  a  bargain," 
replied  the  missionary,  and  the  white  man  was  set 
free  and  the  missionary's  prized  boat  was  delivered 
in  exchange.  This  boat  had  been  of  great  service  in 
the  missionary  work. 

This  noble  act  of  humanity  on  the  part  of  the 
Hawaiian  missionary  later  received  worthy  recognition 
from  President  Abraham  Lincoln,  who  sent  a  fine  gold 
watch  to  Mr.  Kekela  with  a  suitable  inscription  en- 
graved upon  it,  and  also  presented  the  money  for  the 
purchase  of  a  new  boat  to  replace  the  craft  that  had 
been  given  in  exchange  for  the  life  of  Mr.  Whalon. 


MISSIONARIES  TO  OTHER  GROUPS        61 

The  .writer  saw  this  famous  watch  in  the  hands  of 
Mr.  Kekela  and  it  is  now  in  the  possession  of  his 
daughter,  Susan  Kekela. 

The  Hawaiian  Christians  and  churches  have  not  only 
done  efficient  missionary  service  in  the  Marquesas 
Islands,  but  have  also  borne  valiant  service  in  mis- 
sionary work  in  Micronesia,  more  especially  in  the 
Gilbert  and  Marshall  Islands.  The  names  of  several 
who,  during  the  forty  years  from  1855  to  1895  aided 
in  gospel  work  in  these  groups,  are  held  in  honor 
among  the  Hawaiian  Churches  and  are  here  given: 
Opunui,  Kaaikaula,  G.  Leleo,  Aea,  Mahoe,  Rev.  S. 
W.  Kekuewa,  now  pastor  on  Oahu,  Rev.  W.  N^.  Lono, 
formerly  pastor  of  Kaumakapili  Church,  Rev.  S.  P. 
Kaaia,  now  pastor  on  Maui,  Kanoa,  long  on  Butaritari, 
Rev.  D.  P.  Mahihila,  pastor  at  Puuloa,  Oahu,  Rev. 
J.  Nua,  late  pastor  at  Haleaha  Koola  Oahu,  S.  K. 
Maunaloa,  D.  Kapali,  S.  P.  K.  Nawaa,  Maka,  Nalima, 
D.  Kanoho,  T.  Kaehuaaea,  and  W.  P.  Kapu. 

Several  of  these  men  with  their  wives,  after  faithful 
missionary  lives  finished  their  careers  in  their  fields 
of  labor,  while  others  lived  to  be  of  further  service 
to  their  home  churches  in  Hawaii  as  returned  mis- 
sionaries. Four  of  them  are  today  pastors  of  Hawaiian 
Churches. 

The  influence  for  good  upon  the  people  and  churches 
of  Hawaii,  of  the  seven  who  went  to  Marquesas,  and 
of  the  nineteen  men  named  above,  all  with  their  wives, 
may  confidently  be  counted  of  great  benefit  and  of 
spiritual  uplift. 


XI 

STORIES  OF  LIFE  IN  HAWAII 
Kaulia  and  the  Sorcerer 

WAHIAWA,  a  heathen  priest  or  soothsayer, 
Kahuna  Anaana,  lived  in  N'orth  Hilo,  in  the 
early  days  of  Missionary  Coan's  career,  in 
about  1838.  Deacon  Kaulia  meeting  him  one  day  ex- 
postulated with  him,  advising  him  to  stop  his  fraudu- 
lent practices  and  come  out  an  honest  Christian. 

The  priest  said:  "You  are  a  hawk,  and  I  am  a 
hawk ;  there  is  no  branch  I  may  not  light  upon ;  I  light 
upon  the  green  branch,  and  I  light  upon  the  dry 
branch." 

"Yes,"  said  Kaulia,  ''you  are  a  hawk  and  I  am  a 
hawk,  and  the  angel  of  God  is  a  hawk." 

Kaulia  went  on  his  journey  toward  Waipio  valley. 
Within  a  day  or  two  Wahiawa  died  and  Kaulia  was 
sent  for  to  conduct  the  funeral.  Kaulia  returned  im- 
mediately from  his  northward  journey  and  entering 
the  room  tapped  on  the  coffin  and  said:  "You  were  a 
hawk,  and  I  was  a  hawk;  but  the  angel  hawk  has 
scooped  down  upon  you." 

This  language  of  the  heathen  priest,  and  the  deacon, 
is  an  apt  illustration  of  the  ready  picturesque  expres- 
sions at  the  instant  command  of  the  more  able  and 


STORIES  OF  LIFE  IN  HAWAII  63 

gifted  Hawaiian  leaders  and  speakers,  and  was  very 
taking  with  the  people. 


Schooner  Life.     A  Man  Overboard 

Mother  Gulick's  prayer  was  that  not  one  of  her 
boys  should  become  a  sailor.  Living  on  these  small 
islands  of  limited  resources,  with  old  ocean  "poured 
round  all"  there  was  some  reason  to  fear  that  the  at- 
tractions of  the  sea  might  tempt  to  a  sailor's  life. 

The  very  thing  she  feared  came  to  pass,  and  her 
second  son  became  the  captain  of  a  two-masted  schooner 
named  the  Kamehameha  IV,  of  which  he  owned  one- 
half  and  for  two  years  he  followed  the  life  of  a  sailor 
in  the  small  craft. 

When  the  children  of  the  New  England  churches 
sent  out  the  first  Morning  Star,  under  Captain  Bing- 
ham, to  be  the  carrier  for  the  missionaries  in  Micro- 
nesia, this  schooner  captain  left  his  little  schooner  and 
shipped  as  second  mate  of  the  famous  Morning  Star, 
in  which  as  second  mate,  and  later  as  first  mate  or 
chief  officer,  he  made  voyages  to  the  Marquesas,  the 
Society  Islands,  and  to  the  several  groups  of  Micronesia. 

It  is  the  opinion  of  some  who  know  him  not  that 
the  Hawaiian  is  a  stolid  being,  devoid  of  sympathy, 
and  inexpressive  of  sentiment. 

In  1854  I  was  captain  of  the  schooner  above  men- 
tioned, a  vessel  of  44  tons.  She  was  broad  of  beam, 
stiff  as  a  church  and,  it  must  be  confessed,  a  dull 
sailer.  Such  a  craft  today  in  this  era  of  steamers 
and  fine  wind-jammers  would  command  no  passengers, 
would  secure  no   freight  more  costly  than  firewood. 


64  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

But  at  that  time  not  more  than  one  steamer  had  ever 
reached  Honolulu,  and  a  few  schooners  of  from  forty 
to  one  hundred  tons  were  the  passenger  carriers  be- 
tween the  islands  of  the  group,  every  voyage  ending  at 
Honolulu. 

Our  usual  route  for  the  schooner,  during  that  year, 
was  from  Honolulu  to  Lahaina,  thence  eastward  under 
the  lee  of  Maui  across  the  wide  Maalaea  bay,  past 
Molokini,  leaving  Kahoolawe  on  our  starboard,  then 
out  into  the  Hawaii  channel  and  across  it  to  Honoipu, 
under  the  lee  of  Kohala  Point,  the  most  northern  point 
of  the  Island  of  Hawaii.  Here  we  landed  the  majority 
of  our  passengers,  Kohala  people.  Leaving  Kohala 
point  we  recrossed  the  windy  channel  to  Hana,  at  the 
eastern  point  of  Maui.  Here  we  landed  the  remainder 
of  our  passengers  and  their  baggage,  together,  some- 
times, with  a  little  freight  for  the  incipient  sugar 
plantation  of  Hana. 

In  this  snug  little  harbor,  easy  to  enter  but  difficult 
of  exit  for  a  sailing  craft,  we  took  on  pigs,  poultry, 
potatoes,  and  taro  and,  when  prepared  to  sail  on  return 
voyage,  received  deck  passengers,  men,  women,  and 
children.  For  return  voyage  we  again  crossed  the 
rough  channel  to  Kohala  point  where  we  received  on 
board  an  addition  to  our  deck  load  of  passengers  for 
Honolulu. 

One  night's  sail  from  Kohala  brought  us  to  Lahaina 
and  the  next  morning  we  had  the  pleasure  of  landing 
freight  and  passengers  at  the  Honolulu  wharf.  One 
such  voyage  usually  took  from  twelve  to  fifteen  days; 
and,  on  rare  occasions,  yielded  an  income  of  from  three 
hundred  and  fifty  dollars  to  four  hundred  dollars. 


STORIES  OF  LIFE  IN  HAWAII  65 

Such  a  crowding  of  passengers  in  the  hold  and  on 
the  deck  of  so  small  a  craft  would  not  be  permitted 
today,  but  it  is  doubtful  if  ever  a  Hawaiian  passenger 
embarked  on  that  craft  who  could  not  swim. 

One  stormy  night,  on  a  passage  to  windward  with 
a  deck  load  of  perhaps  one  hundred  passengers  for 
Kohala  and  Hana,  we  pushed  out  from  under  the  lee 
of  Maui  into  the  lumpy  seas  of  the  Hawaii  channel. 
We  furled  the  foresail,  shortened  the  jib,  and  close 
reefed  the  mainsail.  Under  this  short  sail  the  little 
vessel  was  laboring  heavily  in  the  mountainous  waves. 
Keawe,  the  best  sailor  of  the  crew  of  six  or  eight,  had 
stood  at  the  helm  from  two  to  four  o'clock  of  this 
dark  night  and  by  the  energy  and  tact  of  his  able 
seamanship,  in  handling  the  helm  of  the  little  schooner, 
had  saved  the  deck  passengers  from  many  a  drenching 
from  breaking  seas. 

I  was  seeking  rest  on  a  transom  in  the  small  cabin, 
with  one  ear  open.  Keawe,  tired  from  standing  two 
or  more  hours  at  the  helm,  took  his  seat  upon  the 
taffrail  and,  watching  the  tumbling  seas,  gave  quick 
commands  to  the  new  and  less  experienced  helmsman. 
"Put  your  helm  up !"  "Put  it  down !"  "Hard  down!" 
as,  watching,  he  saw  an  angry  wave  threatening  an 
instant  deluge. 

Some  woman  deck  passenger  said:  "What  is  that 
fell  overboard?"  and,  in  an  instant,  I  sprang  up  the 
companionway  and  saw  Keawe  in  the  white  wake  ten 
feet  astern  of  our  craft.  In  a  moment  he  was  lost 
in  the  darkness  of  the  night  amidst  the  tumbling  and 
breaking  waves.  We  made  instant  effort  to  get  the 
schooner  on  the  return  tack  that  we  might  pick  him 


66  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

up.  But  the  vessel  was  under  such  short  sail  that  she 
would  not  come  in  stays,  and  we  were  compelled  to 
wear  ship,  that  is,  we  ran  the  vessel  off  before  the 
wind  and  so  brought  her  on  the  port  tack  headed  to- 
wards Maui ;  this  sent  the  vessel  far  to  leeward  and 
as  we  passed  on  toward  Maui,  we  heard  the  voice  of 
our  unfortunate  sailor  calling  to  us  from  the  wind- 
ward. We  then  made  haste  to  shake  the  reef  out  of 
the  mainsail  and  to  hoist  the  foresail,  that  gaining 
headway,  we  might  be  able  to  come  in  stays  and  so 
gain  the  ground  we  had  lost  and,  if  possible,  save  our 
brave  swimmer.  We  were  successful,  the  schooner 
came  around  in  good  shape  and  we  stood  back  toward 
Hawaii.  All  kept  silence  while  our  craft  sped  over 
the  dark,  dashing  seas.  I^ot  a  sound  of  the  voice  that 
rang  over  the  waves  as  we  had  stood  back  toward 
Maui.  It  was  now  half  past  four  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  a  half  hour  that  the  swimmer  had  been  bat- 
tling the  waves.  Should  we  ever  see  him  again  ?  In 
an  instant  his  head  appeared  right  under  the  lee  of  the 
schooner ;  we  threw  him  a  rope  and  he  climbed  dripping 
aboard.  In  a  moment  the  deck  load  of  passengers 
all  burst  out  crying  and  sobbing.  From  childhood  I 
had  maintained  my  disbelief  in  the  possibility  of  cry- 
ing for  joy.  Here  were  from  seventy  to  one  hundred 
people  in  an  instant  convulsed  with  emotion.  Asked 
what  he  would  have  done  if  we  had  not  picked  him 
up,  he  replied  that  if  the  vessel  had  waited  till  day- 
light he  would  have  then  swam  down  to  her.  When 
he  dropped  asleep  and  fell  overboard  he  had  on  a 
new  pea  jacket;  this,  of  course,  he  shook  off  at  once, 
but  held  it  in  hand  hoping  to  save  it.     But  as  in  the 


STORIES  OF  LIFE  IN  HAY^AII  (J7 

gloaming  of  the  night  he  saw  the  vessel  steering  straight 
for  him  he  thought  he  had  better  not  be  trammeled 
with  his  coat,  but  be  free  to  swim  his  best  as  the 
vessel  approached  him,  so  he  abandoned  it  to  the  fishes. 
Frequently  while  the  schooner  lay  at  anchor  at 
Honoipu,  Kohala,  this  man  would  take  his  fish  spear, 
a  trident,  and  going  to  a  point  of  rocks,  would  plunge 
into  the  deep  and  diving  several  feet  under  water,  with 
spear  in  hand,  sit  down  on  the  bottom  or  on  a  rock. 
He  said  that  remaining  there  motionless  the  fish 
would  approach  to  look  at  him  when,  with  a  quick 
motion,  he  would  spear  a  fish  and  return  with  it  to 
the  schooner.  He  seldom  failed  to  return  without  a 
fish  in  hand.  His  movements  under  water  must  have 
been  very  agile  and  skillful,  for  it  is  said  that  six 
minutes  is  the  limit  of  time  that  a  man  can  remain, 
under  water  and  live.  Had  I  ever  with  watch  in 
hand  timed  his  diving  I  might  have  more  accurate 
information,  but  this  I  can  say,  that,  while  lying  at 
anchor  at  Honoipu,  where  was  a  rough  and  rocky  bot- 
tom, once  on  a  time,  a  fluke  of  our  three  hundred  pound 
anchor  became  hooked  under  a  ledge  or  a  rock  at  a 
depth  of  eight  fathoms  or  forty-eight  to  fifty  feet.  We 
were  in  a  bad  predicament,  when  this  sailor  volun- 
teered to  dive  down  and  clear  the  anchor.  Stripping, 
he  plunged  head  first  from  the  bow  of  the  vessel  and, 
immediately,  we  could  see  the  soles  of  his  feet  as  he 
stretched  head  downward  for  the  rocky  ocean  bottom. 
At  the  preconcerted  signal  of  shaking  the  anchor  chain 
we  instantly  slackened  it  off  over  the  windlass,  and 
with  a  muscular  jerk  he  freed  the  anchor  fluke  from 
its  hold  on  the  rock,  and  we  merrily  reeled  in  the 


68  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

chain  and  anchor  by  the  windlass.  Then  the  faithful 
and  true  son  of  Neptune  came  blowing  up  like  a  por- 
poise to  the  surface  and  climbed  aboard,  while  our 
flapping  sails  filled  and  our  buoyant  craft  promptly 
sped  on  her  return  voyage  to  Honolulu. 

In  this  year,  1916,  the  athletes  of  Europe  and 
America  are  echoing  the  name  of  the  humble  Hawaiian, 
Duke  Kahanamoku,  the  world  champion  swimmer,  who 
would  have  found  a  close  competitor  in  the  unknown 
sailor  of  the  schooner  Kamehameha  IV,  Keawe  of 
Kohala,  of  sixty  years  ago. 

Crossing  a  Channel  in  a  Canoe 

On  a  previous  page  mention  is  made  of  Keawe  who 
fell  from  the  schooner's  deck  on  a  stormy  night  and 
was  saved.  Memory  recalls  another  thrilling  experi- 
ence of  deliverance  from  angry  waves. 

We  four  Gulick  boys,  Orramel  and  John,  Charles 
and  William  were  safe  in  Punahou  school  in  1846, 
while  Theodore  and  little  brother  Thomas,  the  seventh 
son,  were  at  home  with  the  parents  at  Kaluaaha, 
Molokai.  This  little  fellow,  then  under  seven  years 
of  age,  picked  up  a  pebble  of  less  than  the  size  of  a 
pea  and  with  childlike  innocence  experimented  with 
it  to  see  if  it  would  go  into  his  ear.  But  a  touch  or 
two  and  in  it  went.  And  every  effort  of  the  anxious 
father  and  mother  to  get  this  small  stone  out  of  the 
precious  child's  ear  proving  of  no  avail,  it  was  de- 
cided that  father  should  take  the  lad  to  Doctor  Baldwin 
at  Lahaina,  who  would  doubtless  have  instruments  and 
means  of  extracting  the  unwelcome  stone  from  the  ear. 


STORIES  OF  LIFE  IN  HAWAII  69 

The  channel  between  Molokai  and  Maui  at  the  nar- 
rowest point  is  ten  miles  in  width,  but  the  passage 
from  Kakiaaha  to  Lahaina  was  fifteen  miles  and  was 
made  by  canoes  in  from  two  to  four  hours  according 
to  the  breeze  or  the  exertion  of  the  paddlers.  The 
early  morning,  before  the  trade  wind  strikes  heavily 
down  the  narrow  channel,  was  the  time  to  start.  The 
single  canoe,  with  outrigger,  and  with  three  or  four 
canoemen  was  to  be  the  passenger  transport,  and  at 
about  four  A.  M,  the  slender  canoe  with  father  and 
son  and  canoemen  made  the  early  start.  As  the  day 
broke  the  mother  at  home  thought;  that  it  seemed  a 
windy  morning  and,  as  usual,  her  refuge  was  in  prayer. 

Just  at  daybreak  a  sudden  gust  of  wind  struck  the 
sail  of  the  canoe  and,  in  a  moment,  it  upset  and  all 
were  struggling  in  the  water.  But  where  was  our  boy 
Thomas  ?  Not  to  be  seen !  One  of  the  expert  canoe- 
men dived  down  under  the  submerged  canoe,  freed 
him  from  a  tangle  of  ropes,  brought  him  choking  and 
spitting  salt  water,  safe  to  the  surface. 

Ordinarily  this  would  have  been  but  an  incident  in 
the  voyage  soon  to  be  forgotten  and  laughed  over  when 
the  expert  swimmers  had  righted  the  canoe  and  bailed 
her  out.  But  not  so  today.  Upon  unlashing  the  out- 
rigger and  righting  the  canoe  the  frail  craft  was  found 
to  be  cracked  in  such  manner  that  no  amount  of  bailing 
out  of  the  water  would  avail  to  free  her.  The  canoe 
would  not  sink,  but,  being  water-logged,  she  could 
neither  be  propelled  by  sail  or  paddles;  and  the  pros- 
pect was  of  perishing  near  sight  of  land  by  the  buffet- 
ing of  boisterous  waves.  For  hours,  perhaps  five  or 
six,  the  company  hung  around  the  wrecked  canoe. 


70  THE   PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

It  was  now  learned  that  in  the  darkness  of  the  early 
morning  the  canoemen,  failing  to  find  the  mast  of  the 
single  canoe,  had  taken  the  mast  of  the  double  canoe. 
This  heavy  mast  in  falling  had  split  the  frail  craft. 

At  about  three  P.  M.  there  came  across  from  Molokai 
for  Lahaina,  an  able  whale  boat  with  a  load  of  poi, 
or  pounded  taro,  for  sale  in  Lahaina,  and  seeing  a 
signal  raised  by  our  distressed  canoemen  came  to  the 
rescue.  Throwing  out  some  of  the  bundles  of  food 
they  kindly  took  the  shipwrecked  company  to  the  de- 
sired haven  of  Lahaina  and  to  the  home  of  Doctor 
Baldwin  who,  with  needed  instruments,  easily  removed 
the  pebble  that  had  been  the  cause  of  all  this  trouble. 
The  next  day  the  father  and  little  son  upon  return  to 
Molokai  brought  unmeasured  relief  to  the  anxious 
heart  of  the  mother,  who  during  the  day  of  their  dis- 
tress had  prayed  earnestly  for  their  safety.  This  de- 
liverance was  recounted  by  the  praying  parents  as 
received  in  answer  to  prayer.  With  the  Psalmist  they 
could  say :  "In  my  distress  I  cried  unto  the  Lord,  and 
he  heard  me." 


e 


O 


PART  II 

JOURNALS  AND   LETTERS 
OF  MISSIONARIES 


XII 

JOUKNALS  AND  LETTERS  OF  MISSION- 
ARIES 1820-1822 

THE  first  missionaries  to  the  Sandwich  Islands 
sailed  from  Boston  October  23d,  1819,  in  the 
brig  Thdddeus,  Captain  Blanchard. 
Extracts  from  the  journal  of  Mr.  Loomis  tell  of  the 
sailing : 

A  large  concourse  of  people  assembled  on  Long  Wharf, 
Boston,  to  witness  our  departure  for  the  Sandwich  Islands. 
It  was  an  interesting  moment,  we  were  about  to  bid 
farewell  to  country,  kindred  and  friends  and  embark  for 
the  distant  isles  of  the  sea.  There  we  knew  not  what 
new  and  untried  scenes,  what  dangers  and  perils  might 
await  us.  But  we  felt  that  our  lives  were  in  the  hands 
of  an  All-wise  God,  who  would  so  dispose  of  us  as  to 
advance  His  honor  and  glory. 

Thomas  Hopu  made  an  affecting  address  to  the  sur- 
rounding multitude,  thanking  them  for  the  kindness  they 
had  shown  him. 

We  were  accompanied  by  a  number  of  our  friends 
with  the  Prudential  Committee  of  the  Board.  They  took 
an  affectionate  leave  of  us  at  one  o'clock  and  before  two 
we  were  under  weigh.     We  are  all  well  and  in  good 

71 


72  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

spirits,  provided  with  everything  to  render  us  comfortable 
during  the  voyage. 

The  voyage  was  not  especially  eventful  and  its  close 
is  told  in  the  Mission  Journal,  which  follows : 

A  Copy  of  the  Journal  of  the  Sandwich  Islands 
Mission 

On  Board  Brig  Thaddeus,  Captain  Blanchard,  Bound  to 

the  Sandwich  Islands 

Extracts  from  a  Journal  Supposed  to  Have  Been  Written 
By  Mr.  Loomis. 

March  21,  1820.  While  Brother  Whitney  was  assisting 
in  painting  the  outside  of  the  vessel,  which  he  considered 
as  not  only  a  pleasant  and  useful,  but  needful  exercise,  the 
rope  on  which  he  held  by  one  hand,  gave  way  and  let 
him  fall  from  a  temporary  scaffold  into  the  sea,  and  he 
was  left  astern,  calling  for  help  and  endeavoring  in  vain 
to  overtake  the  vessel.  Captain  Blanchard's  orders  were 
promptly  executed  and  the  brig,  though  under  full  sail 
moving  at  the  rate  of  six  or  seven  knots  an  hour,  was 
"hove  to"  in  five  minutes  and  drifted  slowly.  In  the 
meantime,  Brother  Whitney,  whose  perfect  self-possession 
and  skill  in  swimming  enabled  him  successfully  to  baffle 
the  waves  after  one  or  two  had  broken  over  him,  happily 
gained  a  small  bench,  which  had  been  providentially  car- 
ried on  deck  a  few  minutes  before  and  was  thrown  over- 
board to  serve  him  as  a  temporary  buoy.  On  this,  though 
his  strength  was  considerably  exhausted,  he  was  easily 
sustained  after  it  had  once  or  twice  deceived  him  by 
rolling.  Never  before  did  the  mission  family  know  how 
much  they  loved  him.  In  five  minutes  more  a  boat  was 
cleared  away  and  let  down  and  sent  to  his  relief,  which 
received  him  in  about  the  span  of  five  minutes  at  the 
distance,  perhaps,  of  one-fourth  of  a  mile.  Before  the 
boat  set  off,  as  he  was  reclining  on  the  bench  and  floating 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        73 

in  the  water,  he  raised  his  hat  and  waved  it  lest  his 
anxious  wife  should  be  too  much  distressed  and  then 
composed  himself  again  in  prayer,  while  many  hearts  on 
board  were,  "in  this  soul  trying  hour,"  lifted  up  to  God 
in  fervent  petitions  that  he  would  spare  his  life  for  his 
appointed  work  among  the  Gentiles.  By  the  blessing  of 
Him  who  had  said:  "When  thou  passest  through  the 
waters,  I  will  be  with  thee,"  he  was  taken  up  and  safely 
returned  and,  not  far  from  twenty  minutes  from  the  time 
he  fell,  was  joyfully  received  on  board.  He  was  welcomed 
with  tender  tears  and  with  thanksgiving  to  an  unchanging 
Redeemer. 

First  Sight  of  Mauna  Kea,  Hawaii 

March  30,  1820.  Let  us  thank  God  and  take  courage. 
Early  this  morning  the  long  looked  for  Owhyhee  (Hawaii), 
and  the  cloud  capped  and  snow  crowned  Mauna  Kea 
appeared  full  in  view  to  the  joy  of  the  little  multitude  on 
board.  A  heavy  cloud  now  envelops  a  considerable  part 
of  this  stupendous  mountain,  on  the  summit  of  which  a 
heavy  body  of  snow  appears  at  intervals  quite  above  the 
clouds.  (11  o'clock  A.  M.).  We  are  now  coasting  along 
the  northeast  part  of  the  Island  so  near  the  shore  as  to 
see  the  numerous  habitations,  cultivated  fields,  rising 
smoke  in  different  parts,  fresh  vegetation,  rocks,  rivulets, 
cascades,  trees,  etc.,  and,  with  the  help  of  glasses,  men 
and  women,  immortal  beings  purchased  with  redeeming 
blood.  We  are  much  pleased  not  to  say  delighted,  with 
the  scene  and  long  to  be  on  shore.  Hopoo  (Hopu),  has 
designated  the  spot  in  a  little  valley  where  he  was  born. 
He  and  his  native  companions  are  much  animated  with 
a  view  of  their  native  shores.  Near  the  northern  ex- 
tremity the  walls  of  an  ancient  heiau^  or  heathen  temple 

"i^Seiau;  A  heathen  temple,  or  place  of  worship;  being  usually 
an  extensive  enclosure  of  unhewn  stone  without  a  roof;  a  sacred 
enclosure  where  offerings  of  food,  of  animals,  and  of  human  beings, 
were  made  \>j  the  priests  upon  festive  or  sacred  days. 


74  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

appears  where  the  sacrifices  of  abomination  have  long 
been  offered  to  demons.  (4  o'clock  P.  M.).  As  we  double 
the  northern  extremity  of  Owhyhee  (Hawaii)  the  lofty 
heights  of  Maui  are  on  our  right.  As  no  canoes  approach 
us  it  is  thought  that  it  is  a  time  of  special  taboo  and 
all  the  people  are  employed  in  its  observance.  Captain 
Blanchard  has  concluded  to  send  a  boat  to  make  inquiries 
respecting  the  king  and  the  state  of  the  islands.  Mr. 
Hunnewell,  Thomas  Hopoo,  and  J.  Honoree  and  others 
have  now  gone  on  this  errand  and  we  wait  with  anxious 
expectation  for  the  first  intelligence.  (7  P.  M.).  The 
boat  has  returned,  having  fallen  in  with  a  number  of 
fishermen  near  the  shore  who  readily  answered  their  in- 
quiries and  the  messengers  have  astonished  and  overjoyed 
our  minds  by  reporting  the  unexpected  and  important 
information  from  the  fishermen  that  the  aged  King 
Tamahamaha  (Kamehameha)  is  dead;  that  Eehoreho 
(Liholiho),  his  son,  succeeds  him,  that  the  images  of  his 
gods  are  burned,  that  the  men  are  all  Ai-noa,  that  is, 
they  eat  with  women  in  all  the  islands,  that  one  of  the 
chiefs  only  was  killed  in  settling  the  affairs  of  govern- 
ment, and  he  for  refusing  to  destroy  his  god;  that 
Eehoreho,  the  king,  and  Crymokoo  (Kalanimoku),  often 
called  Billy  Pitt,  resides  at  Kawaihae.  These  are  inter- 
esting facts.  They  seem  to  show  that  Christ  is  over- 
turning in  order  to  take  possession  and  that  their  souls 
are  waiting  for  His  law,  while  the  old  and  decaying  pillars 
of  idolatry  are  falling  to  the  ground. 

March  31,  1820.  The  interesting  intelligence  of  yes- 
terday is  confirmed  today  by  a  visit  of  Brother  Buggies, 
Thomas  Hopu,  and  William  Tenui,  to  the  residence  of 
Crymokoo  where  they  were  received  kindly  and  enter- 
tained with  unexpected  civility.  By  them  the  widow  of 
Kamehameha  sent  us  a  present  of  fresh  fish,  cocoanuts, 
sweet  potatoes,  bananas,  sugar  cane,  bread  fruit,  etc.,  ex- 
pressing much  satisfaction  that  we  had  come  to  bring 
them  good  things.  Today  a  number  of  the  natives  came 
off  to  the  brig  in  their  canoes,  with  vegetables,  shells, 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        75 

etc.,  for  the  purpose  of  traffic  and  to  gratify  their  curi- 
osity. The  sight  of  these  children  of  nature  drew  tears 
from  eyes  that  did  not  intend  to  weep.  Of  them  we 
inquired  whether  they  had  learned  anything  about  Je- 
hovah, who  made  Hawaii  and  all  things.  They  replied 
that  Rehoreho,  the  king,  had  heard  of  the  great  God 
of  white  men  and  had  spoken,  of  Him,  and  that  all  the 
chiefs,  but  one,  had  agreed  to  destroy  their  gods  and 
idols,  because  they  were  convinced  that  they  could  do 
no  good,  since  they  could  not  even  serve  their  king. 
Idol  worship  is  therefore  prohibited  and  the  priesthood 
entirely  abolished.  Sing,  0  Heavens,  for  the  Lord  hath 
done  it. 

Eawaihae  Bay,  April  2,  1820.  Sabbath.  As  we  ex- 
pected soon  to  leave  Kawaihae  Bay  and  as  Captain 
Blanchard  was  going  on  shore  to  call  on  the  chief,  it  was 
thought  best  that  Mr.  Bingham  should  accompany  him 
this  morning  for  that  purpose.  He  accordingly  visited 
the  chief  Kalanimoku  and  with  him  the  most  celebrated 
heiau  of  the  islands.  It  was  built  by  Kamehameha,  who 
himself  laid  the  corner  stone.  It  stands  on  the  brow  of 
a  hill,  a  little  back  from  the  beach,  and  fronting  the 
seashore.  It  consists  now  principally  of  a  high  wall  about 
ten  feet  thick  at  the  base  and  five  at  the  top,  twenty  feet 
in  height  on  three  sides  of  the  parallelogram,  which  is 
about  a  hundred  and  twenty  feet  in  breadth  and  two 
hundred  and  forty  feet  in  length,  but  on  the  front  side 
the  wall,  instead  of  being  elevated  much  above  the  area 
inclosed,  consists  of  four  or  five  large  terraces  down  the 
declivity  of  the  hill.  These  made  a  convenient  place  for 
hundreds  of  worshippers  to  stand  while  the  priest  was 
within  offering  prayers  and  sacrifices.  In  this  inclosure 
are  the  ruins  of  several  houses  burnt  to  the  ground,  the 
ashes  of  various  wooden  gods,  the  remains  of  cocoanuts 
and  other  like  offerings,  the  ashes  and  burnt  bones  of 
many  human  victims,  sacrificed  to  demons.  At  the  foot 
of  the  hill  is  a  similar  inclosure  two  hundred  and  eighty 
feet  in  length  and  fifty  in  breadth,  which  had  been  used 


76  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

for  the  sacrifice  of  various  beasts,  fish  and  fruits.  The 
walls  and  areas  of  these  open  buildings,  once  tabooed  and 
sacred  are  now  free  to  every  foot,  useless  and  tumbling 
into  ruin.  In  the  afternoon  Kalanimoku  and  his  family 
came  on  board  to  accompany  us  to  the  residence  of  the 
King  at  Kailua. 

April  Jf.,  1820.  At  10  o'clock  this  morning,  one  hun- 
dred and  sixty-three  days  from  Boston,  we  came  to  anchor 
in  Kailua  Bay,  about  one  mile  from  the  king's  dwellings. 
Kalanimoku,  who  still  appears  to  be  friendly  to  our 
cause,  being  sent  for  by  Liholiho,  went  on  shore.  Soon 
after  Brothers  Bingham,  Thurston  and  Thomas  Hopu, 
accompanied  by  Captain  Blanchard,  also  went  ashore  to 
lay  before  the  king  the  plan  of  our  enterprise.  As  we 
drew  near  the  shore,  we  saw  him  bathing  in  the  surf  with 
his  mother  and  first  wife.  He  was  distinguished  by  the 
ornaments  of  beads  on  his  neck.  As  we  landed  five  or 
six  hundred  natives  of  different  ages  and  both  sexes 
swarmed  around  us  and  gave  a  noisy  and  singular  shout, 
and  used  all  their  eyes  and  ears  to  learn  who  and  what 
their  new  visitors  might  be.  Among  the  crowd  was  a 
distinguished  native  chief  named  Kuakini,  a  brother  of 
Kaahumanu,  and,  also,  called  John  Adams,  who  had 
acquired  something  of  the  English  language  and  man- 
ners. He  politely  conducted  us  to  his  own  home  and, 
afterward,  to  the  house  of  Mr.  John  Young,  who  has 
long  resided  here,  has  the  rank  of  a  chief  and  is  now 
acting  secretary  to  the  king.  By  him,  and  by  Captain 
Adams,  an  English  settler  with  him,  we  were  welcomed 
to  the  Sandwich  Islands.  We  then  waited  on  the  king 
with  the  most  important  message  that  could  be  sent  to 
any  earthly  potentate.  Eead  to  him  the  official  letter 
of  Dr.  Worcester  to  Kamehameha  and  the  letters  of 
Captain  Keynolds  to  Kamehameha,  and  his  son  Liholiho, 
and  had  them  interpreted  by  Mr.  Young  and  Thomas 
Hopu  and,  through  them,  made  known  to  his  majesty  the 
views  of  the  American  Board  and  the  wishes  of. the  mis- 
sion family.     We  presented  the  spy  glass,  furnished  by 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822       77 

the  Board,  which  the  king  accepted  very  thankfully.  He 
seemed  pleased  with  the  object  laid  before  him  and  dis- 
posed to  weigh  the  subject  deliberately,  expressed  a  de- 
gree of  approbation  and  seemed  far  from  being  in  haste  to 
give  an  answer  to  our  message.  All,  indeed,  both  king 
and  chiefs,  honorable  women  and  common  people,  whom 
we  heard  speak  on  the  subject,  expressed  their  approbation 
of  our  doings  in  the  general  term,  maiJcai,  it  is  good.  The 
word  gave  us  much  encouragement. 

Kailua  Harhor,  April  5,  1820.  In  the  dawn  of  the 
day,  as  we  passed  near  shore,  several  chiefs  were  spending 
their  idle  hours  in  gambling,  we  were  favored  with  an 
interview  with  Hewahewa,^  the  late  High  Priest.  He 
received  us  kindly  and  on  his  introduction  to  Brother 
Bingham  he  expressed  much  satisfaction  in  meeting  with 
a  brother  priest  from  America,  still  pleasantly  claiming 
that  distinction  for  himself.  He  assures  us  that  he  will 
be  our  friend.  Who  could  have  expected  that  such  would 
have  been  our  first  interview  with  the  man  whose  in- 
fluence we  had  been  accustomed  to  dread  more  than  any 
other  in  the  islands;  whom  we  had  regarded  and  could 
now  hardly  help  regarding  as  a  deceiver  of  his  fellow 
men.  But  he  seemed  much  pleased  in  speaking  of  the 
destruction  of  the  heiau  and  idols.  About  five  months 
ago  the  young  king  consulted  him  with  respect  to  the 
expediency  of  breaking  taboo  and  asked  him  to  tell  him 
frankly  and  plainly  whether  it  would  be  good  or  bad, 

2  Eewahewa:  ' '  The  late  High  Priest ' '  of  the  taboo  system,  which 
for  ages  had  held  the  people  in  bondage.  The  taboo  system  was 
the  device  of  the  priests  of  heathen  worship,  the  first  prohibition  of 
which  forbids  women  the  pleasure  of  eating  with  their  husbands 
and  to  this  was  added,  by  the  cunning  priests,  hundreds  of  restric- 
tions; sample  of  which  is:  the  forbidding  of  woman  to  eat  the 
banana  and  another,  the  declaration  putting  the  whole  people  under 
a  ban  upon  the  death  of  a  high  chief,  in  which  case  no  canoes 
could  be  launched  and  no  fishing  prosecuted  for  a  given  number 
of  days  or  weeks.  The  penalties  for  the  transgression  of  a  taboo 
were  heavy,  the  death  of  the  offender  being  a  frequent  penalty. 


78  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

assuring  him  at  the  same  time  that  he  would  be  guided 
by  his  view.  Hewahewa  speedily  replied,  maikai  it  would 
be  good,  adding  that  he  knew  there  is  but  one  "Akoohah'' 
(Akua)  who  is  in  heaven,  and  that  their  wooden  gods 
could  not  save  them  nor  do  them  any  good.  He  publicly 
renounced  idolatry  and  with  his  own  hand  set  fire  to 
the  heiau.  The  king  no  more  observed  their  superstitious 
taboos.  Thus  the  heads  of  the  civil  and  religious  de- 
partments of  the  nation  agreed  in  demolishing  that  for- 
bidding and  tottering  taboo  system  which  had  been 
founded  in  ignorance,  cemented  with  blood,  and  supported 
for  ages  by  the  basest  of  human  passion.  They  had,  in- 
deed, heard  of  the  Christian's  God,  but  gave  little  evidence 
that  they  understood  His  laws,  or  loved  His  character, 
or  feared  His  Holy  Name.  Whether  they  conceived  him 
as  worthy  of  their  homage  or  not,  they  were  convinced 
of  the  vanity  of  idols  and  the  folly  of  idol  worship. 
Before  we  returned  to  the  brig  the  favorite  wife  of  the 
king  expressed  a  decided  opinion  in  favor  of  our  settling 
in  the  Islands  and  requested  that  we  might  stay.  The 
king,  knowing  her  attachment  to  him  and  willing  to  try 
her  feelings,  said  to  her  pleasantly  that  if  he  admitted 
and  patronized  the  missionaries  he  could  be  allowed  but 
one  wife,  and  he  should  not  want  her.  As  a  gentle  re- 
proof, she  rose  from  the  mat  on  which  they  were  reclining 
and  attempted  to  leave  him,  but  he  detained  her  and 
turned  it  off  playfully.  Whether  he  felt  the  diflBculty 
or  not,  we  cannot  but  feel  that  polygamy  is  one  of  the 
great  barriers  to  the  progress  of  Christianity  here. 

Kailua,  April  6,  1820.  Today  the  royal  family  came 
on  board  the  brig  to  dine.  Liholiho,  dressed  in  what 
his  taste  would  consider  a  princely  style,  having  a  Maro 
around  the  waist,  a  green  silken  scarf  on  his  shoulders, 
beads  on  his  neck  and  a  wreath  on  his  head,  was  made 
acquainted  with  the  first  American  ladies  he  had  ever 
seen,  and  was  seated  at  the  head  of  our  table  and  appeared 
with  great  civility.  It  gave  us  great  satisfaction  to  have 
the  heathen  ruler  and  his  suite  sit  down  with  us  at 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        79 

our  own  table,  and  in  his  presence  to  implore  a  divine 
blessing  of  the  King  of  Heaven. 

April  10,  1820.  All  the  brethren  went  on  shore  to 
make  one  more  united  effort  to  obtain  permission  to  land 
and  reside  at  Kailua  on  Hawaii,  and  upon  the  other 
islands.  We  found  that  Kaahumanu,  who  yesterday  had 
sailed  in  a  double  canoe  on  a  fishing  expedition,  for  whose 
advice  Liholiho  pretended  to  be  waiting,  had  returned 
unsuccessful.  She  had  been  the  favorite  wife  of  Kame- 
hameha  and  possessed  more  property  and  power  than  any 
other  woman  on  the  islands.  Her  return  was  regarded 
by  the  missionaries  as  a  very  favorable  event.  Keeaumoku 
(Governor  Cox),  a  chief  of  great  influence,  a  brother  of 
Kaahumanu,  who  speaks  English  and  is  considered  as  a 
substantial  friend  of  the  whites,  arrived  from  Oahu  at 
the  very  moment  when  the  important  question  was 
pending. 

April  11,  1820.  Tuesday,  Brother  Bingham  being 
somewhat  exhausted  with  the  long  continued  negotiations 
and  seriously  indisposed.  Brother  Thurston  and  Dr.  Hol- 
man  went  on  shore  to  hear  the  result,  a  result  highly 
creditable  to  the  government  and  satisfactory  to  us  and, 
we  believe,  honorable  to  the  Great  Lord  of  Missions.  Our 
joy  is  mingled,  however,  with  the  painful  thought  of  so 
speedy  a  separation.  The  decision  of  the  government  is 
that  two  of  the  brethren  with  their  wives  and  two  of 
the  native  youths  should  remain  here  and  be  furnished 
at  the  public  expense  with  lodgings,  water  and  fuel  and 
with  fresh  provisions  and  be  allowed  to  commence  their 
appropriate  work  with  the  promise  of  protection  and  that 
the  rest  of  our  number  should  be  allowed  to  proceed  to 
Oahu  and  there  be  accommodated  with  convenient  houses. 
The  king  was  told  that  if  we  did  not  do  them  good  he 
might  send  us  away  from  his  realm.  It  was  the  pleasure 
of  the  king  that  the  doctor  should  remain  with  Thomas 
Hopu  and  William  Tenui.  It  was  easily  agreed  among 
ourselves  that  one  of  the  ordained  missionaries  should 
remain  here  and  maintain  the  standard  of  the  gospel. 


80  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

The  trying  question,  "Which  of  the  two?"  was  decided 
by  ballot  and  Brother  Thurston  was,  to  our  mutual  satis- 
faction, appointed  to  occupy  this  important  post. 

April  12,  1820.  Wednesday.  A  busy,  trying,  joyful 
and  important  day.  Brothers  Thurston  and  Holman  and 
their  wives,  Thomas  Hopu,  and  William  Tenui,  landed 
and  took  up  their  residence  at  Kailua.  The  day  was  spent 
principally  in  preparing  and  removing  their  effects  from 
the  brig,  dividing  out  to  them  such  portions  of  the  com- 
mon stock  as  seemed  desirable  and  necessary  for  their 
immediate  use,  and  in  making  the  best  arrangements  in 
our  power  for  their  comfort  and  usefulness.  As  the  brig 
lay  about  a  mile  from  the  shore  the  boats  were  employed 
all  day  in  transporting  their  baggage  to  the  beach,  several 
of  the  king's  men  removing  them  from  the  beach  to  a 
small  house  formerly  occupied  by  Dr.  Elliot,  now  desig- 
nated for  the  temporary  use  of  the  Mission.  After  tea, 
they  who  had  willingly  determined  to  commence  their 
work  here,  took  leave  of  the  Thaddeus  and  of  most  of  the 
remaining  members  of  the  Mission  family  and  repaired 
to  their  lodging  on  heathen  shores.  They  were  accom- 
panied by  Brother  Bingham  and  Captain  Blanchard  and 
were  commended  to  the  grace  and  protection  of  Him  who 
said:  "Lo,  I  am  with  you  alway!"  and  were  left  to  the 
peculiar  privations  and  enjoyments  of  their  new  and  un- 
tried situation. 

April  13,  1820.  Today  the  brig  Thaddeus  sailed  from 
Kailua  with  the  remaining  passengers  for  Oahu.  Passing 
to  the  leeward  of  the  intervening  islands  of  Maui,  Molokai, 
Lanai,  and  Kahoolawe.  After  a  voyage  of  thirty-six 
hours  the  brig  cast  anchor  in  the  offing  of  Honolulu  on 
the  14th  of  April.  Thus  ended  the  eventful  voyage  of 
18,000  miles  of  the  little  brig,  covering  one  hundred  and 
seventy-five  days.  Brother  Bingham  went  early  on  shore 
to  call  upon  the  authorities  to  inform  them  of  the  per- 
mission to  land,  granted  by  the  king  and  chiefs  at 
Kailua. 

April  15,  1820.     Eenewed  our  researches  on  shore,  but 


Rev.  Hiram  Bingham 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        81 

conld  not  do  much  business  in  consequence  of  the  absence 
of  the  governor.  Delivered  to  Mr.  Marin,  a  Spanish 
settler  and  interpreter,  a  letter  from  Captain  Winship,^ 
which  authorized  him  to  put  us  in  possession  of  Captain 
Winship's  houses  until  he  should  have  further  orders. 
The  king's  vessel,  brig  Neo,  from  Hawaii,  arrived  today 
with  a  messenger  bringing  the  general  orders  of  govern- 
ment with  respect  to  us.  George  P.  Kaumualii,  who  also 
left  the  Thaddeus  at  Hawaii,  arrived  in  the  Neo.  He 
informed  us  that  a  native  who  had  stolen  a  piece  of  calico 
from  the  king,  at  Kailua,  was  there  convicted  and  put 
on  board  the  Neo  in  irons  and  thrown  overboard,  on  her 
passage  hither,  and  drowned.  Death  is  the  penalty  for 
stealing  the  king's  property. 

April  16,  1820.  Sabbath.  Enjoyed  the  privileges  of 
public  worship,  probably  for  the  last  time  on  board  the 
Thaddeus.  Boki  (the  governor)  arrived  in  port  this 
afternoon,  but  we  are  told  that  through  the  influence  of 
strong  drink  he  is  now  unfit  for  business.  This  is  a  stub- 
born foe  with  which  we  shall  be  obliged  to  contend,  far  more 
formidable  than  the  guns  of  the  port  or  all  the  weapons 
of  war  on  the  islands.  And  it  is  a  grief  to  see  that  most 
white  men  who  have  intercourse  with  these  people  are 
in  league  with  this  "enemy  of  all  righteousness." 

April  18,  1820.  This  morning  the  brig  Thaddeus  en- 
tered the  inner  harbor  of  Honolulu  in  safety  and  anchored 
within  a  few  yards  of  the  shore. 

Honolulu,  Oahu,  April  19,  1820.  Having  at  length  suc- 
ceeded in  making  the  necessary  arrangements,  casting 
ourselves  again  on  the  care  of  Divine  Providence  and  put- 
ting ourselves  in  the  power  and  possession  of  pagans  and 
strangers,  on  this  interesting  day  we  disembarked  from 
that  board  which  had  borne  us  in  safety  across  the  mighty 
waters,  and  here  took  up  our  abode  in  this  uncivilized 

3  Captain  Winship  brought  to  Honolulu  the  first  bricks  that  the 
Hawaiians  had  seen,  hence  he  gave  a  new  word  to  the  language — 
pohaku  Winihepa,  * '  Winship  Stones. ' ' 


82  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

heathen  land,  the  scene  of  our  future  labors  and  sufferinga 
and,  probably,  the  resting  place  of  our  bones  when  our 
toils  are  over  and  our  pilgrimage  is  ended.  As  a  speci- 
men of  the  kindness  of  some  of  our  neighbors.  Captain 
Pigot  and  Mr.  Green  (with  their  usual  politeness),  an- 
ticipating our  wants  prepared  for  us  a  supper  in  American 
style,  such  as  we  were  unable  at  present  to  provide  for 
ourselves.  As  soon  as  the  bustle  of  landing  was  over  and 
our  lodgings  in  order,  and  the  cottages  were  comfortably 
fitted  up,  we  erected  an  altar  unto  the  Lord  Our  God 
and,  agreeable  to  a  previous  arrangement  with  our 
brethren  who  landed  a  week  before  at  Hawaii,  presented 
our  united  offerings  of  thanksgiving,  and  praise  to 
Jehovah,  that  He  had  preserved  our  lives,  graciously 
delivered  us  from  the  "perils  in  the  sea,"  given  us  a 
prosperous  passage,  and  ministered  unto  us  so  propitious 
an  entrance  among  the  heathen. 

April  26,  1820.  Perhaps  a  decent  monument  recording 
the  death  of  this  distinguished  heathen  ruler,  Kame- 
hameha  I,  presented  by  the  American  Board  to  his  affec- 
tionate people,  might  do  much  towards  securing  their 
confidence  and  good  will  and  be  highly  gratifying  to  the 
young  king,  both  as  a  specimen  of  art  and  as  a  token 
of  honor  to  his  father  and  to  his  nation. 

May  2,  1820.  Brothers  Wliitney  and  Euggles  sailed  for 
Kauai  with  George  Kaumualii,  the  son  of  the  king  of 
Kauai.     Two  English  whale   ships  have  arrived. 

May  12,  1820  Communication  was  opened  with  mis- 
sionaries of  the  London  Missionary  Society  at  Tahiti. 

May  16,  1820.  Captain  Starbuck  took  the  first  package 
of  thirty  letters  to  the  States. 

May  20,  1820  A  priest  and  his  wife  were  this  after- 
noon led  by  our  door  in  irons,  attended  by  an  armed 
guard  and  a  noisy  crowd,  to  the  home  of  the  governor 
to  be  tried  on  the  charge  of  "praying  a  woman  to  death." 
Mr.  Bingham  and  Captain  Pigot  together  went  down  in 
order  to  witness  the  trial,  but  the  prisoners  whom  they 
found  seated  on  the  ground  at  the  door  of  the  governor's 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        83 

house,  apparently  cheerful  and  unconcerned  as  if  they 
had  intended  no  harm,  were  shortly  sent  away  and  con- 
fined. This  singular,  but  long  established  superstitious 
custom  of  praying  to  death  malefactors,  or  persons  charged 
with  crime,  or  unknown  thieves  when  property  is  lost, 
is  now  contrary  to  law  and  we  understand  the  penalty 
is  death. 

May  23,  1820.  Arrival  of  the  brig  Pedlar,  Captain 
Meek,  bringing  the  first  letters  from  the  Board  and  friends 
in  America.  Favors  have  been  received  from  Captain 
Meek,  Captain  Babcock,  whose  vessels  are  lying  in  the 
harbor,  and  from  Mr,  Hunnewell. 

June  19,  1820.  Today  we  fix  on  a  spot  for  the  erection 
of  our  buildings.  It  is  called  Kawaiahao  and  is  a  pleasant 
situation  on  the  road  that  leads  eastward  to  Waikiki, 
about  a  half  mile  from  this  village,  in  the  midst  of  an 
extensive  plain,  having  the  open  sea  in  front  and  the 
rising  mountains  in  the  rear.  One  of  the  three  houses 
which  Boki  has  engaged  to  build  for  our  accommodation 
has  been  nearly  raised  this  morning.  The  timber,  small 
but  durable,  has  been  cut  for  some  time  and  is  brought 
fifteen  to  twenty  miles  on  the  shoulders  of  the  natives. 

June  28,  1820.  Messrs.  WTiitney  and  Euggles  have  re- 
turned from  the  visit  to  Kauai  and  tell  of  kindness  re- 
ceived, and  of  the  affecting  meeting  of  George  Kaumualii 
with  his  father,  the  king,  who  believed  his  son  had  died 
in  America  but  now  is  alive.  Presents  were  received  by 
the  mission  from  King  Kaumualii  and  wife  and  son, 
mats,  tapas,  hogs,  oranges,  cocoanuts,  and  calabashes.  He 
acknowledged  Liholiho  (Kamehameha  II)  as  his  master, 
and  sent  him  many  presents.  The  interpreter  for 
Kaumualii,  former  king  of  Kauai,  is  an  intelligent 
native,  considerably  advanced  in  years,  has  been  to  America 
and  is  attached  to  the  people,  is  disposed  to  use  his  in- 
fluence in  our  favor,  speaks  English  tolerably  well  and 
will  probably  be  a  good  interpreter  for  a  preacher.  He 
once  dined  in  New  York  with  General  "Washington,  who 
finding  that  he  was  a  native  of  the  Islands  when  Captain 


$4  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Cooke  was  killed,  gave  him  clothes  and  showed  him  much 
kind  attention.  The  condescension  and  generosity  of 
Washington  to  this  unlettered  stranger  is  worthy  to  be 
imitated  by  his  successors  and  by  thousands  who  revere 
his  name. 

July  9,  1820.  Governor  Boki  and  his  wife  Liliha  are 
being  taught  to  read  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bingham. 
Kalanimoku  is  very  friendly  and  wishes  us  to  instruct 
him. 

Sept.  11,  1820  Sabbath.  Mr.  Bingham  held  a  preach- 
ing service  on  the  L'Aigle,  Captain  Starbuck,  who  showed 
great  kindness  to  the  missionaries.  We  have  now  forty 
scholars  in  our  school,  taught  daily,  among  these  are 
George  and  Hannah  Holmes,*  at  whose  home  Sabbath 
services  are  held  and  family  worship  maintained.  Great 
effort  is  made  to  interest  and  hold  the  scholars  together. 

Oct.  11,  1820.  Dr.  Holraan,  one  of  the  first  company 
of  missionaries,  sailed  in  the  brig  Anor,  Captain  Hale, 
for  Kauai  and  America. 

Oct.  25,  1820.  Mr.  Daniel  Chamberlain  fmished  ston- 
ing up  our  well.  The  first  well  that  has  been  dug  suc- 
cessfully in  Honlulu. 

Nov.  1,  1820.  Captain  Allen  of  a  Nantucket  whale- 
ship,  said  to  be  a  Quaker,  called  and  gave  the  mission  pro- 
visions to  the  value  of  sixty  dollars. 

Nov.  5,  1820.  The  Sabbath  is  beginning  to  be  ob- 
served and  quietness  is  noticeable. 

Nov.  26,  1820.  Today  we  received  letters  from  Brother 
and  Sister  Thurston,  dated  from  Lahaina.  The  king 
seems  to  have  commenced  in  earnest  his  removal  from 
Kailua  to  Oahu.  On  the  23nd  of  October  he  returned 
from  an  excursion  to  Kealakekua  to  his  residence  at 
Kailua,  and  Brother  Thurston  soon  commenced  prepara- 

4  The  writer  remembers  these  two  estimable  half-white  people 
who  were  resident  on  the  Ewa  corner  of  King  and  Fort  Streets 
where  now  stands  the  Odd  Fellows'  building  and  whom  he  knew 
when  he  kept  store  on  the  ground  now  occupied  by  the  Metropolitan 
Meat  Market. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        85 

tions  for  proceeding  with  him  to  Maui.  On  the  second 
instant  the  king  and  royal  family  embarked  for  Maui, 
leaving  Brother  Thurston  and  wife  to  follow  when  the 
vessel  should  return.  November  10th  Brother  Thurston 
notes  in  his  journal:  *Tt  is  seven  months  today  since 
we  landed  in  this  place.  We  have  great  cause  for  grati- 
tude to  God  for  His  mercies  since  we  have  been  here. 
Our  health  has  been  pretty  good  most  of  the  time  and 
we  have  been  comfortably  supplied  with  provisions  by  the 
king.  Since  his  departure  we  feel  ourselves  almost  alone. 
Most  of  the  inhabitants  of  Kailua  have  gone  with  him. 
Thomas  Hopu  has  recovered  from  his  illness  in  a  good 
degree.  He,  Mrs.  Thurston,  little  Daniel  Chamberlain, 
and  myself,  with  three  or  four  domestics,  composed  our 
little  assembly  today."  On  the  14th  they  put  their  effects 
on  board  the  brig  Neo  and  in  the  evening  went  on  board 
to  embark  for  Maui,  found  the  little  vessel  stowed  with 
men,  women  and  children  to  the  number  of  475,  besides 
hogs  and  dogs  in  considerable  numbers  which  rendered 
the  passage  somewhat  unpleasant.  In  two  days  they 
reached  Lahaina,  landed  the  next  morning  and  took  their 
lodgings  in  the  house  built  for  Dr.  Holman,  where  they 
will  probably  remain  until  they  embark  for  Honolulu. 
The  illness  of  Thomas  Hopu,  alluded  to,  consisted  princi- 
pally of  a  trouble  in  his  head,  from  which  he  has  not 
been  entirely  free  for  several  years  and  which  has  con- 
siderably injured  one  of  his  ears,  and  often  caused  him 
considerable  pain  and  inconvenience.  After  Dr.  Holman 
left  the  struggling  station  a  native  doctor  attempted  to 
cure  the  disorder  in  Thomas's  head.  He  rolled  up  a  large 
green  leaf,  called  in  this  country  a  ti  leaf,  pointed  one 
end  of  it  into  the  affected  ear  and,  requesting  all  to  be 
perfectly  still,  placed  his  mouth  over  the  other  end,  mut- 
tered a  prayer  to  the  god  of  his  forefathers,  and  breathed 
three  times  into  the  ear,  relying  on  his  faith  to  effect  the 
cure.  We  find  relics  of  superstition  among  these  people 
aside  from  the  ruins  of  heiau  and  idols.  It  must  be  long 
before  all  the  rubbish  can  be  removed. 


86  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Dec.  31,  1820.  This  morning,  after  a  sermon  by 
Brother  Bingham  from  John  iii :  5,  on  being  born  of 
water  and  of  the  spirit,  the  infant  daughter  of  Brother 
and  Sister  Bingham,  Sophia  Mosely,  and  the  infant  son 
of  Brother  and  Sister  Loomis,  were  publicly  and  solemnly 
dedicated  to  Christ  by  baptism  into  the  name  of  the  Holy 
Trinity,  administered  by  Brother  Thurston.  Brother 
Loomis'  babe,  the  first  white  child  born  in  the  Sandwich 
Islands,  they  call  Levi,  the  name  of  the  first  tribe  of  men 
consecrated  to  the  priest's  office.  It  was  a  pleasant  and 
solemn  season  and  our  house  was  filled  with  more  than 
ordinary  numbers,  who  were  more  than  usually  attentive, 
and  those  who  were  particularly  interested  as  parents, 
enjoyed  the  peculiar  privilege  of  setting  the  seal  of  God's 
covenant  on  their  beloved  offspring  in  this  public  dedica- 
tion. 

Jan.  1,  1821.  The  king  purchased  Cleopatra's  Barge 
for  8,000  pickles  of  sandalwood,  valued  at  Ten  ($10.00) 
Dollars  a  pickle,  $80,000?  and  on  January  7th  Mr.  Bing- 
ham preached  on  board  of  Cleopatra's  Barge  with  an  at- 
tendance of  many  of  the  captains  and  seamen  of  the  ves- 
sels in  port. 

Jan.  8,  1821.  All  the  articles  received  from  Boston  are 
truly  acceptable,  and  we  are  particularly  thankful  to  the 
Board  for  remembering  us  as  to  flour.  We  have  had  but 
little  flour  and  some  of  the  families  have  very  much  felt 
the  need  of  the  bread  to  which  they  had  been  accustomed, 
and  for  which  they  could  find  no  substitute,  though  others 
in  the  family  are  satisfied  with  the  taro  as  a  substitute, 
generally. 

We  have  planted  about  a  quarter  of  an  acre  of  corn 
for  an  experiment.  It  came  up  well  and  a  worm  similar 
to  that  which  sometimes  cuts  off  the  young  blades  of 
corn  in  America,  has  destroyed  about  half  of  it  and  a 
smaller  worn  is  now  feeding  upon  the  larger  leaves  of 
the  remainder.  Our  garden  vegetables  have  a  similar 
fate.  Taro,  potatoes,  sugar  cane,  and  bananas  seem  to 
be  but  little  injured  by  any  insect  or  reptile. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        87 

Jan.  10,  1821.  Yesterday  and  today  Captain  Turner 
landed  the  frame  and  boards  of  our  house,^  sent  from 
Boston,  for  the  freight  of  which  the  owners  make  no 
charge,  while  they  generously  confer  on  us  a  most  im- 
portant temporal  favor.  To  fit  up  a  room  for  a  school 
and  public  worship,  with  comfortable  seats,  we  bought 
today  of  Captain  Turner  and  Captain  Suter  1000  feet 
of  boards  and  plank  at  Fifty  ($50.00)  Dollars,  the  market 
price.  The  timber,  boards,  etc.,  were  placed  in  Gov.  Boki's 
yard. 

Feb.  1,  1821.  Captain  Daniel  Chamberlain  overhauled 
and  repacked  the  timber  and  boards  for  our  house. 
Captain  Suter  returned  from  Maui  yesterday.  He  in- 
formed the  king  that  he  had  landed  a  house  frame  for  us 
and  placed  it  in  Governor  Boki's  yard.  The  king  replied, 
"maikai." 

Feb.  5,  1821.  Brothers  Bingham  and  Thurston  visited 
the  king  again  and  found  him  awake,  cheerful  and  friendly, 
and  ready  to  return  their  aloha,  or  salutation.  They 
thanked  him  for  former  kindnesses  and  told  him  as  our 
good  friends  in  America  had  been  so  kind  as  to  send  us 
a  house  frame,  they  wished  his  approbation  to  set  it  up. 
To  this  he  gave  a  decided  negative,  pleading  the  example 
of  his  father  who,  he  said,  would  not  permit  any  foreigner 
to  build  a  house  on  his  islands,  except  for  him.  This 
was  taken  as  decisive.  We  had  been  told  that  it  was 
taboo,  so  that  we  should  not  be  allowed  to  build  without 
an  effort.  Soon  after  Brother  Bingham  appealed  to  his 
compassion,  saying  that  our  wives  had  been  accustomed 
to  having  good  floors  to  live  on  and  we  feared  that  if 
they  were  obliged  to  sit,  and  work,  and  sleep  on  the 
damp  ground  they  might  be  sick  and  die,  especially  as 
the  seasons  were  sometimes  wet,  and  our  present  houses 

5  This  House,  the  oldest  building  standing  in  Honolulu  today, 
January  — ,  1917,  and  known  as  The  Old  Mission  House,  is  on  King 
street,  a  few  hundred  feet  eastward  of  Kawaiahao  Church,  and  ia 
an  object  of  much  interest  to  residents  and  visitors  alike. — Editor. 


88  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

would  not  last  long  and  ventured  to  propose,  again,  to 
set  up  the  new  house.  The  king  replied,  'Tianahana"  (do 
it).  But  he  added,  "When  you  go  away,  take  everything 
with  you." 

March  16,  1S21.  Excursion  to  Koolau.  This  morning 
Brothers  Thurston  and  Bingham,  with  the  children  of 
the  family  and  others,  members  of  the  school,  set  off  on 
a  walk  to  visit  the  district  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
island.  Eeached  the  precipice  at  the  distance  of  seven 
or  eight  miles  in  the  period  of  three  hours,  enjoying  the 
prospect.  The  descent  of  the  precipice  is  by  a  very  ir- 
regular and  rugged  path,  winding  at  first  by  a  gentle 
slope  along  the  side  on  the  impending  rocks,  and  then 
by  steeper  effects  where  the  traveller  must  cling  with  his 
hands  and  creep  from  crag  to  crag,  a  distance  of  150 
to  200  feet  ascending  and  descending,  and  then  passing 
off  in  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees  along  that  part  of  the 
mountain,  which  projects  more  into  the  valley  than 
where  you  first  arrive  at  the  precipice.  Down  this  steep 
our  little  company  descended  where  it  would  be  impos- 
sible for  any  domestic  animal  to  ascend  without  the  aid 
of  human  hands.  Formerly  the  traveller  descended  and 
ascended  by  ropes  at  another  perpendicular  part  of  the 
rock,  before  this  singular  path  was  discovered.  Having 
walked  about  a  mile  into  the  valley  of  Koolau,  secluded 
as  it  is  by  mountains  from  the  rest  of  the  island,  which 
is  itself  secluded  from  the  rest  of  the  world,  joined  by 
a  number  of  the  natives  of  the  valley,  our  adventurers 
sat  down  under  a  shady  tree  upon  a  little  hill.  Three 
of  our  pupils  read  and  interpreted  to  the  listening  natives 
the  first  of  Mrs.  Barbauld's  hymns  in  prose.  After  sing- 
ing one  of  the  songs  of  Zion  in  this  strange  land  and 
a  prayer  being  made  to  the  promised  instructor  of  the 
heathen,  Brother  Bingham  preached  a  sermon  to  this 
little  group  of  thirty  or  forty  souls,  the  first,  doubtless, 
ever  heard  in  this  valley.  Honolii  interpreted  and  closed 
the  interview  by  a  prayer  in  the  language  of  the  country. 
The  design  of  the  discourse  was  to  make  known  some  of 


A  Primitive  Grass  House,  with  a  modern  company  of  Hawaiians 
near  the  door 


The  First  Framed  House  of  HonUihi,  which  was  landed  from 
Boston,  Jan.  lo,  1821,  and  which  stands  on  the  west  side  of 
King  Street 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        89 

the  first  truths  respecting  the  character  and  Tvorks  of 
the  Creator  and  Eedeemer  of  the  world.  At  2  o'clock 
P.  M.  our  company,  consisting  of  more  than  twenty, 
began  to  retrace  their  steps  and  at  3  o'clock  regained  the 
height  of  the  precipice  in  safety,  but  with  much  toil  and 
sweat,  and  here  joined  in  thanksgiving  to  our  preserver. 
Then,  proceeding  a  little  further  to  the  place  where  the 
four  stones  be  that  are  called  gods,  sat  down  upon  the 
grass  to  a  comfortable  meal  provided  by  Hannah  Holmes, 
lifting  up  a  prayer  for  blessing  and  returning  thanks  to 
Jehovah. 

April  28,  1821.  Today  all  the  brethren  have  been  en- 
gaged in  digging  ■'.he  cellar  for  our  new  house  and  in 
the  digging  we  discovered  the  skeleton  of  a  human  being. 
For  want  of  stone  we  are  building  the  walls  of  mud  and 
straw,  which  we  think  will  answer  very  well.  The  cellar 
is  now  completed  and  it  will  be  a  valuable  store  room. 

May  Jf.,  1821.  Captain  Chamberlain  procured  of  Cap- 
tain Brown  1000  feet  of  boards  to  enable  us  to  finish  our 
house.     The  market  price  is  fifty  dollars  a  thousand. 

To  explain  the  following  passage  from  the  Mission 
Journal  of  date  July  30,  1821,  we  add  the  information 
that  King  Liholiho  with  Governor  Boki  and  others  left 
Honolulu  professedly  for  Ewa,  but  the  king  refusing  to 
land  at  Ewa  ordered  that  the  boat  be  headed  for  Kauai, 
and,  after  a  dangerous  voyage,  landed  the  next  day  at 
Waimea,  Kauai.  Messrs.  Bingham  and  Euggles  had  pre- 
ceded the  king  to  Kauai  in  the  ship  Tartar. 

July  30,  1821.  Received  a  letter  from  Brother  Bing- 
ham by  the  Tartar,  which  arrived  today,  dated  July  25th. 
After  mentioning  the  singular  manner  in  which  Liholiho 
left  Oahu  and  his  arrival  at  Kauai,  with  some  other 
events,  he  writes:  "You  will  be  surprised  if  I  tell  you 
that  last  evening  Kaumualii  (the  king  of  Kauai)  in  a 
very  formal  manner  and,  in  the  presence  of  a  number 
of  chiefs,  of  Mr.  Jones,  the  Consul,  of  Captain  Masters, 
and  others,  gave  up  to  Liholiho  his  Island,  his  vessels, 
arms,  ammunition,  men,  etc.,  with  full  liberty  to  place 


90  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

over  them  whom  he  pleased,  stating  also  that  he  had 
formerly  made  a  treaty  with  his  father  Kamehameha 
acknowledging  him  to  be  his  superior.  Naihe,  a  chief  of 
Hawaii,  made  a  short  speech  confirming  what  had  been 
said  respecting  the  treaty.  But  you  will  be  gratified,  aa 
well  as  surprised,  to  hear  that  Liholiho,  after  a  profound 
silence  for  some  minutes,  replied :  *I  did  not  come  to 
take  your  Island.  I  do  not  wish  to  place  any  person  over 
it,  nor  to  take  anything  from  you,  but  I  wish  you  to 
keep  your  Island  just  as  you  have  had  it  before.'  This 
was  followed  by  a  general  shout  and  the  kings  smiled 
together  in  this  bloodless  ratification  of  a  former  treaty 
of  peace."  For  some  time  past  considerable  has  been 
said  respecting  the  probability  of  a  war  between  these 
two  kings,  but  we  are  happy  to  learn  that  amity  subsists 
between  them  and  we  hope  it  may  continue." 

August  9,  1821.  The  men  engaged  to  build  a  house  for 
the  worship  of  God  commenced  putting  up  the  frame 
today.  It  is  to  be  fifty-four  feet  by  twenty-one  or  twenty- 
two.  The  timber  is  not  quite  as  good  as  we  expected,  but 
it  will  form  a  convenient  place  for  public  worship  on  the 
Sabbath ;  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  it  will  make  a  favorable  im- 
pression on  the  minds  of  the  people  and  induce  more 
of  them  to  attend  our  meetings  and  excite  a  more  general 
inquiry  respecting  the  religion  of  Jesus. 

August  10,  1821.  Commenced  building  our  cook  house 
of  stone  and  mud,  ten  feet  square,  with  an  oven  of  brick 
in  one  side  which  will  be  an  important  addition  to  our 
cooking  facilities,  though  there  is  a  small  oven  attached 
to  the  stove. 

January  7,  1822.     First  monthly  concert  of  the  year. 

6  When  some  weeks  later  King  Liholiho  (Kamehameha  II)  re- 
turned to  Honolulu  he  brought  with  him  King  Kaumualii  of  Kauai 
who  soon  after  became  the  husband  of  Kaahumanu,  formerly  the 
favorite  queen  of  Kamehameha  I,  and  thus  the  alliance  between  the 
two  parts  of  the  group  was  cemented.  Kaumualii  died  in  Hono- 
lulu in  May,  1824. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        91 

A  day  of  spiritual  interest.  Commenced  the  first  printing 
ever  done  in  the  Sandwich  Islands,  the  operators  of  the 
printing  press  having  fitted  up  for  the  purpose  one  of 
the  thatched  houses  built  for  us  by  the  government.  Gov- 
ernor Cox  (Keeaumuku,  Governor  of  Maui),  who  seems 
to  take  as  friendly  an  interest  in  our  work  as  any  of 
the  chiefs,  was  present  and  assisted  with  his  own  hands 
in  composing  a  line  or  two  and  in  working  off  a  few 
copies  of  the  first  lesson  of  Hawaiian  syllables,  having 
the  composing  stick  put  into  his  hands  and  being  shown 
when  to  take  and  how  to  place  the  types  and  then  to 
pull  the  lever.  Several  gentlemen,  also,  were  present, 
Captain  Masters,  Captain  Henry,  Mr.  Hunnewell  from 
America,  and  Mr.  Butler,  a  resident  of  Maui,  who  also 
took  an  interest  in  this  novel  scene,  while  one  of  the 
highest  chiefs  of  these  islands  aided  in  commencing  the 
printing  of  his  native  tongue.  He,  too,  congratulated 
himself  upon  the  achievement.  But  our  interest  is  in  view 
of  future  and  distant  results,  which  cannot  but  be  happy. 
April  15,  1822.  Today  our  hearts  have  been  cheered 
by  the  arrival  of  the  Sloop  Mermaid,  Captain  Kent,  with 
Messrs.  Tyerman,  Bennet,  and  Ellis,  together  with  nine 
natives  from  the  Society  Islands.  Gladly  do  we  welcome 
these  friends  and  servants  of  the  Lord  Jesus  to  these 
shores,  to  our  house  and  table,  and  to  every  comfort 
which  our  circumstances  will  furnish.  About  nine  o'clock 
in  the  morning  we  met  them  on  the  beach  near  the 
present  dwelling  of  the  king.  We  had  the  pleasure  of 
introducing  them  to  his  Majesty  Liholiho.  After  a  short 
stay  with  him  we  conducted  them  to  the  Mission  House, 
bidding  them  welcome  to  our  humble  lodgings  and  frugal 
fare  while  they  remained  at  these  islands,  which  will 
probably  be  about  three  weeks.  Two  of  the  natives  whom 
they  brought  with  them  are  chiefs  and  have  their  wives 
with  them.  They  have  for  some  time  been  professors 
of  religion  and  are  expecting  on  their  return  to  be  left 
at  the  Marquesas  for  the  purpose  of  commencing  there 
a   missionary   establishment.     May   the   Great  Lord   of 


92  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Missions  go  with  them  and  prosper  their  effort  to  build 
His  kingdom  in  these  now  heathen  islands. 

Extract  prom  the  Journal  of  Mrs.  Sybil  Bingham, 

WHEN   THE   TAHITIAN   DEPUTATION   ViSITED   HAWAII 

Four  families  united  in  one,  all  having  children,  all 
having  infants,  with  eighteen  or  twenty  native  children 
divided  among  them,  two  native  youths,  Thomas  and 
Honolii,  one  young  man,  Mr.  Harward,  from  New  Eng- 
land, constituted,  at  that  time,  the  Mission  family  at 
the  station.  One  framed  house,  containing  five  rooms, 
fourteen  by  twelve,  above  and  below,  with  some  unfinished 
spacee  not  inclosed  in  rooms,  with  a  store  room  and  eating 
room  in  the  cellar,  was  the  habitation  in  which  the  four 
families  dwelt  and  in  which  they  sought  to  make  comfort- 
able their  truly  welcome  guests. 

Here  we  could  all  have  been  comparatively  comfortable 
had  it  not  been  for  the  burning  sun  of  June  and  July 
beating  upon  the  roof  and  unclapboarded  sides  of  the 
house.  I  would  here  say  we  seldom,  at  any  time  of  the 
year,  suffer  from  the  heat  if  not  exposed  to  the  direct 
rays  of  the  sun.  There  is,  uniformly,  a  breeze  sufficient 
to  render  the  air  agreeable.  But  the  house  is  so  thin, 
and  the  exclusion  from  the  air  such,  that  the  heat  was 
very  uncomfortable  and  it  was  favorable  for  us  that  our 
engagements  called  us  out  most  of  the  day.  But  our 
health  was  preserved  in  good  measure  and  our  minds 
rendered  comfortable  and  happy.  Some  plans  of  use- 
fulness were  devised  and,  I  trust,  through  Grace  assisting, 
some  feeble  praises  were  offered  to  our  Divine  Benefactor 
for  his  unfailing  mercies.  But  ways  and  means  must  be 
devised  and  labor  done  that  so  many  might  be  fed  each 
day  with  food  convenient  for  them.  On  our  return  from 
Kauai  Mrs.  Loomis  superintended  the  domestic  concerns, 
though  hardly  able  to  keep  about  from  the  great  exertion 
she  had  made,  but  more  particularly  exhausted  in  con- 
sequence of  a  walk  several  miles  into  the  country  and 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1820-1822        93 

without  rest  on  her  return.  Mrs.  Chamberlain,  having 
a  care  of  the  washing  and  ironing,  with  the  daily  charge 
of  the  visiting  gentlemen,  her  husband,  and  one  or  two 
of  the  children  being  ill,  and  located  up  stairs,  felt  it 
difficult  to  have  the  care  of  the  cellar  kitchen.  I  was 
exceedingly  wearied  out  by  the  peculiar  hardships  of  my 
passage  up,  after  my  labor  at  Kauai,  and  hardly  fit  to 
undertake  business  to  which  I  was  unaccustomed.  In 
two  or  three  days  Mrs.  Loomis  gave  up  and  took  her  bed. 
Mrs.  Chamberlain  felt  it  her  duty,  rather  than  mine,  to 
take  the  place  below.  She  kept  it  ten  or  twelve  days, 
when  Mr.  Chamberlain  had  a  most  violent  attack  of 
rheumatism  and  required  her  whole  attention.  Mrs. 
Thurston  had  commenced  a  new  term  in  my  school,  com- 
mitted to  her  care  when  I  left  it  for  Kauai,  and  considered 
it  desirable  that  she  should  finish  the  quarter.  There  was 
no  alternative,  my  duty  was  plain.  I  went  below,  stood 
at  the  helm  and,  except  a  few  of  the  first  days  of  my 
labor,  had  the  care  of  seeing  that  fifty  were  fed  three 
times  a  day.  The  morning  I  commenced  Mr.  Whitney, 
with  his  family,  came  up  from  Kauai,  making  the  fifth 
family  in  our  household.  You  will  be  ready  to  say,  if 
there  be  a  spot  for  them,  they  have  come  at  the  right 
moment.  But  being  in  a  new  place  with  two  children, 
who  both  cried  all  the  time,  I  never  looked  for  Mrs. 
Whitney  out  of  the  chamber.  I  stood  it  thirteen  days  and 
hoped  to  have  persevered,  but  the  fears  of  my  kind  husband 
were  aroused,  he  saw  that  change  must  be  made  for  the 
school,  if  but  for  a  little  while.  Mr.  Chamberlain  and 
Mr.  Loomis  were  both  too  ill  to  leave  their  room.  I 
went  into  the  school,  Mrs.  Thurston  took  the  post,  stood 
it  five  days  and  said  some  other  way  must  be  devised. 
Mrs.  Loomis,  too,  seriously  needed  a  nurse.  Mr.  Harward 
was  then  prevailed  upon  to  try  the  kitchen  a  month.  Dur- 
ing this  month  God  was  pleased  graciously  to  restore 
prostrated  health  and  strength  in  a  good  degree,  so  that 
less  difficulty  was  found  in  managing  after  that.  As  for 
things  to  put  on  the  table  we  sometimes  had  beef,  pork, 


94  THE  PILGRHVIS  OF  HAWAII 

fish,  potatoes,  butter,  cheese,  flour,  sugar  and,  sometimes, 
we  were  destitute  of  all  of  them  and  of  the  most  of  them 
at  a  time,  but  whatever  might  have  been  the  fare,  a  by- 
stander would  have  pronounced  it  generally  a  cheerful 
meal.  Though  we  sometimes  wrought  hard  and  fared 
coarsely,  yet  God  was  pleased  to  allow  us  daily  the  hope 
that  we  were  strengthening  each  other's  hands  in  holding 
up  the  standard  which,  in  His  kind  providence,  had  been 
erected  in  this  distant  land.  To  make  the  picture  true 
very  many  bright,  pleasant  spots  should  be  put  in,  but 
my  pages  are  lengthening  and  I  will  only  add  now  that, 
notwithstanding  all  these  things,  those  few  months  were 
a  very  interesting  part  of  our  missionary  life,  and  a 
period,  I  think,  which  will  long  be  remembered  with 
gratitude. 


XIII 

JOURNAL  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828 

7|  /t'^^  9,  1822.  Kaumualii  and  Kaahumanu  having 
I  ft  expressed  a  wish  that  Auna  stnd  Mr.  Ellis 
might  remain  here  as  teachers  the  Deputation 
laid  the  subject  before  us  and  very  particularly  consulted 
our  views  respecting  it,  proposing  to  locate  Mr.  Ellis 
here  to  enter  into  our  labors  to  assist,  particularly,  in  the 
acquisition  of  the  language  and  in  the  translation  of  the 
scriptures.  We  assembled  in  the  sitting  room  and  en- 
gaged in  special  prayer  for  special  direction  in  this  new, 
unexpected,  but  deeply  interesting  business.  What  could 
we  do  ?  The  thing  had  not  been  sought  by  us  or  by  them. 
We  had,  indeed,  thought  that  such  a  thing  might  be 
desirable,  but  did  not  suppose  it  would  be  practical  and 
had  not  ventured  to  drop  a  single  hint  of  that  nature, 
not  even  among  ourselves. 

May  IJt,  1822.  Messrs.  Tyerman,  Ellis,  and  Bennet  of 
the  Deputation,  with  Mr.  Bingham,  started  on  a  tour  of 
Oahu  going  by  boat  to  Pearl  Harbor  and  thence  walking 
to  Waialua  and  through  Koolau  to  Kaneohe  and,  climbing 
"The  Pali,"  returned  dowTi  Nuuanu  Valley  to  Honolulu. 
August  2,  1822.  The  king,  with  his  favorites  within 
the  family,  are  engaged  to  receive  instruction  in  reading 
and  writing.  He  requested  that  one  hundred  Hawaiian 
spelling  books  might  be  immediately  made  ready  to  put 
into  the  hands  of  his  people,  assuring  us  also  that  when 
his  debts  should  be  paid  all  his  people  should  be  permitted 
to  learn.  This  we  regard  as  a  favorable  and  an  im- 
portant crisis  in  the  progress  of  the  mission,  and  the 
books  will  be  furnished. 

95 


96  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

August  Jf.,  1822.  Sabbath.  The  chiefs  and  people  gave 
good  attention  to  the  preached  word.  Mr.  Ellis  preached 
in  the  morning  and  afternoon.  Mr.  Bingham  assisted  in 
giving  out  the  hymns  that  had  been  composed  by  Mr.  Ellis 
in  the  Hawaiian  language  and,  for  the  first  time  in  public, 
offered  one  of  the  prayers  in  the  same  language. 

August  5,  1822.  The  king's  dwelling  house,  which 
stands  crowded  in  between  the  fort  and  the  harbor,  be- 
came emphatically  a  school  house.  The  king  himself,  his 
wives  and  favorites,  engaging  in  good  earnest  in  the  em- 
ployment of  learning  to  read  and  write.  Equally  diligent 
is  Governor  Cox  or  Keeaumoku  and  his  family  at  his 
own  home,  besides  sending  ten  pupils  to  the  school  in 
our  yard  at  the  house  first  built  for  us  by  the  government. 

August  6,  1822.  Kaahumanu  and  her  husband  Kau- 
mualii  requested  that  their  people  might  be  furnished 
with  forty  books  and  commenced  learning  to  read  their 
own  language.  It  was  truly  interesting  to  see  this  dig- 
nified and  powerful  heathen  chiefess  drop  her  hand  of 
cards  and  take  a  book  from  a  Christian  to  learn  in  a 
childlike  manner  the  rudiments  of  the  art  of  reading. 
When  she  had  learned  the  letters  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  she  said 
to  her  women  "Ua  loaa  iau,"  "I  have  got  it,"  with  some- 
thing perhaps  of  the  feelings  of  the  mathematician  who 
leaped  from  the  bath  exclaiming  "Eureka,  Eureka,"  when 
he  had  discovered  the  solution  of  a  difficult  problem. 
Naihe,  a  high  chief,  and  Kapiolani  his  wife,  and  Kuhio, 
a  favorite,  are  also  engaged  in  learning  to  read. 

August  1,  1822.  Mr.  Ellis  preached  to  the  people  this 
afternoon.  Just  before  the  service  Mr.  Bingham  went 
with  Kaumualii  to  the  house  of  Kaahumanu  to  induce 
her,  if  possible,  to  attend  meeting  with  her  company. 
She  immediately  ordered  her  covered  wagon  to  be  made 
ready  and,  being  drawn  by  her  servants,  rode  with  several 
others  to  the  chapel,  attended  by  a  large  company  of 
chiefs  and  people.  Then  Kaahumanu  taking  Mr.  Bing- 
ham's arm  and  walking  forward  of  the  group  came  to 
the  house  of  God  as  the  bell  was  ringing  for  the  service. 


f%ii^  ■• 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828        97 

August  9,  1822.  At  several  places  in  Hawaii,  by  the 
express  order  of  Kaahumanu  and  Kaumualii,  the  idols 
which  had  been  laid  aside  and  not  destroyed,  were  brought 
forth  and  burned.  In  the  windward  part  of  Hawaii  one 
hundred  and  two  idols  were  committed  to  the  flames  in 
one  day  by  their  command. 

August  11,  1822.  Sabbath.  A  peculiarly  interesting 
day.  Mr.  Ellis  preached  in  the  morning  to  a  very  full 
house,  the  king  and  queen  being  present.  At  the  opening 
of  the  service  the  marriage  of  Thomas  Hopu  to  Delia,  a 
promising  native  woman  who  has  been  instructed  in  the 
family  of  Mr.  Thurston  and  who  gives  some  evidence  of 
loving  the  gospel,  was  publicly  solemnized,  the  ceremony 
being  conducted  by  Mr.  Bingham  in  the  Hawaiian  lan- 
guage. Agreeable  to  the  practice  in  the  Society  Islands 
the  parties  subscribed  their  names  to  the  following  note 
in  a  blank  book  provided  for  the  purpose,  together  with 
the  witnesses,  as  follows : 

MARRIED  BY  REV.  H.  BINGHAM, 
AUGUST   11,   1832: 


Daniel  Tyerman 
George  Bennet 
James  Kahuhu 


Thomas  Hopu 
Delia 


This  is,  doubtless,  the  first  Christian  marriage  ever 
celebrated  in  these  Islands. 

Translation  of  the  first  recorded  Hawaiian  letters,  from 
King  Liholiho  to  a  chief  of  Huahine,   Society  Islands: 

Hawaii,  August  16,  1822. 
Mahine : 

I  will  now  make  a  communication  to  you.  I  have  com- 
passion towards  you  on  account  of  your  son's  dying.  My 
love  to  you  with  all  the  chiefs  of  all  your  islands. 

I  now  serve  the  God  of  you  and  of  us.  We  ara  now 
learning  to  read  and  write. 


98  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

When  I  shall  become  skilKul  in  learning  I  will  then 
go  and  see  you. 

May  you  be  saved  by  Jesus  Christ. 

Liholiho  Kamehameha  II. 

August  22,  1822.  The  cutter  Mermaid  sailed  with  the 
Deputation  that  came  from  Tahiti,  Messrs.  Ellis,  Tyer- 
man,  and  Bennet  having  made  a  very  opportune,  accept- 
able and  useful  visit  of  four  months.  Before  they  left 
Mr.  Ellis  was  invited  by  Kaumualii  and  other  chiefs  to 
bring  his  family  and  settle  in  these  Islands. 

August  31,  1822.  Three  hundred  persons  are  now 
learning  to  read  on  Maui. 

Sept.  1,  1822.  For  the  last  two  months  from  three  hun- 
dred to  four  hundred  natives  have  attended  the  Sunday 
Chapel  Services. 

Captain  Elias  Grimes,  of  the  brig  Oivy- 
Tiee,  writes  that  the  chiefs  of  the  Northwest  have  heard 
of  the  work  of  the  missionaries  to  Hawaii  and  the  chief 
Skitegates  wishes  to  visit  the  Islands,  and  put  his  family 
under  the  instruction  of  the  missionaries.  How  pathetic 
the  desire  for  the  light  that  had  but  begun  to  send  its 
rays  2000  to  3000  miles  over  the  ocean  waves. 

Nov.  30,  1822.  Captain  Chamberlain  returned  from 
Kauai  having  erected  a  house  for  Mr.  Whitney  and 
family  at  Waimea,  Kauai. 

Feh.  4  1823.  Rev.  Mr.  Ellis,  wife  and  four  children, 
accompanied  by  three  Tahitian  teachers  with  their  wives, 
have  arrived  from  Tahita  by  the  schooner  Active,  Captain 
Charlton,  to  assist  us  in  our  missionary  work.  Mr.  Ellis 
preached  at  once  in  the  Tahitian  language  and  was  affec- 
tionately received  into  fellowship.  Mr.  Ellis  brought 
letters  from  the  Agents  of  the  London  Missionary  Society, 
Messrs.  Tyerman  and  Bennet. 

Feb.  28,  1823.  The  Hawaiian  Clerical  Association  has 
been  founded  by  the  ordained  missionaries.  Mr.  Samuel 
Whitney,  who  left  his  college  course  at  Yale  to  come  with 
the  first  company  to  the  Islands,  was  examined  and  or- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828        99 

dained  to  the  gospel  ministry.  At  about  this  time  Cap- 
tain D.  Chamberlain  left  with  his  wife  and  six  children 
for  return  to  the  United  States,  having  with  them  the 
warmest  sympathy  and  full  concurrence  of  their  associates. 
April  27,  1823.  The  ship  Thames  arrived  this  day 
from  Boston  bringing  the  first  reinforcement  to  the  mis- 
sion, consisting  of  Eev.  Wm.  Eichards  and  wife,  Eev. 
Charles  S.  Stewart  and  wife,  Eev.  A.  Bishop  and  wife, 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  James  Ely,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Goodrich,  Dr. 
and  Mrs.  Blatchley,  and  Mr.  Levi  Chamberlain.     A  col-  '^ 

Cored  woman,  Miss  Betsey  Stockton,  also  accompanied  Mr.  J 
and  Mrs.  Stewart. 

May  18,  1823.  The  missionaries  were  requested  to  con- 
duct prayers  at  the  Palace.  Eev.  Ellis  opened  this 
service.^ 

June  26,  1823.  Messrs.  Ellis,  Bingham,  and  L.  Cham- 
berlain visited  the  high  chief  Kalanimoku  to  review  with 
him  nineteen  or  twenty  hymns  that  had  been  written  in  the 
Hawaiian  language,  principally  by  Mr.  Ellis.  These  met 
Kalanimoku's  hearty  approval.  There  are  on  Oahu  at 
this  time  several  Tahitian  teachers  who  were  accompany- 
ing Mr.  Ellis  en  route  to  the  Marquesas,  but  were  landed 
by  the  Captain  at  Honolulu.  One  of  these  valuable 
Tahitian  teachers  was  Auna. 

Keopuolani,  one  of  the  widows  of  Kamehameha  I, 
mother  of  Liholiho  and  Kauikeaouli,  became  an  earnest 
follower  of  the  teachings  of  the  missionaries  and  was 
baptized  by  Mr.  Ellis  at  Lahaina  in  September  16, 
1823.  She  died  the  same  day  and  was  buried  with 
Christian  services  led  by  Mr.  Ellis  who  preached  from 
the  text:  "Blessed  are  the  dead  that  die  in  the  Lord." 
The  funeral  was   attended  by   a   large   concourse  of 

1  This  service,  commenced  by  Mr.  Ellis,  was  continued  for 
twenty  years,  by  one  or  another  of  the  members  of  the  mission,  lead- 
ing at  a  stated  time  of  day,  and  on  a  designated  day  of  the  week. 


100  THE  PILGRIMS  OP  HAWAII 

people  who  manifested  their  great  love  and  affection 
for  this  distinguished  chiefess,  the  first  baptized  Chris- 
tian of  the  race. 

In  a  letter  from  the  Mission  of  October  23,  1823, 
we  find  the  following: 

Plain,  humble,  comfortable  dwellings,  and  food,  with  the 
means  of  imparting  instruction  most  advantageously  to 
the  nation,  is  all  the  pecuniary  aid  we  expect  or  desire 
from  the  churches  or  the  Board.  These,  together  with 
the  prayers  and  counsels  and  kind  influence  of  our  friends, 
we  need  in  order  to  prosecute  our  work  at  all.  We  need 
them  to  promote  cheerfulness  and  vigor  to  perform  our 
itinerating  tours  on  foot,  to  preach  in  every  district  and 
cottage  and  village,  to  study  and  master  this  rude  lan- 
guage, to  translate  and  publish  the  Scriptures,  to  perform 
no  small  share  of  domestic  labor  and,  at  the  same  time, 
to  teach  150,000  rude  natives  all  the  arts  and  duties  of 
social  and  civilized  life  from  the  a.  b.  c.  of  the  language 
to  the  highest  possible  attainments. 

King  Liholiho,  while  paying  external  respect  to  the 
missionaries  and  making  some  effort  to  learn  to  read, 
led  a  reckless,  dissipated  life.  Once  a  missionary 
visited  him  and  after  much  entreaty  the  king  made 
the  following  promise :  "Five  years  and  I  will  become 
a  good  man."  In  1823  he  conceived  the  idea  of  visit- 
ing England  and,  though  the  chiefs  used  every  effort 
to  dissuade  him,  he  was  immovable.  The  main  reason 
for  his  going  was  love  for  roaming.  An  extract  from 
the  Mission  Journal,  Honolulu,  Nov.  27,  1823,  tells 
of  his  departure,  as  follows: 

This  has  been  an  interesting  day  to  the  people,  one 
which  will  doubtless  be  memorable  in  the  history  of  the 
nation.     About  10  o'clock  A.  M.  the  king  took  an  affec- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      101 

tionate  leave  of  his  people,  leaving  the  wharf  in  the  boats 
of  the  L'Aigle,  and  accompanied  by  his  favorite  wife 
Kamamalu,  Governor  Boki  and  his  wife  Liliha,  Kaihi- 
kukui,  Kekuanaoa,  and  Manuia,  amidst  the  wailing  of  the 
multiude  that  thronged  the  shore,  and  the  roaring  of 
cannon,  embarked  for  London  on  board  the  L'Aigle  which 
was  standing  off  and  on  at  the  mouth  of  the  harbor. 
Two  of  the  five  Avives  which  the  king  had  when  the  Mis- 
sion arrived  he  has  put  away,  as  we  suppose,  some  time 
since,  and  two  of  the  three  remaining  he  has  left  behind. 
The  government  of  the  Islands  and  the  public  business  of 
the  king,  he  has  left  in  the  hands  of  Kalanimoku  and 
Kaahumanu,  and  nominated  Kauikeouli,  his  little  brother, 
to  be  his  successor  in  case  he  should  not  return.  Under 
the  steady  management  of  those  to  whom  the  government 
is  left,  we  apprehend  no  embarrassment  to  the  cause  of 
the  mission  in  consequence  of  the  absence  of  the  king 
and  queen  for  though  the  king  has  been  decidedly  a 
patron  to  the  mission,  yet  his  loose  habits  have  never 
ceased  to  have  an  opposite  tendency.  We  cannot  but  hope 
the  effects  of  this  singular  and  unlooked-for  enterprise 
of  the  king  will  be  salutary  on  his  own  mind  and  man- 
ners and  on  the  general  improvement  of  the  nation  and, 
in  some  way,  facilitate  the  work  of  the  Mission.  The 
prospect  of  this  would  have  appeared  to  us,  however,  much 
more  fair  had  Mr.  Ellis  been  allowed  to  accompany  the 
king  as  an  interpreter  and  guide,  instead  of  the  man 
whom  the  captain  seems  to  have  chosen  in  his  stead. 

Jan.  1  1824-.  We  are  happy  to  notice  that  Kaikioeva 
sent  back  to  us  today  from  Lahaina  Mr.  Whitney's  trunk 
and  most  of  its  contents,  which  had  been  stolen  on  the 
28th  of  November.  The  young  prince,  Kauikeouli, 
caused  his  kahu,  his  chief  steward,  to  be  removed  and 
discarded  because  he  encouraged  stealing,  lest,  as  he  said, 
he  should  himself  be  chargeable  with  that  fault.  Opiia, 
who  was  one  of  the  wives  of  the  late  Karnehameha,  as 
she  sat  at  tea  with  the  family  some  days  since,  said  she 
had  in  her  possession  a  large  silver  spoon  with  the  initials 


102  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

of  Mrs.  Bingham's  name,  which  she  had  deciphered  on 
the  handle.  It  had  been  stolen  from  Mrs.  Bingham 
nearly  two  years  ago.  Opiia  said  she  received  it  from 
one  of  her  women  who  had  it  from  a"  boy.  She  sent  im- 
mediately for  it  and  very  cheerfully  restored  it. 

Jan.  12,  182Jf.  The  brethren  and  sisters,  Messrs. 
Euggles  and  Goodrich  and  their  wives,  who  were  as- 
signed to  the  station  at  Hilo  were  desirous  to  proceed  and 
no  one  would  be  responsible  for  their  detention  provided 
a  conveyance  could  be  obtained.  A  meeting  was  called 
to  consider  the  expediency  of  chartering  a  small  schooner, 
under  the  command  of  Mr.  Hunnewell,  which,  it  was  soon 
ascertained,  might  be  obtained  for  the  purpose  of  trans- 
porting the  detachment,  with  their  effects,  for  one  hun- 
dred dollars.  Before  noon  it  was  unanimously  resolved 
to  charter  the  schooner  and  make  immediate  preparations 
for  their  embarkation  for  Hilo. 

April  15,  182Jf..  A  letter  has  been  received  by  the 
brethren  from  Messrs.  Thurston,  Bishop,  and  Ely,  from 
Kailua  giving  the  pleasing  intelligence  that  Kamakau,  an 
active  chief  at  Kaawaloa,  had  applied  to  them  for  Chris- 
tian baptism  and  had  given  them  satisfactory  evidence 
of  a  radical,  saving  change  of  heart,  which,  in  their  view, 
rendered  it  suitable,  with  our  consent,  to  propoimd  him 
for  admission  to  the  church.  Kapiolani,  also,  they  repre- 
sent as  in  a  very  interesting  state  of  mind,  but  does  not 
offer  herself  as  a  candidate  for  baptism  because,  as  she 
says,  she  is  too  wicked  yet,  but  hopes  to  be  better  by 
and  by. 

Extract  from  a  letter  dated  Hilo,  Dec.  17,  1824- 

Friday.  This  morning  we  heard  that  Kapiolani  was 
on  her  way  to  visit  the  volcano  and  spend  the  Sabbath 
there.  "We  thought  it  expedient  that  one  of  us  should 
go  up  there  and  spend  the  Sabbath  with  her.  Mr. 
Euggles  being  destitute  of  shoes  it  was  thought  advisable 
for  Mr.   Goodrich  to   go.     About  eleven  o'clock   A.   M. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      103 

he  set  out  and  arrived  at  the  volcano  about  three  P.  M. 
on  Saturday.  Not  finding  Kapiolani  there  Mr.  Goodrich 
spent  the  Sabbath  with  a  company  of  her  people,  whom 
she  had  taught  to  regard  the  day  by  resting  from  their 
labors.  They  were  there  building  a  house  for  her  accom- 
modation when  she  should  arrive.  Mr.  Goodrich  preached 
to  the  people  from  Matthew  iv:  17.  Kapiolani  did  not  ar- 
rive until  Tuesday  noon  of  the  twenty-first,  having  too  great 
a  regard  for  the  Sabbath  to  travel  on  that  day.  She  is, 
doubtless,  the  most  zealous  advocate  of  any  of  the  chiefs 
for  the  spread  of  the  gospel  among  the  inhabitants  of 
these  islands.  On  arriving  at  the  house  prepared  for  her, 
her  first  request  was  to  have  Mr.  Goodrich  select  a  hymn 
and  lead  in  prayer.  This  was  a  pleasant  and  happy  sea- 
son. The  next  day,  Wednesday,  Dec.  22,  after  attending 
family  worship  and  breakfast,  Kapiolani  and  attendants, 
about  fifty  in  all,  accompanied  by  Mr.  Goodrich,  began  to 
descend  into  the  crater.  The  descent,  about  four  hundred 
feet,  is  quite  steep,  then  for  a  considerable  distance  it  is 
more  gradual.  Kapiolani  and  most  of  her  company  de- 
scended to  the  ledge,  which  is  from  a  few  feet  to  a  mile 
wide  and  extends  nearly  around  the  crater  about  five 
hundred  feet  from  the  top.  Below  the  ledge  is  a  descent 
of  three  hundred  or  four  hundred  feet,  still  more  difficult 
in  consequence  of  so  many  chasms  in  the  lava  which,  in 
many  places,  is  broken  off  and  fallen  down.  TJpon  the 
brink  of  the  ledge,  above  mentioned,  the  whole  party  sat 
down  and  Kapiolani  addressed  them,  saying :  "Jehovah 
is  my  God  he  kindled  these  fires,  I  fear  not  Pele."  She 
then  ate  some  of  the  ohelo  berries,  which  were  considered 
sacred  to  the  goddess  Pele  and  tabu  to  women.  Then, 
at  her  request,  they  united  in  singing  and  one  of  her 
attendants  led  in  prayer. 

We  return  to  Extracts  from  the  Missionary  Journal, 
Honolulu : 

March  9,  1825.    The  whale  ship  Almira  arrived  in  the 
roads  this  morning  and  the  report  was  circulated  that  the 


104  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

king  and  queen  were  dead.  Mr.  Bingham  and  Mr. 
Chamberlain  hastened  on  board  to  ascertain,  if  possible, 
whether  the  unwelcome  rumor  was  well  founded  or  not. 
The  letters  of  the  Corresponding  Secretary  in  Boston 
assured  us  of  the  death  of  Queen  Kamamalu  and  papers 
received  from  the  ship  Peru,  in  the  course  of  the  day, 
fully  confirmed  the  distressing  fact  that  both  the  king 
and  queen  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  were  dead.  The  in- 
quiry arises  at  once  what  will  be  the  effect  on  the  nation. 
As  soon  as  it  was  communicated  to  Kalanimoku  he  wrote 
a  note  announcing  it  to  Kaahumanu  and  Opiia  at  Mona 
and  they  returned  him  answer  immediately,  encouraging 
him  to  pray  with  the  heart  to  God  that  He  might  show 
mercy.  At  Kalanimoku's  request  the  chiefs  came  down 
from  Manoa  and  in  a  consultation  concluded  to  send 
letters  forthwith  to  the  chiefs  on  the  other  islands,  ap- 
prizing them  of  the  sorrowful  event,  and  giving  them 
their  official  advice. 

March  10,  1825.  Kalanimoku  and  Kaahumanu  dic- 
tated letters  to  the  chiefs  stating  the  principal  facts, 
charging  them  to  keep  the  people  quiet,  to  direct  their 
prayers  and  thoughts  to  the  God  of  Heaven  and  to  wait 
for  their  orders  to  assemble  in  a  common  council  for 
the  good  of  the  nation.  The  letters  being  copied  in  a 
fair  hand  by  Mr.  Levi  Chamberlain,  Kauikeouli,  and  the 
two  administrators  of  the  government,  who  dictated  them, 
signed  them  with  their  own  hands,  and  Opiia  was  sent 
with  them  to  Maui  and  Hawaii.  At  her  departure  we 
joined  with  them  in  prayers  at  the  house  of  Kalanimoku. 
It  being  thought  desirable  for  Mr.  Chamberlain  to  visit 
stations  at  Lahaina  and  Kailua,  he  sailed  with  Opiia. 

May  6,  1825.  At  sunrise  the  frigate  Blonde,  com- 
manded by  Lord  Byron,  a  cousin  of  the  poet,  and  which 
had  been  some  time  looked  for  with  solicitude,  appeared 
off  Diamond  Head,  having  on  board  the  bodies  of  the 
king  and  queen  and  the  remainder  of  the  party  that 
sailed  in  the  L'Aigle.  Four  of  the  number  have  been 
cut  off  by  death.     Kapihee,  who  was  called  in  England 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      105 

the  Admiral,  died  at  Valparaiso  on  their  return.  The 
Blonde  came  to  anchor  in  the  roads  about  nine  o'clock 
and  fired  a  salute  of  fourteen  guns,  and  was  answered 
by  the  same  number  from  the  fort  and  battery.  About 
eleven  o'clock  Governor  Boki  and  his  party  landed  at  the 
king's  wharf.  The  chiefs  had  assembled  at  Kaahumanu's 
house  to  receive  them.  As  they  stepped  from  the  boat, 
Hinau,  the  commander  of  the  fort,  dressed  in  uniform, 
took  the  hand  of  Boki  and  one  of  us  the  hand  of  Madame 
Boki.  In  the  meantime  Kaahumanu  and  a  few  others 
advanced  slowly  and  the  two  parties  approached  within 
two  or  three  yards  of  each  other  and  as  their  eyes  met 
they  stopped  and  lifted  up  their  voices  and  wept.  The 
scene  was  to  us  exceedingly  affecting.  Governor  Boki 
stood  and,  with  strong  emotion,  raised  his  hands  and  eyes 
toward  heaven  and  wept  with  a  loud  voice.  Eemaining 
at  a  little  distance  for  some  minutes,  while  floods  of  tears 
rolled  down  their  faces,  the  parties  met  and  embraced 
each  other  in  the  warmest  manner,  while  the  guns  of 
the  fort  made  them  welcome,  then  proceeded  slowly  to- 
ward ^ne  house,  interrupted  at  every  step  by  friends  suc- 
cessively saluting  those  whom  they  rejoice  to  see  safely 
returned,  while  the  sad  events  of  their  tour  seemed  to 
overwhelm  them  all  with  grief.  They  clasped  each  other 
in  their  arms,  hung  on  each  other's  necks,  touched  noses 
and  kissed  each  other  until  they  were  nearly  exhausted. 
Scarcely  a  word  was  exchanged  between  them  for  half 
an  hour.  After  this  burst  of  feeling  was  over  the  principal 
facts  that  had  occurred  during  the  separation  were  briefly 
touched  upon  and  when  they  had  spent  nearly  a  half 
hour  about  the  doors  and  in  the  rooms  of  Kaahumanu's 
house,  they  retired  to  the  chapel  to  present  their  offerings 
to  the  Lord.  Governor  Boki  met  his  brother  Kalanimoku 
at  his  own  house,  who  received  him  cordially  without 
noise  and  accompanied  him  to  the  church,  which  was  filled 
to  overflowing.  A  hymn  was  sung,  an  appropriate  pas- 
sage of  Scripture  was  read  and  a  prayer  offered.  Gov- 
ernor Boki,  by   request,   m.ade   some  remarks  and   very 


106  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

distinctly  recommended  the  religion  of  the  Bible  and 
manifested  a  serious  desire  to  observe  it  himself.  The 
interesting  exercise  was  closed  with  prayer.  Dr.  Davis, 
the  surgeon  of  the  Blonde,  who  had  been  sent  by  Lord 
Byron  to  see  Kalanimoku,  who  is  ill,  called  very  kindly 
on  the  family  and  by  request  prescribed  for  the  case  of 
Mr.  Bingham's  child,  who  is  quite  low.  In  the  afternoon, 
by  request  of  Kalanimoku  and  Boki,  Mr.  Bingham  ad- 
dressed a  note  to  Lord  Byron  to  assure  him  of  their  kind 
regards  and  to  request  him  to  favor  them  with  his  com- 
pany on  shore  tomorrow,  as  the  present  was  a  time  of 
great  sympathy  among  their  friends.  Had  a  pleasant 
interview  with  Boki  in  the  evening.  He  says  the  King 
of  England,  George  IV,  with  whom  he  was  honored  with 
a  personal  interview,  told  him  to  take  good  care  of  the 
missionaries  for  they  were  sent  to  teach  the  nation  the 
good  word  of  God  and  to  enlighten  them  and  do  them 
good. 

May  1,  1825.  Agreeable  to  arrangement  Lord  Byron 
and  the  scientific  gentleman  of  the  frigate  Blonde  landed 
in  the  early  part  of  the  day  under  a  salute  and  were  pre- 
sented at  court.  They  were  introduced  by  Boki  and  Mr. 
Charlton  to  the  Regent  Kalanimoku,  to  the  young  King 
Kauikeouli,  to  the  young  princess,  and  to  the  old  Queen 
Kaahumanu,  and  the  other  chiefs,  all  assembled  and  ar- 
ranged in  order  in  a  neatly  thatched  hall  about  fifty  feet 
in  length.  At  the  head  sat  the  young  king  and  his 
sister  upon  a  sofa,  with  several  superb  kahilis  poised 
near  them.  On  their  right  down  the  side  of  the  hall  were 
seated  the  high  chief  women  and  on  the  left  in  like 
manner  the  chief  men  of  the  nation.  A  little  in  front 
of  the  center  of  this  line  sat  Kalanimoku  with  his  in- 
terpreters and  Christian  teachers.  All  were  dressed  in 
European  fashion.  As  Lord  Byron,  and  the  officers  of 
the  Blonde,  including  several  young  noblemen,  the  scien- 
tific gentleman  and  the  chaplain  were  introduced,  those 
who  were  assembled  to  receive  them  all  rose  respectfully, 
except  the  young  King  and  the  young  Princess.     When 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      107 

they  were  made  acquainted  with  the  different  individuals. 
Lord  Byron  delivered  the  presents  from  the  King  of 
England,  a  gold  watch,  and  a  likeness  in  wax  of  Liholiho 
to  Kalanimoku,  a  silver  tea  pot  to  Kaahumanu,  and  a 
full  suit  of  royal  Windsor  uniform,  with  hat  and  sword, 
to  Kauikeouli,  which  were  delivered  to  him  by  the  hands 
of  two  young  noblemen.  They  wete  much  gratified  with 
these  tokens  of  respect  and  kindness  from  King  George 
IV,  and  expressed  their  thanks.  Kalanimoku  said  to 
Lord  Byron,  "I  am  made  very  happy  by  your  coming  to 
this  country,  and  by  your  kindness  toward  us."  Lord 
Byron  said  he  was  very  happy  to  have  this  service  to 
perform  for  his  King  and  country,  and  that  he  desired 
only  to  show  them  kindness.  Kalanimoku  proposed,  if 
agreeable  to  Lord  Byron,  they  would  now  have  prayers 
together,  to  which  he  cheerfully  assented  and  one  of  the 
missionaries  being  called  upon  offered  a  prayer  suited 
to  the  occasion,  partly  in  English  and  partly  in  the 
Hawaiian  language.  Lord  Byron  spoke  in  respectful  terms 
of  what  had  been  achieved  by  the  Mission,  and  when  he 
had  put  the  royal  uniform  upon  the  young  King  led  him 
to  Kalanimoku  and  Kaahumanu,  expressing  his  sincere 
desire  that  he  might  attend  well  to  the  instructions  of  the 
missionaries  and  become  wise  and  good. 

May  8,  1825.  Lord  Byron  before  leaving  the  islands 
sailed  for  Hilo,  caused  that  bay  to  be  surveyed  and  visited 
and  explored  the  great  volcano  of  Kilauea.  His  uni- 
formly kind  and  honorable  deportment  made  a  deep  and 
favorable  impression  on  the  chiefs  and  people  in  favor 
of  the  Christian  religion. 

June  8,  1825.  Last  Sabbath  at  a  meeting  of  the  church 
and  congregation,  after  the  various  public  services  of  the 
former  part  of  the  day,  ten  persons,  including  several 
chiefs  of  the  first  rank,  made  a  full  declaration  of  their 
desire  to  be  numbered  among  the  disciples  of  Christ. 
Among  these  were  three  sisters,  Kaahumanu,  Kaniau,  and 
Opiia,  honorable  women,  wives  of  the  celebrated  Kame- 
hameha,  the  present  Eegent,  Kalanimoku,  Kapule,  lately 


108  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

the  Queen  of  Kaui,  Kapiolani,  the  interesting  wife  of 
Naihe,  Kealiiahonui,  the  son  of  the  late  King  Kaumualii, 
Laanui,  the  husband  of  Opiia,  Kalu,  the  husband  of 
Kapule,  and  Richard  Kalaalulu,  from  the  Foreign  Mis- 
sion School.  They  are  therefore  propounded  for  entrance 
to  the  church  after  three  or  four  months  further  instruc- 
tion and  trial,  if  they  continue  faithful. 

July  11,  1825.  Kalanimoku  desirous  that  the  new- 
meeting  house  should  be  opened  for  public  religious  wor- 
ship on  the  approaching  Sabbath,  and  having  given  orders 
to  the  carpenters  to  hang  the  doors,  set  in  the  windows, 
and  fit  up  the  seats,  came  up  this  afternoon,  though  still 
feeble  from  the  effects  of  his  recent  illness,  attended  by 
Opiia,  Kekauluohi,  and  a  great  concourse  of  people  to 
view  the  house,  and  give  directions  about  spreading  the 
mats.  With  the  exception  of  Kalanimoku,  the  whole 
company  set  off  after  rushes  and  grass  to  strew  over  the 
house,  previously  to  putting  down  the  mats.  It  was  in- 
teresting to  see  several  of  the  highest  chiefs  in  the  nation 
following  one  after  another  with  burdens  of  grass,  pre- 
senting their  free-will  offerings  of  labor  to  forward  the 
work.  All  united  cheerfully  and  seemed  to  experience 
a  high  degree  of  satisfaction  in  according  assistance.  The 
house  is  commodious  and  will  accommodate  a  large  audi- 
ence; the  dimensions  within  the  posts  are  seventy  feet  by 
twenty-five;  the  pulpit  is  at  the  north  end,  on  each  side 
of  which  is  a  door,  one  for  the  entrance  of  the  chiefs, 
the  other  for  the  mission  family.  The  building  is  sur- 
rounded by  a  strong,  high  stick  fence,  one  hundred  and 
twenty-five  feet  by  one  hundred  and  fifty-five  and  the 
enclosure  is  to  be  planted  with  bananas,  sugar  cane,  etc. 

Juhj  20,  1825.  Kalanimoku,  with  his  attendants,  form- 
ing considerable  of  a  company,  came  up  to  visit  his  new 
house  situated  contiguous  to  that  of  Mr.  Ellis,  which  he 
has  been  building  in  modern  style  at  considerable  expense 
and  which  is  now  nearly  finished,  and  proposing  to  tarry 
in  it  during  the  night  he  asked  Mr.  Ellis  if  it  would  not 
be  well  to  have  prayers   there.     Mr.    Ellis,   pleased  at 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      109 

having  an  opportunity  of  directing  his  thought  to  the 
true  God,  most  readily  answered  in  the  affirmative  and, 
having  made  known  the  fact  to  the  brethren  at  the  Mis- 
sion House,  invited  their  attendance.  Happy  we  all  were 
to  see  this  highest  chief  in  the  nation  so  ready  to  have 
erected  in  his  new  habitation  an  altar  of  praise  to  that 
God  of  whom  his  fathers  were  ignorant. 

Oct.  21,  1825.  A  most  important  question  was  dis- 
cussed at  the  last  General  Meeting,  namely:  the  letters 
to  be  used  in  writing  this  Hawaiian  language  and  the 
sounds  to  be  represented  by  the  various  letters.  Uni- 
formity of  usage  being  most  desirable.  By  vote  of  the 
Mission  the  number  of  letters  was  fixed  at  twelve, 
namely,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  h,  k,  1,  m,  n,  p,  w,  giving  them  the 
Italian  sound. 
'  Mr.  Bingham  has  begun  a  translation  of  the  Gospel 
of  Matthew  and  it  is  hoped  that  by  Divine  aid  he  may 
be  able  to  complete  the  translation  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment in  the  course  of  a  year,  if  other  labors  do  not 
prevent.  He  has  finished  in  a  manner  the  first  chapter 
today,  having  spent  a  little  time  on  it  almost  daily  for 
the  last  three  weeks,  comparing  the  Latin,  English,  and 
Tahitian  versions  with  the  original  Greek  and  endeavor- 
ing to  produce  from  the  original  a  version  in  the  Hawaiian 
language  as  clear  and  correct  as  the  genius  of  the  lan- 
guage and  our  acquaintance  with  it  will  admit.  A  con- 
siderable number  of  words  must  doubtless  be  introduced 
from  the  Greek  into  the  Havraiian  version  as  there  are 
many  terms  and  many  ideas  for  which  there  is  nothing 
in  this  language  to  answer.  Even  the  common  terms, 
faith,  holiness,  throne,  dominion,  angel,  demoniac,  which 
so  frequently  occur  in  the  New  Testament,  cannot  be 
expressed  with  precision  by  any  terms  in  the  Hawaiian 
language.  The  natives  call  an  angel  either  an  "Akua," 
a  God,  or  a  "Kanaka  Lele,"  flying  man. 


110  THE  PILGRBIS  OF  HAWAII 

Extract  from  letter  hy  Hiram  BingTiam,  William 
Richards,  Elisha  Loomis,  and  Levi  Chamberlain,  from 
Oahu,  March  10,  1826: 

Could  you  see  more  than  twenty  thousand  of  the 
islanders  under  the  influence  of  Christian  instruction  from 
books  in  their  own  language  and  from  the  pulpit,  and 
as  many  hundreds  maintaining  the  duty  of  family  and 
private  devotion  and  many  individuals,  among  whom  are 
the  most  distinguished  persons  in  the  nation,  giving  pleas- 
ing evidence  of  a  radical  change  of  heart  and  of  fitness 
for  the  fellowship  of  the  churches,  you  would  not,  we 
are  persuaded,  for  a  moment,  think  your  operations  here 
had  been  entirely  in  vain,  even  if  nothing  more  were  to 
be  achieved. 

From  A.  Thurston  and  A.  Bishop  to  Secretary  J. 
Evarts,  from  Kailua,  Oct.  23,  1826: 

Soon  after  the  first  appearance  of  a  special  attention 
to  religion  in  this  place  our  congregations  became  over- 
flowing and  great  numbers  were  obliged  to  remain  without 
for  want  of  room  in  our  place  of  worship.  It  soon 
became  apparent  that  another  more  capacious  house  was 
needed.  In  about  five  months  the  ground  was  prepared, 
the  timber  hewn,  and  the  frame  erected.  The  posts, 
fifty-one  on  each  side,  were  firmly  set  into  the  rock  blasted 
out  for  the  purpose  and  an  area  of  stones  was  then  built 
upon  the  site  three  feet  above  the  former  level,  firmly 
enclosing  the  posts  on  every  side.  Early  in  July  the 
people  were  again  called  out  to  thatch  the  building  when 
about  four  thousand  came,  bringing  with  them  the  mate- 
rials. In  little  more  than  a  month  the  thatching  was 
completed  and  by  the  first  of  September  the  house  was 
finished  and  ready  for  use.  Its  whole  length  is  one  hun- 
dred and  eighty  feet,  its  width  seventy-eight  feet.  It  is 
built  of  the  firmest  and  most  durable  material  that  the 
islands  afford  and  is  pronounced  by  good  judges  to  be 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS  1822-1828      111 

the  largest  and  most  elegant  native  building  ever  erected 
and  will  remain  good  for  twenty  years.  The  floor  is 
overspread  with  a  thick  layer  of  rushes  and  covered  with 
mats.  It  has  a  good  pulpit  painted  and  furnished  with 
cushion  and  hangings.  On  Wednesday,  the  4th  of  Septem- 
ber, several  of  the  missionary  brethren  and  principal  chiefs 
having  previously  arrived  from  Oahu  and  Maui,  the 
dedication  of  our  place  of  worship  to  the  service  of  Al- 
mighty God  was  solemnized.  There  were  supposed  to  be 
not  less  than  six  thousand  persons  present,  including  the 
scholars  of  forty  schools  who,  with  their  teachers,  were 
present  on  the  occasion.  It  was  indeed  a  day  of  jubilee 
with  us  and  such  as  had  never  been  witnessed  before  on 
this  island.  On  the  following  day  the  people  were  again 
assembled  in  the  open  air  in  front  of  Kaahumanu's  dwell- 
ing house  where  they  were  successively  addressed  by  Gov- 
ernor Adams,^  Naihe,  Kapiolani,  Hoapili  wahine  and 
Kaahumanu  on  the  truths  of  Christianity,  the  speakers 
publicly  making  known  their  determination  to  follow  its 
precepts  and  obey  its  sanctions  in  the  government  of  the 
people  and  by  their  own  example  confirming  at  the  same 
time  their  purpose  to  suppress  the  vices  and  superstitions 
that  were  once  so  prevalent  in  the  whole  island. 

The  call  of  the  people  for  the  Scriptures  is  loud  and 
daily  repeated.  They  carefully  collect  and  write  down 
every  text  or  historical  sketch  of  Scriptures  that  they  hear 
from  us  and  receive  it  as  the  word  of  God,  to  which 
they  are  bound  to  render  obedience.  In  the  course  of 
another  year  there  will,  in  all  probability,  be  at  least 
ten  thousand  persons  on  this  island  capable  of  reading 
the  Holy  Scriptures  with  facility  could  they  be  obtained 
to  put  into  their  hands. 

2  Kuakini,  one  of  the  highest  chiefs,  and  one  who  at  one  time 
was  governor  of  the  island  of  Hawaii,  and  at  another  time  governor 
of  Oahu,  was  named  by  foreigners  as  Governor  Adams,  and  is  often 
referred  to  as  Governor  Adams. 


112  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Points  of  Interest  in  the  Mission  Eecoed  op  1825, 
1836,  AND  1827 

The  missionaries  having  gained  much  influence  with 
the  ruling  chiefs,  decrees  were  made  stopping  Hawaiian 
women  from  going  on  board  of  foreign  ships  that  might 
touch  at  the  various  ports  of  the  islands. 

This  aroused  the  rage  of  some  of  the  officers  and  crews 
of  certain  vessels  touching  at  island  ports. 

At  Lahaina,  in  October,  1825,  Mr.  Eichard's  life  was 
threatened  by  a  mob  of  the  crew  of  the  British  whaleship 
Daniel.  His  house  was  attacked,  but  the  mob  was  driven 
away  by  the  natives. 

In  January,  1826,  the  cruising  schooner  Dolphin,  of 
the  United  States  Navy,  arrived  at  Honolulu  and  on  the 
26th  of  February  a  company  of  sailors  entered  the  house 
of  Kalanimoku  and  demanded  the  repeal  of  the  law,  or 
decree,  mentioned  above,  and  being  driven  away  made 
an  attempt  to  kill  Mr.  Bingham,  but  were  finally  scat- 
tered by  the  natives  who  rallied  to  protect  their  mission- 
aries. 

Two  other  attacks  were  made  by  ships'  companies  upon 
Mr.  Richards  at  Lahaina,  in  the  first  of  which,  in  1826, 
Mr.  Eichards  being  absent  his  house  was  invaded  and 
property  destroyed.  In  the  second,  in  the  fall  of  1827, 
cannon  balls  from  the  ship  John  Palmer  were  fired  at 
the  mission  house  by  the  crew,  while  the  captain  was 
detained  at  the  Governor's  house.^ 

In  January,  1827,  the  officers  of  the  American  Board 
published  in  the  papers  of  the  Eastern  States  Mr.  Eich- 
ards' statement  of  the  acts  of  violence  of  the  crew  of 
the  whaleship  Daniel,  Captain  Buckle,  at  Lahaina.  These 
papers  reached  Honolulu  in  the  fall  and  aroused  the 
anger  of  Captain  Buckle  whose  ship  had  touched  at  Hono- 
lulu.    So  great  a  tumult  was  raised  by  the  Captain  and 

8  The  writer,  years  ago,  saw  in  the  cellar  of  the  old  Richards 
house  in  Lahaina  the  cannon  ball  that  had  made  a  round  hole  in 
the  wall  of  the  house  some  years  before. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      113 

his  sympathizers  in  Honolulu  that  Kaahumanu  called 
a  council  of  leading  chiefs  and  summoned  the  mission- 
aries for  an  investigation.  Mr.  Eichards  was  called  from 
Lahaina  to  answer  for  the  offence  of  having  written  to 
Boston  regarding  the  outrages  of  the  ship's  company  of 
the  Daniel.  The  hostile  foreigners  were  invited  to  make 
their  charges  against  the  missionaries.  Their  chief  com- 
plaints were  founded  upon  Mr.  Eichards'  letter  to  Boston. 
When  Mr.  Eichards  appeared  in  person  the  complainants 
hastily  retired.  The  council  decided  that  as  Mr.  Eichards 
had  written  only  the  truth,  he  was  entirely  innocent. 

December  11,  1827.  Mr.  Richards  writes  from 
Honolulu : 

It  appears  to  me  that  the  hand  of  Providence  has  never 
been  more  visible  in  any  of  the  events  that  have  trans- 
pired, since  the  establishment  of  the  mission,  than  in 
the  recent  difficulties.  There  has  never  appeared  so  much 
unanimity  of  feeling  among  the  chiefs,  and  never  so 
strong  attachment  to  us.  The  common  saying  is:  'Tf 
one  of  the  missionaries  must  die,  let  us  all  die  together." 
They  seem  to  be  more  and  more  convinced  that  we  are 
seeking  their  good  and  that  in  this  respect  we  differ  from 
our  enemies.  The  minds  of  the  chiefs  have  been  occu- 
pied in  devising  means  to  put  a  stop  to  the  crying  sins 
of  the  country. 

April  IJ/.,  1828.  Mr.  Eichards  writes  from  his  home 
at  Lahaina :  "We  remained  at  Honolulu  until  January  8th 
when  we  embarked  on  board  the  Missionary  Packet  and 
reached  Lahaina  after  a  quick  passage  of  twenty-six  hours. 
The  evening  we  anchored  was  somewhat  rainy  and  it  was 
too  late  for  the  people  to  call  on  us  that  night,  but  the 
next  morning  as  soon  as  our  doors  were  open,  the  people 
began  to  call  to  express  their  aloha  (love).  The  number 
who  called  before  breakfast  we  estimated  at  one  thousand. 
The  attachment  of  the  people  to  their  teacher  was  never 
more  apparent.    Many  of  them  had  been  made  to  believe 


114  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

that  I  should  either  be  sent  from  the  Islands  or  executed 
here,  and  when  they  actually  saw  that  we  had  returned 
without  injury,  they  were  prepared  to  express  their  joy 
in  the  strongest  manner.  Many  seemed  not  only  to  be- 
lieve, but  to  feel  that  it  was  because  the  Lord  is  on  our 
side.  A  day  of  fasting  and  prayer  on  our  account  was 
observed  the  week  we  left,  and  from  that  time  little 
circles  continued  to  meet  to  pray  for  us  until  our  return. 
You  may  well  suppose,  therefore,  that  the  meeting  was 
an  interesting  one  to  us  all." 

The  missionaries  at  Lahaina  write  later  of  the  in- 
fluence of  the  trial  and  acquittal  of  Mr.  Richards  on 
the  people  of  Lahaina: 

There  never  was,  probably,  any  occurrence  which  so 
much  endeared  the  missionary  to  the  people  or  they  to 
him.  It  seemed  also  to  be  the  commencement  of  a  re- 
newal of  attention  to  religious  concerns.  As  the  fruits 
of  this  attention  we  trust  that  a  good  number  will  at 
no  distant  period  be  united  with  the  church. 

But  the  influence  of  these  occurrences  is  not  confined 
to  Lahaina  or  to  Maui.  The  general  meeting  of  the  chiefs, 
which  took  place  in  consequence  of  the  above  mentioned, 
apparently  untoward  event,  was  one  of  the  most  interest- 
ing councils  which  has  ever  been  held  in  the  Sandwich 
Islands.  The  ostensible  object  for  which  they  were  as- 
sembled was  to  hear  the  complaints  of  Captain  Clark 
against  Hoapili,  and  of  Captain  Buckle  against  Mr. 
Richards.  The  real  object  for  which  they  were  assembled, 
was  to  establish  laws  for  the  nation.  And  this  object  was 
accomplished.  It  was,  doubtless,  hoped  on  the  one  part 
that  every  obstacle  in  the  way  of  crime  would  now  be 
removed  and  everything  like  law  or  "Kapu"  be  banished 
from  the  Islands.  But  this  was  the  very  meeting  at 
which  was  enacted  the  first  laws  that  ever  existed  on  the 
Sandwich  Islands.  In  these  laws  the  chiefs  were,  united, 
and  to  them  the  king  affixed  his  name. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      115 

The  first  law  prohibited  mnrder  on  penalty  of  death. 

The  second  law  prohibited  theft;  penalty,  confinement 
in  irons. 

The  third  law  prohibited  adultery;  penalty,  same  as 
above. 

Viewing  the  subject  in  all  its  bearings,  we  think  that 
scarcely  anything  has  occurred  in  the  history  of  the  mis- 
sion which  has,  on  the  whole,  done  more  to  promote  the 
interests  of  civilization  and  Christianity,  than  the  occur- 
rences of  which  we  have  been  speaking. 

Among  items  of  vital  interest  to  the  Young  Mis- 
sion, was  that  Messrs.  Thurston  and  Bishop  at  Kailua 
had  6000  scholars  learning  to  read  with  weekly  con- 
gregations of  from  2000  to  3000. 

At  a  general  meeting  of  the  mission,  held  at  Kailua 
in  October,  1826,  there  was  discussed  the  condition 
and  prospects  of  the  children  of  the  mission.  Also  the 
need  of  more  missionaries,  which  was  pressing  in  view 
of  the  early  departure  of  Mr.  E.  Loomis  and  family. 
Mr.  Loomis,  spoken  of  as  much  beloved,  sailed  January 
3,  1827,  via  Tahiti  and  Valparaiso.  Dr.  Blatchley  had 
left  a  few  months  earlier. 

The  ordination  of  Mr.  James  Ely  took  place  at 
Kailua  January  4,  1825,  while  that  of  Mr.  Samuel 
Whitney  to  the  gospel  ministry  by  his  fellow  mis- 
sionaries at  Honolulu  !N'ovember  28,  1825,  and  the 
ordination  of  Mr.  Joseph  Goodrich  at  Kailua  October 
25,  1826. 

A  letter  from  Messrs.  Thurston  and  Bishop,  from 
Kailua,  dated  October  10,  1827: 

These  islands  have  externally  embraced  Christianity  and 
are  rapidly  coming  under  the  influence  of  its  precepts 
and  sanctions.    "You  have  obtained,"  said  Mr.  Young  to 


116  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

us  one  day,  "in  three  years  by  the  preaching  of  the 
gospel  what  I  have  labored  in  vain  for  more  than  thirty 
to  accomplish."  Alluding  to  the  customs  and  usages  of 
Christian  countries  which  are  now  taking  the  place  of 
their  former  practices,  he  said:  "These  are  the  very 
things  which  I  have  so  often  attempted  to  persuade  the 
king  and  chiefs  to  adopt;  I  have  set  before  them  in  the 
plainest  manner  the  superior  advantages  of  civilization 
over  savage  customs,  but  could  never  gain  their  assent; 
the  uniform  reply  of  the  king  was:  Tela  i  Hawaii  nei' 
(these  are  the  customs  here  at  Hawaii),  but  as  soon  as 
you  bring  them  under  the  influence  of  the  gospel  you 
can  mould  them  as  you  please."  It  was  observed  to  him 
that  no  country  since  the  promulgation  of  Christianity 
has  become  civilized  but  through  the  preaching  of  the 
gospel.  He  replied  that,  in  his  opinion,  the  gospel  alone 
is  able  to  save  this  people  from  extinction,  for  until  mis- 
sionaries came  they  were  going  to  ruin  as  fast  as  possible. 

From  letter  hy  Mr.  Richards  from  Lahaina  April 
IJf,  1828: 

The  particulars  of  Mrs.  Bishop's  last  sickness  and  death 
you  have  already  received  from  another  pen.  She  was 
a  much  loved  and  useful  member  of  this  mission,  un- 
wearied in  her  exertions  for  others,  always  more  ready 
to  suffer  herself  than  to  see  others  suffer,  and  a  mother 
not  only  tender  but  faithful. 

The  30th  of  March,  1828,  was  a  day  not  to  be  forgotten, 
for  in  the  annals  of  the  mission  there  has  been  no  day 
it  will  be  more  pleasant  for  us  to  remember,  none  the 
events  of  which  are  more  directly  connected  with  the 
immortal  interests  of  the  nation,  and  none  to  which  the 
people  will  longer  look  back  with  gratitude  and  Joy.  I 
refer  to  the  arrival  of  the  second  re-enforcement  of  mis- 
sionaries, consisting  of  Messrs.  Andrews,  Clark,  Green, 
Gulick,  Judd,  Shephard,  and  the  Misses  Ogden,  Ward, 
Stone,  and  Patton.     Many  a  time  within  the  last  few 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      117 

years  when  I  have  taken  my  pen  to  write  you,  I  have 
felt  like  saying:  "Send  ns  no  more  of  our  accustomed 
food,  we  will  live  on  taro,  bread  fruit  and  the  other  produc- 
tions of  this  island ;  send  us  nothing  more  of  all  your  good 
things,  but  oh !  do  not  compel  us  to  see  our  numbers 
diminishing,  our  strength  wasting,  the  enemy  advancing, 
and  yet  have  no  prospect  of  aid." 

Letter  from  the  newly  arrived  missionaries,  dated 
April  27,  1828: 

Through  the  goodness  of  our  Heavenly  Father  we  have 
been  brought  safely  to  these  ends  of  the  earth.  On  the 
29th  of  March,  while  looking  eagerly  for  land,  Hawaii 
burst  upon  our  view.  A  sight  truly  welcome  after  almost 
five  months  residence  on  the  ocean.  In  a  little  time  we 
were  favored  with  a  delightful  view  of  Mauna  Kea,  as 
it  lifted  its  snow-capped  summit  far  above  the  clouds. 
A  thousand  interesting  associations  now  rushed  upon  our 
minds  and  almost  overpowered  our  feelings.  In  the 
evening  the  wind  breezed  up  and  wafted  us  rapidly  to- 
wards Oahu.  The  next  day  was  the  Sabbath  and  we 
attended  public  worship  for  the  last  time  on  board  the 
Parthian.  The  weather  was  uncommonly  pleasant  and 
several  of  the  islands,  to  which  we  have  come  16,000 
miles  in  order  to  labor  for  our  Saviour,  were  in  full  view. 
About  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  we  cast  anchor  in 
the  outer  harbor  of  Honolulu.  As  it  was  the  Sabbath 
and  we  were  some  distance  from  land,  we  thought  it  not 
best  to  go  ashore  until  the  next  day.  But  as  an  oppor- 
tunity offered  a  line  was  addressed  to  Mr.  Bingham  in- 
forming him  of  our  arrival.  Before  dark  the  three 
brethren  then  at  the  station,  Messrs.  Bingham,  Goodrich, 
and  Chamberlain,  came  out  to  the  Parthian  and  bade  us 
a  joyful  welcome.  The  interview  seemed  much  more  like 
the  meeting  of  long  absent  friends  than  of  entire 
strangers.  The  next  morning,  on  our  way  to  the  Mission 
House,  we  called  on  Kaahumanu  and  were  introduced 


118  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

to  her  by  Mr.  Bingham.  She  received  us  with  cordiality 
and  expressed  much  joy  that  new  missionaries  had  ar- 
rived and  seemed  only  to  regret  that  there  were  no  more. 
She  accompanied  us  to  Mr.  Bingham's,  where  we  were 
introduced  to  other  chiefs,  who  received  us  with  the  same 
cordiality.  We  then  united  in  a  song  of  praise  and  in 
devout  thanksgiving  to  that  Being  who  had  brought  us 
safely  through  the  dangers  of  the  deep  to  this  interesting 
field  of  labor  now  white  for  the  harvest. 

Under  date  May  8,  1828,  Mr.  Goodrich  writes  from 
Eilo: 

We  welcome  Mr.  and  Mrs.  E.  W.  Clark  to  Hilo.  A 
company  of  sixty,  including  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Goodrich  and 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Clark,  set  off  for  a  visit  to  the  volcano. 
They  spent  the  first  night  at  Olaa  and  the  next  day 
reached  the  volcano.  These  two  ladies  were  the  first 
foreign  ladies  to  see  the  fires  at  Kilauea.  After  four 
months  spent  in  teaching,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Clark  returned 
to  Honolulu. 

On  November  23,  1828,  mention  is  made  of  the  manu- 
facture of  sugar  and  molasses  by  Mr.  Goodrich,  the  first 
ever  made  in  Hilo. 

Regarding  Hawaiian  songs,  dirges,  and  recitations 
Mr.  Kichards  says: 

Many  of  these  ancient  songs  are  really  admirable.  Of 
these  songs,  the  dirges  are  generally  the  best.  In  these 
dirges  they  often  recount  the  exploits  of  the  subject,  or 
rather  give  an  outline  of  his  character.  This  is  done  in 
language  highly  figurative  and,  often,  truly  beautiful.  I 
have  attempted  in  my  intercourse  with  the  people  to 
draw  a  line  between  the  immoral  songs  and  those  valuable 
specimens  of  which  I  have  spoken,  but  this  is  extremely 
difficult. 


"^'".^i'^rW, 


-L  .<:.. 


^^"^ifcfe^.^ 


A^'JS  Sii\.v 


A  Papaia  Tree  bearing  perhaps  over  two  hundred  pounds  of  fruit 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1822-1828      119 

From  letter  written  hy  L.  Andrews,  J.  S.  Green, 
and  W.  Richards,  from  Lahaina,  October  15,  1828: 

With  the  present  system  even  the  laboring  class  of 
people  have  opportunity  to  attend  school,  religious  meet- 
ings, etc.,  and  that,  too,  without  interfering  with  their 
regular  employment,  for  the  schools  and  religious  meet- 
ings merely  take  the  place  of  their  former  boxing  games, 
cock  fights,  hulas,  hooluas  (or  hill  side  sliding  games), 
etc.  We  think,  too,  that  we  much  more  effectually  en- 
courage industry  by  proposing  some  new,  valuable  and 
interesting  employment  than  we  should  do  by  merely 
recommending  to  the  people  to  spend  more  hours  in  their 
old  employments.  Indeed,  it  is  well  known  that  no  people 
was  ever  industrious  that  was  not  enlightened.  While  on 
this  subject  we  remark  further,  that  we  do  not  think  it 
possible  that  there  should  ever  be  any  material  or,  at 
least,  any  rapid  improvement  in  general  industry  until 
there  is  a  radical  change  in  the  system  of  government.  The 
tenure  by  which  property  is  held  is  so  feeble  and  the 
rules  regulating  its  sale  and  descent  so  unsettled  and  so 
lax,  that  no  strong  motive  to  industry  can  exist,  unless 
it  is  to  obtain  learning  and  religion,  which  no  civil  power 
can  take  away. 

The  corner  stone  of  the  new  church  building  was  laid 
on  Monday,  September  14th.  The  only  ceremony  on  the 
occasion  was  a  short  address  and  prayer.  At  the  par- 
ticular request  of  Hoapili  the  building  receives  the  name 
of  Ebenezer.*  It  is  104  feet  long  and  50  feet  wide.  The 
stones  of  which  the  house  is  built  are  volcanic,  easily 
hewn,  are  rather  light  and  porous,  but  are  very  tenacious 
and  will  resist  the  action  of  the  weather. 

You  will  recollect  that  Miss  Patton  was  one  of  the 
number  who  joined  this  station  in  May  last.  Soon  after 
we  had  opportunity  of  showing  to  the  people  that  what 

4  The  building  here  mentioned  was  doubtless  erected  upon  the 
site  on  which  now  stands  the  Wainee  church  of  Lahaina. 


120  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

we  inculcate  on  them  as  duty  and  propriety  respecting 
marriage,  we  also  practice  ourselves.  On  the  first  Mon- 
day in  September  the  montly  concert  for  prayer  was 
attended  with  the  people  at  an  earlier  hour  than  usual, 
after  which  we  had  our  meeting  in  English,  and  at  an 
early  hour  in  the  evening  Mr.  Chamberlain  and  Miss 
Patton  were  united  in  marriage.  All  the  high  chiefs  and 
a  number  of  our  particular  friends  were  present.  On  the 
19th  of  the  same  month  they  sailed  for  Honolulu.  We 
deeply  feel  the  loss  we  sustain  in  the  removal  of  Miss 
Patton  from  the  station,  where  for  the  last  four  months 
she  has  done  so  much  to  make  herself  useful  and  the 
families  comfortable  and  happy. 


XIV 
JOUEN'AL  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834 


R 


^V.  E.  TF.  CLARK  describes  a  journey  iaJcen 
on  foot  in  company  with  Mr.  Levi  Chamber- 
lain : 


We  left  Honolulu  April  30,  1829,  and  landed  at 
Waipio,  Hawaii,  where  we  were  delighted  with  the  scenery 
and  the  hospitality  of  the  people,  who  loaded  our  boats 
with  baked  hog,  taro  and  poi.  From  there  we  went  to 
Hilo  where  we  spent  the  Sabbath.  There  were  probably 
not  less  than  three  thousand  hearers  at  the  house  of 
worship.  From  there  we  went  on  to  the  volcano  arriving 
there  about  10  A.  M.  The  feelings  with  which  I  gazed 
upon  this  sublime  and  awful  spectacle  can  be  more  easily 
conceived  than  described.  Nothing  ever  reminded  me  so 
forcibly  of  the  power  of  that  Being  "Who  spreadest  out 
the  heavens  like  a  curtain  and  hangest  the  earth  upon 
nothing."  The  volcano  was  in  very  brisk  action.  After 
leaving  the  volcano  we  travelled  to  Punaluu,  where  we 
spent  the  Sabbath  with  the  head  man  of  the  village  and 
preached  to  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  people.  Thence 
we  proceeded  to  Honuapo  where  we  found  three  or  four 
hundred  people  assembled  to  hear  us.  This  place  had 
been  visited  but  a  few  times  by  the  missionaries,  but  the 
Sabbath  was  well  observed  and  schools  were  established. 
The  next  day  we  went  on  to  Amalu  where  a  Christian 
marriage  was  performed,  the  first  probably  ever  performed 
in  Ka-u.  Thence  we  proceeded  through  Waiohinu  to 
Kahuku.    Here  we  were  received  by  the  head  man  of  the 

121 


122  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

place,  the  comfort  and  neatness  of  whose  home  and  yard 
surpassed  anything  we  had  seen  since  we  left  Hilo.  We 
were  surprised  to  find  so  much  appearance  of  civiliza- 
tion in  this  distant  and  obscure  part  of  the  island.  But 
on  inquiring  we  found  that  the  man  and  his  family  had 
formerly  lived  at  Lahaina  and  enjoyed  the  instruction 
of  the  missionaries.  We  proceeded  over  the  rough  broken 
lava,  slept  on  the  ground  and  finally  procured  a  canoe 
which  took  us  the  last  fifteen  miles  to  Kaawaloa,  Kona. 
A  short  time  since  Kaahumanu  and  other  chiefs,  accom- 
panied by  Mr.  Euggles,  removed  from  the  house  of 
Keawe  at  Honaunau  the  bones  of  twenty-four  ancient 
kings  and  princes.  The  bones  were  put  into  two  coffins 
and  deposited  in  a  common  burying  ground  at  Kaawaloa. 
We  arrived  at  Kaawaloa  a  little  after  dark  and  were 
heartily  welcomed.  It  was  a  time  of  deep  interest.  We 
felt  that  we  were  in  the  midst  of  a  revival  of  religion. 
Mr.  Euggles'  house  was  almost  constantly  thronged  with 
inquirers.  We  noticed  with  pleasure  the  stillness  and 
propriety  with  which  the  Sabbath  was  observed.  About 
fifteen  hundred  attended  public  worship  and  listened 
with  serious  attention  to  the  preaching  of  the  gospel. 
A  considerable  part  of  this  number  came  from  six  to 
ten  miles  in  canoes.  The  canoes,  one  hundred  or  more 
in  number,  came  in  with  the  utmost  steadiness  and  regu- 
larity in  the  morning  and  returned  in  the  same  manner 
in  the  evening.  This  was  more  observable  since,  on  any 
other  day,  they  would  have  been  remarkably  talkative  and 
noisy,  but  not  a  loud  word  was  to  be  heard,  or  hardly 
the  sound  of  the  paddles.  A  captain  of  a  ship  in  the  harbor 
observed  that  the  greatest  curiosity  he  had  seen  at  the 
Sandwich  Islands  was  the  people  coming  to  meeting  in 
their  canoes.  From  Kaawaloa  we  visited  Kailua,  Messrs. 
Thurston  and  Bishop's  station,  where  a  considerable  num- 
ber have  lately  been  received  to  the  church.  From  here 
we  returned  to  Honolulu  having  been  absent  six  weeks. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      123 

From  letter  written  hy  Messrs.  Thurston  and  Bishop 
from  Kcdlua,  dated  October  1,  1829: 

We  have  been  satisfied  that  the  seeming  want  of  true 
conviction  in  many  is  to  be  attributed  to  the  fact  that 
their  former  sins  were  those  of  pure  ignorance,  committed 
without  the  least  knowledge  that  there  was  any  better 
way,  and  that  as  their  minds  became  gradually  enlight- 
ened by  the  truth,  and  the  Holy  Spirit  began  to  operate, 
it  was  in  this  mild  way,  rather  than  by  the  terrors  of 
the  law,  that  they  were  brought  forward.  The  first  con- 
verts at  Kailua,  Hawaii,  were  baptized  on  March  9,  1828, 
two  men  and  four  women.  Kuakini  (Governor  Adams) 
is  a  thoroughly  consecrated  man. 

From  letter  written  at  Oahu,  dated  October  10, 
1829: 

A  new  church  built  in  an  improved  native  style  by 
the  people,  196  feet  by  63  feet,  was  dedicated  in  Honolulu 
on  the  third  of  July  with  appropriate  and  very  interesting 
exercises.  It  was  filled  at  an  early  hour  and  many  as- 
sembled around  the  doors.  Probably  five  thousand  were 
present,  besides  some  foreigners.  The  young  king  (in 
imitation  of  Solomon)  first  addressing  the  congregation, 
said  we  had  assembled  to  consecrate  to  the  Lord  this 
house  which  he  had  built  for  Jehovah,  his  God,  and 
expressed  his  desire  that  all  his  people  might  worship 
Him,  listen  to  the  voice  of  His  ministers  and  obey  His 
word.  After  the  dedicatory  prayer  Nahienaena,  the  king's 
sister,  made  some  very  suitable  remarks  in  support  of 
what  had  been  said  by  the  king. 

Letter  of  the  Oahu  Station: 

October  29,  1829.  The  Gospel  of  Luke  is  now  in  the 
hands  of  the  people;  Acts  is  complete  and  a  part  of  the 
Psalms,  and  portions  of  Genesis,  Exodus,  and  Leviticus. 
We  make  steady  progress. 


124  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  Mrs.  Thurston,  from  the  Sandwich 
Islands,  dated  October  16,  1829: 

I  am  placed  in  a  situation  replete  with  cares  and 
responsibilities  to  my  own  children,  I  have  to  blend  the 
duties  of  the  servant,  the  playmate,  the  mother,  and  the 
preceptress.  My  wardrobe,  my  house,  my  table,  all  hang 
suspended  on  my  own  exertions  and  the  imperfect  services 
of  natives.  Added  to  this,  I  am  mistress  of  a  public 
house,  which  may  well  be  com.pared  to  public  houses  in 
America  on  public  days.  During  the  forenoon  it  is  nec- 
essary, in  order  to  live,  to  have  our  house  under  a  Kapu 
(taboo),  that  is,  people  are  not  allowed  to  visit  it.  Yet,  to 
this  general  rule,  chiefs  and  principal  teachers  must  be 
made  an  exception.  Afternoons  our  doors  are  open  to  any, 
to  all,  and  our  house  is  thronged.  However,  of  the  four 
families  from  the  brig  Thaddeus,  who  still  remain  in 
the  field,  ours  is  the  only  one  that  has  not,  by  gratuitous 
passages,  sent  home  the  precious  gift  of  a  child  to  per- 
sonal friends.  To  send  away  children  at  an  age  so  early, 
while  I  am  sustained  in  active  life,  is  a  thing  at  which 
every  feeling  of  my  heart  revolts. 

From  letter  by  L.  Andrews,  dated  November  3, 
1829: 

I  would  beg  leave  to  remark  here  that  Miss  Ogden  has 
been,  and  is  now,  most  persevering  and  indefatigable  in  the 
business  of  teaching,  besides  being  of  great  help  to  Mrs. 
Eichards  in  her  family.  As  a  teacher  of  children  and 
of  female  schools  she  has  been  extensively  useful.  And  I 
see  no  reason  why  the  number  of  such  helpers  could  not 
be  multiplied  to  the  great  advancement  of  knowledge, 
industry,  virtue  and  piety. 

From  letter  of  Rev.  P.  J.  GulicTc  written  in  1829 
from  Waimea,  Kauai: 

January  7.  I  started  to  attend  the  examination  of 
schools.     The  want  of  roads  and  bridges  was  felt,  but 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      125 

still  travelling  is  much  more  pleasant  to  me  in  this  land 
of  hills  and  valleys,  of  brooks  of  water,  of  fountains  that 
spring  up  out  of  the  valleys  and  hills  than  it  would  be 
in  a  dry  and  thirsty  land.  But  the  most  interesting 
object  which  came  under  my  view  was  the  school  house. 
There  is  at  least  one  in  every  considerable  village.  They 
are  thatched  buildings  constructed  with  care,  and  large 
enough  to  afford  a  commodious  place  of  worship  for  the 
inhabitants  in  their  respective  vicinities.  At  the  ex- 
amination 850  readers  passed  in  review,  they  read  in 
various  parts  of  the  books  which  they  had  studied  and 
acquitted  themselves  very  much  to  our  satisfaction.  One 
hundred  and  fifty-two  men  and  forty-two  women,  most 
of  them  neatly  dressed  in  European  style,  were  also  ex- 
amined in  the  art  of  writing.  They  wrote  on  slates  and 
manifested  a  very  pleasing  evidence  of  improvement. 
When  these  exercises  were  finished  the  whole  company, 
including  many  hundreds  of  spectators,  removed  from  the 
church  to  the  Governor's  house.  Here  were  assembled, 
I  suppose,  about  5,000  to  hear  certain  new  regulations 
published  and  old  ones  newly  enforced. 

A  letter  by  Levi  Chamberlain,  from  Honolulu,  dated 
August  16,  1830: 

I  do  not  know  that  you  have  been  informed  of  a  very 
singular  expedition  fitted  out  from  these  islands  last 
December.  If  you  have  not,  some  account  of  it  may  not 
be  unacceptable: 

By  a  ship  from  Port  Jackson,  New  South  Wales,  which 
anchored  at  this  port  in  November,  1829,  a  notice  was 
communicated  to  Governor  Boki  that  somewhere  in  the 
South  Pacific  Ocean  an  island  had  been  fallen  in  with 
abounding  in  sandalwood.  A  person  who  arrived  in 
the  ship,  and  who  had  made  some  observation  as  to  the 
situation  of  the  island,  proposed  to  lead  an  expedition 
thither.  The  bait  of  sandalwood  in  abundance  proved 
too  tempting  to  be  resisted.     The  governor  immediately 


126  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

formed  the  plan  of  an  expedition.  The  brigs  Kame- 
hameha  and  Becket  were  forthwith  put  in  readiness,  each 
vessel  was  supplied  with  a  considerable  quantity  of  am- 
munition and  two  hundred  soldiers  equipped  for  the 
former  and  one  hundred  for  the  latter  vessel.  Besides 
the  soldiers  there  embarked  quite  a  number  of  the  chiefs, 
people  for  their  attendants  and  the  cutting  of  sandal- 
wood. On  board  the  BecTcet  there  were  one  hundred  and 
seventy-nine  persons.  On  board  the  Kamehameha,  of 
which  Boki  had  the  charge,  there  were  probably  not  far 
from  three  hundred  people,  including  the  soldiers.  Hastily 
equipped,  the  expedition  sailed  on  the  second  day  of 
December,  1829.  Kaahumanu  was  absent  at  the  time  from 
this  island;  had  she  been  present  she  would,  doubtless, 
have  protested  against  the  mad  expedition  and  prevented 
its  sailing.  Infatuation  seemed  to  be  marked  on  the  very 
face  of  it  and  many  of  the  merchants  and  residents 
strongly  remonstrated  against  it  and  advised  Boki  to 
abandon  it,  but  he  was  determined  on  carrying  it  into 
execution  and  sailed.  The  first  notice  received  respecting 
the  fate  of  the  expedition  was  in  June,  1830,  by  a  vessel 
from  Canton.  This  vessel  had  been  fitted  out  here,  in 
connection  with  the  ship  before  mentioned  from  Port 
Jackson,  for  a  trip  to  the  newly  discovered  island  for  the 
purpose  of  obtaining  sandalwood,  had  visited  the  island 
and  fallen  in  with  the  Becket  and  reported  that  the  ex- 
pedition was  likely  to  be  closed  with  disaster.  On  the 
third  day  of  the  present  month  the  Becket  arrived  and 
communicated  intelligence  of  the  most  distressing  kind. 
Out  of  the  one  hundred  and  seventy-nine  which  left  in 
this  vessel  only  twenty  returned  and  eight  of  these  were 
foreigners.  All  that  the  survivors  could  relate  respecting 
the  other  brig  was :  that  the  two  vessels  anchored  together 
at  the  Island  of  Rotama,  one  of  the  New  Hebrides,  from 
which  Aramango,  the  sandal  wood  island  to  which  they 
were  bound,  was  distant  only  a  few  days'  sail.  Here  Boki 
stopped  four  days  and  took  on  board  a  considerable  num- 
ber of  the  natives  of  the  island  to  assist  in  cutting  sandal- 


JOURNALS  AND   LETTERS,  1829-1834       127 

wood  and  then  set  sail  for  Aramango.  The  Bechet 
stopped  about  ten  days  longer  and  then  followed.  Owing 
to  light  winds  and  calms  she  was  ten  days  making  the 
passage.  When  she  arrived  nothing  was  to  be  seen  of. 
or  heard  from,  the  Kamehameha,  except  that  a  small 
vessel,  recently  arrived,  reported  having  seen  floating  in 
the  neighborhood  of  the  island  some  pieces  of  a  wreck. 
A  boat  was  dispatched  to  make  the  circuit  of  the  island 
in  search  of  the  wreck,  in  case  the  vessel  had  been  cast 
ashore,  but  nothing  was  found  which  they  could  identify 
as  belonging  to  the  brig.  The  Becket  remained  at  the 
island  about  five  weeks,  but  owing  to  the  hostility  of  the 
natives  and  sickness  among  the  people  on  board  they 
were  entirely  defeated  in  the  object  of  the  expedition. 
N'othing  more  was  heard  concerning  the  Kamehameha, 
and  the  conclusion  was  that  she  had  either  been  wrecked 
on  some  small  islands  that  lay  in  their  way,  or  had  been 
blown  up  at  sea.  The  latter  opinion  is  entertained  by 
some  of  the  foreigners,  as  there  was  much  powder  on  board 
and  very  little  caution  observed  in  regard  to  fire.  A  very 
dark  cloud  rests  upon  the  fate  of  the  vessel  and  of  all 
on  board.  There  is  not  a  doubt  entertained  by  judicious 
persons  who  have  heard  the  circumstances  that  the  vessel 
is  lost  and  that  all  on  board  have  perished.  The  intelli- 
gence filled  many  hearts  with  anguish  which  burst  out 
in  loud  and  continuous  wailing  for  many  days. 

From  letter  hy  Levi  Chamherlain,  Honolulu,  dated 
December  5,  1831  : 

When  Governor  Boki  left  the  island  to  embark  on  the 
expedition  for  sandal  wood,  which  proved  so  disastrous 
to  him  and  his  associates,  he  committed  the  government 
of  the  island  of  Oahu  into  the  hands  of  his  wife  Liliha. 
But  neither  the  administration  of  Boki  nor  that  of  his 
vvife  gave  satisfaction  to  the  high  chiefs.  The  high  chiefs 
here  meant  are  Kaahumanu,  Kaikioewa,  John  Adams 
(Kuakini),  Hoapili  and  his  wife  Kekauluohi,  Kinau,  and 


128  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Naihe.  The  conduct  of  Boki  was  considered  highly 
reprehensible  by  Kaahumanu,  who  would  gladly  have  re- 
moved him  could"  she  have  done  it  without  endangering 
the  peace  of  the  nation.  The  almost  absolute  certainty 
of  Governor  Boki  being  lost  has  rendered  it  necessary 
that  a  new  governor  should  be  appointed.  This  has  been 
done  and  the  present  chief  magistrate  is  John  Adams 
(Kuakini).  He  is  under  Kaahumanu  who  takes  posses- 
sion of  this  island  agreeably  to  the  grant  of  the  king. 
As  soon  as  the  chiefs,  who  had  now  returned  to  Maui, 
had  been  apprised  of  the  attitude  of  the  governess  (Lililia, 
who  was  making  warlike  preparations  to  retain  her  author- 
ity) they  dispatched  her  father  Hnapili  to  mediate  with 
his  daughter  and,  if  possible,  induce  her  to  meet  the 
chiefs  in  council  at  Lahaina.  This  he  effected  and  called 
in  all  the  arms  of  both  parties,  deposited  them  in  the 
armory  of  the  fort  and  took  possession  himself  of  the 
key.  The  difficulties  in  the  nation  having  been  happily 
settled  and  the  government  of  this  island  committed  into 
the  hands  of  Governor  Adams,  an  occasion  for  uneasiness 
arose  from  another  quarter  in  consequence  of  an  attempt 
of  the  chiefs  to  effect  reform  and  establish  good  order. 
The  traffic  in  ardent  spirits  was  too  lucrative  to  admit 
of  its  suppression  without  strong  expressions  of  dissatis- 
faction on  the  part  of  those  whose  gains  were  touched, 
and  it  was  to  be  expected  that  an  attempt  to  shut  up 
gambling  houses  and  to  secure  to  the  Sabbath  its  peace- 
ful observance,  would  excite  very  strenuous  opposition, 
and  so  it  was,  and  the  mission  was  accused  of  being  the 
instrumental  cause  of  all  the  restrictive  measures  adopted 
by  the  chiefs. 

From  letter  hy  G.  P.  Judd,  Honolulu,  dated  August 
19,  1830: 

Every  arrangement  having  been  previously  made  we 
set  off  from  Kailua  on  the  morning  of  the  24th  of  Feb- 
ruary to  go  to  Waimea,   Hawaii.     The   High   Chiefess 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      129 

Kapiolani  in  her  own  double  canoe,  Mr.  Richards  and 
family  in  another,  belonging  to  Naihe.  Mrs.  Judd,  Miss 
Ward  and  myself  in  one  furnished  us  by  Governor  Adams.^ 
There  were  in  addition  half  a  dozen  single  canoes,  which 
were  loaded  with  people  and  baggage.  The  weather  was 
fine.  Our  little  fleet  of  nine  sails  was  wafted  gaily  along 
by  the  sea  breeze,  aided  occasionally  by  the  rowers,  as  we 
dashed  through  the  rough  waves  resounding  from  the 
rocky  projections  of  the  shores.  Landed  to  dine  at 
Kalihulu.  Arrived  at  Puako  at  3  P.  M.  where  we  spent 
the  night;  there  Kapiolani  gave  the  people  orders  to 
carry  our  baggage  to  Waimea  by  land.  Next  morning 
we  proceeded  by  water  to  Kawaihae,  four  miles  distant 
from  Puako.  There  we  remained  during  the  day  and 
following  night  under  the  hospitable  roof  of  Mr.  Young. 
Meanwhile  Kapiolani,  in  connection  with  Mrs.  Young, 
made  the  necessary  arrangements  for  carrying  the  ladies 
and  children  in  chairs,  lashed  on  long  poles  manned  with 
six  or  eight  men  each  for  the  ladies,  and  a  cot  for  the 
children.  Calabashes  for  water  and  poi  and  fish,  com- 
pleted the  preparations. 

February  26,  1830.  Our  party  is  now  increased  to  one 
hundred  and  thirteen,  forty-three  having  joined  us  at 
Kawaihae.  We  began  to  move  before  sunrise  in  order  to 
avoid  the  extreme  heat  of  the  sun.  Our  road  was  only 
a  narrow  footpath,  which,  for  the  first  two  miles,  led 
through  an  uneven  and  rocky  country  that  gradually  be- 
came more  smooth  and  verdant  as  we  proceeded.  About 
five  miles  from  Kawaihae  we  came  to  a  running  stream; 
here  the  people  had  provided  refreshments  of  baked  hog, 
taro,  potatoes,  etc.,  of  which  the  natives  partook  freely. 
The  remaining  part  of  our  way  was  through  a  more  level 
country  covered  with  green  bushes  and  grass.  We  arrived 
at  Aalii,  Waimea,  about  half  past  twelve.  This  place 
affording  the  best  house  in  the  district  we  took  up  our 
abode  here  for  the  present.    The  house  was,  however,  too 

2  See  footnote  at  the  bottom  of  page  111. 


130  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

small  to  accommodate  us  and  all  our  baggage.  A  small 
but  comfortable  house  was  put  up  immediately  for 
Kapiolani. 

March  19,  1830.  Governor  Adams  arrived  with  all  his 
train.  He  intends  spending  some  months  with  us  to  catch 
wild  cattle. 

March  21,  1830.  Sabbath.  Our  congregation  has  in- 
creased every  Sabbath  since  our'  arrival.  Today  it  has 
received  a  great  addition  owing  to  the  arrival  of  the 
governor.  There  cannot  be  less  than  one  thousand  people. 
Governor  Adams  addressed  them  in  a  very  appropriate 
manner.  The  people  appear  particularly  anxious  to  gain 
religious  knowledge.  Our  house,  during  the  week,  is 
literally  crowded  with  visitors  who  come  expressly  to 
hear  instructions.  They  usually  manifest  their  desire  by 
saying  they  are  ignorant  and  wicked  and  wish  us  to 
instruct  them  in  the  word  of  God. 

March  25,  1830.  Kapiolani  with  all  of  her  train  took 
leave  of  us  today.  "We  all  were  much  affected  with  her 
kindness  in  coming  to  this  place  with  us.  She  has  exerted 
herself,  all  in  her  power,  to  make  us  comfortable,  careful 
to  see  that  we  were  first  served  and  best  accommodated. 
She  has  also  rendered  essential  service  by  hastening  the 
progress  of  our  building,  and  conversing  with  the  people 
when  our  time  was  otherwise  occupied.  May  she  receive 
a  heavenly  reward  for  all  her  labors  of  love. 

April  3,  1830.  Eemoved  to  Mr.  Eichards'  new  house. 
Find  ourselves  very  pleasantly  situated  in  a  spacious 
native  house  containing  three  separate  apartments,  well 
spread  with  new  mats  and  provided  with  suitable  doors 
and  windows;  it  stands  on  the  eastern  bank  of  the  stream 
called  Waikoloa  (Duckwater),  Another  house  stands  a 
few  feet  distant,  so  constructed  as  to  afford  room  for 
kitchen  work  and  a  large  apartment,  which  will  be  used 
for  a  school  or  lodging  room  as  may  be  most  convenient. 
This  establishment  stands  on  a  level  spot  nearly  sur- 
rounded with  trees,  in  sight  of  lofty  mountains,  evergreen 
hills,  and  an  extended  plain  diversified  with  dark  thick 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834       131 

woods,  open  pastures,  low  shrubbery  and  fruitful  planta- 
tions, and  will,  when  enclosed  and  completed,  be  a  de- 
lightful country  seat.  A  similar  establishment  is  now  in 
progress  on  the  other  side  of  the  stream,  which  will  be 
finished  in  the  course  of  a  fortnight. 

April  23,  1830.  Yesterday  morning,  the  weather  being 
clear  and  inviting,  I  set  off  in  company  with  John  Honolii 
and  other  natives  to  visit  the  top  of  Mauna  Kea.  I 
rode  a  mule  furnished  me  by  the  governor.  We  ascended 
until  about  two  P.  M.  when  we  were  overtaken  with  a 
violent  thunder  storm.  We  were  compelled  to  take  shelter 
in  a  cave  and  the  storm  continuing  to  rage  we  remained 
all  night.  Arose  early  this  morning,  left  the  mule  and 
proceeded  on  foot.  The  atmosphere  was  clear.  We  had 
a  delightful  view  of  the  scenery  below,  which  certainly 
surpasses  anything  I  have  seen  before  and  clouds  soon 
obscured  our  sight  for  the  rest  of  the  day.  Eeached  the 
snow  about  noon  and  ascended  a  short  distance,  but  found 
myself  too  much  fatigued  to  ascend  to  the  summit;  there 
was  indeed  little  inducement  the  prospect  was  so  obscured 
by  clouds.  I  therefore  descended  bringing  with  me  a 
large  bundle  of  snow.  Arrived  at  the  cave  at  five  P.  M., 
bestrode  the  mule  and  reached  home  about  nine  o'clock 
in  the  evening. 

April  2^,  1830.  Sent  the  bundle  of  snow  to  Governor 
Adams,  who  had  never  before  seen  any  except  on  the 
distant  mountain  top,  he  appeared  much  gratified  with 
tasting  and  handling  it. 

April  25,  1830.  The  natives  finding  us  more  at  leisure 
flock  to  our  houses  in  greater  numbers,  if  possible,  than 
before.  They  now  come  mostly  in  companies  of  forty  or 
fifty,  in  single  file  and  solemn  pace,  and  seat  themselves 
at  our  door.  One  person  is  spokesman  for  the  whole, 
and  he  having  declared  their  manao  (thought)  waits  for 
questions  or  instruction  from  the  missionary. 

May  20,  1830.  Visited  the  valley  of  Waipio  in  com- 
pany with  Mrs.  Judd,  and  Miss  Ward.  The  view  from 
the  top  of  the  precipice  is  very  beautiful  and  will  recom- 


132  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAH 

pense  any  one  who  will  take  the  trouble  to  visit  it  from 
Waimea.  We  descended  the  valley  down  a  steep  precipice 
two  thousand  feet  or  more  in  height,  the  lower  half  of 
the  distance  we  passed  by  seating  ourselves  on  bundles  of 
leaves  and  sliding  down  with  great  rapidity,  not  without 
fear  on  the  part  of  the  ladies.  Attended  meeting  with  the 
people  of  the  valley  assembled  in  a  large  house.  They 
appear  more  interesting  and  better  informed  than  any 
inhabitants  we  have  seen  in  this  region. 

June  6,  18S0.  Governor  Adams  (Kuakini)  has  com- 
menced building  a  large  meeting  house.  It  will  be  about 
one  hundred  and  twenty  feet  long  and  fifty  feet  wide;  the 
timber,  partly  collected,  will  be  large  and  of  the  best 
quality;  the  spot  selected  for  it  is  a  pleasant  site  near  the 
road  about  a  hundred  rods  from  our  houses.  The  gov- 
ernor has  begun  this  house,  without  any  solicitation  on 
our  part,  from  a  sincere  desire,  we  hope,  to  promote  the 
cause  of  religion.  It  is  a  great  work  and  although  com- 
menced with  spirit  will  not  be  finished  in  many  months. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarlc,  Honolulu,  dated  April 
20,  1831: 

Providence,  in  a  mysterious  way,  removed  the  former 
governor  and  prepared  the  way,  we  trust,  for  better  things 
at  this  island.  Governor  Adams  has  entered  upon  his 
new  station  with  a  vigor  and  decision  which  surprises  us 
all.  If  he  goes  on  as  he  has  begun,  ten  grog  shops  will 
no  longer  in  this  village  yawn  upon  him  who  passes  on 
the  streets  and  send  forth  their  loathsome  and  pestiferous 
exhalations.  He  has  given  orders  for  their  entire  sup- 
pression and  he  is  carrying  these  orders  into  execution 
with  a  strong  hand.  He  is  also  in  a  fair  way  to  suppress 
Sabbath  breaking  and  other  vices.  We,  of  course,  receive 
our  full  share  of  reproach  for  these  measures,  but  we  feel 
little  concerned  so  long  as  we  turn  not  aside  from  the 
great  and  good  work  to  which  we  have  devoted  our  lives. 

November  19,  1831.    Letter  of  Eev.  Samuel  Whitney, 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      133 

"Waimea,  Kauai:  We  send  our  two  sons,  Samuel  and 
Henry  Martin,  to  the  United  States  by  Captain  Hussey, 
ship  Cypress. 

From  letter  written  hy  H.  Bingham,  Oahu,  dated 
April  21,  1831: 

I  have  been  told  that  our  young  king  has  ordered  that 
a  cask  of  spirits  on  board  of  one  of  his  brigs  be  poured 
into  the  sea.  The  British  Consul,  I  was  told,  has  applied 
to  the  government  for  permission  to  buy  up  some  alco- 
holic drinks  for  His  Britannic  Majesty's  ships  of  war  when 
they  shall  touch  here,  but  permission  was  not  granted. 
Others,  it  is  said,  applied  to  the  governor  for  the  privilege 
of  selling  to  foreigners  only  and  not  to  natives.  Governor 
Adams'  reply  was  amusing:  "To  horses,  cattle,  and  hogs 
you  may  sell  rum,  but  to  real  men  you  must  not  on  these 
shores." 

From  letter  hy  Levi  Chamberlain,  Honolulu,  dated 
November  6,  1830: 

I  am  now  superintending  the  erection  of  a  new  build- 
ing designed  to  be  a  store  house  for  the  mission  and  a 
dwelling  house  for  myself.  This  work  I  should  never 
have  undertaken  merely  for  my  own  accommodation,  not- 
withstanding my  need  of  a  better  dwelling  than  a  grass 
house.  When  this  work  is  ofE  my  hands,  if  I  am  spared 
to  complete  it  in  the  enjoyment  of  health,  I  hope  to 
have  more  time  to  labor  for  the  heathen  in  the  way  of 
teaching  and  examining  schools. 

October  29,  1831,  Rev,  Wm.  Richards  writes: 

That  he  considers  Wailuku  as  a  more  favorable  point 
for  missionary  work  than  Lahaina.  The  Wailuku  con- 
gregation now  numbers  three  thousand  and  seven  hun- 
dred, and  they  are  collecting  materials  for  a  church  build- 
ing. He  says  that  Rev.  Lorin  Andrews  has  been  ap- 
pointed to  found  a  High  School  two  miles  back  of  Lahaina 


134  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

(afterward  called  Lahainaluna),  which  was  established  to 
raise  up  teachers  and  helpers  for  the  missionary  work. 

May  17,  1832.  The  fifth  company,  known  as  the 
fourth  Reenforcement  of  Missionaries,  arrived  at 
Honolulu  in  the  ship  Averich.  For  their  names  see 
the  Appendix. 

June  5,  1832.  Kaahumanu,  after  a  few  days  ill- 
ness, died  at  her  residence  in  Manoa  Valley.  With  her 
dying  breath  she  bore  most  beautiful  testimony,  saying 
to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bingham  regarding  her  Saviour:  "I 
shall  go  to  Him  and  shall  be  comforted."  She  was  the 
youngest  wife  of  Kamehameha  the  Great,  and  was  the 
virtual  Sovereign  of  the  Islands  from  the  departure 
of  Kamehameha  II  (Liholiho)  for  England,  November 
27,  1823,  till  her  death  June  5,  1832,  a  period  of 
eight  years  and  six  months.  She  was  at  first  haughty 
and  overbearing  in  manner  but  a  great  change  came 
over  her  in  1825,  when  she  received  baptism  and  from 
that  time  until  her  death,  her  life,  example,  and  teach- 
ings were  exemplary  and  contributed  powerfully  to  the 
spread  of  the  gospel  throughout  the  Islands. 

From  letter  hy  D.  Baldwin,  Waimea,  Hawaii,  dated 
August  10,  1832: 

We  reached  this  place  about  the  middle  of  January  and 
found  the  people  anxiously  waiting  our  arrival.  They 
expressed  great  satisfaction  that  their  teachers  were  come; 
numbers  were  engaged  in  preparing  food  for  us  and  they 
all  testified  their  good  will  by  bringing  in  for  our  comfort 
such  supplies  as  the  land  afforded,  consisting  of  sweet 
and  Irish  potatoes,  taro,  onions,  fowls,  ducks,  turkeys, 
eggs,  and  hogs.  The  houses  which  were  previously  built 
here  for  two  mission  families,  as  well  as  the  house  of 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834       135 

God,  we  found  all  in  good  repair.  The  former  have 
afforded  us  very  comfortable  shelters  from  the  strong 
winds  and  frequent  rains,  which  we  find  here;  and  the 
latter,  calculated  to  hold  about  three  thousand  people,  has 
afforded  as  good  a  place  for  worship  as  most  have  on 
these  islands.  Mr.  Bishop  came  up  with  us  as  a  temporary- 
associate  till  we  should  acquire  the  language.  On  the 
first  Sabbath  in  February  the  church  was  organized  in 
Waimea.  This  land  was  ever  crowded  with  people  as  the 
fields  and  hillsides  give  evidence.  The  work  is  inviting. 
Mr.  John  Young,  now  eighty  years  old,  lives  in  Kawaihae 
and  has  showed  us  the  kindness  of  a  brother.  His  wife 
is  a  chief  ess,  a  member  of  the  church  and  a  great  aid 
to  our  work.  We  are  strengthened  by  the  arrival  of  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Lyons. 

From  letter  hy  P.  J.  Gulick,  'Waimea,  Kaiuii, 
October  25,  1832: 

We  would  gratefully  acknowledge  the  kindness  and 
courtesy  we  have  received  from  the  only  ship  masters 
who  have  touched  here  this  fall,  namely:  Captain  Tabor, 
ship  Cadamus  of  New  Bedford,  and  Captain  Braiton  of 
the  Ann  of  Nantucket.  Their  conduct  was  obliging  and 
friendly  throughout.  With  regard  to  Captain  Braiton, 
I  am  utterly  unable  to  express  the  pleasure  and  encour- 
agement that  his  visit  has  afforded  us.  His  whole  course 
of  conduct  was  such  as  we  expect  from  none  but  those 
"that  love  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  in  sincerity,"  and 
whose  hearts  are  truly  in  our  work.  Brother  Bingham, 
having  heard  of  the  state  of  our  congregation  and  the 
urgent  need  of  more  laborers  at  this  time,  arrived  here 
night  before  last  and  is  now  engaged  conversing  with  the 
anxious.  He  just  now  remarked  that  he  did  not  see  how 
the  present  state  of  feeling  could  be  accounted  for  without 
attributing  it  to  the  Spirit  of  God.  Indeed  the  divine 
sovereignty  has  been  strikingly  displayed  in  some  cases 
that  have  occurred  here.    Persons  have  come  from  almost 


136  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

inaccessible  parts  of  the  island  where,  I  have  good  reason 
to  believe,  the  Gospel  was  never  proclaimed  by  an  am- 
bassador of  Christ,  and  yet  appear  deeply  distressed  from 
a  sense  of  their  sins.  Frequently  they  can  give  no  definite 
account  of  the  origin  of  their  conviction;  but,  as  they 
often  express  it,  they  were  afraid  on  account  of  sin  and 
their  soul  and  body  troubled,  therefore  they  come  here 
to  inquire  after  salvation.  It  is  enough  to  chill  one's 
blood  to  hear  their  confessions,  and  still  more  painful 
to  reflect  on  the  state  of  society  which  these  indicate. 
This  state  of  society,  however,  when  contrasted  with  that 
of  the  same  people  twelve  years  ago,  indicates  a  wonder- 
ful reformation.  And  this  reformation,  its  enemies  them- 
selves being  judges,  has  been  effected  under  God  by  our 
elder  brethren,  through  their  influence  over  the  chiefs. 
And,  considering  the  character  of  the  nation,  chiefs  and 
all,  I  esteem  it  a  work  truly  wonderful,  a  very  essential 
and  a  happy  preparation  for  that  internal  reformation 
which  is,  I  trust,  now  going  on  with  increased  power 
and  rapidity.  There  are  now  four  hundred  and  twenty- 
five  persons  in  our  congregatioi^  who  study  the  Scriptures 
on  the  verse  a  day  system.  Mu  and  Kuihewa,  two  elderly 
men  from  Koloa,  fifteen  miles  east  of  us,  were  hopefully 
converted  last  June,  while  we  were  all  assembled  at  Oahu 
at  the  General  Meeting.  Their  hope  has  from  the  first 
appeared  remarkably  bright,  their  conscience  tender,  and 
their  deportment  uniformly  humble  and  consistent.  They 
appear  to  be  peculiarly  attached  to  each  other,  so  that 
although  they  have  called  frequently  I  have  seldom  seen 
them  separately.  Mu  is  the  pagan  priest  alluded  to  in 
my  letter  of  last  fall.  While  conversing  a  few  minutes 
with  them  this  morning  he  could  not  refrain  from  weep- 
ing; this  has  very  frequently  been  the  case  for  the  last 
eight  months.  He  says  his  priestly  office  had  a  special 
reference  to  the  business  of  fishing.  When  fishermen 
were  about  to  engage  in  their  occupation  they  were  ac- 
customed to  solicit  his  pra5^ers  in  their  behalf  and  when 
they  returned  successsf ul,  before  any  of  the  .  fish  were 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834       137 

eaten,  an  offering  from  what  had  been  taken  was  made 
to  the  god.  Having  gone  through  certain  ceremonies  the 
offer,  ng,  at  least  the  chief  portion,  became  the  property  of 
the  priest.  While  he  was  praying  it  is  said  all  present 
were  required  to  prostrate  themselves.  The  part  Mu 
took  in  these  things  now  appears  to  him  the  most  guilty 
part  of  a  wicked  life. 

Koloa,  Kauai,  1835.     Mr.  GulicJc  writes: 

You  will  have  heard  that  Messrs.  Brismade  &  Company, 
known  later  as  Ladd  &  Company,  have  leased  a  fine 
tract  of  land  in  Koloa  with  a  design  to  cultivate  cane 
and  manufacture  sugar.  In  consequence  of  this  Mr. 
Hooper,  of  that  firm,  has  become  our  neighbor.  He 
seems  very  pleasant  and  obliging  and  we  hope  the  enter- 
prise will  prove  successful  and  a  blessing  to  the  nation. 

From  letter  hy  W.  Richards,  L.  Andrews,  E.  Spauld- 
ing,  and  A.  Chapin,  Lahaina,  dated  Novemher  15, 
1832: 

Before  closing  what  we  say  of  the  appearance  of  those 
who  are  examined  for  church  membership  it  may  be 
well  to  relate,  as  nearly  as  we  recollect,  the  experience 
of  one  who  was  examined  last  Saturday  evening  and  who 
appeared  more  than  usually  interesting.  The  name  of 
the  man  is  Malaihi.  He  is  a  member  of  the  high  school 
from  a  distant  part  of  this  island,  Maui,  and  Mr.  Richards 
has  long  known  him  as  a  man  of  promising  character 
and  apparently  very  conscientious  in  all  his  conduct.  His 
parents  were  formerly  worshippers  of  the  shark,  and  he 
was  taught  by  them  to  believe  in  the  miraculous  power 
of  the  shark.  With  those  that  worshipped  that  monster 
it  was  tabu  to  eat  his  flesh  and  it  was  universally  believed 
that  should  any  one  violate  the  tabu  death  would  be 
the  immediate  forfeit.  We  requested  the  man  to  give 
us  an  account  of  his  religious  feelings  from  the  time  that 
he  fi,rst  heard  of  the  true  God  down  to  the  present  tjme. 


138  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

His  eyes  glistened  with  tears  while  he  replied:  "Soon 
after  your  arrival  at  this  island  I  began  to  learn  to  read 
and  as  soon  as  I  had  learned  so  as  to  be  able  to  read 
a  little,  I  was  stationed  as  a  teacher  for  the  others.  But 
I  thought  nothing  about  God  and  nothing  about  my  soul. 
I  did  not  regard  your  instructions  any  further  than  to 
learn  to  read.  The  meaning  of  what  I  read  I  did  not 
regard.  About  the  time  that  Governor  Hoapili  went 
around  this  island  (August  1825),  I  was  taken  sick  and 
came  nigh  unto  death.  Then  I  began  to  think  of  my 
end  and  felt  anxiety  for  my  soul.  I  conversed  with  my 
mother,  but  the  spirit  of  our  former  god  came  upon  her 
and  she  said :  *It  is  nothing  but  the  palapala  (book) 
that  has  brought  this  sickness  upon  you.  The  god  is 
angry  with  you  for  learning  that  new  thing  and  you 
are  about  to  die  for  your  folly.'  I  then  argued  with 
myself  as  to  what  there  could  be  in  the  palapala  to  kill 
a  man  or  make  him  sick.  And,  besides,  how  does  the 
shark  know  that  I  have  been  learning  the  palapala?  And 
even  if  he  does  know  it,  how  can  he  effect  my  sickness? 
I  was  perfectly  sceptical,  I  did  not  believe  in  his  power. 
Then  I  said  to  my  mother:  'If  your  god  were  here  I 
would  eat  him,  I  have  no  belief  in  his  divinity.  When 
he  gets  hold  of  us  his  anger  is  very  visible,  but  I  know 
nothing  more  of  his  power.  His  flesh  would  be  sweet 
to  me  and  I  would  eat  it  if  I  could  get  hold  of  it.' 

"My  mother  was  astonished  at  the  audacity  of  my  lan- 
guage and  endeavored  to  convince  me  of  my  presumption. 
But  not  long  after  this  I  obtained  some  of  the  flesh  of 
her  god  and  it  was  quickly  devoured  by  me.  I  waited  all 
that  day  for  death  to  come,  but  he  came  not,  and  all  that 
night  but  he  did  not  arrive.  This  made  it  very  clear  in 
my  mind  that  it  was  not  in  the  power  of  such  a  god  as 
that  to  send  death,  and  instead  of  my  being  in  his  power 
he,  rather,  was  in  mine.  From  that  time  I  have  fully 
believed  that  there  is  another  God,  who  made  both  me 
and  the  shark,  and  that  it  is  He  who  sends  life  and 
death  at  his  pleasure.    I  recovered  from  my  weakness  and 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      139 

ever  since  that  time  it  has  been  my  desire  and  my  business 
to  seek  that  God  and  learn  His  will.  I  read  His  word, 
but  Oh !  how  little  do  I  understand !  I  hear  the  preach- 
ing of  the  gospel  and  I  love  to  hear,  but  when  I  go 
away  it  is  not  clear  that  I  am  benefited  at  all.  I  often 
retire  to  some  secret  place  to  pray,  but  when  I  arrive 
there  I  find  my  heart  is  left  behind.  I  say  a  few  words, 
then  weep  at  my  awkwardness  and  return  again.  This 
much  I  know,  I  have  believed  and  sought,  and  desired, 
but  my  heart  has  not  arrived  at  that  which  I  wish.  What 
I  should  be  is  quite  clear  in  my  mind,  but  I  am  not  that, 
I  am  altogether  another  thing.  Knowledge  I  have  ob- 
tained, but  my  heart.  Oh,  when  will  that  be  right?  That 
is  the  only  difficulty  with  me."  Here  tears  prevented 
him  from  going  further.  We  have  mentioned  the  case 
to  show  that,  while  the  greater  part  appear  comparatively 
stupid,  there  are  some  who  exhibit  strong  feeling. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarh,  and  J.  S.  Emerson,, 
Waialua,  December  3,  1832: 

As  Mr.  Emerson  was  not  acquainted  with  the  native 
language,  it  was  thought  best  that  Mr.  Clark  should 
spend  a  few  months  at  Waialua  and  aid  in  commencing  the 
station.  Accordingly  Mr.  Clark  and  family  left  Honolulu 
on  the  18th  of  July  for  Waialua.  They  proceeded  about 
twenty  miles  in  a  double  canoe.  They  then  left  the 
water  side  and  crossed  over  the  island  about  twenty  miles 
further  to  Waialua.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Clark  rode  on  horse- 
back and  the  two  children  were  carried  by  natives.  In 
a  few  days  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Emerson  arrived  in  a  small 
schooner,  after  a  passage  of  about  twenty-four  hours.  We 
were  accompanied  to  this  place  by  Laanui,  who,  since 
the  death  of  his  former  wife,  Piia,  has  had  the  charge 
of  the  district  of  Waialua,  first  under  Kaahumanu  and 
now  under  Kinau.  He  has  now  taken  up  his  residence 
at  this  place  and  affords  invaluable  aid  to  the  mission- 
aries stationed  here.    He  gave  us  a  small  thatched  house 


140  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

standing  on  the  premises  which  we  selected.  Two  other 
thatched  houses  were  immediately  erected  by  the  people 
free  of  expense  to  the  mission,  which,  with  some  improve- 
ments since  made,  afford  tolerable  accommodations  for 
the  present,  for  one  or  two  families.  A  large  and  sub- 
stantial meeting  house  is  also  building  under  the  direction 
of  Laanui.  The  frame  is  nearly  completed.  The  house, 
when  finished,  will  be  in  no  ways  inferior  to  the  one  at 
Honolulu,  except  in  size  and  in  construction  of  the  pulpit. 

From  letter  by  J.  S.  Emerson,  Waialua,  December, 
3,  1832: 

The  field  is  large  and  apparently  white  for  the  harvest. 
A  good  part  if  not  all  the  people  around  us  appear  favor- 
ably disposed  toward  us  and  our  object  so  far  as  they 
know  anything  about  it.  There  is  one  great  obstacle  to 
the  gospel,  it  is  ignorance,  gross  ignorance,  among  the 
people.  One  of  the  school  teachers  has  said  lately  that 
when  we  first  came  to  this  station  she  was  afraid  to  come 
and  visit  us  because  she  thought  that  we  were  the  gods. 

1833.  Our  meeting  house,  of  which  we  spoke  the  last 
year,  has,  after  a  long  struggle  and  much  delay,  been 
completed.  It  is  built  of  firm  materials  and  is  one  of 
the  best  specimens  of  native  workmanship  I  have  seen. 
It  will  contain  one  thousand  five  hundred  or  one  thou- 
sand eight  hundred  people  to  be  seated  in  native  style 
and  if  proper  care  is  taken  of  the  thatch  it  will  doubtless 
be  a  good  building  for  quite  a  number  of  years.  The 
house  was  dedicated  on  Wednesday  the  25th  of  Septem- 
ber, at  which  time  all  the  people  in  the  several  districts 
belonging  to  this  station  who  wished  to  be  considered  on 
the  Lord's  side  were  requested  to  attend.  The  house  was 
filled.  Mr.  Bingham  was  present  and  preached.  Mrs. 
Emerson  has  a  school  of  about  forty  women,  most  of 
them  teachers,  and  another  of  about  forty  children,  all 
of  whom  are  readers  in  these  two  schools;  she  has  occu- 
pied the  forenoon  of  each  day  four  days  in  the  week. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      141 

As  to  our  situation  in  the  midst  of  this  people  we  feel 
happy  and  contented,  although  alone  we  are  not  lonely. 
We  have  no  time  to  indulge  in  gloom  or  despondency  for 
we  have  a  great  work  in  hand  and  woe,  woe  to  us  if  not 
found  faithful  and  diligent.  At  the  organization  of  our 
church  we  chose  an  individual,  Kuokoa,  to  the  office  of 
Deacon  and  publicly  read  and  explained  to  him  the  pas- 
sages of  Scripture  that  relate  to  the  duties  of  his  office. 
A  few  days  after  he  came  to  me  and  said  that  one  of 
his  duties  was  to  feed  the  hungry  in  the  church  and 
another  to  provide,  so  far  as  in  his  power,  for  the  wants 
of  their  teachers.  He  added  that  if  at  any  time  my 
family  were  in  want  of  food  he  wished  me  to  inform 
him  and  he  would  either  furnish  it  himseK  or  see  that 
some  of  the  brethren  in  the  church  did.  He  has  been  aa 
good  as  his  word,  so  far  as  articles  of  native  food  have 
been  wanting,  but  we  have  rarely  found  occasion  to  ask 
for  them.  During  the  last  four  months  the  chief  at 
Waialua  has  kept  a  careful  and,  I  suppose,  accurate  ac- 
count of  the  births  and  deaths  in  the  district  of  Waialua. 
Births  had  been  but  twenty,  deaths  forty-four,  yet  no 
special  sickness  in  the  place.  At  this  rate  of  decrease  the 
native  population  in  the  Sandwich  Islands  would,  in  forty 
years,  be  reduced  to  about  one-third  of  the  present  number. 

From    letter    hij    D.    Baldwin,    Waimea,    Hawaii, 

November  21,  1833: 

In  September  we  went  to  Kohala  for  seven  weeks.  The 
people  had  built  a  house  for  us  in  Kohala  and  asked 
when  we  would  come.  They  furnished  us  everything  we 
needed  in  the  way  of  food.  We  were  especially  pleased, 
when  word  was  given  at  the  close  of  the  first  service  for 
the  children  to  separate  and  sit  in  a  place  by  themselves, 
to  see  about  two  hundred  gathered  together  as  chattering 
as  a  flock  of  birds.  Mrs.  Baldwin,  aided  by  native 
teachers,  attended  to  them  while  I  superintended  the 
adults.  About  one  hundred  or  one  hundred  and  fifty  of 
these  thoughtless  little  immortals  thronged  us,  for  several 


142  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Sabbaths  as  we  returned  to  our  house,  till  we  reached  the 
yard.  Their  curiosity  was  not  much  to  be  wondered  at 
as  a  white  woman  was  probably  never  in  the  district  be- 
fore and  some  of  them  had,  doubtless,  never  seen  one. 
No  crowd  of  little  ones,  in  any  other  part  of  the  world, 
ever  touched  our  hearts  with  such  compassion  as  these. 
I  was  told  that  a  sick  woman  lay  in  a  village  hard  by. 
As  she  was  unable  to  attend  the  meeting  the  evening 
before,  I  thought  I  must  go  and  tell  her  of  the  gospel 
lest  she  should  die  before  I  came  round  again.  I  went 
and  found  a  middle-aged  woman  Ipng  with  ulcers  in  the 
feet  and  limbs.  She  had  been  confined  from  the  first 
arrival  of  the  Gospel  in  the  island,  had  never  seen  a  mis- 
sionary before,  nor  ever  been  at  a  religious  meeting  or 
at  a  school.  After  telling  her  such  things  as  I  thought 
best  adapted  to  her  spiritual  wants,  I  remarked  that  I 
could  say  but  little  as  we  must  soon  be  going,  but  there 
was  a  great  fountain  of  truth  in  the  Bible.  She  must 
get  some  of  the  people  to  read  it  to  her  every  day.  She 
replied,  and  so  did  some  of  the  by-standers,  that  she 
read  it  herself  and  immediately  pulled  out,  from  her  side, 
a  dirty  copy  of  one  of  the  Gospels.  I  wondered  at  her 
being  able  to  read,  and  the  more,  as  her  eyes  looked  in- 
flamed and  dim,  but  was  informed  she  had  acquired  the 
art,  with  the  assistance  of  such  as  came  to  the  house, 
while  she  was  lying  sick.  She  showed  some  knowledge 
of  divine  things.  I  asked  her  where  she  learned  these 
things.  She  said:  "Native  teachers  told  her  what  they 
had  heard  of  the  missionaries  at  Kailua."  I  asked  her 
if  she  prayed ;  she  blushed,  which  I  thought  might  be  be- 
cause she  was  ashamed  of  the  duty,  but,  presently,  said: 
"Yes,  I  pray,  but  it  is  awkward  and  not,  I  suppose,  as 
you  pray."  After  talking  as  long  as  I  supposed  best  to 
stay,  and  praying  with  her,  I  departed  rejoicing  that  God 
could  accompany  by  his  spirit  truths  which  we  might 
think  were  lost  and  forgotten. 

I  made  a  visit  to  the  Heiau  of  Mookini  in  Kohala, 
built  by  Kamehameha.     This,  I  was  told,  was  the  most 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1829-1834      143 

famous  temple  on  this  island,  perhaps  on  all  the  islands,  for 
human  sacrifices.  When  I  asked  how  many  human  victims 
were  offered  there,  the  reply  was :  ua  lau,  ua  lau,  ua  lau, 
etc.  There  were  four  hundred  and  four  hundred  and 
four  hundred,  etc.  In  a  word,  the  expense  of  this  one 
heathen  temple  was  greater  than  that  of  all  the  churches 
in  the  United  States,  and  even  in  the  whole  Christian 
world.  It  was  an  expense  of  blood,  of  life,  of  souls.  And 
what  a  reign  of  terror  must  there  have  been  among  this 
simple-hearted  people  when  tabus  were  laid  on  the  dis- 
trict and  their  appointment  carefully  concealed  from  the 
people,  that  every  one  might  be  caught  and  made  a  victim 
who  was  found  out  of  his  own  doors,  and  when  the 
minions  of  the  priest  roamed  about  by  night  to  catch  the 
unsuspecting  and  innocent. 

I  am  on  the  whole  much  pleased  with  the  progress 
made  in  children's  schools  and  in  the  qualification  of  their 
teachers  during  the  last  year.  But  the  art  of  governing, 
both  in  the  family,  in  the  school,  and  in  the  nation,  must 
be  very  much  cultivated  before  schools  can  be  a  very  eflfi- 
cient  means  of  improvement  in  the  hands  of  native 
teachers. 

April,  1833.  By  the  ship  Mentor  there  arrived  at 
Honolulu  Rev,  and  Mrs.  Benjamin  Parker,  and  Rev.  and 
Mrs.  Lowell  Smith.  This  being  the  sixth  company,  or 
the  fifth  reenforcement.  Soon  after  the  arrival  of  this 
reenforcement  the  Mission  gathered  for  their  Annual,  or 
General,  Meeting  at  Honolulu,  and  held  prolonged  dis- 
cussion as  to  the  location  of  the  several  couples  and  the 
sending  of  missionaries  to  the  Marquesas  Islands. 

In  accord  with  the  vote  of  the  Mission  Meeting  of 
June,  1833,  three  families,  the  Alexanders,  Armstrongs, 
and  Parkers,  proceeded  by  way  of  Tahiti  to  the  Marquesas 
Islands,  where  they  remained  eight  months,  during  which 
period  they  encountered  the  utmost  dangers  and  priva- 
tions possible,  short  of  loss  of  life.  They  were  most 
warmly  welcomed  by  their  brethren  upon  their  return 
to  Hawaii. 


144  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Extracts  from  a  letter  by  W.  P.  Alexander,  from 
Taiohae,  Marquesas  Islands,  dater  September  4^  18S3: 

I  learned  yesterday  that  when  the  Missionary  Packet 
lay  at  anchor  here  for  three  days  a  year  ago,  a  plot  was 
formed  to  kill  all  on  board  and  take  the  vessel.  A  man 
of  considerable  importance  conceived  the  design,  but  as 
he  could  get  but  one  chief  to  join  him  he  could  not 
execute  it. 

Taiohae,  April  3,  183^.  In  view  of  all  the  facts  which 
we  had  gathered  we  felt  on  Monday  evening  as  if  it  was 
time  to  halt  and  seriously  consider  the  whole  state  of  this 
mission.  We  therefore  agreed  to  observe  Tuesday,  the 
first  of  April,  as  a  day  of  fasting  and  prayer  to  God  for 
direction  in  the  path  of  duty.  In  the  afternoon  when 
we  met  together  for  conference  and  united  prayer,  in 
view  of  the  facts  before  us,  we  unanimously  agreed  that 
it  is  our  duty  to  abandon  this  field,  embracing  the  first 
good  opportunity  of  returning  to  the  Sandwich  Islands. 
The  population  in  this  field  capable  of  being  brought  under 
the  influence  of  missionaries  is  too  small  to  justify  the 
Board  in  sustaining  a  mission  here,  when  such  vast  fields 
are  calling  for  their  efforts.  Considering,  therefore,  the 
numbers  and  situation  of  the  people  and  the  danger  of 
our  situation  among  them  and,  considering  the  wants  of 
one  hundred  thousand  in  the  Sandwich  Islands,  it  ap- 
pears to  us  to  be  the  path  of  wisdom  and  duty  to  abandon 
this  field  and  return  to  the  Sandwich  Islands. 

Honolulu,  May  13,  183Jt.  When  we  finally  left  the 
Marquesas  the  crews  of  both  vessels  laid  hold  with  vigor 
and  before  it  was  dark  had  all  our  goods  on  board  the 
two  ships.  Before  we  got  our  goods  all  aboard,  however, 
the  natives  grew  almost  furious  with  a  desire  to  get  them. 
Before  Mr.  Parker  had  succeeded  in  getting  his  removed 
they  pulled  over  one  side  of  his  house  and  tore  away 
all  his  partitions.  About  dark  we  got  aboard  ourselves 
and  felt  grateful  that  we  got  off  so  well.  Yesterday  we 
astonished  the  brethren  here  by  our  arrival. 


XV 
JOUKNAL  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838 


F 


BOM  letter  written  hy  A.  Thurston,  D.  Bald- 
win, and  R.  Tinker,  Honolulu,  July  15, 
183  If: 


Mr.  Euggles,  on  account  of  his  declining  health,  de- 
cided, with  the  approbation  of  the  mission,  to  embark 
in  the  ship  Telegraph,^  Captain  Sayre,  for  the  United 
States.  He  and  his  family  sailed  in  January  last  and 
with  them  Lucy  Bingham  and  Emily  Whitney,  to  be 
educated  among  our  intelligent  and  Christian  population. 
On  the  23d  of  May  it  pleased  the  Lord  to  afflict  us  in 
the  death  of  Mrs.  Eogers.  It  was  an  event  we  looked 
not  for,  an  admonition  to  be  always  ready.  She  was 
buried  in  the  same  grave  with  her  two  infant  children. 
Mr.  Shepard,  of  whom  we  have  heretofore  spoken  of  as 
one  near  the  grave,  continued  with  us  the  last  twelve 
months  ready  to  depart  and,  at  times,  apparently  on  the 
point  of  going,  and  then  reviving  again  so  as  to  devote 
some  attention  to  the  reading  of  proof  sheets  and  to 
other  business  of  the  printing  department;  labors  to 
which  he  was  ardently  devoted  even  to  the  last  for  it  was 
his  heart's  desire  to  supply  the  nation  with  the  word 
of  life.  He  died  on  the  morning  of  the  Sabbath,  July 
6,  1834. 

As  to  your  inquiries  in  reference  to  the  chiefs,  we  would 
say:  while  Governor  Adams  had  charge  of  Oahu  he  still 
acted  as  governor  of  Hawaii,  and  has  now  returned 
thither.  Hoapili  resides  at  present  at  Honolulu  as  a 
counselloj  in  the  affairs  of  the  nation,  but  is  the  governor 

145 


146  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

of  Maui.  It  is  not  easy  to  say  precisely  how  many  of 
the  chiefs  are  entitled  to  a  seat  in  the  national  council. 
As  to  the  authority  of  the  Prime  Minister  it  may  be  re- 
marked that  Kaahumanu  derived  her  authority  from 
Kamehameha  on  account  of  the  minority  of  his  sons, 
and  shared  it  in  common  with  Kalanimoku.  When 
Kalanimoku  died  all  that  authority,  the  king  being  yet 
a  minor,  was  left  with  Kaahumanu  who,  at  her  decease, 
willed  her  authority,  as  well  as  lands,  to  Kinau,  who  now 
bears  the  office  of  Prime  Minister.  She  acts  as  governess 
of  Oahu,  but  her  power  as  Minister  of  State  depends 
much  upon  the  voice  and  influence  of  the  king. 

From  report  of  Sandivich  Island  Mission  to  the 
American  Board,  July,  183 Jf.: 

When  the  people  are  sick  medicine  is  sometimes  called 
for,  but  it  commonly  happens  that  the  missionaries  do 
not  know  of  the  illness  of  their  neighbors  till  callefl  to 
attend  their  funerals.  The  service  on  such  occasion  is 
performed  sometimes  at  the  house  and  sometimes  at  the 
grave.  The  corpse  is  usually  wound  up  in  black  Tcapa 
without  a  coffin.  So  far  as  recollected  only  one  of  fifty 
whose  funerals  were  attended  the  past  year,  was  buried 
in  a  coffin.  A  few  only  attend  on  funeral  services,  ten, 
fifteen,  or  twenty,  for  whose  benefit  a  portion  of  Scripture 
is  read,  a  few  remarks  made  and  a  prayer  offered. 

From  letter  hy  Mrs.  Thurston,  Kailua,  October  23, 
183Jf: 

When  w.e  went  down  to  Oahu  to  the  General  Meeting 
of  the  Mission  last  June,  we  repaired  immediately  to 
Mr.  Bingham's.  His  family  was  soon  collected  in  the 
parlor  and  it  was  at  once  suggested  to  our  minds  that 
the  presence  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Whitney  were  alone  wanting 
to  make  out  all  that  remained  of  the  pioneers  of  our 
mission.  Being  in  a  neighboring  house  they  were  im- 
mediately called  in  and  for  the  first  time  since  quitting 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838      147 

the  brig  Thaddeus,  1820,  all  whose  feet  continued  to  press 
the  soil  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  were  together  in  one 
spot.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Whitney  had  no  children  by  their 
side.  They,  four  in  number,  were  far  away  from  their 
parents  and  from  each  other.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bingham 
appeared  with  two  little  children.  Two  they  had  sent 
home,  and  two  they  had  laid  in  their  graves;  ourselves 
with  our  four  children  alone  appeared  an  unbroken 
family.  Mr.  Whitney  remarked  that  his  heart  never  came 
so  near  breaking  as  when  he  sent  away  his  last  child. 
"But,"  he  says,  "if  I  had  not  sent  away  my  children 
1835  would  not  find  me  at  the  Sandwich  Islands."  Mr. 
Eichards  had  seven  children,  the  most  numerous  family 
of  any  upon  the  ground.  With  the  exception  of  Mr. 
Goodrich's  family,  who  will  ere  long,  probably,  sail  for 
America,  our  three  families  alone  furnish  children  over 
six  or  seven  years  of  age.  Still,  at  our  last  General  Meet- 
ing, no  less  than  forty-seven  children  of  the  mission  were 
brought  together.  The  missionaries  daily  assembled  in 
a  retired  school  house,  near  the  Mission  House,  so  that 
the  children  were  allowed  at  any  hour  to  go  from  one 
to  the  other  and  often  used  to  attend  the  meetings  and 
we  were  sometimes  amused  to  see  the  scene  which  was 
spread  out  before  us.  One  father  would  be  seen  with  a 
child  on  his  knee,  another  with  one  slumbering  at  his 
feet,  a  third  walking  to  and  fro  on  the  vacant  end  of  the 
house,  leading  one  by  the  hand.  Here  a  little  boy  by 
his  father's  side  would  be  making  dogs  and  horses  not  to 
be  distinguished;  there  a  group  formed  trying  their  skill 
in  drawing  geometrical  diagrams,  or,  perhaps  braiding, 
the  rushes  at  the  feet  furnishing  facilities;  while  at  a 
little  distance  their  mothers  would  be  seated  engaged  in 
a  book  or  plying  their  needles.  In  this  way  I  have  seen 
twenty  children  displayed  through  the  house,  while  their 
fathers  were  engaged  in  their  discussion^.  In  our  situa- 
tion I  approve  the  motto:  that  the  missionary  best  serves 
his  generation  who  serves  the  public,  and  his  wife  serves 
her  generation  who  serves  her  family. 


148  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

A  wooden  house  sent  out  from  America  to  Mr.  Stewart 
by  his  friends  was,  by  the  mission,  sent  to  Mr.  Thurston. 
It  is  placed  in  our  large  retired  yard  at  Kailua,  Hawaii, 
and  both  yard  and  house  are  specially  devoted  to  the 
accommodation  of  our  children.  It  has  been  to  me  like 
the  shadow  of  a  great  rock  in  a  weary  land.  Here  is 
our  school  room  and  sleeping  apartment.  Our  other 
house,  which  is  capacious,  is  open  to  all  our  household 
employments  performed  by  natives.  There,  too,  is  Mr. 
Thurston's  study  so  situated  that  his  school  and  people 
can  ever  have  access  to  him  without  in  the  least  annoying 
my  department. 

The  Following  Persons  Weee  Located  at  their 
Several  Stations  by  Vote  of  the  Mission 
IN  1834: 

Mr.  Gulick  is  stationed  at  Koloa,  a  new  post  on  the 
southern  shore  of  Kauai, 

Mr.  Alexander  is  to  occupy  one  of  the  two  remaining 
stations  near  the  north  end  of  the  same  island. 

Mr.  Clark  is  removed  from  Honolulu  to  Lahainaluna 
to  assist  in  the  instruction  of  the  High  School. 

Mr,  Tinker  is  to  remove  from  Wailuku  on  Maui  to 
Honolulu  to  take  charge  of  the  periodical  paper,  Ke 
Kumu  Hawaii,  and  perform  such  other  missionary  labor 
as  he  may  be  able. 

Mr,  Smith  removes  from  Molokai  to  take  a  new  station 
at  Ewa  about  fourteen  miles  west  of  Honolulu, 

Mr,  Armstrong  is  to  occupy  a  new  post  on  East  Maui, 
as  he  and  the  brethren  of  that  island  shall  determine. 

Mr.  Parker  is  to  take  one  of  the  vacant  districts  on 
Hawaii  or  Oahu  at  his  own  discretion. 

From  letter  by  E.  W.  ClarJc,  Honolulu,  September 
28,  1833.  Rejoicing  in  the  arrival  of  Rev.  John  Diell 
as  Seamen's  Chaplain  of  Honolulu,  he  says: 

Much  time  must  yet  elapse  before  the  Bible  can  all  be 
translated  and  corrected  for  a  uniform  edition.     Besides, 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838      149 

the  Sandwich  Islanders  are  not  yet  a  reading  people. 
Although  twenty  thousand  or  more  can  read,  a  small 
portion  only  of  this  number  have  acquired  the  habit  of 
reading  books  for  the  sake  of  knowing  and  understanding 
the  contents.  They  need  more  school  instruction,  more 
mental  discipline  in  order  to  read  our  books  with  profit. 
Great  multitudes,  however,  and  even  all  our  readers  would 
derive  much  advantage  from  having  the  Scriptures,  and 
other  books,  in  their  own  hands;  and  they  ought,  I  think, 
all  to  be  supplied,  at  least  with  the  New  Testament,  as 
soon  as  possible. 

From  letter  hy  L.  Andrews,  Lakainaluna,  October 
1,  1S34: 

As  soon  as  practicable  after  the  General  Meeting  of 
1831,  Mr.  Eichards  and  myself  commenced  the  examina- 
tion of  several  sites  in  the  neighborhood  of  Lahaina  for 
the  location  of  the  school.  We  at  length  fixed  upon  the 
present  spot,  which  has  since  been  named  by  the  scholars 
Lahainaluna,  or  Upper  Lahaina.  It  is  situated  back  of 
Lahaina  about  two  miles  and  its  elevation  above  it  has 
been  estimated  at  seven  hundred  feet.  Hence  we  look 
down  upon  Lahaina  as  upon  a  map.  As  yet  there  is 
no  road,  except  a  foot  path  and  that  a  poor  one,  from 
the  school  to  the  sea  shore.  The  site  was  in  a  wild,  bar- 
ren, rude  state,  but  by  cultivation  and  irrigation  is  capable 
of  being  made  very  fertile  and  pleasant.  The  prospect 
is  extensive  and  fine.  As  soon  as  the  site  was  fixed  upon, 
notice  was  sent  to  the  different  stations  that  the  school 
would  commence  on  the  fifth  of  September,  1831. 
Previously  to  that  time  some  scholars  had  arrived  from 
Hawaii,  but  none  as  yet  from  the  leeward  islands.  Dur- 
ing the  week  or  ten  days  previous  to  the  first  Monday 
of  September  a  native  house  was  put  up  for  my  family, 
whither  we  removed.  On  the  Saturday  before  the  school 
commenced  some  of  the  Lahaina  scholars  erected  a  lanai, 
or  shed,  of  kukui  poles  and  grass  for  a  school  house.    It 


150  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

served  only  as  a  screen  from  the  sun,  as  it  would  not 
shed  rain  at  all  and  from  the  materials  it  could  last  but  a 
few  months.  My  own  house  was  without  doors  or  win- 
dows for  several  weeks,  and  it  was  about  two  months  be- 
fore we  had  any  place  for  cooking  except  the  open  air. 

The  school  commenced  on  the  fifth  of  September,  1831. 
About  twenty-five  scholars,  chiefly  from  Maui  and  Hawaii, 
were  all  that  had  assembled  from  their  respective  islands. 
After  the  school  had  continued  about  two  weeks,  and  it  was 
manifest  the  scholars  were  interested  in  it,  I  ventured  to 
propose  the  subject  of  building  a  school  house.  I  told  them 
this  school  was  designed  to  be  a  permanent  one,  that 
many  things  yet  remained  for  them  to  have,  but  that 
we  had  no  conveniences,  that  upon  them  depended  the 
success  of  the  school,  that  when  it  was  manifest  that 
they  wished  for  instruction,  and  would  do  anything  to 
gain  it,  the  good  people  of  Christian  lands  would  assist 
them,  that  learning  was  not  only  a  good  thing,  but  it 
was  a  duty  to  labor  to  obtain  it,  but  that  knowledge 
could  not  be  obtained  without  conveniences,  such  as  a 
permanent  house,  tables,  seats,  books,  paper,  etc.,  that 
books  would  be  made  by  us  as  far  as  we  could  make  them, 
but  that  we  were  not  then  able  to  build  a  house.  They 
all  assented  that  what  I  had  said  was  proper  and  that 
they  would  work  if  I  would  show  them  how,  that  I  must 
be  their  teacher  and  their  chief.  I  told  them  that  I 
would  be  their  teacher  but  not  their  chief.  If  they  worked, 
they  must  work  willingly  and  cheerfully.  It  was  for 
their  own  benefit  and  not  for  mine.  Such  was  the  drift 
of  the  conversation  at  that  time.  I  dismissed  them  by 
requesting  them  to  think  well  of  the  matter  and  to- 
morrow we  would  talk  more  about  it. 

After  school  the  next  day  I  asked  them  what  they 
thought  of  a  school  house?  They  said  they  had  thought 
some  about  it  and  their  thought  was  they  could  build 
one  if  I  would  show  them  how.  The  kind  of  building 
was  agreed  upon  the  day  before.  As  stones  were  con- 
venient it  was  thought  a  stone  house  would  be  the  quick- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838      151 

est  and  easiest  to  build.  It  only  remained  to  settle  the 
time  of  commencing  the  work.  As  usual  with  Hawaiians, 
some  said  next  week,  some  next  month,  and  so  on,  but 
no  one  thought  of  the  present  as  suitable.  I  asked  them 
what  the  harm  of  beginning  now?  They  made  several 
objections  without  answering  my  question.  I  asked  again, 
what  would  be  the  harm  of  beginning  now?  They  said 
we  know  no  harm,  but  it  is  not  the  custom  of  Hawaiian 
people  to  be  quick  at  work.  I  then  said,  those  of  you 
who  are  willing  to  commence  now,  follow  me,  those  who 
wish  to  wait  till  next  month  may  sit  still.  I  then  took 
up  such  a  sized  stone  as  I  could  conveniently  carry  and 
walked  to  the  site  of  the  contemplated  house,  twelve  or 
fifteen  rods  perhaps,  where  I  laid  it  down.  More  than 
half  of  the  school  very  promptly  followed  and  imitated 
my  example  and  all  of  them  for  curiosity  or  some  other 
motive  within  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  came  on  to  the 
ground.  We  worked  about  an  hour  and  I  then  dismissed 
them.  From  this  time  on  we  worked  regularly  an  hour 
or  two  immediately  after  school  both  in  the  morning 
and  in  the  afternoon.  I  taxed  myself  to  do  as  much  as 
any  of  them,  though  I  could  not  carry  very  large  stones. 
In  about  fifteen  days  it  was  judged  we  had  stones  enough 
collected  for  the  body  of  the  house  and  we  commenced 
laying  them  up.  About  the  first  of  November  the  walls 
were  finished.  The  house  was  forty  feet  by  twenty  inside, 
walls  three  feet  thick.  The  building  stood  on  a  side  hill 
and  we  designed  to  have  the  floor  an  inclined  plane  or 
rather  steps  at  regular  intervals.  The  walls,  therefore, 
were  about  eight  feet  in  heighth  at  the  upper  end  and 
about  twelve  at  the  lower.  When  the  walls  were  up  it 
was  necessary  that  school  should  be  dismissed  to  go  and 
get  timber.  The  nearest  timber  suitable  for  beams  and 
rafters  for  the  school  house  was  twenty-five  miles  and 
more  of  it,  upwards  of  thirty.  The  sticks  of  timber  were 
divided  out  to  companies  and  the  school  was  dismissed 
with  a  charge  to  return  as  soon  as  they  could  obtain 
their  timber.     They  went  to   different   places   on  East 


152  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Maui  where  they  supposed  they  should  succeed  best.  As 
there  were  then  about  sixty  scholars  the  timber  required 
would  be  equal  to  one  stick  to  a  scholar  and  I  supposed 
a  week  or  ten  days  would  be  sufficient. 

After  waiting  four  or  five  weeks,  in  which  time  I 
scarcely  heard  from  them,  I  sent  for  them  to  return 
whether  they  had  any  timber  or  not.  The  fact  was  there 
had  been  some  very  stormy  weather;  but  the  principal 
reason  of  their  delay  was,  that  the  chief  at  Lahaina  had 
given  direction  to  the  people  in  the  neighborhood  of  the 
timber  to  supply  the  scholars  with  food  while  thus  en- 
gaged and  the  scholars,  finding  themselves  so  much  better 
provided  for  than  they  had  been  at  school,  were  in  no 
hurry  to  shorten  their  stay.  And,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  scholars  told  such  marvellous  stories  about  the  differ- 
ence between  vowels  and  consonants  and  the  position  of 
the  mouth  in  pronouncing  them  and  the  wonderful  in- 
fluence of  commas,  semicolons,  and  periods  on  the  mean- 
ing of  a  sentence,  all  of  which  they  had  learned  at  the 
high  school,  that  they  were  considered  by  no  means  un- 
welcome guests  by  their  more  illiterate  neighbors.  In 
the  course  of  ten  days  or  so  from  the  time  I  sent  for 
them  they  all  got  back.  During  their  absence,  however, 
there  had  come  a  long  storm  of  rain,  together  with  a 
strong  wind,  and  as  the  house  was  built  on  a  side  hill 
the  rain  that  fell  within  the  walls  was  prevented  from 
running  off  by  the  wall  on  the  lower  side  and  thus  soaked 
into  the  ground,  rendering  the  foundation  soft,  when  two- 
thirds  of  the  house  fell  flat  to  the  ground.  After  the 
scholars  returned  we  held  a  council  to  consider  what 
should  be  done.  It  was  thought  best  to  rebuild  the  house, 
but  not  until  after  the  rainy  season  should  be  over,  which 
would  be  in  a  few  weeks.  We,  therefore,  laid  aside  regu- 
lar labor  and  attended  to  study  as  well  as  we  could,  for 
one-half  of  our  lanai,  or  shed,  had  been  blow  away  by  the 
wind. 

About  the  first  of  February  it  was  supposed  the  storms 
of  the  season  were  over  and  we  began  to  think  of  re- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838      153 

building  our  school  house.  We  held  a  consultation  and 
formed  a  resolution  to  that  effect.  We  altered  the  plan 
of  our  building  and  somewhat  enlarged  it.  The  house 
was  now  fifty  feet  by  twenty  inside  and  stood  fronting 
the  sea.  When  the  walls  were  again  up,  school  was  dis- 
missed in  order  that  the  scholars  might  go  and  fetch  their 
timber,  as  most  of  it  still  remained  in  the  places  where 
it  was  cut.  The  timber  (most  of  it  large  and  heavy, 
particularly  the  rafters)  was  carried  on  their  shoulders 
or  dragged  on  the  ground  with  ropes  except  perhaps  a 
few  sticks  brought  on  canoes  a  part  of  the  way.  In  a 
week  or  two  it  was  brought  on  the  ground.  And  now 
it  became  me  to  lay  aside  the  mason  and  assume  the 
carpenter.  During  the  months  of  April  and  May  the 
scholars  were  engaged  in  finishing  the  materials  and  cov- 
ering the  roof  and,  when  not  in  the  mountain  collecting 
aho  and  Jci  leaves  for  thatching,  we  had  school  as  usual. 
The  house  was  just  covered  before  our  General  Meeting 
in  June,  1833. 

On  the  fourteenth  of  February  we  published  the  first 
Hawaiian  Newspaper  ever  printed  at  the  Sandwich  Islands. 
Of  the  style  in  which  it  was  got  up  I  say  nothing,  as 
we  have  but  one  sort  of  type  and  those  had  once  been 
so  much  worn  out  as  to  be  thrown  aside,  as  had  also  our 
press.  We  called  the  paper,  Ka  Lama  Hawaii,  that  is: 
The  Hawaiian  Luminary. 

From  letter  by  E.  W.  ClarTc,  Lahain<duna,  November 
10,  183  Jt: 

The  High  School  is  becoming  a  very  important  branch 
of  our  work.  It  is  clear  to  my  mind,  and  I  believe  to 
the  minds  of  all  the  members  of  the  mission,  that  if  the 
school  cannot  be  sustained  and  carried  forward,  all  hopes 
with  regard  to  the  permanent  success  of  the  Gospel  here 
are  cut  off.  I  cannot  well  see  how  the  operations  of  the 
mission  can  be  carried  forward  with  any  success  with- 
out it.     T^he  land  which  has  been  given  by  the  king  and 


154  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

chiefs  to  the  school  we  regard  as  an  invaluable  help,  as 
it  will  afford  the  scholars  the  means  of  procuring  their 
own  food  and  give  us  full  control  over  the  land  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  school,  the  importance  of  which  we  have 
greatly  felt. 

November  14,  1835.  We  have  been  called  to  suffer  a 
severe  domestic  affliction.  Our  oldest  child,  a  beloved 
daughter  five  and  a  half  years  old,  was  suddenly  removed 
from  us  in  March  last  by  the  croup. 

December,  183^.  Rev.  D.  B.  Lyman  mentions  that  by 
vote  of  the  mission  they  have  been  directed  to  establish 
a  Boarding  School  at  Hilo.  Also,  Mr.  Lyman  speaks  of 
tours  made  both  in  Puna  and  in  North  Hilo. 

From  Mission  Letter  of  July  3,  1835,  from  Hono- 
lulu: 

Mr.  Armstrong  became  very  ill,  their  house  being  leaky 
and  damp,  and  on  Thursday,  January  first,  the  natives 
having  very  ingeniously  constructed  an  excellent  litter  he 
was  removed  from  Haiku  to  Wailuku.  The  adult  scholars 
in  his  school  volunteered  their  services  on  the  occasion  and 
he  was  removed  with  great  tenderness  and  care.  We 
acknowledge  their  kindness  and  are  grateful  for  it. 

The  political  affairs  of  the  nation  are  more  settled  than 
they  were  last  year  and  the  laws  better  enforced.  The 
king,  though  still  greatly  devoted  to  pleasure,  is  more 
disposed  to  listen  to  the  counsel  of  the  older  chiefs.  He 
is  very  respectful  to  missionaries,  and  occasionally  attends 
church.  Kinau  still  holds  the  office  of  Prime  Minister, 
and  the  governors  of  the  other  islands  are  the  same  as 
stated  last  year. 

We  love  this  mission  better  than  father  or  mother, 
brother  and  sister,  friends  and  country.  And  it  is  the 
affectionate  solicitude  we  feel  for  it  that  leads  us  to  say 
again  and  again:  "Brethren  pray  for  this  people  and 
for  us,  send  hither  more  light,  for  the  darkness  is  not 
past,  though  the  day  has  begun  to  dawn." 

Habits  of  industry  appear  to  be  slowly  gaining  ground 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838       155 

and  nothing,  probably,  is  wanting  to  render  them  general 
but  proper  incentives  to  labor.  The  quantity  of  clothing 
worn  by  the  natives  is,  we  think,  annually  increasing,  and 
the  frail  native  tapa  is  giving  place  more  and  more  to 
the  foreign  fabric  and  the  American  style  of  dress.  Espe- 
cially is  this  true  at,  and  near,  the  several  mission  sta- 
tions. Perhaps  no  article  of  foreign  manufacture  is  so 
much  called  for  among  these  natives  as  our  domestic 
cottons,  and  none  is  probably  more  useful  to  them. 

In  consequence  of  the  great  trouble  among  seamen 
touching  at  this  port,  because  of  rum,  a  petition  was 
drawn  up  during  the  last  year  and  signed  by  twenty-five 
ship  masters  praying  the  king  to  suppress  all  the  grog 
shops  in  the  place.  Soon  after  this  another  petition  was 
drawn  up  and  signed  by  the  high  chiefs  and  more  than 
three  thousand  of  the  most  respectable  natives  of  Honolulu 
and  its  vicinity,  asking  of  the  king  the  entire  suppression 
of  the  sale,  manufacture,  and  use  of  ardent  spirits  on 
the  islands.  In  a  letter  like  this  we  can  only  allude  to 
the  painful  subject,  but  we  do  earnestly  pray  the  Pruden- 
tial Committee,  and  all  who  wish  to  see  the  Eedeemer's 
Kingdom  established  in  heathen  lands,  to  do  all  in  their 
power  to  stay  this  dreadful  tide  of  fiery  ruin,  which  rolls 
from  our  native  shores  and  threatens  to  deluge  whole 
nations  in  its  course. 

A  very  large  thatched  building  was  erected  for  a  meet- 
ing house  at  Kailua  in  1826.  Messrs.  Thurston  and 
Bishop  speak  of  it  as  being  burnt  down  in  1835,  and  of 
the  resolve  to  erect  a  stone  building,  which  will  require 
two  years  in  the  construction.^ 

From  letter  hy  J.  S.  Green,  WailuJcu,  March  16, 
1836: 

Today,  after  making  a  few  remarks  to  the  people,  I 
called  upon  Bartimeus,  the  blind  man  from  Hilo,  to  ad- 

1  ThiB  the  projected  stone  building  is,  doubtless,  the  large  stone 
church  standing  today  (1917)  at  Kailua. 


156  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

dress  the  congregation  as  he  had  just  arrived.  He  did 
so  and  afforded  us  great  satisfaction  by  his  excellent  and 
well  told  remarks.  I  am  unusually  pleased  with  this 
man,  he  is  so  humble  and  well  instructed  in  the  things 
pertaining  to  the  Kingdom  of  God.  He  is  going  to  make 
the  tour  of  East  Maui.  I  trust  he  Will  be  an  instrument 
of  great  good.  May  the  Saviour  go  with  him  and  bless 
his  exhortations  to  the  salvation  of  some,  at  least,  of  the 
poor  benighted  occupants  of  the  island. 

In  a  letter  of  Messrs.  Green  and  Armstrong  of  date, 
Wailuku,  November  16,  1836,  they  mention  the  founding 
of  the  "Wailuku  Girls'  Boarding  School.  Mr,  Armstrong 
has  charge  of  the  church  and  pastoral  work,  while  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Green  and  Miss  Brown  are  beginning  a  girls* 
industrial  school.  They  speak  of  a  dozen  girls  as  having 
successfully  woven  a  piece  of  cotton  cloth.  Governor 
Hoapili  advises  the  people  to  send  their  girls  to  the 
school. 

One  of  the  missionaries  who  spends  his  Sabbaths  in 
Haiku  has  a  congregation  of  three  hundred. 

From  letter  hy  Miss  Maria  Ogden,  Lahaina,  1836: 

Were  I  now  in  America  with  the  knowledge  I  have 
of  the  trials  of  a  missionary  life  I  would  gladly  go  forth 
to  meet  them  all  for  the  privilege  of  laboring  for  these 
poor  people.  I  ask  no  greater  happiness  this  side  of 
heaven  than  to  labor  and  die  in  the  blessed  work. 

Mission  Report  of  Augiist  23,  1836,  contains  mention 
of  the  initial  gift  for  the  building  of  the  Kawaiahao  Stone 
Church.  The  king,  as  you  will  see,  is  very  friendly  as 
shown  by  his  gift  of  $3000  for  the  proposed  new  church 
edifice. 

From  letter  hy  Rev.  J.  8.  Emerson,  Waialua,  April 
21, 1881: 

For  the  support  of  the  ten  schools  under-  my  care  I 
have  paid  out  about  one  hundred  and  twenty  dollars  dur- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838      157 

ing  the  past  year,  about  thirty  dollars  of  which  was  con- 
tributed by  the  parents  and  friends  of  the  children,  the 
rest  has  been  obtained  from  the  funds  of  the  Board;  and 
could  our  patrons  at  home  see  the  pleasing  improvement 
made  by  a  few  children  and  the  stimulus  given  to  the 
teachers  by  the  occasional  bestowment  of  a  shirt  and  pair 
of  pantaloons  upon  them,  I  think  they  would  both  pray 
in  faith  and  weep  for  gratitude  that  such  small  sacrifices 
can  be  made  to  result  in  so  much  good.  We  have  one 
teacher  from  the  High  School  who  is  doing  well,  all  the 
rest  of  our  teachers  have  been  trained  up  at  the  station. 

From  letter  hy  Wm.  Richards,  Sag  Harbor,  Massor 
chusetts,  May  13,  1837: 

On  the  9th  of  December  I  embarked  from  Oahu  with 
my  family,  consisting  of  Mrs.  Richards  and  six  of  our 
children,  together  with  Mr.  Bishop's  oldest  daughter,  nine 
of  us  in  all.  We  have  left  our  two  youngest  children  at 
the  islands.  Mrs.  Richards'  general  health  is  much  as 
it  was  when  we  left  the  islands,  having  some  cough  and 
her  general  health  being  rather  low.  The  rest  of  us  are 
all  in  good  health. 

New  Haven,  July  3,  1S37.  An  opening  has  been  very 
providentially  made  for  two  of  our  children  in  the  family 
of  a  Mr.  Williston,  East  Hampton.  We  have  no  distinct 
opening  yet  for  our  three  oldest  boys,  but  do  not  feel 
greatly  anxious. 

From  letter  of  Lorenzo  Lyons,  May  26,  1837 : 

I  cannot  close  the  report  without  alluding  to  some  of 
the  scenes  through  which  I  have  been  called  to  pass.  A 
fond  and  lovely  son,  an  infant  five  months  old,  the  young- 
est and  tenderest  branch  of  my  family  has  been  laid  in 
the  lone  grave.  No  missionary  brother  or  sister  was 
present    at    the    time    to    soothe    the    parents'    wounded 


158  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

hearts.  Soon  after,  my  eldest  son  was  laid  upon  the  bed 
of  sickness  and  brought  so  near  to  death  that  we  despaired 
of  his  recovery.  But  the  Lord  raised  him  up.  But  there 
remained  concealed  from  mortal  view  another  trial  of 
a  most  overwhelming  nature.  This  was  the  death,  on 
May  14,  1837,  of  one  who  was  bone  of  my  bone  and 
flesh  of  my  flesh,  the  partner  of  my  joys  and  sorrows, 
the  wife  of  my  bosom,  the  counsellor  and  companion  of 
my  youth.  The  blow  I  feel  most  deeply,  but  the  Lord 
has  sustained  me  under  it.  Her  career  was  short,  but 
useful.  Angels,  I  trust,  have  welcomed  her  to  a  higher 
and  nobler  sphere  of  action.  But  while  I  mourn  the  loss 
of  my  beloved  wife  a  laborer  in  the  missionary  work,  I 
rejoice  at  the  seasonable  arrival  of  my  helpers. 

January  15,  1838.  The  Lord  is  doing  great  things 
for  Waimea  and  Hamakua.  He  is  driving  his  chariot 
of  salvation  through  the  length  and  breadth  of  the  land. 
Sinners  are  fleeing  for  their  lives,  the  word  of  God  pursues 
them  with  resistless  power.  The  Holy  Ghost  pours  its 
naked  truth  all  burning  upon  their  souls.  There  is  no 
alternative  but  to  yield  and  live  or  resist  and  die.  Multi- 
tudes seem  to  prefer  the  former.  The  Lord  is  putting 
a  new  song  into  my  mouth  so  that  I  can  sing  as  on  an 
angel's  harp.  The  year  of  jubilee  has  come.  Return  ye 
sorrowing  sinners!  or,  rather, 

"The  glorious  harvest  now  is  come. 
See  sorrowing  sinners  flocking  home !" 

The  first  Sabbath  in  this  month  was  a  most  interesting 
and  blessed  day.  Multitudes  assembled  together  to  wor- 
ship God.  The  meeting  house  was  too  small  for  Ihem 
so  that  we  held  our  worship  in  the  open  air  under  the 
broad  canopy  of  heaven.  ^Vhat  need  of  a  more  spacious 
temple?  In  the  afternoon  I  had  the  blessed  and  delight- 
ful privilege  of  baptizing  two  hundred  and  twenty  in- 
dividuals and  receiving  them  to  the  church  of  the  Lord. 
Among  these  were  a  number  of  children,  some  not  more 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1834-1838      159 

than  seven  or  eight  years  of  age.  What  a  glorious 
spectacle!  The  whole  number  received  to  this  church 
within  the  past  six  months  is  three  hundred.  About 
sixty  children  among  them. 

From  letter  hy  E.  0.  Hall,  Honolulu,  April  19, 
1837: 

We  bless  the  Lord  and  take  courage,  but,  Oh,  what  a 
dying  people  this  is !  They  drop  down  on  all  sides  of 
us  and  it  seems  that  the  nation  must  speedily  become 
extinct.  Three  of  Brother  Dimond's  native  bookbinder 
boys  have  died  within  two  or  three  weeks,  and  last  night 
one  of  our  nearest  neighbors  was  called  away  who  was 
well  yesterday  morning.  What  we  do  for  people  must  be 
done  quickly. 

October  18,  1837.  In  May  last  I  was  walking  up  the 
valley  Pauoa,  which  is  about  two  miles  from  Honolulu, 
with  one  of  the  brethren  who  was  down  to  General  Meet- 
ing. In  the  course  of  our  walk  I  discovered  a  number 
of  children  who  seemed  to  be  idling  away  their  time  with- 
out any  one  to  look  after  them.  I  inquired  whether  they 
had  a  school  to  go  to,  they  answered  in  the  negative. 
After  some  further  conversation,  in  which  I  found  they 
would  be  glad  to  have  some  one  look  after  them,  I  ap- 
pointed a  school  the  next  Sabbath  for  the  children.  After 
a  week  or  two  I  requested  all  the  adults  to  come  also, 
whether  they  could  read  or  not,  and  about  two  hundred 
came.  These  I  supplied  with  books  suited  to  their  re- 
quirements. I  divided  the  school  into  classes  over  which 
I  put  the  most  intelligent  natives  I  could  find.  After 
a  few  weeks  I  got  the  children  into  week-day  schools, 
under  their  native  teachers,  visiting  them  on  Tuesday  and 
Friday  afternoons,  instructing  a  class  of  the  most  promis- 
ing myself.  Thus  I  have  continued  to  the  present  time, 
and  can  say  that  I  have  found  it  a  pleasant  duty  and  an 
agreeable  relaxation  from  the  duties  of  the  Printing 
Office. 


160  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  Artemus  BisJiop  to  the  Americcun 
Board  in  Boston,  Ewa,  Oaliu,  September  2,  1838: 

We  wish  to  be  put  on  the  same  footing  as  all  the  rest 
of  the  world  are,  who  live  on  salaries,  viz. :  to  have  a 
certain  sum  given  to  us  as  our  own,  to  make  the  best 
use  of  it  we  can,  allowing  each  man  to  be  his  own  judge. 
This,  we  think,  is  the  wise  design  of  Providence.  .  .  . 
Had  we  salaries  to  use  as  our  own,  even  though  they 
were  less  than  was  heretofore  been  allowed  us  on  the  old 
system,  I  have  no  doubt  the  Board's  money  would  be  made 
to  go  much  further  than  it  has  heretofore.^ 

2  This  marks  the  end  of  what  was,  perhaps,  the  most  successful 
experiment  of  the  Common  Stock  System,  known  in  Mission  history. 
Though  the  experiment  had  continued  for  eighteen  years,  it  may 
never  have  been  heard  of  by  the  Socialist  philosopher,  Henry 
George. 


XVI 
JOUENAL  AND  LETTEES,  1838-1839 


F 


BOM  letter  hij  A.  Bishop,  1838: 


Our  congregation  has  increased  to  about  four 
times  its  former  number.  About  one  thousand 
was  the  former  number  of  regular  hearers.  We  have  now, 
perhaps,  four  thousand  on  the  Sabbath  morning,  but  not 
that  full  amount  in  the  evening  service.  We  have  laid 
aside  the  use  of  our  chapel,  and  built  a  large  lanai,  or 
shelter,  where  we  meet  in  fair  weather  which  is  with  us 
the  greater  part  of  the  year.  The  lanai  is  one  hundred 
and  sixty-five  feet  long  and  seventy-two  feet  wide  and 
is  filled  by  the  crowd  who  mostly  sit  upon  the  ground  in 
a  compact  mass.  The  religious  aspect  of  things,  not  only 
here  but  throughout  the  islands,  has  been  much  improved 
during  the  year  past.  Some  of  those  for  whom  we  had 
hoped  better  things  have  already  gone  back  to  their  former 
sins  and  are  excluded  from  Christian  fellowship.  Such, 
I  believe,  has  been  more  or  less  the  case  in  all  parts  of 
the  islands,  but  we  are  not  taken  by  surprise.  It  is  no 
more  than  what  we  had  expected  from  the  first,  and  no 
human  foresight  or  sagacity  could  have  anticipated  the 
persons  who  should  be  of  the  number.  This  people  have 
much  idle  time  on  their  hands,  which  we  feel  anxious 
to  have  employed  to  some  valuable  end.  It  is  a  most 
difficult  task  to  teach  industry  to  an  idle  people.  But  it 
is  necessary  to  the  promotion  of  their  Christian  character. 
An  idle,  improvident  Christian  is  a  contradiction  in 
terms.     And  such  have  ever  been  the  lazy  habits  of  this 

161 


162  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

people  that  they  can  not  improve  of  themselves  without 
the  influence  and  example  of  those  who  are  willing  to 
persevere  in  teaching  and  encouraging  them  to  work.  A 
little  labor  will  suffice  to  provide  a  supply  of  food  for  their 
own  consumption  and,  besides  this,  the  wants  of  nature's 
children  are  few.  Our  Hawaiian  Christians  find  them- 
selves in  consequence  in  possession  of  much  idle  time,  and 
their  previous  habits  make  it  sit  easily  upon  them.  They 
would  be  glad  to  hire  out  at  day's  work,  but  there  are 
none  to  employ  them.  Their  time  must  therefore  be 
spent  in  indolence  or,  what  is  worse,  in  exposure  to  cor- 
rupting influences,  to  which  their  fondness  for  each 
other's  society  peculiarly  leads  them.  To  this  influence 
our  churches  will  continue  to  be  exposed  until  some  means 
of  employment  can  be  devised  which  shall  tend  to  raise 
them  from  their  poverty  and  degradation. 

Mission  Letter  June  4,  1838: 

Incipient  measures  have  been  taken  for  two  establish- 
ments for  the  manufacture  of  raw  silk;  and  one  of  sugar 
is  now  in  successful  operation  at  the  islands.  These  are 
conducted  by  foreigners,  men  of  Christian  and  moral 
principles,  who  are  giving  encouragement  to  labor  in  their 
immediate  vicinity  and  are,  therefore,  haled  as  auxiliaries 
in  the  work  of  civilizing  the  people.  The  past  year  has 
been  one  of  uncommon  interest  throughout  all  the  Sand- 
wich Islands.  Though  the  enemy  of  souls,  with  his  com- 
missioned agents,  has  opposed  the  progress  of  truth  and 
righteousness,  yet  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  has  lifted  up 
a  standard  against  him.  There  has  probably  been  no 
period  since  the  commencement  of  the  mission  when  the 
progress  of  truth  has  been  so  rapid  and  the  victories  of 
the  cross  so  numerous  and  glorious  as  during  the  year 
that  is  past.  At  every  station  there  has  been  a  revival 
of  religion.  A  great  multitude  have  professedly  turned 
to  the  Lord. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1889       168 

From  letter  by  Mr.  B.  Armstrong,  Wailuhu,  August 
U,  1838: 

My  public  labors  during  the  past  year  have  been  more 
abundant  than  they  have  any  previous  year  of  my  mis- 
sionary life.  From  last  January  till  May  first  I  attended 
more  than  twelve  meetings  a  week,  besides  almost  con- 
stant conversation  with  individuals  in  private.  Indeed, 
many  days,  I  have  been  so  pressed  from  daylight  in  the 
morning  till  late  at  night  as  scarcely  to  allow  me  time 
to  eat,  or  spend  half  an  hour  with  my  family.  At  length 
my  lungs  began  to  give  way  and  I  was  obliged  to  slack 
a  little,  though  it  must  be  at  the  expense  of  my  work. 
But  while  it  has  been  a  year  of  toil,  it  has  also  been  one 
of  enjoyment  such  as  the  world  cannot  give.  There  are 
a  few  individuals  in  the  church  whose  attainments  in 
holiness  seem  to  be  of  no  ordinary  stamp.  Among  these 
are  our  excellent  Bartimeus  and  the  wife  of  Mr,  McLane, 
a  Bostonian,  a  member  of  our  church  and  a  good  man. 
This  woman  is  marked  for  her  good  sense,  humble  walk, 
and  untiring  zeal,  and  unwavering  constancy.  Mrs.  Arm- 
strong has  often  told  me  that  she  exceeds  any  one  in 
prayer  she  has  ever  heard.  She  is  a  great  comfort,  as  well 
as  a  great  help  to  us.  I  am  always  sure  of  one  attentive 
hearer  and  one  ready  for  every  good  work.  Among  those 
recently  received  to  our  church  are  an  Englishman  and 
two  sons  of  Americans.  Prayers  now  began  to  be  offered 
with  much  fervency  and  often  with  strong  crying  and 
tears,  and  the  work  from  this  time  assumed  a  decided 
character.  Until  now  we  were  hoping  for  a  revival,  but 
now  we  felt  that  we  were  in  the  midst  of  one.  We  had, 
heretofore,  held  our  morning  meetings  in  a  large  school 
house,  which  will  hold  about  four  hundred  persons,  but 
we  were  now  obliged  to  go  to  the  meeting  house  in  order 
to  get  room.  The  meetings  were  opened  as  soon  as  I 
could  see  to  read  a  hymn  and  many  of  them  were  the 
most  solemn  and  interesting  that  I  ever  witnessed. 


164  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander,   Waioli,  Kauai, 

'August  25,  1838: 

The  showers  of  blessings  which  have  been  refreshing 
the  garden  of  the  Lord  in  these  islands  of  the  sea,  have 
not  been  withheld  from  our  field.  I  have  never  before 
witnessed  among  the  people  so  earnest  an  attention  to 
the  means  of  grace  and  so  deep  concern  for  the  salvation 
of  the  soul. 

From  letter  by  D.  Baldwin,  Lahaina,  August  17, 
1838: 

I  will  attempt  to  give  you  a  brief  account  of  what  God 
has  been  doing  for  us,  though  I  feel  that  neither  tongue 
nor  pen  can  tell  what  our  eyes  have  seen  and  our  hearts 
have  felt.  Such  scenes  were  never  intended  to  be  fully 
described  here  on  earth.  It  will  be  enough  that  they 
will  be  fully  and  perfectly  unfolded  at  the  great  day  when 
the  secrets  of  all  hearts  shall  be  made  manifest  and  we 
shall  be  prepared  to  unite  with  angels  in  joy  unspeakable 
and  in  giving  all  the  glory  to  God.  Our  protracted 
meeting  commenced  March  7th.  The  interest  we  had 
observed  among  the  people  previous  to  the  meeting  now 
became  more  general,  and  the  cases  of  decided  conviction 
or  awakening  began  to  multiply.  Indeed  the  little  cloud 
had  already  spread  till  it  seemed  to  rest  over  the  whole 
population.  There  seemed  to  be  an  awe  over  the  whole. 
During  the  week  of  the  meeting  all  business  was,  as  if 
by  instinct,  suspended.  Even  the  work  of  preparing  their 
food,  to  which  hunger  prompts,  was  not  attended  to.  It 
was  observed  that  no  fires  for  cooking  were  kindled  in 
all  the  place,  a  change  which  positive  orders  from  their 
chiefs  would  hardly  have  effected  at  any  other  time.  The 
whole  population  seemed,  during  the  week,  to  view  the 
time  as  a  Sabbath  and,  to  our  view,  even  the  hardest 
seemed  to  have  some  sense  that  God  was  near.  Those 
were  days  of  awful  solemnity  to  us.     We  had  heard  of 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1839      165 

His  pouring  down  the  Spirit  on  parts  of  Hawaii,  and 
now  we  saw  Him  advancing  in  majesty  toward  us.  We 
bowed  down  in  earnest  before  Him,  entreating  Him  not 
to  pass  by  without  giving  us  a  shower  of  blessing. 

Our  congregations  had  increased  in  size  before  the  pro- 
tracted meeting.  The  house  was  almost  always  crowded 
to  excess.  Probably  two  thousand  were  generally  present, 
while  many  went  away  who  could  not  gain  admittance, 
and  more  deep  solemnity,  stillness,  and  fixed  attention 
could  never  be  found  in  any  part  of  the  world.  AH 
classes  crowded  to  the  place  of  worship.  The  children 
thrust  themselves  in  where  they  could  find  a  little  vacancy. 
Old  hardened  transgressors,  who  had  scarcely  been  to  the 
house  of  God  for  the  whole  fifteen  years  that  the  Gospel 
had  been  preached  at  this  place,  Avere  now  seen  there  in 
tears,  melting  down  under  the  power  of  omnipotent  truth. 
The  blind,  whom  we  had  never  seen  before,  we  now  saw, 
as  we  went  to  the  house  of  God,  led  along  the  way,  some- 
times by  a  parent,  sometimes  by  a  child,  and  some,  per- 
haps, by  a  grandchild,  just  as  they  were  tottering  over 
the  grave.  Cripples,  also,  sometimes  affected  our  hearts 
deeply  as  we  saw  them  laboring  to  get  to  God's  temple 
as  hard  as  some  have  done  to  reach  that  of  Juggernaut. 
Two  of  these  were  seen,  and  are  seen  to  this  day,  crawling 
on  their  hands  and  feet  to  every  meeting.  One  of  them 
we  had  none  of  us  ever  seen  before  and  none  of  the  people 
seemed  to  know  before  that  such  a  being  was  in  existence 
and  now  we  had  some  hope  that  like  the  cripple  who  sat 
at  the  gate  called  Beautiful,  m  soul  at  least,  he  had  been 
made  whole.  Though  I  have  seen  many  revivals  in  the 
United  States,  I  have  never  before  been  in  a  place  where 
the  Spirit  of  God  seemed  so  ready  to  follow  up  every 
truth  exhibited  before  the  people.  Every  sermon  seemed 
to  do  thorough  execution.  If  terror  was  preached,  the 
people  were  terrified;  if  love  was  the  theme,  they  were 
melted;  and  those  who  had  been  before  the  most  set 
against  the  Gospel,  were,  in  many  cases,  the  first  to  fall 
under  its  power.    So  evident  was  the  effect  of  every  effort, 


166  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

both  in  awakening  individuals  and  in  making  a  general 
impression,  that  I  often  felt  as  if  I  wished  to  preach  the 
whole  twenty-four  hours  without  any  respite. 

Mrs.  Baldwin  was  sometimes  able  to  attend  meetings 
for  women  and  children,  but  one  of  our  children  being 
ill  during  most  of  the  time  she  was  obliged  to  confine 
most  of  her  efforts  to  work  at  home.  She,  therefore,  set 
apart  a  room  in  the  house  where,  when  not  engaged  in 
personal  conversation,  she  could  resort  with  pious  women 
for  prayer  and,  when  she  v/as  not  able  to  be  with 
them,  they  prayed  there  by  themselves,  so  that  often  that 
room  was  a  scene  of  prayer  from  morning  till  night.  It 
was  sometimes  literally  a  "bochim"  and  we  trust  that 
many  fervent  supplications  went  up  to  heaven  from  that 
sacred  spot,  to  return  in  effusions  of  the  Spirit  on  the 
people.  One  of  the  earliest  effects  witnessed  of  the  opera- 
tions of  the  Spirit  here  was  that  old  inveterate  smokers 
were  abandoning  their  pipes  and  flocking  to  the  house  of 
God.  It  was  seeing  these  visible  effects  of  the  Spirit 
that  first  seemed  to  give  point  and  earnestness  to  the 
prayers  of  Christians  and  some  of  them  have  continued 
their  earnestness  and  their  apparent  constancy  in  prayer 
to  this  day.  I  have  mentioned  the  interest  that  was  early 
manifested  by  many  of  the  children.  Parents  were  aston- 
ished to  find  their  little  ones  not  only  becoming  more 
docile  and  ready  to  listen  to  them,  but  to  find  them  often 
alone  praying  to  God  to  save  their  souls.  For  a  long 
time  one  could  scarcely  go  in  any  direction  in  the  sugar 
cane  or  banana  groves  without  finding  these  little  ones 
praying  and  weeping  before  God.  I  have  myself  turned 
out  a  long  way  to  avoid  disturbing  them.  The  excitement 
took  the  most  powerful  hold  of  the  central  girls'  school, 
a  school  formerly  taught  by  Miss  Ogden,  a  school  over 
which  she  labored  and  prayed  faithfully  for  many  a  year 
but  not  seeing  the  fruit  she  desired.  WTien  she  left  them 
six  months  previous,  all  were  wild  and  many  of  them 
exceedingly  wicked.  But  the  Spirit  made  a  great  over- 
turning at  once.     There  are  upwards  of  one  hundred  in 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1839      167 

this  school  and,  probably,  there  is  not  one  of  them  that 
has  not  had  considerable  concern  for  her  soul. 

November  13.  I  have  formerly  mentioned  how  power- 
fully the  Spirit  has  taken  hold  of  the  school  for  girls  in 
the  center  of  this  place.  They  were  almost  universally 
awakened  to  attend  to  the  concerns  of  their  souls  and 
comparatively  few  of  them  seemed  to  have  returned  to 
their  former  stupidity.  Only  twelve  from  this  school 
have  been  received  to  the  church,  but  there  may  be,  per- 
haps, two  or  three  times  as  many  more  who  give  evidence 
of  being  born  again,  who  will,  we  hope,  in  due  time  be 
gathered  in.  One  of  the  twelve  admitted  at  our  last  com- 
munion has  already  been  called  to  her  everlasting  rest. 
It  is  evident  that  Grace  had  made  the  most  powerful 
and  rapid  work  in  her  soul  and  when  we  think  of  her, 
a  pure  spirit  before  the  throne  of  God,  we  cannot  but 
exclaim  that  if  all  our  exertions  this  year  had  but  resulted 
in  the  translation  to  glory  of  only  this  one  individual, 
we  should  have  reaped  a  large  reward.  One  week  ago 
she  was  in  blooming  health.  Her  disease,  a  bilious  fever, 
was  very  rapid  in  its  progress.  Yesterday  her  spirit  took 
its  flight  and  this  afternoon  we  committed  her  body  to 
the  silent  grave.  She  was  probably  about  twelve  or  four- 
teen years  of  age.  From  the  time  that  her  attention  was 
arrested  at  our  protracted  meeting  in  March  last  to  the 
day  of  her  death,  her  heart  had  been  evidently  becoming 
more  and  more  deeply  interested  in  the  things  of  the 
Kingdom  of  Christ,  and  this  was  the  more  decisive  evi- 
dence of  her  piety  inasmuch  as  she  maintained  this  spirit 
in  the  midst  of  three  girls  living  in  the  same  family  who 
had  nearly  lost  all  their  seriousness.  Her  chosen  com- 
panions have  been  companions  in  praying.  She  was  often 
found  in  the  darkness  of  night  in  the  groves  of  sugar 
cane  pouring  out  her  soul  to  God.  In  her  sickness,  when 
rational,  she  expressed  great  delight  in  d'iparting  to  be 
with  Christ.  I  cannot  tell  how  many  times,  as  I  have 
looked  down  from  the  pulpit  and  seen  this  young  disciple 
like  others  sitting  on  the  mats  in  front,  her  face  looking 


168  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

up  as  if  to  catch  every  word  and  the  tears  often  coursing 
their  way  over  her  cheeks,  delight  has  thrilled  my  soul 
at  the  thought  that  ten,  twenty,  and  thirty  years  hence 
she  would  be  a  shinicg  pattern  of  piety,  a  mother  in 
Israel,  a  standing  monument  to  silence  gainsayers  and 
to  point  souls  to  Jesus,  but  in  the  case  of  this  one  God 
had  other  purposes. 

From  letter  hy  A.  Thurston^  Kailua,  April  12, 
1838: 

It  is  eighteen  years  this  day  since  we  took  up  our 
residence  on  the  shores  of  Hawaii.  On  the  12th  of  April, 
1820,  two  families  of  us  were  left  at  this  place,  then  the 
residence  of  the  king  and  most  of  the  principal  chiefs,  and 
the  rest  of  the  mission  sailed  for  the  island  of  Oahu. 
The  changes  which  have  been  effected  in  these  islands 
since  that  period  through  the  blessing  of  God  on  the 
efforts  of  this  mission  have  been  great  and  wonderful 
as  the  facts,  from  year  to  year,  given  to  the  public  have 
fully  shown. 

From  letter  of  U.  R.  Hitchcock,  Kaluaaha,  MoloJcai, 
November,  1888: 

Several  of  the  native  brethren  were  sent  out  to  the 
outstations  to  converse  with  the  people  and  they  were 
astonished  to  find  that  the  Lord  had  preceded  them  and 
had  inclined  the  hearts  of  many  to  attend  to  His  word. 
They  were  absent  one  week  and  returned  little  less  sur- 
prised at  the  power  and  goodness  of  God,  than  were  the 
disciples  when  they  exclaimed:  "Lord,  even  the  devils 
are  subject  unto  us  through  thy  name!"  This  visit  of 
these  brethren  to  the  distant  places  of  the  island  had  a 
very  beneficial  result.  Besides  the  protracted  meeting 
at  the  station  I  have  held  two  others,  one  at  Halawa,  an 


3 


< 


c 


C4 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1839      169 

outpost  twelve  miles  northeast  of  Kalnaaha,  the  other  at 
Kalamaula  twenty  miles  west.  Both  were  solemn  ses- 
sions and  the  Holy  Spirit  was  present  at  Halawa  in  a 
most  evident  manner.  From  the  commencement  the 
people  seemed  prepared  to  believe  the  word  and  every 
successive  sermon  seemed  to  increase  the  fears  of  sinners 
and  to  make  them  the  more  earnest  in  inquiring  for  salva- 
tion. No  means  but  the  naked  sword  of  the  spirit  were 
resorted  to  on  this  occasion  and  yet  there  seemed  to  be 
scarcely  an  unconverted  sinner  in  the  assembly,  which 
averaged  during  the  meeting  between  four  and  five  hun- 
dred. Never  did  I  witness  a  more  fixed  and  anxious  at- 
tention to  the  word  of  God. 

Lahaina,  January  1,  1839.  Rev.  D.  Baldwin  writes: 
The  meeting  house  on  the  Sabbath  for  two  months  past 
has  been  excessively  crowded.  We  reckon  that  above  two 
thousand  may  find  room  in  the  house.  During  Novem- 
ber we  were  in  the  midst  of  shipping  season,  and  yet 
that  was  the  time  when  our  congregations  became  more 
thronged,  which  was  a  matter  of  astonishment  to  the 
people.  Not  less  than  twenty  ships  were  at  anchor  most 
of  that  month  and  yet  a  pious  stranger  remarked  to  me 
that  the  market  was  the  solitary  place,  and  the  temple 
of  God  the  crowded  place,  a  thing  which  had  never  before 
been  so  seen  in  Lahaina.  Hoapili  and  wife  among  the 
highest  chiefs,  now  tottering  with  age,  appear  well.  They 
are  infirm,  but  always  in  the  midst  of  the  congregation. 
She  has  a  stately  and  gigantic  figure  and  within  a  few 
days  I  have  heard  her  setting  forth  the  Gospel  principles 
and  duties  to  individuals  in  private  with  a  majesty  and 
force  which  would  not  have  disgraced  an  apostle.  She 
is  an  own  sister  of  Kaahumanu  and  seems  ripening  fast 
to  join  her  in  the  holy  throng  on  high.  At  this  time 
there  is  probably  a  deeper  excitement  of  religious  feeling 
in  the  numerous  retinue  of  these  two  aged  chiefs  than 
there  has  ever  been  before  since  the  Gospel  came  to  these 
shores. 


170  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  of  L.  LyonSj  Waimea,  Hawaii^  Fehruary 
11, 1839: 

I  reached  the  valley  of  Waipio  sometime  in  the  after- 
noon. This  valley  is  some  twelve  miles  distant  from 
Waimea.  Commenced  a  protracted  meeting,  after  which 
I  laid  myself  down  on  a  native  bed,  which  is  a  little 
softer  than  a  board.  Fleas  and  mosquitos  used  their 
influence  to  keep  away  sleep.  Awoke,  took  breakfast  on 
kalo,  breadfruit,  etc.,  held  several  meetings,  conversed 
with  church  members,  serious  inquirers  and  impenitent 
sinners.  Held  one  or  two  meetings  and  then  took  a 
canoe  and  sailed  for  Waimanu,  a  valley  some  three  or  four 
miles  distant.  This  valley  can  be  reached  by  water  when 
the  ocean  is  calm,  otherwise  it  must  be  reached  by  travel- 
ling over  a  i/umber  of  polls  (mountain  passes),  some  of 
which  are  very  steep.  I  never  ventured  this  way.  The 
fatigue  would  probably  be  very  injurious  to  the  body. 
The  ocean  today  was  rather  rough.  The  head  man  said  it 
would  do  for  fishermen,  but  not  for  me.  Then  said  I :  "I 
am  a  fisherman  and,  therefore,  will  venture  out."  I  ven- 
tured, the  surf  rolled  furiously  and  threatened  to  swallow 
up  canoe  and  all  in  it.  But  the  Lord  prevented.  Beached 
Waimanu  in  safety,  held  meeting  all  Thursday.  Preached 
to  adults  and  children,  conversed  with  Christians  and 
sinners.  Took  canoe  and  returned  to  Waipio,  landed 
without  harm  amid  the  swelling  and  dashing  surf.  My 
nerves  were  not  a  little  unstrung. 

I  often  weep  over  the  poor  miserable  natives  when  I 
go  out  among  them  and  behold  their  miserable  dwelling 
places,  destitute  of  all  articles  of  comfort,  filled  with 
filth  and  smoke,  forbidding  an  entrance,  or  even  an  ap- 
proach. I  have  sometimes  found  a  sick  and  apparently 
dying  person  in  a  wretched  hovel  that  I  could  not  enter. 
I  would  be  obliged  to  stay  without  and  talk  and  pray 
there,  the  smoke  and  heat  and  filth  and  contractedness 
would  not  allow  me  to  enter.  It  is  a  wonder  the  sick 
ever  recover  or  the  well  keep  well  so  long.    Let  it  not  be 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1839      171 

understood  that  all  the  houses  are  alike,  in  some  of  these 
it  is  different,  yet  all  are  sickening  enough.  I  said  I 
have  visited  the  sick,  this  is  not  all,  I  have  also  en- 
deavored to  heal  them  by  administration  of  medicine  and 
have  sometimes  tried  to  do  something  for  their  comfort 
in  the  article  of  food.  But  it  is  so  difficult  to  do  anything 
of  this  kind,  that  it  is  discouraging  to  undertake.  What- 
ever is  done  must  be  done  at  our  house.  We  must  pro- 
vide the  dish,  the  spoon,  the  water,  the  fire,  the  flour, 
the  milk,  the  sugar,  prepare  the  article  and  send  it.  Then 
it  is  not  certain  it  will  be  given  to  the  sick.  Others  who 
may  have  more  of  something  else  than  love  may  devour 
it.    Such  is  heathenism. 


From  letter  hy  H.  Bingham,  Honolulu,  April  26, 
1838: 

The  Spirit  of  God  is  showered  down  upon  the  whole 
extent  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  and  those  of  us  who  have 
seemed  to  think  the  Gospel  could  hardly  gain  a  lodgment 
in  the  heart  of  this  people  because  of  their  alleged  stu- 
pidity, or  ignorance,  or  want  of  conscience,  are  now  con- 
strained to  admit  that  they  can  be  as  readily  affected  by 
the  Spirit  of  God  as  any  class  of  men  with  whom  we 
have  been  acquainted.  The  protracted  meeting  here  about 
the  time  of  Nahienaena's  funeral  appears  to  have  been 
crowned  with  many  fruits. 

April  19,  1839.  Today  is  the  nineteenth  anniversary 
of  our  landing  at  Honolulu  and  I  have  just  witnessed  the 
examination  of  two  hundred  and  seventeen  children  and 
youths,  some  in  reading,  some  in  arithmetic,  and  some  in 
astronomy.  There  are  now  about  fourteen  hundred  church 
members  in  Honolulu  being  about  equally  divided  be- 
tween the  two  congregations.  There  have  been  about  ten 
thousand  admitted  to  the  other  churches  upon  these 
islands. 


172  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  by  Titus  Coan,  June  6,  1839: 

Since  July  last  the  pastor  has  made  five  separate  tours 
through  Hilo  and  Puna,  holding  numerous  protracted 
meetings  and  preaching  from  twenty  to  thirty  times  a 
week.  These  labors  have  been  prosecuted  from  village 
to  village  and  from  house  to  house  by  night  and  by  day. 
I  suppose  the  great  numbers  added  to  our  church  is  what 
staggers  the  faith  of  many.  A  beloved  missionary  sister 
in  writing  to  us  on  this  subject  says:  "If  there  were 
only  a  few  hundreds  we  could  believe,  but  there  are  so 
many  it  spoils  it  all.''  That  was  a  frank  and  honest  con- 
fession. The  fact  is  that  the  church  is  not  prepared  to 
see  great  things  in  the  conversion  of  the  heathen.  Mis- 
sionaries themselves  are  not  prepared  for  it.  At  Kohala 
I  spent  one  week  in  company  with  Brother  Lyons  and 
Brother  Bliss  in  attending  a  series  of  meetings.  A  large 
and  solemn  concourse  of  people  assembled  from  day  to 
day  and  in  increasing  numbers  to  the  last.  God  was 
there.  His  spirit  breathed  upon  the  slain.  There  was 
a  shaking  among  the  dry  bones.  The  presence  of  the 
spirit  was  indicated  by  the  fixed  eye,  the  gushing  tear, 
the  quivering  lip,  the  deep  sigh,  and  the  heavy  groan, 
God  was  there  and  the  people  were  moved  at  the  presence 
of  the  Lord  of  the  whole  earth.  God  was  there.  His 
power  was  felt.  His  arm  was  seen.  His  voice  was  heard. 
His  thunders  shook  the  hosts  of  hell.  He  was  there  and 
none  but  a  sleeper  could  fail  to  see  it — none  but  an 
infidel  could  deny  it.  Pipes  like  the  "books  of  those 
who  used  curious  arts,"  were  brought  in  great  numbers 
and  burnt,  and  most  of  the  plantations  of  tobacco  in 
Kohala  were  destroyed. 


XVII 
JOUKNALS  A¥D  LETTEES,  1838-1840 


F 


BOM   letter   by    William   Richards^   Lahavna, 
August  1,  1838: 


The  general  subject  of  Political  Economy  is 
every  day  increasing  in  importance  and  the  time  has 
arrived  when  the  rulers  of  the  nation  must  have  instruc- 
tion on  that  subject.  There  is  but  one  feeling  in  the 
mission  in  relation  to  it.  How  to  provide  that  instruc- 
tion has  at  length  become  a  desideratum  in  our  minds. 
The  king  and  chiefs  are  fully  impressed  with  a  sense  of 
the  importance  of  this  subject  and  have  said  much  to  us 
about  it.  They  waited  my  return  with  anxiety  and  when 
they  found  their  request  sent  by  me  to  the  United  States 
of  America  was  not  complied  with,  they  immediately  re- 
quested me  to  become  their  teacher  and  offered  to  support 
me  if  I  would  do  it.  After  considering  the  subject  for 
several  weeks  and  discussing  the  subject  thoroughly  with 
the  king  and  chiefs  I  at  length  accepted  the  appointment 
and  now  act  as  the  "Chaplain  Teacher  and  Translator," 
for  the  king.  They  also  expect  from  me  free  suggestions 
on  every  subject  connected  with  government  and  on  their 
duties  as  rulers  of  the  nation,  and  in  all  important  cases 
I  am  to  be  not  only  translator,  but  must  act  as  interpreter 
for  the  king.  It  has  been  considerably  trying  to  my  feel- 
ing to  turn  aside  in  so  great  a  degree  from  what  is  the 
more  common  and  appropriate  business  of  the  mission- 
ary. But  I  am  satisfied  that  the  spiritual  as  well  as  the 
temporal  good  of  the  nation  requires  it,  or  at  least  requires 

173 


174  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

that  some  one  should  be  devoted  to  the  business  In  which 
I  am  now  engaged. 

I  have  enclosed  to  your  care  a  communication  addressed 
to  the  Hon.  Benjamin  F.  Butler.  It  contains  a  treaty 
or  rather  a  proposed  treaty  between  this  government  and 
the  United  States.  I  have  written  to  Mr.  Butler,  at  the 
request  of  the  king,  and  hope  he  will  lay  the  treaty  before 
the  President  and  use  his  influence  to  have  it  ratified. 
Any  plan  you  can  devise  to  forward  this  object  will  be 
of  great  benefit  to  the  Sandwich  Islands.  The  treaty  is 
drawn  up  as  treaties  usually  are  between  free  and  inde- 
pendent nations.  Should  it  be  ratified  I  think  difficulties 
between  this  nation  and  American  citizens  will  be  in .  a 
good  degree  at  an  end. 

From  letter  by  William  Richards,  Honolulu,  August 
29,  1839: 

I  have  already  informed  you  of  my  engagement  with 
the  chiefs  entered  into  in  July  of  last  year.  Since  that 
time  circumstances  have  occiirred  which  have  made  it 
necessary  for  me  to  leave  them  entirely,  or  be  more  ex- 
clusively devoted  to  them.  On  the  ninth  ultimo  the 
French  Frigate  L'Artemise  arrived  demanding  satisfac- 
tion from  this  government  for  alleged  violation  of 
treaties.  There  was  no  middle  course  that  I  could  pursue. 
I  must  either  desert  my  post  as  teacher  of  the  chiefs  or 
I  must  stand  by  them  openly  and  publicly.  The  former 
course  M'ould  have  been  to  abandon  the  nation  immediately 
to  French  influence,  Catholicism,  and  utter  destruction. 
For  without  some  direct  advice  and  aid  they  would  not 
have  failed  to  so  involve  themselves  as  to  either  directly 
or  indirectly  have  brought  down  all  the  evils  threatened 
in  the  Manifesto  of  Captain  Laplace.  On  account  of  this 
state  of  things  I  determined  to  act  openly  and  directly, 
not  only  as  interpreter  and  translator,  but,  also,  to  some 
extent,  as  counselor  for  tbem. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1840      175 

A  letter  regarding  Lahmnalmia,  by  E.  W.  Clark, 
September  20,  1837: 

Besides  about  twenty  adults  the  school  now  consists 
of  sixty-four  boarding  scholars.  The  annual  expense  of 
one  scholar  we  estimate  at  $30.00.  Our  most  sanguine 
hopes  have  been  surpassed  by  the  experiment  of  a  board- 
ing school  thus  far.  The  school  is  more  easily  governed 
than  any  school  of  the  same  number  of  boys  with  which 
I  was  ever  acquainted  in  America.  And  notwithstanding 
they  are  required  to  be  in  school,  or  at  work,  nearly  all 
the  time  and  are  brought  under  strict  regulations,  no 
one  has  yet  manifested  any  wish  to  leave  the  school.  The 
school  might  be  enlarged  immediately  to  any  extent  so 
far  as  obtaining  promising  scholars  is  concerned.  "We  are 
satisfied  there  is  no  want  of  capacity  or  of  disposition  to 
learn.  We  hope  two  or  three  have  been  born  again. 
And  we  fully  believe  that  many  others  will  be,  if  we  are 
faithful,  and  our  patrons  pray  for  them  as  they  ought. 
This  is  the  great  object  to  which  we  would  direct  all 
our  labors  with  them.  We  have  abundant  proof  that 
those  who  are  most  enlightened  are  most  likely  to  be 
converted  and  to  bring  forth  fruits  meet  for  repentance. 
And  what  so  well  calculated  to  wake  up  their  minds  as 
school  instruction.  We  soon  see  a  difference  in  the 
very  faces  of  those  who  have  been  instructed.  Instead  of 
the  stupid  unmeaning  expression  of  the  multitude,  their 
countenances  begin  to  brighten  up  with  intelligence. 
This  has  repeatedly  been  remarked  upon  by  those  who 
have  visited  our  school. 

From  letter  by  G.  P.  Judd  to  the  Officers  of  the 
A.  B.C.  F.  M.,  Honolulu,  October  9,  1838: 

During  several  years  past  the  chiefs  have  punished  some 
eight  or  ten  persons  for  what  they  consider  hoomanakii, 
or  idolatry,  and  on  the  recent  visit  of  H.  B.  M.  Sloop 
Frigate,  Captain  R.  Eliott,  the  Captain  sent  in  a  written 


176  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

remonstrance  against  punishing  any  one  for  his  religious 
opinions.  He,  at  the  same  time,  allowed  that  the  chiefs 
have  a  right  to  forbid  the  Roman  Catholic  religion  being 
taught  by  foreigners  or  natives.  The  following  copy  of 
Kinau's  letter  to  him  in  reply  to  his  remonstrance  will 
show  you  how  the  subject  is  received  by  ourselves: 

Halehauila,  October  1,  1838. 
Salutations  to  you,  Captain  Eliott: 

Your  letter  respecting  the  natives  who  are  punished 
for  their  adherence  to  the  Eoman  Catholic  religion  is 
just  received.  I  am  pleased  with  the  manner  in  which 
you  have  expressed  the  opposition  of  your  views  to  our 
practice  on  this  subject.  The  Missionaries  have  likewise 
explained  the  subject  in  the  same  manner  that  we  ought 
not  to  punish  our  people  on  account  of  their  religion,  but 
the  state  of  our  country  is  peculiar.  Perhaps  I  ought  to 
make  known  to  you  some  of  our  transactions  which  will 
explain  the  reasons  of  our  conduct: 

In  the  time  of  Liholiho  we  came  to  the  conclusion  that 
the  worship  of  images,  which  we  had  practiced  from  time 
immemorial,  was  foolish  and  we  deemed  it  best  to  over- 
throw it.  We  at  once  put  a  stop  to  the  worship  of 
images  and  burnt  them  all  with  fire,  all  the  temples  were 
overthrown  and  all  the  priests  were  thrown  out  of  their 
places,  some  with  their  own  consent  and  some  without  it. 
After  that  males  and  females  ate  together  and  dwelt  under 
the  same  roof.  This  was  the  cause  of  a  rebellion  on  the 
part  of  Kekuaokalani,  and  others  of  the  party  who  favor 
idolatry,  and  of  his  death  in  battle.  Afterwards  the 
king  enacted  a  law  forbidding  idolatry,  whoever  uses  such 
practices  shall  be  punished  the  same  as  for  any  crime. 
So  it  is  at  the  present  time.  If  any  person  is  found 
still  reviving  idolatrous  practices  in  any  part  of  the  coun- 
try he  is  immediately  brought  to  punishment.  And  when 
the  Eoman  Catholic  Priests  came  they  sought  out  the  ig- 
norant, those  who  despised  learning  and  those  who  favored 
idolatry,  and  found  them  ready  to  join  their  party.    They 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1840      177 

suspended  their  images  about  their  necks  and  practiced 
foolish  things.  We  sent  to  turn  them  back,  but  their 
hearts  were  rebellious  and  they  would  not  hear,  there 
was  therefore  no  alternative,  in  our  opinion,  but  to  punish 
them.  So  we  have  done  with  all  cases  of  persons  using 
idolatrous  practices,  and  such  is  a  law  of  the  land. 

You  have  not  informed  us  what  you  would  advise  to 
ward  off  the  danger.  What  shall  we  do  ?  Shall  we  return 
to  idolatry  and  to  the  shedding  of  blood? 

I  desire  to  make  you  fully  acquainted  with  the  reasons 
of  our  present  course,  but  cannot  owing  to  the  very  short 
time  which  remains  for  you  to  stay. 

Perhaps  we  will  look  at  this  subject  by  ourselves.    Per- 
haps it  will  be  best  to  expel  the  British  subject  who  is 
here  considered  a  teacher  of  that  religion.     What  think 
you  of  that?     Perhaps  it  would  be  right,  perhaps  not! 
I  am  yours  with  esteem, 

(Signed)  Kaahumanu  IL 

From  letter  hy  Dr.  Seth  L,  Andrews^  Kailua,  May 
12,  1838: 

We  have  recently  received  from  Honolulu  the  first 
volume  of  the  Old  Testament  in  the  Hawaiian  language. 
It  is  eagerly  sought  for  by  the  people  and  is  received 
by  them  with  manifestations  of  the  most  heartfelt 
pleasure.  I  would  you  could  see  with  what  joy  they  take 
the  sacred  volume  from  our  hands,  it  would  cheer  your 
heart  and  give  you  fresh  courage  amid  the  trials  and 
discouragements  which  press  upon  you. 

From  letter  hy  Edward  Bailey,  Kohala,  Hawaii, 
May  25,  183^: 

Mrs.  Bailey  and  myself  came  here  on  the  26th  of 
September,  1837,  and  commenced  the  Station.  Some  six 
weeks  or  so  after  Mr.  Bliss  came  on.  We  found  here 
a  wild,  heathenish  people,  the  most  so  it  was  said  of  any 


178  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

that  could  be  found  in  the  Islands.  Much  had,  however, 
already  been  done  by  the  missionaries  who  had  resided 
at  Waimea,  so  that  we  have  not  often  seen  the  darkest 
features  of  heathenism.  It  was,  however,  dark.  No  one 
brought  up  in  an  enlightened  land  who  has  not  been  long 
conversant  with  heathen  can  form  any  correct  idea  of 
what  it  is. 

From  letter  hy  Dr.  8.  L.  Andrews,  Kailua,  Novem- 
ber 9,  1838: 

Governor  Adams'  cotton  manufactory  is  prospering. 
Several  hundred  yards  of  cloth  have  been  woven,  chiefly 
twilled,  and  some  of  plaid.  It  is  quite  fashionable  among 
the  natives  and  sells  for  fifty  cents  per  yard.  We  have 
the  gratification  of  seeing  many  natives  clad  in  Hawaiian 
fabrics.  Governor  Adams  is  about  sending  to  America 
for  some  additional  machinery.  Four  young  men  have 
been  instructed  in  weaving  and  are  able  to  go  through  the 
whole  process  with  a  little  assistance  from  their  teachers. 

1889.  The  following  letter  from  the  Mission  indi- 
cates the  remarkable  fact  that  in  this  year  Hawaii  was 
accounted  as  nearer  to  Boston  than  was  Oregon.  The 
missionaries  in  Oregon  sought  and  received  aid  in 
printing  from  Hawaii : 

The  Oregon  Mission  has  in  its  correspondence  with  us 
made  frequent  mention  of  their  want  of  books,  have  sent 
some  manuscripts  to  be  printed  here  and,  at  one  time, 
proposed  to  send  men  to  learn  the  printer's  art  here,  at 
the  islands,  and  at  another  time  proposed  to  us  to  send 
native  printers  from  here.  At  our  delegate  meeting  a 
year  ago  we  voted  to  send  them  an  old  printing  press 
and  a  few  types,  also  to  do  printing  for  them  at  our 
press.  It,  therefore,  became  a  serious  question  whether 
Mr.  Hall  had  not  better  go  on  himself  with  materials 
for  printing  and  teach  the  art  so  that  it  can  be  carried 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1840      179 

on  there  and  thus,  also,  afford  his  wife  an  opportunity 
to  try  the  effect  of  a  change  of  climate.  The  physicians 
very  decidedly  recommended  the  voyage.  A  ship  bound 
to  the  Columbia  Kiver  arrived  which  offered  good  accom- 
modations and  Mr.  Hall  and  wife  embarked  on  the  second 
of  March,  taking  with  them  a  small  press  and  types. 

There  has  no  unusual  sickness  prevailed  at  the  islands 
during  the  year  till  just  at  its  close  when  a  new  and 
contagious  disease  was  introduced  by  a  vessel  from  Cali- 
fornia under  command  of  Captain  Barker.  It  was  prob- 
ably thought  the  mumps  was  not  a  disease  of  sufficient 
importance  to  demand  any  caution  and,  therefore,  though 
the  late  Consul  Jones  was  on  board  no  notice  was  com- 
municated to  the  authorities  of  the  place,  and  there  being 
no  quarantine  law,  the  fact  of  that  disease  being  on  board 
was  not  known  until  one  of  the  men  affected  with  it  had 
come  on  shore  and,  as  afterwards  proved,  communicated 
the  disease.  It  spread  rapidly  not  only  on  Oahu,  but  was 
soon  communicated  to  the  other  islands  and  a  large  por- 
tion of  the  inhabitants,  old  and  young,  the  strong  and 
the  feeble,  became  affected  with  it.  Great  numbers  have 
died  with  the  disease,  not  usually,  however,  in  its  active 
stages,  but  as  a  consequence  of  it  through  ignorance,  ex- 
posure, ill  management,  etc.  In  order  to  counteract  these 
evils  we  published  in  the  Kumu  Hawaii  cautions  and 
advice  which  doubtless  had  some  effect,  but  still  the 
disease  has  often  proved  fatal.  Many  of  the  children  of' 
the  Mission  and  some  of  the  adults  have  had  it,  but  with 
them  it  has  not  proved  serious.  The  late  lamented  Kinau 
had  scarcely  recovered  from  that  disorder  when  she  was 
attacked  with  a  fit  of  paralysis,  which  closed  her  life  on 
the  sixth  day.  She  has  sustained  the  highest  rank  in  the 
nation  next  to  the  king  and,  according  to  the  constitution 
of  the  government,  no  public  act,  even  of  the  king,  was 
considered  legal  without  her  consent.  Hence  when  he 
was  called  upon  to  sign  a  document  of  a  public  nature 
it  was  pretty  uniformly  his  practice  first  to  ask  her  ap- 
probation.    Her  station,  therefore,  was  one  of  vast  re- 


180  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAU 

eponsibility.  For  this  station  she  had  some  eminent 
qualifications.  For  stability  of  character  she  has  left  no 
equal.  She  was  ever  awake  to  the  best  interests  of  the 
nation  and  showed  no  ordinary  skill  in  managing  its  con- 
cerns, even  in  the  most  troublous  times.  During  the 
whole  period  in  which  she  was  in  authority  she  set  her 
face  against  the  prevailing  immoralities  and  gave  satis- 
factory evidence  of  a  readiness  to  make  any  personal 
sacrifice  for  the  sake  of  promoting  Christian  morals  and 
the  general  best  interests  of  the  nation.  Only  one  week 
after  the  death  of  Kinau  the  nation  was  again  bereaved 
by  the  removal  of  Kaikioewa,  an  ancient  chief,  and  the 
Governor  of  Kauai. 

But  perhaps  the  most  important  change  we  have  made 
is  the  removal  of  Mr.  Cooke  from  his  former  sphere  of 
labor  to  that  of  a  boarding  school  for  the  young  chiefs 
of  rank,  eight  in  number,  the  oldest  of  which  is  now 
ten  years  old.  We  have  for  a  length  of  time  perceived 
that  the  young  chiefs  were  growing  up  more  ignorant 
than  the  common  people.  The  chiefs  have  seemed  un- 
willing to  connect  themselves  with  the  Seminary  or  our 
other  boarding  schools  and  we  have  ourselves  hesitated 
in  encouraging  them  to  do  it.  We  have  feared  that  their 
connection  with  those  schools  would  exert  an  unhappy 
influence  on  the  other  scholars  while  they  themselves 
would  receive  less  benefit  than  they  would  under  other 
circumstances.  We  have  also  felt  that  it  was  a  matter 
of  immense  importance  that  they  should  stand  the  highest 
in  the  scale  of  civilization,  that  they  should  know  by 
their  own  delightful  experience  the  happiness  and  the 
excellency  of  a  well  regulated  family.  Heretofore  the 
chiefs  have  been  unwilling  to  have  their  children  excluded 
from  a  train  of  attendants,  which  they  considered  as 
necessary  to  the  very  existence  of  a  chief.  But  now  the 
chiefs  all  manifest  a  readiness  to  dispense  with  whatever 
the  good  of  their  children  may  require  and  have  assented 
to  the  plan  of  their  being  adopted  into  the  family  of  a 
missionary  to  be  trained  up  entirely  by  him.    They,  them- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1840      181 

selves,  nominated  Mr.  Cooke,  and  the  mission  have  ap- 
pointed him  to  that  business.  The  chiefs  will  defray  all 
the  expense  of  the  establishment  except  Mr.  Cooke's 
private  support.  From  this  school  or  family  we  hope 
much.  We  continue  to  look  with  strong  and  ever  in- 
creasing interest  to  our  Seminary  at  Lahainaluna  as  the 
most  important  of  all  the  means  in  our  possession  for 
supplying  the  Sandwich  Islanders  with  a  permanent  and 
educated  ministry. 

The  Girls'  School  at  Wailuku  is  at  present  in  a  very 
prosperous  state.  The  number  of  pupils  has  been  increased 
to  forty-nine.  The  blessing  of  heaven  seems  to  have 
rested  very  signally  on  that  institution.  Several  have  been 
hopefully  converted  and  are  respectable  members  of  the 
church.  The  labors  of  Miss  Ogden,  who  was  removed  to 
that  place  by  the  delegate  meeting  of  last  year,  have  been 
very  useful  in  teaching  the  girls  to  sew,  knit  and  spin. 

From  letter  of  D.  B.  Lyman,  November  29, 1839: 

I  have  already  said  the  school  was  opened  the  first  of 
October,  1836,  with  eight  boys  from  this  station  and  that 
their  number  was  soon  increased  to  twelve.  At  the  close 
of  our  annual  meeting  in  June,  1837,  six  of  them  entered 
the  mission  seminary  and  new  scholars  were  received 
from  the  several  stations  on  the  island,  increasing  the 
number  remaining  to  thirty-one  which  continued  the 
same  until  the  next  annual  meeting  when  a  few  falling 
out  for  various  reasons  and  being  about  to  engage  in 
building,  we  deemed  it  not  expedient  to  take  a  new 
class.  Consequently  our  number  for  the  year  commencing 
with  July,  1838,  was  twenty-eight.  In  April,  1839,  having 
erected  a  dwelling  house  for  my  family,  and  the  principal 
school  building  being  so  far  advanced  as  to  render  the 
scholars  then  in  school  as  comfortable  as  in  the  building 
before  occupied,  we  relinquished  the  accommodations 
previously  occupied  by  our  family  to  Brother  Wilcox. 
I  took  down  the  former  school  buildings  to  use  the  mate- 
rial in  completing  the  accommodations  on  the  new  site. 


182  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

The  following  October,  the  school  buildings  being  nearly 
completed,  the  number  of  scholars  was  enlarged  to  fifty- 
seven,  fifty-five  of  whom  remained  to  the  end  of  the  year. 
At  the  commencement  of  our  present  school  year  (which 
is  always  at  the  close  of  our  annual  meeting)  seventeen 
of  the  scholars  entered  the  Seminary  at  Lahainaluna, 
four  others  were  dismissed  having  acquitted  themselves 
decently  well  as  scholars  for  about  three  years,  but  for 
various  reasons  were  not  deemed  the  most  promising  can- 
didates for  the  Seminary.  Three  of  them  are  employed 
as  teachers  and  some  of  them  may  yet  enter  the  Seminary 
another  year.  In  August  a  new  class  was  received  mak- 
ing the  number  for  the  present  year  fifty-three.  The 
present  buildings  for  accommodation  of  the  school  are 
situated  on  elevated  ground  in  a  comparatively  retired 
spot  about  a  fourth  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  command- 
ing an  extensive  prospect  of  Byron's  Bay  (Hilo  Bay),  of 
the  broad  blue  waters  of  the  Pacific,  and  the  two  principal 
mountains  of  Hawaii.  They  are  surrounded  by  a  spacious 
yard,  enclosed  with  a  stone  fence.  Some  parts  of  the 
yard  are  designed  for  the  cultivation  of  melons,  bananas, 
and  other  sections  for  play  grounds.  The  enclosure  is 
entirely  surrounded  by  the  Kalo  and  sugar  cane  planta- 
tions of  the  school.  I  rejoice  that  you  propose  to  make 
more  direct  efforts  than  hitherto  for  raising  up  a  native 
ministry  and  qualified  native  teachers  for  these  islands. 
It  should  be  done  with  as  little  delay  as  possible.  I  think 
this  will  meet  the  warm  approbation  of  all  reflecting 
Hawaiians. 

From  letter  of  H.  R.  Hitchcock,  January,  18^0: 

Our  visit  at  Kailua,  Hawaii,  was  truly  satisfactory.  My 
Boul  shouted  for  joy  as  I  sat  in  the  sanctuary  there,  and 
listened  to  the  praises  of  God,  and  witnessed  the  air  of 
civilization  and  good  order  that  existed.  It  was  more  like 
home  than  anything  I  have  seen  in  the  Pacific.  A  noble 
though  not  well  contrived  house,  handsomely  finished 
with  galleries  and   seats,   a  congregation  of  say  fifteen 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1840      183 

hundred  or  so,  all  seated  in  chairs  or  settees  of  their  own 
construction,  and  the  fine  singing  from  those  recent  bar- 
barous voices  all  conspired  to  fill  with  pleasing  emotions 
and  caused  us  to  exclaim,  what  hath  God  wrought!  But 
a  short  time  back  and  all  that  congregation  were  the 
worshippers  of  demons  and  the  perpetrators  of  all  the 
dark  and  horrible  crimes  inseparable  from  idolatry.  How 
changed!  Could  it  be  the  very  spot  where  twenty  years 
ago  our  dear  Brother  Thurston  and  his  companion 
camped  down  amid  the  bowlings  and  the  darkness  of 
savages,  then  not  a  ray  of  light  from  heaven.  0  could 
those  who  have  contributed  of  their  substance  for  bring- 
ing about  this  change  been  present,  they  would  think  that 
the  few  thousand  dollars  which  have  been  expended  at 
that  station  had  been  received  back  again,  and  more  than 
a  hundredfold. 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Wailuku,  July  7, 
1840: 

My  church  and  several  others,  agreeably  to  a  resolu- 
tion of  our  association,  is  organized  on  the  Presbyterian 
plan.  I  have  three  properly  ordained  elders,  one  of  whom 
is  the  good  old  Bartimeus  who  grows  higher  and  higher 
as  he  advances  in  life.  These  brethren  are  a  great  help 
to  me  in  managing  the  affairs  of  the  church. 

The  stone  meeting  house  at  Haiku  has  been  finished 
and  dedicated  to  the  worship  of  God.  It  is  a  noble  house 
and  well  filled  with  hearers  every  Sabbath.  The  meeting 
house  here  is  ready  for  plastering  and  we  hope  to  get 
into  it  soon.  This  will  be  another  good  job  off  our  hands. 
These  two  houses  together  will  not  cost  $500  in  cash  and 
be  completed  in  less  than  three  years  from  the  time  the 
work  was  commenced.  Will  it  still  be  said  that  natives 
have  no  energy,  enterprise,  or  skill?  At  the  close  of  the 
feast  at  the  dedication  of  the  church  at  Haiku  the  king 
expressed  a  desire  to  make  an  address,  so  the  calabashes 
were  shoved  aside  and  the  multitude  drew  up  together 
until  it  presented  an  almost  unbroken  mass  of  faces,  and 


184  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

all  wide  awake  to  hear  what  the  great  Kamehameha  III 
had  to  say  to  them.  His  Majesty  then  addressed  them 
in  a  speech  of  about  ten  minutes,  expressing  his  extreme 
gratification  in  contemplating  the  spectacle  before  him, 
he  said  it  was  the  first  thing  of  the  kind  he  had  ever 
witnessed  and  thought  it  could  not  but  result  in  good. 
He  then  urged  both  parents  and  children  to  go  forward 
in  the  work  of  education.  As  to  the  moral  influence  of 
such  a  celebration  I  would  say  that  after  observing  them 
for  several  years  at  Wailuku  I  never  heard  of  any  evil 
results,  but,  on  the  contrary,  they  make  the  schools  popu- 
lar, are  a  very  little  expense  and  tend  to  remove  the 
impression  that  religion  forbids  all  innocent  enjoyments 
and  recreations. 

July  21,  ISJfO.  Eev.  D.  Baldwin  writes  from  Lahaina: 
Hoapili,  the  Governor,  died  the  third  of  January  last 
in  the  clearest  triumphs  of  faith.  His  love  for  Christ 
and  his  cause,  his  deep  and  affecting  humility  and  tender- 
ness, shone  out  during  the  last  month  or  two  of  his  life 
in  a  manner  which  none  of  us  had  ever  expected  to  see. 
I  can  truly  say  that  none  of  the  good  effects  which  I 
anticipated  from  the  revival  of  last  year  have  failed,  I 
would  rather  say  my  anticipations  have  all  been  exceeded. 
I  once  told  you  we  should  have  more  eflicient  aid  from 
church  members  hereafter  and  now  I  can  see  that  the 
addresses  and  other  efforts  of  native  Christians  to  con- 
vert sinners  are  more  efficient  than  before.  This  arises 
in  some  degrees  from  deeper  feeling  in  them,  but  still 
more  from  their  better  knowledge  of  what  conversion  is. 
Before,  they  looked  too  much  at  external  reformation,  the 
revival  brought  them  in  contact  with  the  heart.   . 

From  letter  by  A.  S.  CooTce,  September  18,  1839: 

At  our  last  General  Meeting  a  letter  was  received  from 
the  king  and  high  chiefs  requesting  a  teacher  to  be  de- 
voted to  their  children.  It  being  ascertained  that  both 
they  and  their  children  would  be  pleased  with  us,  the 
Mission,  by  a  large  majority,  voted  that  we  should,  if 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1838-1840       185 

willing,  relinquish  our  other  labors  and  undertake  the 
(Herculean)  task.  I  mentioned  the  majority  for  some  few 
did  not  vote  for  it  because  it  was  going  to  keep  a  distinc- 
tion between  the  chief's  children  and  those  of  the  com- 
mon people.  We  saw  that  the  majority  of  them  were 
growing  up  in  ignorance  and  that  they  did  not  attend 
our  common  schools.  The  chiefs  said  they  would  furnish 
a  house  and  support  the  children,  and  it  was  thought  by 
some  of  our  number  that  they  would  in  a  year  or  two 
support  us  also.  With  all  these  reasons  bearing  upon 
us  we  consented  (unqualified  as  we  were)  to  engage  in 
the  undertaking.  The  design  is  for  us  to  open  school 
as  soon  as  a  house  shall  be  built  of  sufficient  size.  As  we 
may  have  occasion  to  speak  of  these  children  to  you  in 
the  future  I  will  here  give  you  their  names,  ages,  etc. 
Moses  Kaikioewa  is  ten  years  old,  son  of  Kinau,  and 
adopted  by  the  governor  of  Kauai,  who  is  now  dead,  and 
leaves  him  governor  of  that  island.  Lot  Kamehameha, 
brother  of  Moses,  is  about  eight  years  old  and  is  adopted 
by  Hoapili,  the  governor  of  Maui,  and  will  soon  fill  his 
place.  Alexander  Liholiho  is  a  younger  brother  still, 
about  six  years  of  age,  and  is  adopted  by  the  king.  Vic- 
toria, now  a  babe  about  one  year  old,  is  a  sister  of  the 
three  foregoing  and  will  take  the  place  of  Kinau.  Auhea 
now  acts  in  her  place.  William  Lunalilo  is  the  son  of 
Auhea  and  is  about  four  years  old.  Keliiokalani  is  about 
the  age  of  William  and  is  a  grandson  of  Aikanaka.  David 
Kalakaua  is  a  brother  of  Keliiokalani  and  is  about  two 
and  a  half  years  old.  Jane  Loiau  is  an  adopted  daughter 
of  Kauukulaii  and  about  twelve.  Bernice  Pauahi  was 
adopted  by  Kinau  and  is  the  daughter  of  Paki.  She  is 
about  seven  years  old.  She  and  Jane  have  attended  our 
school.  Lydia  Kamakaeha  is  a  sister  of  Keliiokalani  and 
David,  adopted  by  Paki,  and  is  of  the  same  age  with 
Victoria.  These  are  the  ten  and  we  are  expecting  to 
teach  them  all  in  our  own  language  and  for  the  present 
in  no  other.  They  are  all  interesting  children  and  we 
begin  to  feel  much  interested  in  them. 


186  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  by  A,  S.  Cooke,  Honolulu,  July  27, 
18JfO: 

The  house  was  completed  about  the  first  of  April  and 
we  entered  it  on  the  eleventh  and  during  an  interval 
of  about  four  weeks  the  chiefs  furnished  rooms  for  the 
children  after  their  own  fancy  by  covering  the  floors  with 
fine  native  mats,  a  good  bedstead,  also  a  bureau,  wash 
stand,  looking  glass,  etc.,  for  each  room.     On  the  fourth 
of  May  seven  of  the  children  commenced  living  with  us 
and  the  time  for  separation  between  them  and  the  numer- 
ous attendants  came.    The  first  week  was  rather  a  melan- 
choly time  with  the  children  and  their  accustomed  train 
of  servants.    For  some  days  we  were  fearful,  as  we  always 
had   been,   that   feeling  would   get   the   upper   hand   of 
judgment  of  all  parents  and  servants  concerned.     After 
a  few  days  it  became  still  and  we  felt  more  than  ever 
that  God  had  undertaken  the  work  and  was  producing 
this  great  overturning  for  some  wise  and  benevolent  end. 
On  the  eighteenth,  just  two  weeks  after,  four  were  added 
to  the  former  number.     John  li  and  his  wife,  who  are 
the  appointed  parents  of  the  infant  Victoria,  entered  this 
same  day  as  assistants  in  the  care  of  all  the  children.     Of 
his  standing  you  are  probably  somewhat  acquainted.     He 
was  Kinau's  secretary.     He  is  an  almost  invaluable  as- 
sistant as  we  can  trust  the  children  with  him  and  feel 
that  our  instructions  will  be  complied  with.     There  were 
none  present  at  the  General  Meeting,  this  year,  that  did 
not  give  us  their  warm  sympathy  and  prayers.     We  have 
now  a  writing  from  the  king  and  Kekauluohi  in  which  they 
commit  the  children  to  us  and    requiring    parents    and 
servants  to  furnish  us  with  what  is  requisite  for  the  sup- 
port of  the  school.^ 

1  The  above  gives  evidence  of  the  most  remarkable  confidence  of 
the  king  and  the  highest  chiefs  in  the  benevolence  and  faithfulness 
of  this  missionary  family.  Such  a  tribute  of  faith  in  their  fellow 
men  is  very  seldom  won  from  such  a  people  and  speaks  volumes 
for  the  Christian  character  and  winsome  tact  of  these  rare  mis- 


XVIII 
JOURNAL  ANT>  LETTERS.  1840-1842- 


F 


ROM  letter  by  H.  0.  Knapp,  Honolulu,  Feb- 
ruary Jf.,  ISJfO: 


Mr.  Cooke  having  been  appointed  teacher  for 
the  children  of  the  chiefs  I  commenced  teaching,  im- 
mediately after  General  Meeting,  the  school  that  he  had 
previously  taught.  The  school  was  small  at  first,  com- 
pared with  the  number  of  children  that  ought  to  attend. 
It  now  numbers  from  seventy  to  eighty  regular  attendants, 
exclusive  of  a  number  whom  I  have  selected  from  among 
them  and  brought  into  a  separate  school  for  myself,  leav- 
ing the  former  to  be  taught  principally  by  two  native 
teachers,  whom  I  employed  to  assist  me.  I  have  a  select 
school  of  boys,  of  from  twenty  to  twenty-five.  It  is  in- 
creasing both  in  numbers  and  in  interest.  Some  of 
them  are  those  who  formerly  belonged  to  Mr.  Cooke's 
select  school.  Mrs.  Knapp  has  also  a  select  school  of 
from  thirty-five  to  forty  females.  For  the  first  term  she 
had  two  schools  per  day  averaging  about  twenty-five 
scholars. 

July  27,  1840.  Eev.  William  Richards  writes  from 
Lahaina:  I  think  that  the  merchants  generally  are  be- 
ginning to  feel  that  they  are  indebted  in  no  small  degree 
to  the  influence  of  the  mission,  procuring  for  them  that 
perfect  security  and  patronage,  and  their  facilities  for  do- 
ing business  which  have  with  but  very  few  exceptions 
commanded  for  the  government  the  respect  of  visitors 
from  all  nations.  It  is  a  common  saying  among  the 
business  men  here:  '*We  shall  all  regret  the  day  that  the 

187 


188  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

influence  of  the  American  Missionaries  is  destroyed  or 
materially  diminished." 

From  letter  hy  Rev.  Lowell  Smith,  Honolulu,  Jan- 
uary 3,  1840: 

On  the  27th  of  last  August  we  dedicated  our  new  meet- 
ing house  to  the  worship  of  the  living  God.  It  is  a  very 
pretty  building,  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  feet  by 
sixty  feet,  has  sixteen  glass  windows  and  eight  large  panel 
doors,  is  ceiled  over  head  and  will  accommodate  two  thou- 
sand people  and  is  well  filled  on  the  Sabbath.  The  build- 
ing has  cost  about  $2000,  the  most  of  which  has  been 
raised  by  this  church  and  congregation.  They  are,  at 
present,  in  debt  only  one  hundred  dollars  towards  it.  It 
is  very  easy  speaking  in  this  house,  compared  with  the 
old  school  house  and  shed  where  I  have  preached  hundreds 
of  times  during  the  months  of  religious  excitement. 

From  letter,  in  heJialf  of  the  Mission,  hy  J.  S.  Green, 
B.  W.  Parker,  and  8.  Dihble,  Honolulu,  June  1,  ISJ^O: 

Rev.  Charles  McDonald,  missionary  teacher  at  Lahaina, 
on  Maui,  who  had  long  been  in  declining  health,  was 
removed  by  death,  September  7th,  leaving  an  afflicted 
widow  and  two  orphan  children.  We  should  do  violence 
to  our  feelings  did  we  not  say  that  in  the  death  of  Mr. 
McDonald  the  mission  has  sustained  a  severe  loss. 
Though  he  was  cut  down  in  the  morning  of  his  days, 
though  the  term  of  his  missionary  life  was  short,  being 
less  than  two  and  a  half  )'^ears,  and  though,  on  account 
of  ill  health,  he  was  able  to  perform  a  comparatively 
small  amount  of  missionary  labor,  yet  he  did  what  he 
could  and  gave  promise  of  enlarged  usefulness. 

Soon  after  our  last  General  Meeting  Mrs.  Angeline  L. 
Tenny  Castle  began  to  decline  and  though  the  best  medi- 
cal attention  has  been  bestowed  disease  is  not  arrested. 
Though  not  entirely  confined  to  her  couch,  she  has  no 
expectation   of   recovery.     Her  house   she   is   setting  va 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      189 

order.  She  is  calm  as  the  summer's  evening  and  is  wait- 
ing patiently  and  joyfully  the  coming  of  her  Lord. 

And  now  that  Hoapili  is  gone  his  memory  is  sweet. 
Those  who  saw  and  conversed  with  him  while  he  was 
waiting  the  summons  of  death  were  much  affected  with 
his  deportment.  He  seemed  well  nigh  to  have  shaken 
off  what  in  health  seemed  like  listlessness.  He  was  wake- 
ful and  deeply  interested  in  the  prospect  of  the  change 
which  awaited  him.  His  humility  was  apparently  deep. 
He  seemed  to  be  emptied  of  self,  to  be  lowly  in  his  own 
eyes.  He  cast  himself  with  much  confidence  on  Christ. 
His  attachment  to  the  house,  the  word,  and  the  ordinances 
of  God  were  marked.  He  was  carried  to  the  house  of 
God  only  ten  days  before  his  death,  although  he  had  the 
dropsy  and  was  unable  to  sit  up  long  at  a  time.  The 
word  of  God  and  prayer  seemed  to  be  his  delight  and 
from  these  he  sought  solace  till  he  was  insensible  to 
everything  earthly.  As  he  lay  dying  he  gave  a  charge 
concerning  his  bones,  strictly  prohibiting  wailing  on  the 
occasion  of  his  death,  and  desired  that  his  grave  might  be 
a  humble  one  near  the  sleeping  place  of  Mr.  McDonald. 
We  are  happy  to  add  that  these  injunctions  were  com- 
plied with  to  the  letter.  We  bless  God  for  His  grace. 
His  distinguishing  mercy  to  this  once  dark  hearted  and 
polluted  chieftain.  Surely  may  we  say  of  the  Gospel  of 
Christ,  "It  is  the  wisdom  of  God  unto  salvation  to  every 
one  that  believeth." 

We  believe  that  in  the  midst  of  trials  and  temptations 
the  church  has  been  making  advances.  Many  of  its  mem- 
bers are  growing  in  knowledge  and  are  becoming  rooted 
and  grounded  in  truth.  Every  year's  experience  convinces 
us  more  and  more  that  the  Lord  has  a  true  people  to 
serve  him  in  these  islands  and  that  this  number  is  in- 
creasing from  year  to  year,  and  we  have  abundant  en- 
couragement to  labor  and  pray  that  Zion  here  may  advance 
and  increase  till  she  shall  appear  in  all  her  beauty  and 
comeliness.  The  Holy  Spirit  has  visited  some  of  our 
churches  the  past  year  in  a  special  manner,  though  not 


190  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

in  so  powerful  a  manner  as  two  years  since.  One  new 
church  has  been  organized  the  past  year  at  Nawilwili  on 
Kauai  and  Dr.  Lafon  installed  pastor,  making  in  all 
nineteen  churches  in  these  islands,  connected  with  the 
Board. 

Although  Mr.  Bailey  was  added  to  the  number  of 
teachers  and  Mr.  Clark  restored  in  the  autumn  of  last 
year,  the  Seminary  at  Lahainaluna  has  not  yet  recovered 
from  the  effects  of  neglect.  At  the  close  of  the  year  there 
were  fifty  pupils  in  the  Seminary.  Of  these  fourteen  have 
finished  their  regular  course.  Mr.  Dibble  having  returned, 
will  resume  his  labors  in  the  Seminary.  Another  class 
is  about  to  enter  and  we  cherish  the  hope  that  the  labors 
of  former  years  will  be  resumed  and  carried  forward  with 
efficiency  and  success. 

The  female  Seminary  at  Wailuku,  Maui,  is  in  a  pros- 
perous condition.  There  are  connected  with  it  fifty-four 
pupils. 

The  Boarding  School  for  Boys  at  Hilo,  under  the  care 
of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Lyman,  numbered  at  the  close  of  the  year 
fifty-five  pupils.  Of  these  twenty-five  are  members  of 
the  church.  Twenty  from  this  school  are  now  desirous 
of  entering  the  Seminary  at  Lahainaluna.  The  boys  have 
made  commendable  progress  in  their  studies,  are  industri- 
ous, wakeful,  and  desirous  of  making  further  improve- 
ment. We  cherish  great  hope  of  the  school.  It  is  proper 
to  remark  that  the  pupils  are  from  the  Island  of  Hawaii 
with  a  single  exception.  At  Waialua,  Oahu,  Mr.  Locke 
has  commenced  a  self-supporting  and  manual  labor  school, 
and  though  it  is  in  the  incipient  stages,  something  has 
been  done  and  we  hope  that  success  may  crown  his  efforts. 

A  ground  of  hope  for  the  nation  is  the  influence  of 
Mr.  Eichards  as  the  instructor  of  the  king  and  chiefs. 
A  new  code  of  laws  has  been  framed  and  they  are  now 
being  carried  into  execution.  These  are  an  improvement 
on  their  former  laws,  if  immemorial  custom  and  usage 
can  be  called  law.  We  earnestly  pray  that  our  hopes  of 
the  ultimate  prosperity  and  happiness  of  the  Hawaiian 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      191 

nation  may  not  be  disappointed.    What  we  can  we  shall 
do  to  save  the  nation. 

The  Education  of  Missionaeies'  Childsen 

This  subject  came  up  at  an  early  stage  of  business  and 
occupied  no  small  share  of  our  attention.  The  brethren 
are  not  entirely  agreed  on  this  subject.  Some  are  of  the 
opinion  that  children  can  be  wholly  educated  at  these  is- 
lands. They  may  be  retained  here  till  they  shall  be  pre- 
pared to  enter  academies,  colleges,  or  boarding  schools, 
when  they  will  need  to  go  to  the  fatherland.  Others  think 
that  our  children  may  be  trained  at  the  islands  and  re- 
tained, too,  both  safely  and  profitably.  They  are  anxious, 
therefore,  that  there  should  be  a  central  seminary,  well 
endowed  and  vigorously  sustained,  where  the  children  of 
the  mission  may  be  congregated  and  educated.  All  the 
brethren  are  willing  that  an  experiment  should  be  made 
at  Punahou,  on  Oahu. 

We  have  reluctantly,  yet  on  the  whole  cheerfully,  recom- 
mended that  Brother  and  Sister  Bingham  make  a  visit  to 
the  United  States.  They  go,  if  God  so  order  it,  with  our 
warmest  approbation  and  sympathy.  Eeceive  them  as  be- 
loved and  approved  laborers  in  this  field  of  missionary  toil, 
and  give  them  your  confidence  and  aid.  The  committee  to 
supply  Mr.  Bingham's  pulpit  during  his  absence  on  his 
contemplated  visit  to  the  United  States,  have  written  to 
Mr.  Armstrong  requesting  him  to  come  from  Wailuku, 
Maui,  for  that  purpose.  They  have  also  written  to  Mr. 
Bailey  to  assist  in  the  labors  of  the  station  at  Wailuku. 

From  letter  ofjhe  Mission  of  June,  1841: 

We  niay  suppose  that  many  of  our  children  will  re- 
main permanently  in  this  their  native  land  and  that 
through  their  influence  good  results  may  yet  flow  from 
the  school  we  have  resolved  to  establish.  The  Lord  has 
graciously  sent  us  instructors  to  take  charge  of  the  school 
just  at  the  time  they  were  needed,  and  by  the  indications 


192  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAU 

of  his  providence  encourages  ns  to  go  forward.  We  have 
resolved  that  the  school  be  located  at  Punahou,  a  verdant 
spot  of  ground  a  few  miles  distant  from  Honolulu,  and 
we  have  appointed  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Dole,  aided  by  Miss  M. 
M.  Smith,  to  take  charge  of  the  institution.  We  hope 
during  the  present  year  to  erect  the  necessary  buildings 
and  get  the  school  in  full  and  successful  operation. 

Extract  from  Report ,  from  ISJ^O  to  ISJfl,  by  G.  P, 
Judd: 

Kapiolani,  of  whose  holy  life  and  estimable  character 
I  need  not  speak,  died  on  the  6th  of  May  under  circum- 
stances peculiarly  aifecting.  She  came  to  Honolulu  about 
the  20th  of  March,  by  the  advice  of  Dr.  Andrews  her 
physician,  to  be  operated  on  for  a  cancer  of  the  breast. 
She  bore  the  operation,  which  was  severe,  without  mani- 
festing the  least  symptom  of  pain.  So  vivid  was  her  sense 
of  the  Divine  presence  that  she  seemed  to  be  almost  un- 
conscious of  what  she  was  suffering.  She  was  ready  to 
die  and  equally  ready  to  live  if  that  were  the  will  of 
God.  About  six  weeks  after  the  operation,  deeming  my 
attendance  no  longer  necessary,  I  gave  her  permission  to 
visit  Maui  as  soon  as  she  could  procure  a  passage.  In 
preparation  for  leaving  she  took  a  long  walk  in  the  heat 
of  the  day,  which  brought  on  a  pain  in  the  side.  Ery- 
sipelas now  made  its  appearance  which  after  two  or  three 
days  affected  the  brain  and  she  sunk  away  into  palsy 
and  death. 

While  at  the  volcano  of  Kilauea  I  narrowly  escaped 
death  through  the  merciful  interposition  of  Providence. 
Let  down  by  the  hands  of  a  native  I  had  descended  six 
or  eight  feet  of  the  brim  of  a  cooled  caldron,  twenty- 
eight  feet  deep  and  two  hundred  feet  wide,  and  crept 
along  under  a  ledge  where  I  was  crouched  down  on  my 
feet  collecting  Peles  hair,  when  the  falling  of  a  few  stones 
warned  me  that  an  eruption  was  about  to  take  place  and 
the  next  instant  the  bottom  opened  fifty  feet  from  me  like 
an  immense  bubble  eight  or  ten  feet  in  diameter  and 


Ui 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      193 

with  a  tremendous  noise  projected  a  column  of  lava  to  a 
height  far  above  the  bank  of  the  margin  of  the  caldron. 
The  color  of  this  jet  was  of  the  most  perfect  crimson 
and  the  heat  and  glare  too  great  for  the  eye  to  look  on. 
I  raised  myself  to  an  erect  posture,  turned  my  face  to  the 
wall  with  my  hands  upon  a  projecting  ledge  above,  which 
I  found  it  impossible  to  mount  without  assistance  nor 
could  I  resume  my  former  position  and  return  the  way 
I  came  on  account  of  the  intense  heat.  Here  I  stood 
perfectly  helpless.  God  heard  my  prayer.  When  I  had 
given  up  all  and  resigned  myseK  into  his  hands,  Kalama 
appeared  on  the  bank,  put  out  his  hand,  seized  one  of 
mine  which  enabled  me,  by  an  extraordinary  effort,  to 
throw  myself  out.  It  seems  at  the  moment  of  the  erup- 
tion the  whole  of  the  five  natives  who  were  with  me  ran 
off,  but  Kalama  more  bold  than  the  rest  bethought  him- 
self of  me  and  turned  back  only  just  in  season  for  my 
rescue,  for  just  as  he  approached  the  brink  the  accumu- 
lated flood  having  filled  the  inequalities  of  the  bottom 
flowed  directly  under  my  feet.  As  I  went  over  the  ledge 
I  felt  that  I  was  burnt  although,  as  it  proved,  but  slightly, 
on  each  elbow  and  one  wrist.  Kalama's  face  and  ear  was 
blistered  by  the  heat  radiated  from  below. 

From  letter  hy  P.  J.  Gulick,  Koloa,  Kauai^  October 
3,  1840: 

Having  deemed  it  a  duty  to  send  our  oldest  son,  Luther 
Halsey,  to  the  United  States  and  he  having  yesterday 
embarked  in  the  William  Penn,  Captain  Bodfish,  of  Fal- 
mouth, it  seems  necessary  that  I  say  a  few  words  to  you 
on  that  subject.  So  far  as  the  Captain  and  officers  are 
concerned  the  passage  is  gratuitous.  But  as  they  cannot 
speak  for  the  owners  there  may  be  some  expense  attending 
his  voyage  and  he  will  probably  need  some  aid  in  order 
to  reach  my  brother  William  at  Forked  River,  Monmouth 
County,  New  Jersey.  If  he  should,  you  will  be  duly 
informed  by  Brother  Tinker,  under  whose  care  he  goes, 
and  whose  family  accompanies  him.     If  I  could  be  so 


194  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Bitiiated  as  to  support  myself  and  family  entirely  without 
interrupting  my  labors  as  a  missionary  and  at  the  same 
time  be  free  to  pursue  such  measures  as  I  might  prefer 
in  regard  to  my  children  and  other  affairs  of  importance, 
this  would  be  most  agreeable  to  my  feelings.  Should 
any  imagine  that  these  sentiments  are  the  offspring  of 
a  desire  to  lay  up  property  for  my  children,  I  reply:  I 
desire  nothing  earthly  for  them  except  a  good  education. 
Above  all,  I  desire  that  they  may  all  become  faithful  and 
devoted  missionaries. 

Extracts  from  Journal  of  J.  P.   Gulick,  June  28, 

1841  : 

While  conversing  with  a  family  in  the  narrow  valley 
of  Lawai,  eastward  from  Koloa,  an  aged  female,  having 
seen  me,  came  from  the  opposite  side  of  the  valley  bring- 
ing a  pig  which  she  begged  me  to  accept.  Knowing  she 
was  rather  indigent  I  declined  receiving  it  and  accom- 
panied her  to  her  hut.  I  there  found  that  her  husband 
had  been  a  cripple  for  years  and  not  able  to  walk.  And 
seldom  if  ever,  have  I  seen  a  more  destitute  hovel,  house 
it  could  not  be  called.  It  was  about  ten  feet  long,  eight 
wide,  and  six  high  at  the  peak  of  the  roof.  The  roof 
was  so  flat  and  so  poorly  covered  with  grass  and  leaves 
that  it  seemed  but  an  apology  for  shelter.  A  few  tat- 
tered and  half-rotten  mats  were  their  bed  and  was  all, 
save  a  little  grass,  which  kept  them  from  contact  with  the 
earth.  Some  old  calabashes  were  their  only  furniture. 
This  poor  woman,  in  her  deep  poverty  with  a  crippled 
husband  depending  chiefly  upon  her  and  with  scarcely 
a  change  of  raiment  for  herself,  appears  to  Lave  offered 
me  the  richest  present  she  could  possibly  make.  Her  con- 
duct cannot  be  attributed  to  a  desire  to  get  into  the  church 
for  she  was  already  a  member.  Nor  is  it  probable  that 
she  was  influenced  by  a  hope  of  receiving  a  valuable  re- 
turn, for,  not  knowing  distinctly  her  situation,  I  had 
never  assisted  her  in  the  least.  She  seemed  to  me  fo 
verify  the  text:  "^God  hath  chosen  the  poor  of  this  world 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842       195 

rich  in  faith."  I  think  she  came  as  near  to  the  example 
of  the  widow  we  read  of  in  the  Gospel  who  cast  her  two 
mites  into  the  Lord's  treasury,  as  any  person  I  ever  knew. 
Feeling  that  she  had  received  spiritual  benefit  through 
my  agency,  she  appeared  to  esteem  it  a  small  thing  that 
she  should  deny  herself  to  bestow  a  temporal  favor.  On 
my  way  home  I  called  to  see  a  blind  man  now  sick  and 
who  has  often  been  led  by  his  daughter  to  my  house  for 
religious  conversation.  When  seated  beside  him  he  took 
my  hand  very  affectionately  and  held  it  while  I  conversed 
with  him.  He  talked  with  animation.  Spoke  of  himself 
as  a  lost  sinner.  Said  his  hope  was  in  the  Saviour  to 
whom  I  had  pointed  him  and  that  there  he  constantly 
rested.  After  I  had  prayed  with  him  he  took  my  hand 
again.  Said  he  had  thought  much  of  me  since  I  sent 
him  my  aloha  (which  was  a  few  days  previous)  and  that 
he  had  been  very  anxious  to  see  me.  When  I  spoke  of 
going  he  clasped  my  hand  more  firmly,  saying:  "I  hold 
you  fast."  Then  lifted  up  his  voice  and  wept  like  a  little 
child.  He  seemed  to  be  overjoyed  that  I  had  called  to 
converse  with  him.  It  was  a  touching  sight  to  see  a 
venerable,  gray-headed  man,  a  great-grandfather,  so  over- 
come with  joy  or  gratitude  for  a  favor,  as  he  esteemed 
it,  from  a  fellow  sinner. 

September  12.  The  blind  man  above  mentioned  and 
twenty-six  others  were  received  to  the  church ,  and  two 
excommunicated  members  were  restored. 

November  21,  ISJfl.  Have  become  somewhat  acquainted 
with  Mr.  Damon  and  am  much  pleased  with  him,  both 
in  the  pulpit  and  out  of  it.  Have  never  before  seen  such 
large  audiences  in  the  Seamen's  Chapel  and  they  seem  to 
listen  with  interest. 

Extract  from  letter  hy  Ahner  Wilcox,  Hilo,  March 
25,  18Jf.l: 

The  United  States  Ship  Vincennes,  of  the  Exploring 
Squadron,  recently  visited  Hilo.     She  anchored  here  the 


196  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

ninth  of  December  and  sailed  on  the  fifth  instant,  after 
a  stay  of  about  three  months.  Commodore  Wilkes  spent 
several  weeks  on  Mauna  Loa  in  making  observations  with 
his  pendulum  and  other  instruments,  which  were  carried 
on  to  the  mountain  by  natives.  I  have  written  you  in 
times  past  and  sometimes  when  the  pulse  of  the  school 
was  so  low  that  it  was  from  a  sense  of  duty  rather  than 
otherwise.  But  now,  when  it  beats  more  vigorously  and 
hope  revives,  it  affords  pleasure  to  write  respecting  the 
schools.  I  think  I  may  say  there  has  been  a  very  mani- 
fest improvement  in  our  schools  generally  ever  since  the 
time  when  the  king  and  chiefs  gave  a  helping  hand  by 
enacting  laws  for  the  benefit  of  education. 


From  letter  hy  Mark  Ives,  Kealahehua,  May,  ISJ^l: 

Mrs.  Ives  from  severe  fatigue  was  taken  sick  which 
resulted  in  continued  fever.  For  nine  weeks  she  was 
unable  to  raise  her  head  in  bed.  Our  little  ones  were 
carried  to  the  family  of  Brother  Forbes,  which,  together 
with  their  owm,  made  a  family  of  six  children.  This, 
together  with  the  adults  and  attentions  to  the  sick  served 
much  to  reduce  Sister  Forbes'  health.  Brother  Thurston 
showed  his  happy  face  at  the  commencement  of  our  afflic- 
tions and  watched  with  Mrs.  Ives  two  nights  in  succes- 
sion. Dr.  Andrews  was  here  also  as  soon  as  the  health 
of  his  family  would  admit  and  unremittingly  gave  his 
days  and  his  nights  to  the  care  of  the  sick.  Brother 
Lyons  and  wife  rendered  us  their  assistance  for  two  weeks. 

I  have  spent  my  Sabbaths  at  Kealia  about  five  miles 
from  this  place,  where  our  house  of  worship  is  located, 
which  holds  from  five  to  six  hundred.  My  only  means 
of  getting  to  this  place  is  either  to  go  in  a  canoe  so 
narrow  that  I  can  but  just  squeeze  myself  dovm  into  it, 
so  that  I  am  subject  constantly  to  be  wet  with  water,  or 
else  walk  by  land  over  a  path  composed  of  huge  uneven 
rocks  with  bits  of  sharp  pointed  lava. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      197 

From  letter  by  Rev.  C.  Forhes,  regarding  the  Church 
Building  at  Kealakehua,  Hawaii,  July  22,  18^1 : 

In  the  first  place,  every  stone  had  to  be  carried  by  the 
church  members  on  their  shoulders  about  an  eighth  of 
a  mile  to  the  building.  This  was  gratuitous  labor.  Our 
lime  had  then  to  be  obtained  in  the  following  manner : 
The  coral  was  taken  from  the  sea  and  as  there  are  no 
reefs  here  it  was  procured  at  the  bottom  in  from  ten  to 
twenty  feet  of  water  by  diving  down,  detaching  a  piece 
and,  if  large,  ascending  to  take  breath,  then  descending 
again  with  a  rope  which  they  made  fast  and  drew  up 
the  mass.  In  this  way  the  canoe  was  laden  and  then 
rowed  ashore  and  the  coral  piled  on  the  beach.  Thus  all 
the  limestone  was  procured.  About  thirty  cubic  fathoms 
in  all.  It  had  then  to  be  burned  and  for  this  purpose 
they  had  to  procure  more  than  forty  cords  of  wood,  every 
stick  of  which  was  carried  from  the  mountain  (from  one 
to  two  miles)  on  the  shoulders  of  the  church  members. 
After  the  wood  was  got  and  the  lime  burned  it  still  had 
to  be  taken  from  the  beach  up  to  the  building,  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile.  This  was  done  by  the  women  in 
calabashes,  each  one  filling  her  calabash  with  lime  and 
carrying  it  on  her  shoulder  to  the  building,  in  all  about 
seven  hundred  barrels  of  lime.  In  like  manner  they  car- 
ried fully  as  much  sand  and  about  an  equal  amount  of 
water,  making  in  all  about  two  thousand  barrels  of  sand, 
lime,  and  water  carried  solely  by  the  women  in  calabashes. 
This  labor  of  the  female  church  members  was  entirely 
gratuitous  besides  many  contributions  in  other  ways. 
Then  the  plates,  beams,  sills,  rafters,  and  posts,  which 
support  the  work  overhead,  joists,  lath,  etc.,  were  still  to 
be  got.  This  fell  on  the  men,  of  course,  and  as  we  had 
no  cattle  to  drag  large  sticks  (such  animals  are  not  owned 
by  any  person  who  is  a  member  of  my  church),  the  male 
church  members  divided  themselves  off  into  companies, 
according  to  the  size  of  the  stick  to  be  dragged  down, 
and  taking  with  them  ropes  each  company  selected  their 


198  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

stick  going  up  to  the  mountain  by  daylight.  The  posts 
and  beams  required  from  forty  to  sixty  men  for  each 
stick,  generally  they  got  down  the  stick  by  dark  after 
much  toil  over  beds  of  lava  and  ravines,  the  distance  was 
from  six  to  ten  miles.  In  this  way  all  our  timbers  were 
obtained.  Sometimes  I  went  with  them  myself  to  en- 
courage them  and  found  that  by  the  time  we  reached 
the  place  where  the  timbers  were,  we  had  performed  quite 
a  fatiguing  morning  journey,  besides  being  benumbed  with 
cold,  being  thoroughly  wet  with  the  dew  on  the  fern  and 
underwood  through  which  we  had  to  make  our  way. 

Messrs.  John  D.  Paris  and  W.  H.  Rice  and  their 
wives  were  sent  by  the  officers  of  the  American  Board 
as  missionaries  to  Oregon,  by  the  ship  Gloucester, 
round  Cape  Horn  to  Honolulu,  this  being  at  that  date 
the  shortest  and  safest  route  from  Boston  to  Oregon 
then  known  to  the  commercial  world.  Messrs.  D.  Dole 
and  Elias  Bond  were  fellow  passengers  with  Messrs. 
Paris  and  Rice  on  the  Gloucester,  sent  as  missionaries 
to  Hawaii. 

From  letter  hy  C.  Forbes,  August  17,  18Ji.2: 

Brothers  Paris  aiad  Eice  of  the  Oregon  Mission  were 
led  by  communications  from  that  Mission  to  doubt  the 
propriety  of  proceeding  till  further  light  might  dawn 
on  their  case.  Therefore,  in  accordance  with  their  desire, 
this  mission  appointed  them  both  to  fields  of  labor  for 
the  time  being.  Brother  Paris  was  to  enter  this  field 
and  labor  for  Kau,  which  is  a  district  almost  enclosed 
by  mountains  and  the  sea,  and  contains  over  four  thou- 
sand souls.  This  was  a  great  relief  to  us  at  this  station 
for  the  church  members  in  Kau  were  numerous  and 
hundreds  were  anxious  for  instructions  while  we  pressed 
with  labors  in  Kona  could  only  make  occasional  visits 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      199 

io  Kau  and  pass  through,  preaching  to  the  crowds  who 
were  eager  to  hear  the  word  of  God.  At  the  time  Mr. 
Paris  went  there,  there  were  about  three  hundred  church 
members,  besides  a  large  numbr  of  inquirers.  He  has 
now  acquired  the  language  so  as  to  preach  very  intelli- 
gently and  takes  the  entire  management  of  the  church 
and  labor  of  that  field.  The  attachment  of  the  natives 
to  him  is  daily  increasing  and  his  influence  manifested 
by  the  eagerness  with  which  they  treasure  up  his  instruc- 
tions. Thus  he  labors,  not  knowing  but  the  first  news 
from  the  committee  will  be  a  decision  that  he  ought  to 
leave  that  interesting  and  important  field  and  proceed 
to  Oregon.  The  question  has  often  occurred  to  me  within 
two  months,  is  it  possible  for  me  to  sustain  the  labors 
of  this  station  many  years?  A  negative  answer  is  all  I 
can  find  ground  for.  I  feel  the  encroachment  of  debility 
and  should  act  unwisely  to  conceal  it  from  either  myself 
or  you.  There  are  two  courses  for  you  to  pursue  in 
reference  to  your  missionaries,  particularly  in  this  field. 
First,  leave  us  to  sustain  a  burden  that  will  inevitably 
sink  us  prematurely  to  the  grave  (for  such  is  the  position 
of  affairs  here  that  the  work  must  be  done,  or  soon  there 
will  be  no  use  attempting  it).  The  second  is,  furnish 
immediately  the  requisite  number  of  laborers  to  sustain 
the  toil.  For  this  latter  (which  I  know  is  your  desire) 
there  ought  at  least  to  be  two  able  men  in  Kau  and  one 
in  Kapalilua. 


From  letter  hy  J.  D.  Paris,  Honolulu,  July  30, 
1841: 

I  would  Just  remark  that  this  Mission  is  desirous  to 
have  us  remain  here  permanently  and  if  the  Board  think 
proper  to  alter  the  field  of  our  destination  we  think, 
as  things  are,  and  are  likely  to  be  for  some  time  to  come, 
we  would  on  the  whole  prefer  being  connected  with  this 
Mission. 


200  THE   PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From   letter  by   A,   Bishop^   Ewa,   Oaliu,   July   8, 

Since  the  triumph  of  the  French  over  the  Sandwich 
Islands  Government  in  July,  1839,  the  moral  aspect  of 
things  at  the  islands  has  been  deepening  with  gloom. 
The  repeal  of  the  law  forbidding  the  importation  of 
alcohol  into  the  kingdom  effected  by  the  French  treaty 
was  followed  by  a  large  importation  and  sale  of  the  article 
by  the  French  Consul  and  others.  The  consequence  was 
disastrous.  The  former  quiet  town  of  Honolulu  became 
a  scene  of  riot  and  noise,  and  the  resort  of  the  vicious. 
Many  members  of  our  church,  also,  were  drawn  into  the 
vortex  and  were  cut  off.  The  example  so  boldly  set  at 
the  metropolis,  at  length  began  to  spread  to  other  parts 
of  the  island.  Matters  grew,  for  a  time,  worse  and  worse. 
Our  congregations  divided,  the  love  of  Christians  waxed 
cold,  and  with  the  introduction  of  intoxicating  drinks,  the 
other  concomitant  vices  of  heathenism  were  also  revived. 
In  the  month  of  October,  when  this  state  of  things  had 
arisen  to  its  height,  the  king  made  this  island  a  visit 
from  Maui.  The  state  of  things  was  duly  represented 
to  him  and  supported  by  Commodore  Wilkes,  his  officers 
and  the  American  Consul,  he  published  a  law  prohibiting 
his  subjects  the  making  and  using  of  intoxicating  drinks 
and  the  evil  has,  in  a  good  measure,  been  arrested  and 
order  and  quiet  nearly  restored.  In  the  districts  out  of 
Honolulu  drunkenness  has  been  entirely  stopped.  But 
the  evil  it  enacted  is  still  felt  in  the  depravity  of  mind 
it  produced,  and  the  calamities  it  brought  upon  some  of 
our  churches. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarh,  Laliainaluna,  November 
20,  ISJfl  : 

Our  present  number  of  pupils  is  one  hundred.  A  class 
of  about  thirty  left  in  April  after  spending  four  years 
in  the  institution,  and  are  now  mostly  employed  as  school 
teachers. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      201 

From  letter  by  A.  Thurston,  from  Kailvn,  on  hear- 
ing of  the  death  of  his  daughter  Lucy  in  America, 
December  22,  18U : 

Many  tears  have  fallen  on  reading  the  account  of  the 
deceased  loved  one.  But  I  have  felt  no  disposition  to 
complain  of  the  allotment  of  Providence  with  me  or  mine. 
The  Lord  has  done  right.  Instead,  therefore,  of  complain- 
ing I  would  rather  rejoice  and  praise  the  Lord,  that  he 
gave  us  such  a  child  and  that  she  was  with  us  seventeen 
eventful  years;  that  she  was  carried  across  the  ocean  in 
safety  and  landed  on  the  shores  of  our  fathers,  spent  a 
few  days  there  giving  evidence  of  her  Christian  disciple- 
ship  and  passed  on  to  her  heavenly  mansion. 

From  letter  by  A.  Thurston,  Kailua,  May  1,  ISJ/S: 

The  return  of  Mrs.  Thurston  with  our  two  children, 
Thomas  and  Mary,  all  in  good  health  is  a  matter  of 
devout  gratitude  to  the  Father  of  all  our  mercies.  He 
has  protected  them  across  the  mighty  waters,  and  on  the 
evening  of  the  twenty-fourth  of  October,  1842,  they  ar- 
rived at  Kailua. 

From  letter  by  E.  Johnson,  Waioli,  Kauai,  Feb- 
ruxiry  18,  1841: 

On  the  death  of  our  aged  Governor  Kaikioewa  the  laws 
that  he  had  framed  for  the  good  of  the  schools  were 
thought  by  the  people  to  be  dead  likewise,  and  the  children 
greatly  diminished  in  all  our  schools.  But  I  rejoice  to 
say  that  the  king  has  framed  a  code  of  laws  for  the  benefit 
of  the  children  and  youths  of  his  kingdom.  The  laws 
are  so  framed  that  no  child  between  the  ages  of  four 
to  fourteen  can  be  absent  from  school,  and  all  between 
fourteen  and  eighteen,  who  desire  it,  can  attend  school 
without  being  called  to  the  work  of  the  king  or  head  man. 


202  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  L.  Lyons,  September,  15,  18^1: 

I  would  speak  of  progress  in  mental  and  written  arith- 
metic. There  was  a  time  when  I  could  not  have  been 
induced  to  believe  that  native  children  could  make  such 
proficiency  in  these  branches  under  native  instructors. 
The  advances  made  during  the  last  year  have  altogether 
exceeded  my  highest  expectations. 

One  scene  of  peculiar  interest  I  must  not  pass  unnoticed. 
A  company  of  candidates  for  the  church  stood  before 
me,  among  them  were  the  gray-headed,  the  totally  blind, 
the  deaf  and  dumb,  and  the  child  of  ten  or  twelve  years 
of  age.  They  had  been  examined  together  and  were  bap- 
tized together  and  sat  down  together  at  the  table  of  the 
Lord.  Some  of  the  number  had  travelled  six  or  seven 
hours,  over  giddy  precipices  and  deep  ravines,  to  reach 
the  place  where  the  missionary  was  laboring.  But  why 
receive  to  the  church  the  deaf  and  dumb  man,  because 
from  all  the  evidence  that  could  be  gathered  from  signs 
and  general  conduct  we  regarded  him  as  a  Christian.  He 
had  forsaken  sinful  practices,  was  often  found  in  the 
attitude  of  prayer,  struggling,  apparently,  to  give  vent  to 
his  feelings  in  an  audible  voice,  but  poor  man !  this 
privilege  was  not  his.  Yet,  doubtless,  his  language  was 
intelligible  to  the  ear  of  God.  Whenever  there  was  a 
religious  meeting  he  was  usually  present  and  appeared 
as  devoted  and  interested  as  any  of  the  worshippers. 
Whenever  he  discovered,  what  he  doubtless  considered  as 
sinful  and  improper  conduct  in  others,  he  manifested  by 
signs  and  gestures  his  displeasure.  As  he  indicated  the 
desire  to  come  into  the  church,  duty  seemed  to  say,  open 
the  door  and  allow  the  poor  man  to  enter.  "For  he 
maketh  the  deaf  to  hear  and  the  dumb  to  speak."  "The 
eyes  of  the  blind  shall  be  opened  and  the  ears  of  the  deaf 
shall  be  unstopped,  then  shall  the  lame  man  leap  as  the 
hart,  and  the  tongue  of  the  dumb  sing;  for  in  the  wilder- 
ness shall  waters  break  out,  and  streams  in  the  desert?" 

A  large  stone  edifice  whose  extension  of  stately  walls 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1840-1842      203 

and  two  large  panel  doors  and  smiling  windows,  presents 
an  imposing  form  and  whose  interior,  with  the  addition 
of  a  boarded  floor  and  well  arranged  seats  and  neat  simple 
pulpit,  furnishes  new  attractions  to  the  native  worship- 
per. There  the  long  toiling  missionary,  surrounded  with 
the  churchgoing  throng,  may  stand,  cast  his  eye  around 
and,  while  he  contrasts  the  present  with  the  past,  he  is 
constrained  to  exclaim :  "Behold  what  God  has  wrought," 
what  the  Gospel  has  accomplished  on  the  spot  where  once 
stood  the  altars  and  the  temples  of  a  bloody  idolatry. 

From  letter  hy  Dr.  Baldwin  to  Mr.  Armstrong,  from 
LaJiaina,  January  16,  18J{2: 

Hoapili  wahine  had  but  a  whispering  voice  all  day. 
She  retained  her  reason  and  showed  out  the  genuine 
disciple  of  Jesus  to  the  last.  When  shall  her  place  in 
Zion  be  made  good?  She  was  at  meeting  all  day  last 
Sabbath  and  again  on  Wednesday — today,  in  the  upper 
Sanctuary. 

From  Report  of  Mission  Seminary  at  Lahainaluna, 
May,  18Jf2: 

The  whole  number  now  living,  who  have  been  members 
of  the  Seminary  and  have  graduated,  is  one  hundred  and 
fifty.  Of  these  one  hundred  and  five  are  usefully  em- 
ployed as  teachers.  Officers  of  government  thirty-five,  a 
few  of  these  also  teach.  In  other  useful  employments, 
seven.  Doing  nothing  or  worse,  eleven.  Of  the  above, 
Beventy-three  are  church  members  in  regular  standing. 
Nine  are  Deacons  or  Elders.  In  conclusion,  the  teachers 
would  say  that  from  past  experience  they  are  fully  satis- 
fied of  two  things:  First,  that  the  Seminary  is  among 
the  most  important  instrumentalities  employed  by  the 
Mission  for  the  elevation  and  salvation  of  the  people  as 
a  nation  and  as  individuals;  and.  Second,  that  it  cannot 
be  carried  on  efficiently  without  a  strong  company  of 
patient  and  self-denying  teachers. 


XIX 
JOURlSrALS  AND  LETTERS.  1842-1847 


F 


BOM  letter  hy  A.  S.  Cooke,  Honolulu: 


Mrs.  Cooke,  in  June  last,  1842,  soou  after 
our  return  from  Maui,  was  taken  ill  with 
ophthalmy  and,  for  a  time,  we  were  fearful  she  would 
lose  sight  of  both  her  eyes.  The  right  eye  was  restored 
in  about  four  weeks,  but  the  left  eye  had  an  ulcer  which 
broke  and  left  an  opaque  substance  over  the  sight  render- 
ing it  almost  blind.  The  chiefs,  parents  of  the  children 
with  us,  have  appeared  to  place  very  implicit  confidence 
in  our  management,  never  seeking  to  alter  our  plans,  nor 
jfinding  fault  with  what  we  do.  This  was  evidenced  to 
us  by  the  manner  they  treated  us  while  on  a  visit  to 
Maui  in  April  and  May  last.  It  was  the  season  of  the 
king  and  nobles  meeting  together  to  enact  laws,  and  as 
all  would  be  together  it  was  desirable  to  have  all  their 
children  with  them.  They  sent  a  vessel  on  purpose  for 
us  and  we  all  went,  teachers,  assistants,  and  scholars. 
The  vessel  was  entirely  at  our  control.  When  we  reached 
Lahaina  the  Premier  and  some  of  the  chiefs  came  out 
with  a  double  canoe  and  took  us  on  shore.  After  reaching 
the  house  they  prepared  a  sumptuous  breakfast  for  us 
in  English  style;  they  themselves  serving  as  stewards 
and  waiters,  except  the  king  and  premier  who  sat  with 
us.  After  breakfast  they  conducted  us  to  a  large  two- 
story  stone  house  built  and  formerly  occupied  by  Hoapili. 
Here  we  were  to  live  by  ourselves  just  as  we  did  at  our 
home  in  Honolulu.  I  never  saw  a  band  of  brothers  and 
sisters,  especially  so  large  a  band,  that  had  so  few  diffi- 
culties among  themselves  as  these  children. 

204 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-184r      205 

Lahaina,  July  18,  18Jf.2,  Dr.  Baldwin  writes: 

One  of  the  most  signal  and  unexpected  interpositions 
of  Providence  has  occurred  the  present  year,  which  led 
the  king  and  all  the  high  chiefs  to  join  the  Temperance 
Society.  That  put  a  new  face  upon  all  things  around 
us.  It  cut  ofE  in  a  day  nine-tenths  of  the  power  which 
unprincipled  foreigners  had  before  possessed  over  the  king 
and  over  the  kingdom.  I  will  give  you  a  translation  of 
the  pledge  signed  on  that  day,  April  26,  1842,  by  thirteen 
chiefs,  by  their  children,  members  of  Mr.  Cooke's  school, 
and,  since,  by  about  fifteen  hundred  of  the  people  of 
different  grades  at  this  place.     It  is  as  follows: 

"WE,  the  signers  of  this  Pledge,  unite  ourselves  in  a 
Society  for  the  purpose  of  putting  an  end  to  the  use  of 
intoxicating  liquors  in  the  Sandwich  Islands.  Therefore 
we  Pledge  ourselves  before  God  and  men  to  forsake  en- 
tirely the  use  of  all  intoxicating  drinks.  We  will  neither 
drink  distilled  liquors  or  wine,  nor  anything  that  intoxi- 
cates. We  will  not  drink  in  imitation  of  others,  nor  to 
the  health  of  others,  nor  for  pleasure.  We  will  not  buy 
or  sell  or  give  to  others  intoxicating  drinks,  nor  will  we 
do  anything  opposed  to  the  spirit  of  this  Pledge,  but  will 
do  all  in  our  power,  and  which  is  proper  for  us  to  do,  to 
put  an  end  to  the  use  of  intoxicating  drinks  among  all 
men." 

The  officers  of  the  Society,  chosen  at  a  subsequent  meet- 
ing, were: 

Kamehameha  III    (the  King)  President 

D.  Baldwin  Secretary 

Paki 


John  Youitg 

JOANE  Ir 

D.  Malo 
A.  MoKU 


Executive  Committee 


206  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander,  Kauai,  September 
8,  1842: 

I  was  surprised  to  find  no  allusion  in  your  letter  to 
our  school  at  Punahou  for  our  children,  a  school  in  whose 
prosperity  I  feel  the  deepest  interest,  for  without  it  the 
attention  which  many  of  us  must  bestow  on  our  rising 
families  must  materially  cripple  our  missionary  labors. 
I  hope  the  Board  will  aid  us  in  cherishing  that  institu- 
tion that  it  may  become  a  blessing  to  our  children,  and 
a  joy  to  our  hearts. 

From  letter  hy  A.  B.  Smith,  Waialua,  October  11, 
1842: 

In  the  providence  of  God  this  station  has  been  our 
place  of  residence  for  four  months  past,  and  it  devolves 
on  me  at  this  time  to  communicate  to  you  the  sad  in- 
telligence that  one  of  our  number  at  this  station  is  no 
more  in  the  land  of  the  living.  Yesterday  we  committed 
to  the  silent  grave  the  remains  of  our  beloved  sister,  Mrs. 
Locke.  Her  labors  here  are  finished  and  she  has  gone  to 
receive  her  reward  on  high. 

From  letter  written  on  behalf  of  the  Mission  by  A. 
Bishop,  B.  W.  Parher,  and  R,  Armstrong,  Honolulu, 
June  1,  1842: 

To  us  all  the  idea  of  such  a  measure  as  the  return  to 
the  fatherland  is  always  a  dernier  resort,  and  more  pain- 
ful than  was  the  pang  of  bidding  adieu  to  country  and 
kindred.  But  we  see  no  other  course  which  in  certain 
cases  can  be  substituted  for  return  to  our  native  land. 
During  the  past  year  there  have  been  three  deaths  among 
the  children  of  the  Mission.  On  the  15th  of  November 
last,  Henry,  the  only  son  and  eldest  child  of  Mr.  Locke 
at  Waialua,  was  drowned  in  the  river  in  front  of  his 
house.  He  was  not  missed  for  some  time  and  when  found 
the  spark  of  life  had  fled.     On  the  30th  of  April  the 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      207 

infant  son  and  only  child  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Lowell  Smith 
was  removed  by  dysentery  now  prevalent  among  children. 
And  within  these  few  days  now  passed,  the  infant  daughter 
of  Dr.  Andrews  was  seized  with  the  same  disorder  and 
expired  in  the  arms  of  its  afflicted  parents. 

The  merchants  of  these  islands  are  receiving  monthly 
advices  from  their  American  correspondents  through 
New  York,  Vera  Cruz,  and  Mazatlan,  which  enables 
them  to  obtain  answers  to  their  letters  in  the  space  of 
a  few  months,  while  it  takes  us  a  year  and  a  half  or 
two  years  from  the  time  of  our  General  Meetings  in  May 
to  get  returns  respecting  our  most  important  transac- 
tions. Since  our  last  Annual  Meeting  Mr.  Lorrin  An- 
drews of  the  Seminary  and  Dr.  Judd  have  left  the  service 
of  the  Board  though  the  latter  engaged  to  act  as  physician 
to  the  mission  families  for  a  season.  Mr.  Green  also 
announces  to  the  mission  that  he  has  forwarded  a  request 
for  dismission  from  his  services  to  the  Board  and  expects 
his  connection  with  us  will  be  dissolved  in  the  course  of 
the  present  year.  These  changes  taking  place  have  em- 
barrassed our  operations  and  leaves  our  prospects  in  un- 
certainty. The  renewed  prostrations  of  health  in  the 
instances  of  Messrs.  Clark  and  Dibble  and  the  retirement 
of  Mr.  Andrews  from  the  post  he  has  so  long  occupied 
has  thrown  the  Seminary  into  a  state  bordering  upon 
suspension:  an  event  which  would  inevitably  have  taken 
place,  if  we  had  not  succeeded  in  obtaining  a  suitable 
man  to  remove  to  that  institution.  Mr.  Emerson,  of 
Waialua,  though  at  the  sacrifice  of  much  feeling  on  his 
part,  has  cheerfully  yielded  to  the  invitation  of  the  mis- 
sion to  remove  to  the  Seminary.  This  arrangement  will 
enable  the  business  of  the  institution  to  move  on,  but 
will  need  a  secular  man  to  be  placed  there  as  soon  as 
one  can  be  obtained  as  none  of  our  present  number  can 
be  spared  for  that  purpose.  The  subject  of  the  circular 
for  raising  up  a  native  ministry  has  been  before  us  and 
meets  with  a  response  from  all  our  hearts.  It  revives 
a  hope  which  we  have  long  cherished  as  the  means  of 


208  THE  PILGRBIS  OF  HAWAII 

perpetuating  the  institution  of  religion,  of  which  we  are 
now  laying  the  foundations.  Had  we,  at  this  moment, 
fifty  well  trained  and  pious  men  ready  to  send  forth  as 
ministers  of  the  Gospel  there  would  be  ample  room  for 
their  labors  in  places  more  or  less  remote  from  our 
several  stations  where  missionary  posts  are  impracticable. 
We  have  long  felt,  likewise,  that  a  native  ministry  must 
sooner  or  later  take  the  place  of  foreign  missionaries  and 
be  supported  by  the  people,  whenever  the  means  of  a 
foreign  support  to  us  shall  be  withdrawn.  Therefore  it 
was  resolved  that  while  suitable  native  candidates  for  the 
Gospel  Ministry  are  so  few,  and  those  most  promising  in 
our  churches  are  imperiously  needed  on  their  prospective 
islands,  it  be  recommended  to  the  brethren  of  each  island 
to  confer  together  on  this  subject  and  to  enter  upon  the 
work  as  individuals,  or  designate  one  of  their  number  to 
devote  such  a  portion  of  his  time  as  he  and  they  might 
deem  proper  to  a  class  in  theology  and,  also,  to  make 
all  such  arrangements  as  may  be  necessary  to  carry  this 
suggestion  into  effect. 

From  letter  hy  G.  P.  Judd,  Honolulu,  June  11, 18Jf2: 

On  the  19th  of  last  April,  or  thereabouts,  I  wrote  you 
as  I  was  about  to  visit  Lahaina  at  the  request  of  the 
king.  On  my  arrival  there  I  found  that  the  minds  of 
the  chiefs  were  prepared  to  press  upon  me  the  importance 
of  my  engaging  at  once  in  their  service  and  in  order  to 
my  becoming  more  familiar  with  the  details  of  their 
business  it  was  necessary  for  me  to  attend  the  daily  ses- 
sions of  their  legislature.  This,  of  course,  involved  me 
in  their  affairs  more  than  is  consistent  for  a  Missionary 
of  the  Board,  and  by  the  advice  of  Mr.  Eichards  I  ac- 
cepted two  appointments  without  consulting  with  the 
brethren. 

The  following  letter  from  Mr.  Richards  was  written 
while  he  and  the  chief  Haalilio  were  on  a  mission  to 
America  and  Europe  seeking  from  the  leading  powers 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      209 

recognition  of  the  independence  of  Hawaii,  then  the 
smallest  nation  on  earth: 

East  Hampton,  Massachusetts,  January  7,  1843. 
I  arrived  here  on  Wednesday  night  having  spent  one 
day  with  my  daughter  in  Brooklyn,  The  other  four  of 
my  children  are  with  me  here.  These  few  days  will  be 
numbered  among  the  happiest  of  my  life.  I  now  know 
that  there  is  a  joy,  even  this  side  of  heaven,  which  far 
exceeds  anticipation  and  even  the  highest  powers  of  con- 
ception. I  hope  to  be  profited  during  my  whole  life  by 
this  meeting.  God  has  been  better  to  me  than  all  my 
hopes.  I  will  praise  Him  for  the  past  and  my  heart  shall 
trust  in  Him  for  time  to  come. 

From  letter  hy  William  Richards,  London,  April  3, 
18JtS: 

We  addressed  Lord  Aberdeen  an  official  letter,  setting 
forth  the  reasons  for  our  request,  similar  to  the  letter 
addressed  to  Daniel  Webster.  We  then  went  to  Paris, 
taking  letters  from  the  best  sources  to  Mr.  Guisot.  We 
obtained  easy  access  to  him  and  laid  before  him  a 
memorandum  of  the  object  of  our  Embassy,  viz. :  Nulli- 
fication of  treaties,  reasons  briefly  stated;  Acknowledg- 
ment of  Independence;  Formation  of  a  New  Treaty  and 
removal  of  present  Consul.  He  at  once  declared  posi- 
tively and  strongly  that  Brandy  should  no  longer  be 
forced  upon  us  and  that  our  Independence  should  be 
acknowledged.  He  said  the  other  points  he  would  con- 
sider, and  on  our  return  from  London  he  would  give  us 
an  opportunity  to  confirm  our  statement  and  throw  light 
on  the  subject  and  would  endeavor  to  do  that  which  is 
right  in  the  case.  We  returned  much  encouraged,  feeling 
that  God  prospered  us.  The  news  of  the  taking  of 
Tahiti,  reached  Paris  the  same  day  we  did,  and  had  a 
very  great  tendency  to  forward  our  object.  We  returned 
to  London,  having  spent  only  four  days  in  Paris.  We 
lost  no  time  in  communicating  to  Lord  Aberdeen  the  result 


210  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

of  our  visit  to  France,  and  day  before  yesterday  we  re- 
ceived his  answer  announcing  the  determination  of  the 
British  Government  to  acknowledge  the  Independence  of 
the  Islands.  We  have  also  visited  Belgium,  and  have  had 
an  interview  with  King  Leopold,  and  he  will  follow  the 
rest.  You  will  not  fail  to  discover  the  hand  of  God  in 
all  these  movements,  they  are  not  the  movements  of  men. 
They  look  to  me  like  the  crowning  acts  of  that  Divine 
benevolence  which  has  been  performing  such  a  series  of 
wonders  for  the  salvation  of  Hawaii.  Sir  George  Simpson 
has  been  of  invaluable  benefit  to  us.  No  zeal,  or  diligence, 
or  disinterestedness  could  have  excelled  that  which  he 
has  manifested  for  the  last  six  weeks.  He  has  secured 
my  gratitude  and  my  affection  and  is  worthy  of  the  ever- 
lasting gratitude  of  Hawaii. 

From  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander,  Honolulu,  January 
19, 1843: 

When  visiting  at  Waialua  I  was  much  interested  in 
the  school  and  plantation  of  Mr.  Locke.  The  order  and 
system  with  which  everything  is  managed  remind  one  of 
a  neat  New  England  farm.  The  boys  surpass  all  Ha- 
waiians  I  have  seen  in  order  and  industry.  Every  one 
knows  his  place  and  works  as  though  his  task  was  a 
pleasure.  I  also  met  them  several  times  in  the  school 
room  and  was  pleased  to  find  they  had  made  so  much 
progress  in  their  studies.  I  think  the  boys  are  receiving 
that  moral,  intellectual,  and  physical  culture  adapted  to 
fit  them  for  eminent  usefulness  in  the  nation. 

From  letter  hy  J.  W.  Smith,  Koloa,  April  6,  18^3: 

You  have  doubtless  heard  through  Mr.  Chamberlain 
of  our  safe  arrival  at  Honolulu  on  the  22d  of  September, 
one  hundred  and  forty-two  days  after  leaving  Boston. 
On  the  4th  of  November  I  came  to  this  place  accom- 
panied with  Mrs.  Smith,  the  brethren  having  appointed 
me  to  this  station  at  their  last  General  Meeting.     We 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      211 

took  possession  of  the  house  formerly  occupied  by  Dr. 
Lafon  and  felt  truly  thankful  that  we  had  not,  as  many 
of  our  brethren  have  had,  the  care  and  perplexity  of 
building  a  house  to  live  in  before  we  could  be  comfortable. 
Indeed,  when  we  look  upon  the  period  which  has  elapsed 
since  we  left  our  native  land,  we  feel  that  the  Lord  hath 
been  with  us  and  that  mercy  and  goodness  have  followed 
us  continually.  Since  I  arrived  at  this  place  I  have  been 
employed  in  administering  to  the  sick  and  in  studying 
the  Hawaiian  language  and,  recently,  I  have  spent  a 
part  of  my  time  in  visiting  the  native  schools.  My  first 
impression  in  relation  to  matters  and  things  at  the  islands 
were  very  pleasant.  Honolulu  presents  an  appearance  of 
civilization  much  beyond  my  expectations.  The  brethren 
of  the  mission  live  in  circumstances  of  comparative  com- 
fort, though  most  of  them  look  rather  pale  and  feeble, 
many  of  the  ladies  of  the  mission  are  invalids.  The 
results  of  missionary  labor  are  most  conspicuous  on  the 
Sabbath.  I  think  no  Christian  could  enter  the  great 
church  at  Honolulu  on  the  Sabbath  and  see  so  large  a 
congregation,  once  heathen,  now  devoutly  worshipping  the 
Lord  of  Hosts,  and  not  be  deeply  affected  at  the  sight. 

From  letter  by  E.  Bond,  Kohala,  Match,  16,  ISJfS: 

We  have  been  trying  to  labor  as  God  has  given  us 
strength  and  He  in  many  ways  has  blessed  us  with  good 
health  and  spirits  from  the  first.  Since  the  first  com- 
mencement of  my  labors  here  I  have  made  it  a  point  to 
visit  every  part  of  the  field  at  least  four  times  a  year, 
in  each  tour  meeting  with  the  church  members  and  all 
others  disposed  to  attend  the  meetings  in  their  respective 
neighborhoods  held  in  the  school  houses,  thirty-three  in 
number.  Seven  or  eight  days  is  the  amount  of  time  nec- 
essary to  accomplish  a  complete  tour  of  the  field;  and 
I  need  hardly  say,  after  all  you  have  heard  of  the  travel- 
ling in  these  islands,  that  the  labor  of  performing  these 
tours  is  exceedingly  fatiguing  to  the  flesh,  and  hardly 
less  so  to  the  spirit,  in  consequence  of  the  great  amount 


212  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

and  variety  of  instmction  to  be  given  to  the  thousands 
the  missionary  meets  in  his  progress.  I  ought  to  have 
spoken  of  the  monthly  contributions  of  this  church  to 
benevolent  objects.  The  amount  for  the  past  mission 
year  has  been  about  $230.  My  own  school  for  teachers, 
commenced  in  November,  1841,  has  continued  through 
the  year,  on  Wednesday  and  Saturday  of  each  week,  with 
some  considerable  benefit,  I  trust,  to  the  cause  of  educa- 
tion among  us.  A  boarding  school  for  boys  was  com- 
menced in  September  last.  Its  object  is  twofold:  first, 
to  prepare  boys  for  the  school  at  Hilo  and,  second,  to 
prepare  some  teachers  for  our  own  immediate  wants.  This 
school  is  held  five  days  per  week,  two  sessions  per  day, 
except  Wednesday.  I  have  admitted  fourteen  of  the  best 
boys,  the  most  promising  I  could  find  in  the  field,  all  of 
whom  remain  continually  under  my  immediate  care  and 
inspection.  During  the  past  year  at  least  twenty-three 
substantial  stone  school  houses  have  either  been  com- 
pleted, or  are  now  in  progress  of  erection,  instead  of  the 
ordinary  grass  houses,  so  soon  destroyed  by  the  children. 
Our  situation  is  still  very  pleasant  to  us.  We  have  no 
spot  on  the  wide  earth  for  which  we  would  willingly  ex- 
change it,  unless  called  to  do  so  by  the  providence  of 
God. 


From  letter  by  J.  D.  Paris,  Kau,  April  28,  18Jf3: 

On  one  of  my  last  tours  an  old  man,  whose  name  is  Laza- 
rus, who  looks  as  if  he  could  not  walk  a  mile,  followed  me 
through  the  whole  length  of  Kau,  travelling  not  less  than 
one  hundred  and  twenty  miles.  I  endeavored  to  persuade 
him  to  return  home  aftegr  he  had  gone  a  short  distance, 
but  he  replied  with  great  earnestness  that  the  "lamp  of 
life  was  almost  out,  his  eyes  were  almost  blind,  his  ears 
almost  deaf,  and  his  feet  would  not  carry  him  much 
longer  to  the  house  of  God,  and  he  wished  to  hear  the 
blessed  Gospel  as  often  as  he  could  before  he  died." 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      213 

From  letter  written  in  behalf  of  the  Mission  hy  A. 
Thurston,  T.  Coan,  and  D.  Dole,  Honolulu,  May  30, 

Mr.  Clark,  on  account  of  enfeebled  health,  has  requested 
that  his  connection  with  the  Seminary  might  cease  and 
he  has  accordingly  been  located  at  Wailuku,  as  pastor 
of  the  church  formerly  under  the  care  of  Mr.  Armstrong. 
To  fill  the  vacancy  made  by  his  removal,  Mr.  Alexander 
has  been  located  at  Lahainaluna.  Mr.  Dibble,  on  account 
of  ill  health,  is  compelled  to  reside  one  mile  distant  from 
the  Seminary.  He  cannot  be  expected  to  do  as  much 
for  the  institution  in  the  time  to  come  as  he  has  done. 
The  school  at  Punahou,  for  the  children  of  missionaries, 
went  into  operation  July  11,  1842.  About  thirty  children 
have  attended  the  school  and  of  these  sixteen  have  been 
boarders.  Temperance.  This  good  cause  has  been  gain- 
ing ground  among  the  people  during  the  past  year.  Most 
of  those  who  have  united  with  our  temperance  societies 
stand  firm  to  their  pledge,  and  a  healthful  public  senti- 
ment has  been  strengthened  on  this  subject.  The  king  still 
remains  true  and  firm  to  his  principles  of  total  abstinence 
and  he  has  recently  emptied  into  the  sea  about  one  hun- 
dred and  twenty  gallons  of  ardent  spirits,  which  had  lain 
untouched  in  his  store  house  from  the  time  he  first  signed 
the  total  abstinence  pledge. 

From  letter  hy  Levi  Chamberlain,  Honolulu,  Feb- 
ruary 21,  1843: 

It  has,  for  about  a  week,  been  a  season  of  excitement 
to  the  inhabitants  of  Honolulu,  both  natives  and  foreign- 
ers. The  Carrysfort,  an  English  ship-of-war,  commanded 
by  Lord  George  Paulet,  arrived  on  the  tenth  instant,  was 
immediately  visited  by  Mr.  Alexander  Simpson,  a  person 
left  in  charge  of  the  affairs  of  the  British  Consulate 
by  Mr.  Charlton,  who  had  departed  secretly  for  England, 
and   whom   the  government,  from  his   known  hostility. 


214  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

had  refused  to  acknowledge  as  acting  consul.  Mr.  Simp- 
son had  certain  complaints  to  make  to  the  commander, 
one  of  which  was  that  the  Sandwich  Islands  Government 
had  refused  him  an  acknowledgment,  and  another,  that 
property  belonging  to  Mr.  Charlton,  the  Consul,  now 
absent,  had  been  laid  under  attachment  for  debt  by  a 
decision  of  Court,  in  opposition  to  the  protest  of  Mrs. 
Charlton,  his  wife,  who  was  on  the  premises.  The  King, 
who  was  at  Maui,  was  sent  for  and,  almost  immediately 
on  his  arrival  at  Honolulu,  was  summoned  to  a  private 
interview  with  his  Lordship,  to  appear  without  his  in- 
terpreter (Dr.  Judd).  This  the  king  declined  to  grant, 
but  assured  His  Lordship  that  he  would  wait  upon  him 
at  an  early  period  attended  by  his  interpreter.  The  reply 
to  this  communication  was  attended  with  demands,  the 
non-compliance  with  which  was  threatened  with  special 
hostilities  and  an  attack  upon  the  place  from  the  guns 
of  the  ship  in  less  than  twenty-four  hours.  If  an  affirma- 
tive answer  were  not  given  by  four  o'clock  of  the  next 
day  the  firing  would  commence.  This  communication 
was  sent  to  the  government  on  the  evening  of  the  seven- 
teenth. Early  in  the  morning  of  the  next  day  an  English 
Brig  was  towed  out  of  the  harbor  and  anchored  in  the 
roads  and  the  English  families  in  the  place  instructed 
to  take  refuge  on  board  of  her  while,  at  the  same  time, 
the  Frigate  was  moored  with  her  broadside  placed  toward 
the  fort  and  everything  put  in  readiness  for  an  attack 
in  case  the  demands  were  not  complied  with.  Not  a 
doubt  was  entertained  of  the  resolute  purpose  of  the 
English  Commander  to  put  the  threat  into  execution, 
backed  up  as  he  was  by  the  exasperated  Simpson.  Much 
alarm  was  experienced  by  the  residents  and  some  removed 
their  money  and  valuable  papers  to  a  place  of  safety  and 
began  packing  up  their  effects.  Captain  Long  of  the 
United  States  Sloop  of  War,  Boston,  recently  arrived  in 
port,  offered  his  ship  as  an  asylum  to  all  Americans  who 
might  wish  to  avail  themselves  of  his  protection,  and  all 
the  commanders  of  the  American  whaling  ships  in  port 


o 
U 


K 


eu 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      215 

were  requested  to  have  their  boats  in  waiting  at  twelve 
o'clock.  This  was  the  attitude  of  things  abroad  while 
the  chiefs  were  engaged  in  council  within  and  devising 
what  reply  they  should  make.  Their  indignation  was 
sufficiently  raised  to  have  resisted,  but  their  fears  led 
them  to  compliance.  And  they  penned  an  answer  of  sub- 
mission, at  the  same  time  introducing  a  protest  against 
the  demands  to  which  they  had  yielded  only  because  the 
nation's  weakness  precluded  resistance  and  referred  the 
whole  case  to  the  clemency  of  the  Court  of  Great  Britain. 
The  concession  seemed  to  be  satisfactory.  Monday,  two 
o'clock,  salutes  were  exchanged  and  the  excitement  from 
fears  of  violence  and  bloodshed  subsided,  though  great 
indignation  was  felt  on  the  part  of  many  Americans. 
There  is  much  reason  to  fear  the  difficulties  are  not  ended, 
though  the  apprehension  of  immediate  hostilities  is  re- 
moved. 

March  7.  Important  events  have  transpired  since  the 
date  occurred  which  stands  at  the  head  of  this  letter  of 
the  nature  of  which  the  printed  official  acts,  which  I 
enclose,  will  sufficiently  inform  you.  Had  I  time  I  would 
gladly  go  into  detail  of  the  transactions  which  led  to  the 
results  that  are  now  witnessed.  The  British  flag  is  hoisted 
in  all  the  islands  and  the  aifairs  of  the  government,  in 
everything  which  relates  to  foreigners,  are  transacted  by 
a  Board  entitled  the  British  Commissioners  for  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Sandwich  Islands.  Of  this  Commission 
Dr.  Judd  is  a  member  as  deputy  for  the  king.  What 
induced  the  king,  you  may  ask,  to  cede  his  kingdom 
while  negotiations  were  pending  at  the  Court  of  Great 
Britain.  Having  duly  commissioned  Ambassadors  and 
sent  them  to  England  with  powers  to  adjust  all  difficulties 
and  make  treaties,  why  did  not  the  king  stand  his  ground 
and  hold  out  until  the  result  of  those  negotiations  were 
known?  This  he  gladly  would  have  done,  but  having 
yielded  to  the  first  demands,  because  it  would  have  been 
presumptuous  to  resist,  notwithstanding  it  was  done  under 
protest,  other  demands,  more  arbitrary  and  unjust,  were 


216  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

preferred,  damages  to  a  very  large  amount  (eighty  thou- 
sand dollars),  which  the  government  had  no  ability  to 
meet,  were  brought  against  them  and  no  alternative 
seemed  left  but  to  make  a  provisional  cession  of  the 
islands  or  to  fight.  For  the  latter  they  had  neither  the 
disposition  nor  the  ability  and,  as  the  most  peaceful 
measure,  they  cast  themselves  upon  the  magnanimity  and 
clemency  of  the  British  Government. 

From  letter  written  from  the  Sandwich  Islands^ 
August,  ISJfS: 

The  day  on  which  the  Sandwich  Islands  Government 
was  restored  and  the  national  flag  again  raised  will  be 
long  remembered  in  these  islands.  Admiral  Thomas, 
Commander-in-Chief  of  H.  B.  M.'s  naval  forces  in  the 
Pacific  Ocean,  determined  that  the  event  should  be  at- 
tended with  special  ceremony.  Some  four  hundred 
marines  with  their  officers  from  the  three  English  ships 
of  war  in  port,  viz. :  Dublin,  Carry sfort,  and  Hazard, 
were  marched  out  and  drawn  up  in  line  upon  the  plain, 
having  several  brass  pieces  in  their  train,  a  great  con- 
course of  people  both  native  and  foreigners  assembled 
and  took  positions  on  the  sides  of  a  large  parallelogram, 
which  had  been  staked  off,  a  tent  for  the  king  and  his 
attendants  having  been  erected  on  one  side,  and  on  the 
opposite  side  another  for  foreign  ladies  and  persons  of 
distinction.  Near  the  king's  tent  a  staff  bearing  the 
Sandwich  Islands  flag  furled,  was  set  up,  by  the  side  of 
which  the  King  and  Admiral  Thomas,  in  full  uniform, 
attended  by  appropriate  officers,  took  their  stand.  At  a 
signal  the  standard  was  unfurled  and  simultaneously 
with  it  the  field  pieces  opened  the  salute,  which  was  fol- 
lowed by  the  display  of  other  banners  and  the  hoisting 
of  the  national  flag  at  the  two  fortresses  and  a  discharge 
of  a  national  salute  from  all  the  ships  of  war  in  port  and 
from  the  batteries.  Various  evolutions  were  performed 
by  the  marines  and  all  due  honor  conferred  upon  His 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      217 

Majesty  and  the  flag  of  his  nation.  Commodore  Kearney 
and  officers  from  the  United  States  Ship  Constellation 
honored  the  circle  with  their  presence  and  seemed  highly 
to  participate  in  the  joy  of  the  occasion.^  The  American 
residents  and  most  of  the  foreign  ladies  testified  by  their 
presence  and  signals  of  congratulation  that  they  felt  a 
high  degree  of  interest  in  the  events  of  the  day. 

On  the  return  of  the  king  to  his  residence  he  was  met 
by  the  officers  of  a  band  of  soldiers  who  had  been  enlisted 
into  the  service  of  the  British  Commission  and  had  sworn 
allegiance  to  another  sovereign.  They  advanced  into  his 
presence  and  supplicated  pardon  by  kissing  the  hand  of 
the  king  and  declaring  their  wish  to  return  to  their 
allegiance.  The  king  very  graciously  granted  their  re- 
quest, signed  a  writing  for  their  pardon,  together  with 
those  that  had  composed  their  band  and  dismissed  them 
to  return  to  their  duties.  At  one  o'clock  the  king  and 
chiefs  repaired  to  the  stone  meeting  house  to  offer  public 
thanks  for  the  singular  interposition  of  Providence  in 
favor  of  the  nation.  The  king  made  an  earnest  address 
stating  that,  according  to  the  hope  expressed  by  him  when 
he  ceded  the  islands,  "the  life  of  the  land"  had  been 
restored  to  him,-  that  now  they,  the  people  of  his  islands, 
should  look  to  him  and  his  rule  over  them  should  be 
exercised  according  to  the  constitution  and  laws.  This 
address  was  followed  by  the  interpretation  of  Admiral 
Thomas'  Declaration,  after  which  John  li  delivered  an 
animated  address  suited  to  the  jojrful  occasion.  He  re- 
ferred to  the  gloom  which  had  shrouded  the  nation  and 
the  despondency  which  had  brooded  over  many  minds, 
that  these  were  now  dispelled,  that  joyful  hope  had  sprung 
up  making  every  thing  around  look  bright  and  smiling. 

1  Commodore  Kearney  was  Commander  of  the  American  Squad- 
ron on  the  Pacific  at  this  time. 

2  The  Hawaiian  of  this  expression  of  the  king  was  ' '  Ua  man  ka 
ea  o  ka  aina  i  ka  pono ' ' — ' '  The  life  of  the  land  is  perpetuated  in 
righteousness, ' '  and  this  was  the  national  motto  while  the  kingdom 
continued. 


218  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

He  referred  to  the  auspicious  event  of  the  restoration  as 
of  the  Lord  who  had  been  mindful  of  the  nation  in  its 
low  state  and  as  demanding  from  all,  grateful  thanks  and 
praise.  He  spoke  as  though  the  sentiments  and  feelings 
of  the  Psalmist  was  in  his  heart  when  he  penned  the 
Twelfth  Psalm,  '^hen  the  Lord  turned  again  the  cap- 
tivity of  Zion  we  were  like  them  that  dream,"  etc.  Every 
arrangement  on  the  part  of  Admiral  Thomas  was  made 
with  reference  to  conferring  upon  the  king  the  honor 
which  was  due  to  him  as  a  sovereign  and  to  wipe  away, 
as  it  seemed  to  us,  as  far  as  he  might  be  able  the  reproach 
which  his  flag  had  suffered  by  the  proceeding  of  Lord 
Paulet.  He  was  Invited  to  dine  on  board  the  Admiral's 
ship  in  company  with  Commodore  Kearney  of  the  Con- 
stellation. The  ships  were  fully  decorated  with  national 
ensigns  and  signals  and  as  the  king  passed  the  men-of- 
war  in  the  harbor  he  was  honored  with  a  national  salute 
from  each,  and  with  another  from  the  Dublin,  as  he  en- 
tered on  board.  The  conduct  of  the  king  on  the  occasion 
was  very  creditable  to  him  and  on  all  occasions  his  be- 
havior  has  been  dignified  and  becoming.  We  are  happy 
to  learn  that  he  has  maintained  his  pledge  of  total  absti- 
nence and  in  giving  and  receiving  entertainments  has  not, 
so  far  as  we  know,  in  the  least  respect  violated  it. 

September  or  October^  184-3.  The  following  letter 
from  Mr.  Armstrong  must  have  been  about  this  date: 

The  restoration  has  given  an  impulse  to  everything 
and  inspired  the  friends  of  the  nation  with  new  courage. 
The  reign  of  Lord  George  Paulet  was  short  and  full  .of 
evil,  and  blessed  be  God  that  it  has  been  brought  to  a 
speedy  end.  The  king  continued  to  adhere  to  his  teetotal 
principles  and  the  other  chiefs  without  exception,  I  be- 
lieve, follow  his  example.  The  common  people  generally 
have  enlisted  under  the  same  banner,  so  that  among 
natives  we  have  quietness  and  order  throughout  the  land. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      219 

From  letter  hy  Lowell  Smith,  Honolulu,  Novemher 
25,  18k3: 

The  thirty-first  of  July  is  a  day  long  to  be  remembered 
with  joy  by  the  king,  chiefs,  people,  and  friends  of  this 
nation.  The  public  manner  in  which  Admiral  Thomas 
rebuked  Captain  Lord  George  Paulet  on  this  occasion  is 
worthy  of  note.  He  was  the  first  one  called  upon  to 
salute  the  king  on  its  restoration  and  he  fired  no  less  than 
three  national  salutes  that  very  day,  and  the  Admiral 
kept  him  saluting  and  paying  obeisance  to  the  king  for 
two  or  three  weeks,  whenever  His  Majesty  had  occasion 
to  pass  through  the  harbor  to  and  from  ships  of  war. 
Sometimes  instead  of  firing  twenty-one  guns  he  would 
man  his  yards  and  order  his  band  of  music  to  play  "God 
Save  the  King." 

From  letter  hy  A,  Bishop,  Ewa,  September  15, 
1843: 

Since  the  restoration  of  the  islands  to  their  rightful 
sovereign,  things  have  again  reverted  to  their  former 
regularity  and  the  excesses  consequent  upon  the  prostra- 
tion of  law  have  been  restrained.  A  few  months  since 
we  feared  the  worst  for  the  interests  of  this  little  king- 
dom, everything  appeared  to  be  getting  worse  and  retro- 
grading. The  laws  regulating  morals  were  prostrate  and 
righteousness  was  trodden  down  in  the  streets  by  multi- 
tudes. But  God  only  intended  to  chastise  us  and  not  to 
cast  us  off.  The  same  power  that  deprived  the  kingdom 
of  its  independence  has  also  freely  restored  it  and  on  a 
more  friendly  footing  with  foreign  powers  than  before. 

My  labors  on  the  revision  and  carrying  through  the 
press  a  new  edition  of  the  Scriptures,  are  just  completed. 
Most  of  my  time,  not  devoted  to  preaching  and  pastoral 
cares,  has  been  spent  upon  this  work.  It  is  possible  that 
these  labors  have  now  come  to  a  final  close,  but  I  have 
not  been  weary  of  the  work.  On  the  contrary,  it  has 
been  to  me  inexpressibly  delightful. 


220  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  C.  Forbes,  September  18,  1843: 

Everything  hangs  on  the  missionary.  If  he  flag,  all 
flag,  he  must  sustain  his  Sabbath  Schools  and,  in  effect, 
the  day  schools,  too.  He  must  provide  and  train  his  own 
singing  and  lead  mostly  in  all  devotional  exercises.  He 
must  teach  and  lead  his  deacons,  he  must  keep  alive  the 
spirit  of  benevolence,  nay,  create  it.  He  must  look  after 
those  who  halt  and  are  ready  to  fall.  Our  labors  are 
necessarily  incessant. 

From  letter  by  E.  W.  ClarTc,  Wailuku,  November  1, 
18Jf3: 

Providence  so  ordered  events  that  Mr.  Alexander  felt 
it  necessary  to  seek  a  drier  climate  on  account  of  Mrs. 
Alexander's  health.  He  came  to  Lahainaluna  and  spent 
a  few  weeks  and  consented,  after  a  little  time,  to  become 
permanently  connected  with  the  Seminary.  This  opened 
the  way  for  me  to  leave  the  institution,  which  I  had 
been  very  reluctant  to  do  while  it  was  in  so  feeble  a 
state,  and  in  June  I  removed  with  my  family  to  "Wailuku. 

Bartimeus,  whose  former  name  was  Puaaiki,  has  often 
been  mentioned  in  the  journals  of  the  mission.  He  was 
among  its  earliest  and  richest  fruits.  He  was  a  poor 
blind  man,  when  the  light  of  the  Gospel  first  beamed  upon 
his  darkened  mind,  though  he  afterwards  partially  re- 
covered his  sight.  By  much  perseverance  he  learned 
to  read,  but  owing  to  the  great  dimness  of  his  sight  this 
acquisition  was  of  little  use  to  him.  It  was  almost  entirely 
through  the  sense  of  hearing  that  he  treasured  up  in 
memory  nearly  the  whole  of  the  word  of  God.  He  seemed 
to  have  a  remarkable  gift  of  memory,  as  in  some  measure 
a  substitute  for  the  sense  of  seeing.  Although  more  than 
thirty  years  old  before  he  knew  that  such  a  book  as  the 
Bible  existed,  he  was,  before  he  died,  more  familiar  with 
its  contents  and  had  more  Scripture  treasured  up  in  his 
memory  than  any  other  person  I  ever  knew.  He  com- 
menced storing  his  memory  with  the  word  of  God  long 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      221 

before  the  Bible,  as  a  whole,  was  translated  into  his 
native  tongue.  A  text  from  which  he  ever  heard  a  mis- 
sionary preach  seldom  escaped  him.  We  could  repeat  it 
many  years  after  with  the  chapter  and  verse  and  often- 
times a  large  part  of  the  discourse.  After  portions  of 
Scripture  began  to  be  published  in  his  own  language,  he 
would  get  his  wife  and  others  to  read  to  him.  In  this 
way  he  secured  the  precious  treasure  as  fast  as  it  was 
published  in  a  language  which  he  understood.  And  so 
accurate  was  his  memory  that  he  would  sometimes  quote, 
in  his  address  to  the  people,  from  different  editions  of 
the  New  Testament  as  changes  were  made  in  the  transla- 
tion from  time  to  time.  He  would  first  tell  how  the 
passage  stood  in  the  old,  then  in  the  new  edition,  so  that 
those  who  had  the  different  editions  might  recognize  the 
passage. 

I  was  never  before  so  deeply  impressed  with  the  extent 
and  accuracy  of  his  knowledge  of  the  Scriptures  as  I  was 
a  few  months  ago  while  attending  a  protracted  meeting 
in  this  place.  Bartimeus  was  called  on,  with  only  a  few 
hours'  notice,  to  preach  at  an  evening  meeting.  His 
mind  was  strangely  excited  in  view  of  the  impenitent  and 
the  overwhelming  destruction  of  the  wicked.  He  selected 
for  his  text  a  passage  in  Jeremiah  iv :  13.  "Behold  he 
shall  come  up  as  clouds,  and  his  chariots  shall  be  as  a 
whirlwind."  In  hearing  this  discourse  I  was  forcibly 
struck  with  the  remark  of  the  Apostle,  "Knowing  the 
terror  of  the  Lord,  we  persuade  men.''  The  final  over- 
throw and  destruction  of  the  wicked  was  the  subject  of 
discourse.  He  exhibited  the  terror  of  the  Lord  with  great 
energy  and  pathos,  interspersing  his  remarks  with  a  great 
number  of  quotations  from  the  Scriptures,  always  naming 
the  chapter  and  verse.  He  referred  to  a  large  number 
of  passages  in  which  the  same  image — the  image  of  a 
whirlwind  is  introduced  as  an  object  of  terror.  We  were 
all  surprised  to  find  that  this  terrible  image  is  so  often 
used  in  the  Bible;  and  how  this  poor  blind  man,  on  the 
spur  of  the  moment,  never  having  used  a  Concordance  or 


222  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

a  reference  Bible  in  his  life,  could  refer  to  so  many 
pertinent  passages,  was  quite  a  mystery  to  us.  His  dis- 
course was  original  and  deeply  impressive.  He  secured 
the  individual  attention  of  the  audience  for  forty  or  fifty 
minutes,  although  owing  to  his  extreme  modesty  he  oc- 
cupied the  floor  of  the  house  instead  of  the  pulpit.  "You 
have  heard,"  he  says,  "of  the  cars  propelled  by  steam  in 
America,  with  what  speed  they  go,  and  how  they  over- 
whelm all  before  them,  thus  will  the  wicked  be  over- 
whelmed by  the  chariots  of  Jehovah." 

This  is  only  one  specimen  of  his  address.  They  always 
exhibit  feeling  and  often  a  high  degree  of  eloquence.  His 
text  on  this  occasion  was  entirely  his  own.  He  never 
had  known  it  used  as  a  text  by  a  missionary.  A  re- 
markable memory  was  not  the  only  thing  for  which 
Bartimeus  was  distinguished.  What  was  more  than  all, 
his  heart  was  ardently  devoted  to  the  cause  of  the 
Saviour.  He  seemed  to  carry  about  with  him  wherever  he 
went  the  same  warm  heart  and  devout  spirit.  Although 
greatly  respected  and  much  noticed  both  by  missionaries 
and  his  own  countrymen,  he  always  had  a  low  opinion 
of  himself.  He  was  far  from  trusting  to  his  own 
works,  although  remarkably  consistent  in  his  deportment 
and  active  in  his  Master's  service.  When  near  his  last 
end  I  asked  him  how  he  felt  in  view  of  death.  He  replied 
with  much  feeling,  "I  fear  I  am  not  prepared,  my  sins 
are  very  great."  I  referred  him  to  Jesus  the  Friend  of 
sinners.  He  replied,  yes,  there  was  his  only  hope.  He 
soon  became  insensible  and  after  a  few  hours  ceased  to 
breathe.     "Blessed  are  the  dead  who  die  in  the  Lord." 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  October, 
1843: 

I  wish  to  say  something  about  our  dear  departed 
brother  and  fellow  laborer,  Bartimeus.  A  mighty  man  in 
Israel  has  fallen,  one  whose  praise  is  in  all  our  churches, 
one  who  has  long  borne  with  us  the  burden  and  heat  of 
the  day,  standing  in  the  thickest  of  the  battle  wielding 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      223 

the  swOrd  of  the  Spirit  with  a  dexterity,  intrepidity  and 
success  unsurpassed  by  any  of  his  countrymen.  In  a 
knowledge  of  the  Scriptures,  in  his  own  tongue,  Bartimeus 
though  blind  and  unable  to  read  had  no  equal  on  the 
islands  and  for  skill  in  dividing  the  word  of  truth  so  as 
to  give  each  a  portion  and  leave  none  to  escape,  he  was 
unsurpassed.  He  was  my  helper  in  the  Gospel  for  five 
years  and  I  had  an  opportunity  to  know  him  well.  His 
efforts  in  public  speaking  were  not  all  equally  good,  but 
at  times  I  have  heard  him  when  it  seemed  to  me  that 
nothing  short  of  the  direct  influence  of  the  Spirit  of 
God  on  his  mind,  could  enable  him  to  speak  the  word 
with  such  distinctness  and  power.  I  have  no  doubt  but 
that  he  was  the  instrument  for  hundreds  of  conversions, 
besides  doing  a  great  deal  for  the  advancement  of  the 
church  in  holiness.  His  piety  was  simply  childlike  and 
ardent.  The  secret  of  his  power  as  a  public  speaker  lay 
in  the  strength  and  ardor  of  his  pious  feeling,  but  he 
was  endowed  by  his  Maker  with  a  memory  of  the  first 
order  and  a  clear  discriminating  judgment.  He  was 
peculiarly  eloquent  when  he  spoke  on  the  great  theme  of 
redemption  by  Jesus  Christ.  How  often  has  my  heart 
melted  while  hearing  him  speak  of  a  Saviour's  dying 
love,  and  I  have  often  thought  while  hearing  him  of  the 
Saviour's  promise :  ""He  that  believeth  in  me,  out  of  his 
belly  shall  flow  rivers  of  living  water."  But  the  dear 
man  is  no  more  with  us,  God  has  taken  him  and  our 
hearts  are  afflicted,  not  for  his  sake,  but  for  our  own 
and  for  Zion's  sake.  I  know  of  no  man  on  earth  whom 
I  loved  more  than  this  same  little  dwarfish,  blind,  Chris- 
tian, Sandwich  Islander,  God  grant  that  his  mantle  may 
fall  on  hundreds  of  his  brethren  who  are  yet  here  in  the 
church  militant. 

From   letter   hy    William   H.    Rice,   Hana,   Maui, 
December  12,  ISJ^S: 

It  is  now  little  more  than  two  and  a  half  years  since 
we  first  landed  at  these  islands,  and  two  and  a  fourth 


224  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

since  we  came  to  this  station  with  the  Rev.  Mr.  Conde 
and  family.  The  first  year  that  we  were  on  the  ground, 
of  course,  was  mostly  spent  in  acquiring  the  language. 
I,  however,  commenced  immediately  on  our  arrival  at  this 
station  to  take  charge  of  a  Sabbath  School  of  native 
children,  and  a  Bible  Class  of  adults,  in  preparation  for 
which  exercises  I  spent  some  time  each  day  during  the 
week.  After  being  about  four  months  at  Hana  I  com- 
menced a  school  for  the  benefit  of  the  native  school 
teachers  connected  with  Hana  station,  between  fifty  and 
sixty  in  number.  This  school  with  a  few  modifications 
and  interruptions  has  been  in  successful  operation  ever 
since. 


From  letter  hy  E.  Bond,  KoTiala,  April  8,  18^4: 

Our  meeting  house;  our  people  can  get  timber,  prepare 
the  ground,  and  thatch  the  building,  but  money  they 
cannot  get  in  any  possible  way  I  have  been  able  to  devise. 
After  waiting,  therefore,  already  until  the  cause  of  Christ 
has  suffered  much  for  lack  of  a  house,  I  proposed  re- 
cently to  make  an  effort  myself  and  raise  the  funds  with 
which  to  pay  some  carpenter  for  framing  the  house.  It  will 
take  about  six  hundred  dollars  to  pay  some  foreigner  for 
this  Job  and  we  are  now  endeavoring  to  find  some  suit- 
able man  to  whom  we  can  commit  the  work.  Meanwhile, 
with  God's  blessing,  I  hope  to  raise  the  needed  funds. 
Perhaps  I  ought  to  say  a  word  in  relation  to  the  little 
Boarding  School  for  Boys  under  my  immediate  care.  It 
has  now  been  in  operation  nearly  two  years  and  forms  a 
very  agreeable  and  hopeful  portion  of  my  labors  for  the 
people,  though  not  without  its  proportion  of  anxieties  and 
care.  The  number  of  pupils  is  still  limited  to  fourteen 
for  lack  of  time  to  care  for  more.  To  these  I  devote  all 
the  time  I  am  able,  and  hire  a  graduate  of  the  Mission 
Seminary  to  do  all  that  I  am  not  able  to  accomplish. 
He  remains  in  school  all  the  time  during  school  hours. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      225 
From  letter  hy  Titus  Coan,  HilOj  May  3,  I844.: 

General  peace  and  prosperity  have  attended  this  church 
during  the  year.    No  special  defection  has  occurred  among 
this  flock  and  the  march  of  truth  and  of  righteousness 
has  been  onward.     The  Holy   Spirit  has  descended  on 
many  parts   of  this   extended   field.     Saints  have   been 
quickened  to  watch,  and  pray,  and  work,  and  not  a  few 
sinners  have,  as  we  trust,  been  turned  to  the  Lord.    Temp- 
tations  have   assailed    this    flock,    trials   have   beset   us, 
dangers  like  dark  clouds  have  thickened  and  thundered, 
but  Jehovah  still  reigns,  and  the  upper  surface  of  these 
clouds  is  gilded  with  everlasting  sunshine.     Through  the 
grace  of  God  I  have  been  able  to  accomplish  eight  tours 
in  the  last  ten  months,  viz.:  four  through  Puna,  and 
four  through   the   distant  parts   of   Hilo.     These  tours 
usually  occupy  from  eight  to  twenty  days  each.     They 
are  always  arduous  and  in  Hilo  they  are  often  perilous 
from  the  raging  rivers  which  have  swept  many  a  traveller 
into  the  shoreless  ocean  of  eternity.     Some  of  my  recent 
ejEforts  in  crossing  streams  have  been  attended  with  fear- 
ful peril  and  I  have  often  thought  it  probable  that  mine 
will  be  a  watery  grave.     It  is  but  a  few  days  since  a 
strong  and  robust  foreigner  was  swept  down  by  one  of 
these  rivers  and  would  have  been  carried  suddenly  out 
of  time,  but  for  some  powerful  and  expert  natives  who 
saved  him  just  as  he  was  about  to  be  precipitated  down 
a  fearful  precipice.     Two  or  three  natives  have  been  not 
long  since  drowned  in  attempting  to  cross  these  streams, 
and  others  have  effected  hairbreadth  escapes.     A  little 
grassy  hillock  on  the  bank  of  one  of  these  streams  marks 
the  lonely  dust  of  a  foreigner  who  was  carried  down  a 
cataract  of  one  hundred  feet  in  an  attempt  to  cross  the 
river.     Nearly  thirty  of  these  streams  are  to  be  passed 
and  repassed  in  making  the  tour  of  Hilo.     I  have  now 
under  my  care  about  thirty  organized  congregations  of 
from   fifty   to   one   hundred   souls,    each   assembling   in 
their  respective  places  of  worship  with  which  they  are 


226  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

provided,  from  Sabbath  to  Sabbath,  throughout  the  entire 
length  and  breadth  of  my  field  of  labor.  The  Female 
Boarding  School  under  the  care  of  Mrs.  Coan  has  been 
greatly  blessed  during  the  past  year.  Perhaps  it  has 
never  enjoyed  a  year  of  greater  vigor  and  prosperity  than 
the  one  just  closed.  Health  and  cheerful^iess  have 
bloomed  on  every  cheek  and  joy  beats  in  every  heart. 
Not  a  look  of  sadness  has  been  seen  or  a  word  of  dis- 
content uttered.  On  account  of  the  great  numbers  who 
have  plead  for  admittance  into  the  school,  Mrs.  Coan 
has  been  induced  to  exceed  her  fixed  complement  by  six, 
so  that  her  number  has  been  twenty-six  instead  of  twenty 
the  past  year. 

From  Mission  Report  hy  S.  Dibble,  Honolulu,  June 
15,  18U: 

The  providence  of  God,  which  has  been  very  remark- 
able in  the  whole  history  of  this  nation  has  been  no  less 
so  the  past  year  than  at  any  former  period.  God  has 
done  great  things  for  us.  If  it  had  not  been  the  Lord 
who  was  on  our  side,  then  the  enemy  had  swallowed 
us  up  quick.  The  restoration  of  the  islands  to  their 
rightful  ruler,  the  recognition  of  his  sovereignty  and  in- 
dependence by  some  of  the  great  powers  of  the  earth, 
a  mutual  pledge  from  those  powers  not  to  do  anything  to 
impair  his  sovereignty,  the  vigor  and  justice  now  manifest 
in  the  execution  of  the  laws  of  the  land  and  the  conse- 
quent peace  and  order  that  prevail,  together  with  the 
increase  of  wealth,  progress  in  civilization  and  disposition 
to  good  works,  constitute  a  tide  of  prosperity  almost  un- 
exampled, especially  if  viewed  in  contrast  with  the  de- 
pressed and  subjugated  condition  of  the  government 
when  we  last  met,  and  the  confusion,  perplexities,  dis- 
couragements, and  rampant  evils  which  then  prevailed. 
Surely  we  have  occasion  for  the  warmest  emotions  of 
praise  and  thanksgiving. 


to 


c^ 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1842-1847      227 

From  letter  by  Daniel  Dole,  Punahou,  July  1,  184.1/.: 

When  I  wrote  in  October  last  to  inform  you  of  the 
departure  of  Brother  Locke  I  little  thought  that  my 
next  communication  would  notify  you  of  the  death  of 
my  dear  wife,  but  so  it  is.  She  went  to  her  rest  on  the 
twenty-seventh  of  April,  leaving  an  infant  four  days  old. 

The  following  letter  from  Mr.  Emerson,  Lahaina- 
luna,  announces  the  death  of  Mr.  Dibble: 

January  22,  18^5.  I  write  this  evening  mainly  to  com- 
municate to  you  the  mournful  intelligence  that  Brother 
Dibble  is  no  longer  with  us.  Last  evening  he  took  tea  with 
his  family  and  in  the  evening  sat  up  some  time  and  enjoyed 
several  hymns  that  his  wife  sung  to  him.  At  about  eleven 
our  families  began  to  gather  around  him,  he  gave  us  all 
his  hand  with  much  calmness,  but  could  not  speak  so  as 
to  be  understood,  except  a  very  few  words  in  which  he 
signified  his  cheerfulness  to  depart  and  be  with  Christ. 
He  gradually  sank  away  till  at  three  o'clock  this  morn- 
ing he  died  perfectly  easy.  So  gradual  was  the  decline 
that  we  did  not  know  the  minute  when  he  ceased  to 
breathe.  The  chamber  of  death  did  not  appear  gloomy 
to  us,  it  seemed  more  like  the  gate  of  heaven. 

From  Mr.  Bond,  July  7,  1847: 

The  meeting  house  at  the  station  has  been  improved 
and  is  a  source  of  great  comfort  to  us  all,  as  well  as  a 
great  blessing  to  the  cause  of  the  Redeemer  in  this  dis- 
trict. It  is  a  frame  building,  eighty  feet  by  forty  feet, 
with  a  veranda  on  all  sides.  The  sides  are  thatched  or 
rather  wattled  with  the  lei  leaves  and  the  roof  thatched 
with  cane  leaves.  It  has  twelve  large  windows  and  is 
entered  by  four  doors,  two  on  each  side,  is  well  floored 
with  boards  and  filled  with  about  one  hundred  and  thirty 
settees  manufactured  by  those  who  occupy  them.  From 
the  time   we   were   able   to  occupy  it  our  congregation 


228  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

steadily  increased  until  they  filled  the  house  regularly. 
Our  usual  Sabbath  congregations  at  present  are  measured 
by  the  capacity  of  the  building.  The  seats  will  accom- 
modate nine  hundred  individuals  and  the  three  aisles  five 
hundred  more  at  least,  sitting  closely  as  Hawaiians  are 
accustomed  to  do.  My  own  select  school  of  boys  has 
been  sustained  as  usual.  During  the  period  since  I  wrote 
I  have  entered  nine  at  Hilo  and  received  ten  of  the  most 
promising  pupils  of  the  public  schools.  Twenty  boys 
have  been  connected  with  the  school  in  the  time  referred 
to.  Six  years  ago  the  twenty-sixth  of  June  we  landed  at 
this  station.  I  look  with  astonishment  and  gratitude  to 
God  upon  the  improved  external  appearance  of  our  people 
and  the  increase  of  their  means  of  personal  comfort.  In 
our  congregation  then,  a  shirt  or  a  pair  of  pants  were 
extremely  rare  articles  of  dress;  as  for  vests  and  jackets 
or  coats,  hats,  shoes,  etc.,  they  w^ere  not  seen,  with  an 
individual  exception.  Kapa*  was  almost  the  only  article 
of  dress  worn  and  in  multitudes  of  cases  there  was  but 
an  apology  for  even  a  covering  of  Kapa.  Now  a  Kapa  is 
rarely  seen  in  our  meeting  house.  Even  in  our  Sabbath 
School  there  is  not  perhaps  a  single  child  without  one  or 
more  cloth  garments. 

4  Kapa  is  the  Hawaiian  word  for  clothing  and  is  also  the  word 
to  designate  the  Hawaiian  paper-like  tissue  manufactured  by  the 
Hawaiians  from  the  bark  of  the  shrubs  called  wauki  and  mamdki, 
plants  resembling  the  mulberry,  whose  bark  after  soaking  was 
pounded  out  into  sheets  resembling  paper,  but  stronger  and  tougher 
than  most  paper  and  very  pliable.  The  manufacture  of  this  paper 
was  woman's  work,  for  which  they  had  hard  wood  pestles  with 
hard  wood  boards  upon  which  the  bark  was  spread.  The  resound- 
ing of  the  beating  of  kapa  or  tapa  of  the  women  beside  the  valley 
brook  is  among  childhood 's  memories.  A  sound  no  longer  heard  in 
all  Hawaii  as  the  commerce  in  cotton,  linen,  and  woolen  fabrics  has 
ended  forever  the  manufacture  of  kapa.  Kapa  was  used  for  sheets, 
and  the  simple  clothing  that  the  people  wore. 


XX 

J0UK:N'ALS  and  letters.  1847-1848 


F 


BOM   letter   hy   Mr.   Armstrong,   Octoher  10, 

1847: 


The  king  has  family  worship  regularly  when 
the  Scriptures  are  read  in  course,  accompanied  with 
singing  and  prayer.  Our  devoted  and  excellent  Brother 
John  li  usually  officiates  at  this  exercise.  Probably  no 
other  person  in  the  nation  exerts  a  more  general,  steady, 
and  happy  influence  on  the  cause  of  religion  than  he. 
Being  among  the  first  converts  and  having  had  the  best 
opportunities  for  acquiring  general  intelligence  and  a 
knowledge  of  the  world  the  country  affords,  and  having 
stood  firm  by  the  truth  through  all  the  changes  and  trials 
the  nation  has  passed  through,  he  is  regarded  as  a  tried 
man  whose  principles  cannot  be  shaken.  His  wife  Sarah, 
too,  is  not  far  behind  him  in  Christian  consistency  and 
worth.  Their  hands  and  hearts  are  in  every  good  work. 
The  church  members  have  another  important  matter  on 
hand  and  that  is  to  purchase  a  town  clock  for  the  tower 
of  our  large  church,  which  will  be  of  immense  advantage 
to  the  place.  It  was  proposed  to  the  king  and  chiefs  to 
finish  out  the  steeple,  or  tower,  which  will  cost  $2300, 
provided  the  common  people  of  the  congregation  would 
purchase  a  town  clock,  this  was  agreed  to  and  the  work 
is  soon  to  be  commenced.  You  will  be  pained  to  hear  that 
our  dear  Brother  Eichards  lies  at  the  point  of  death, 
having  had  a  stroke  of  apoplexy. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarh,  Wailuhu,  Octoher  20, 
1847: 

I  have  thought  much,  for  one  or  two  years  past,  on  the 
manner  in  which  the  missionary  work,  or  rather  the  work 

229 


230  THE  PILGREMS  OF  HAWAII 

of  the  Board,  is  to  be  brought  to  a  close  at  the  Islands. 
Some  of  your  last  letters  have  reference  mainly  to  this 
subject.  I  fully  agree  with  you  that  the  great  work, 
which  the  churches  of  America  have  yet  to  do  for  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  must  probably  be  done  in  the  next  ten 
years.  But  in  what  way  is  the  work  of  the  American 
churches  to  be  brought  to  a  close  at  the  Islands?  The 
way  which  would  be  most  agreeable  to  the  feeling  of 
missionaries  and  their  patrons  and  which  would  redound 
most  to  the  triumph  of  the  Gospel,  would  be  to  bring 
forward  native  pastors,  teachers,  etc.,  and  withdraw  and 
leave  the  work  wholly  in  their  hands.  This,  I  understand 
to  be  the  point  to  which  you  would  urge  us.  And  permit 
me  to  say  that  I  fully  concur  with  you  as  you  will  see 
from  former  letters,  that  we  should  aim  to  bring  forward 
native  pastors  and  helpers  and  devolve  responsibility  upon 
them  as  fast  and  as  far  as  it  can  be  done  with  prosperity 
and  safety  to  the  cause.  I  see  no  better  way  than  to 
place  missionaries  here  on  the  same  ground  as  Home 
Missionaries  at  the  West.  Let  the  Board  assist  feeble 
churches  so  far  only  as  they  need  assistance,  expecting 
bye  and  bye  that  they  will  be  able  to  get  along  without 
help.  Missionaries,  in  this  case,  must  be  left  as  free  to 
look  out  for  their  own  support  as  missionaries  who  go 
to  the  West.  I  am  aware  there  would  be  dangers  and 
temptations  connected  with  this  course  but  Home  Mis- 
sionaries and  other  Ministers  are  exposed  to  similar 
dangers.  As  human  nature  is  the  same  in  missionaries 
as  in  other  men  it  would  manifestly  be  economy  to  throw 
each  one  in  a  measure  upon  his  own  resources. 

November  15,  18Jf7-  As  the  thatched  roof  of  our 
meeting  house  has  become  leaky  the  people  have  decided 
to  replace  it  by  a  shingle  roof.  This  will  cost  from 
$1000  to  $2000.  The  contributions  for  the  past  year  have 
been  devoted  mainly  to  this  object.  About  six  hundred 
dollars  in  cash  have  been  paid  in  and  considerably  more 
subscribed.  A  native  preacher  is  sustained,  as  last  year, 
at    Honuaula    by    contributions    from    the    church.      In 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      231 

August  we  received  a  visit  from  Eev.  Mr.  Geddie  on  his 
way  from  Nova  Scotia  to  the  New  Caledonia  Islands.  He 
gave  our  people  some  account  of  the  origin  of  his  mis- 
sion, the  state  of  the  people  in  New  Caledonia,  etc.,  and 
they  contributed  twenty  dollars  to  aid  in  planting  the 
Gospel  in  that  group  of  islands.  They  seem  to  appre- 
ciate the  good  they  have  derived  from  the  Gospel  and 
are  anxious  to  impart  it  to  other  dark  islands  in  the 
Pacific.  They  would  have  willingly  given  much  more 
if  they  had  not  been  burdened  with  the  work  of  repairing 
their  own  house  of  worship. 

From  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander,  Lahainaluna, 
October  27,  18J^7: 

In  looking  at  the  state  of  things  here,  I  do  not  see 
any  prospect  that  the  time  is  near  when  the  Hawaiian 
churches  can  be  left  to  themselves.  Still,  however,  I  do 
believe  that  God  has  a  people  here  and  that  in  our  time 
he  will  raise  up  from  among  them  pastors  to  feed  them. 
How  soon  he  will  do  this  I  cannot  tell.  He  will  probably 
first  try  our  faith  and  patience  and  teach  us  more  fully 
how  entirely  we  depend  on  His  grace. 

November  19,  18Jf7.  On  the  fourth  instant  a  council 
of  ministers  met  at  my  house,  consisting  of  Rev.  Messrs. 
Clark,  Baldwin,  Hunt,  Andrews,  and  myself  and  after 
a  rigid  examination  of  S.  Kauwealoha  one  of  our  later 
pupils,  licensed  him  to  preach  the  Gospel  of  Christ.  I 
do  hope  he  will  make  one  of  the  pastors  of  the  Hawaiian 
churches  raised  up  from  their  own  bosom.  If  we  had 
fifty  such,  then  the  prosperity  of  the  nation  would 
brighten;  but,  alas!  like  all  other  truly  precious  things, 
they  are  scarce. 

From  letter  hy  E.  Bailey,  Wailuku,  November  18, 
1847: 

Of  six  girls  from  the  Wailuku  Female  Seminary  added 
to  the  church,  one  soon  married  a  graduate  of  Lahainaluna 


232  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

and  lived  happily  with  him  till  her  death  about  a  year 
ago.  Another  continued  to  adorn  her  profession  in  school 
till  last  June  when  she  was  married  to  a  graduate  from 
Lahainaluna  of  great  promise,  a  theological  student  be- 
longing to  Waialua,  Oahu,  where  they  now  reside.  Of 
her  I  cannot  speak  too  highly.  She  was  a  great  comfort 
to  us  while  she  remained  in  school.  Her  meekness,  sober- 
ness, and  docility,  joined  with  industry  and  neatness, 
endeared  her  to  our  hearts  and  few  of  the  young  couples 
who  have  left  us  have  given  so  much  promise  as  she  and 
her  husband,  not  for  any  strong  talents  they  possess,  but 
for  their  uniform  sobriety  and  consistent  conduct.  Her 
name  is  Naomi  and  her  husband  Kekela.^ 

From  letter  hy  Levi  Chamberlain,  Honolulu,  Decem- 
ber 16,  1847: 

The  death  of  Mr.  Richards,  besides  creating  a  vacancy 
in  the  government,  has  deprived  the  nation  of  a  tried 
friend  and  benefactor.  He  has  always  been  on  the  most 
friendly  terms  with  the  Mission  and  has,  from  the  period 
of  his  separation  from  the  Board,  continued  to  seek  its 
peace  and  prosperity  and  labored  collaterally  to  promote 
the  cause  of  the  Redeemer.  The  Government  has  made 
a  suitable  provision  for  Mrs.  Richards  by  an  annuity  of 
eight  hundred  dollars  during  her  lifetime  and  four  hun- 
dred after  her  decease  to  her  daughters  in  the  islands, 
as  long  as  they  may  need  it.  I  have  seen  the  copy  of 
a  letter,  addressed  by  R.  C.  Wyllie,  Esq.,  Minister  of 
Foreign  Relations,  to  Mr.  Hill,  under  the  impression  of 
his  being  Corresponding  Secretary  of  the  Board  in  which 
he  refers  to  the  vacancy  in  the  Hawaiian  Government 
occasioned  by  the  death  of  Mr.  Eichards  and  intimates 
that,  in  his  opinion,  the  Mission  should  allow  Mr.  Arm- 
strong to  withdraw  from  the  direction  of  the  American 

1  Both  James  Kekela  and  Samuel  Kaiiwealoha  with  their  wives 
were  for  over  fifty  years  missionaries  of  the  Hawaiian  Board  to 
the  Marquesas  Islands,  living  into  the  first  decade  of  the  twentieth 
century. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      233 

Board  and  engage  in  the  duties  of  Minister  of  Public 
Instruction.     He  gives  various  reasons  why   Mr.   Arm- 
strong should  not  decline  the  office  and  why  his  brethren 
of  the  Mission  and  their  patrons  and  directors  at  home 
should  approve  of  his  acceptance  of  it.    The  officer  hold- 
ing this  appointment  is,  by  statute,  one  of  the  five  high 
Ministers  of  State  and  a  member  of  the  Privy  Council. 
The  proper  discharge  of  the  duties  of  this  functionary 
requires  that  he  should  be  a  magistrate  of  high  official 
authority  and  have  power  under  the  king  to  make  regula- 
tions and  carry  into  effect  all  laws  and  orders  relating 
to  the  subject  of  education.    That  it  is  an  important  sta- 
tion, involving  great  responsibility  and  requiring  peculiar 
talent,  wisdom,  and  skill,  knowledge  of  Hawaiian  customs 
and    experience    of    the    native    character,    in    order    to 
properly  discharge  the  duties  of  it  will  be  readily  ad- 
mitted.    It  is  true,  as  intimated  by  Mr.  Wyllie,  that  no 
one  of  our  number  possesses  more  ample  qualifications 
for  the  work  than  Mr,  Armstrong,  and  no  member  of 
the  Mission  would  be  likely  to  serve  the  interests  of  edu- 
cation better.     There  are   some   reasons  for  Mr.   Arm- 
strong's acceptance,  to  which  I  have  not  referred,  namely : 
the  strong  wish  of  the  king  and  chiefs,  their  distrust  of 
native  ability,  and  the  feeling  expressed  that  the  Mission 
has  originated  the  want  of  such  a  department,  and  no 
one  but  a  missionary  is  fully  qualified  to  discharge  the 
duties  of  it.     The  king  said  to  Mr.  Armstrong,  this  is 
your  work,  meaning  it  is  missionary  work.     There  is  no 
doubt  but  that  Mr.  Wyllie  and  some  others  of  the  cabinet, 
besides  the  king  and  chiefs,  are  very  desirous  that  Mr. 
Armstrong    should    join    the    government.      He    speaks 
fluently  the  native  language,  is  ready  at  translating,  has 
the  confidence  of  the  chiefs  and  the  Mission,  and  is  rather 
popular  with  a  class  of  foreigners.     It  is  not  unlikely 
they  may  wish  a  balance  in  the  Council,  though  this  is 
a  thing  not  at  all  referred  to,  and  he  is  told  that  he  may 
be  relieved  from  Cabinet  duties  as  a  general  thing,  that 
is,  attending  the  sessions  of  the  Privy  Council. 


234  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

May,  ISJf-S.  About  this  date  Mr.  Armstrong  writes 
in  regard  to  a  renewed  call  to  the  office  of  Minister  of 
Public  Instruction: 

The  subject  has  been  under  consideration  for  more 
than  six  months.  We  have  all  had  time  for  mature  de- 
liberation upon  it  and,  probably,  each  one  has  come  to 
some  conclusion  in  regard  to  it.  As  regards  myself,  if 
left  to  choose  my  own  way  in  the  matter,  I  have  come 
to  the  conclusion  to  accept  the  office.  On  the  conviction 
that,  by  accepting  this  appointment,  I  may  do  more  for 
the  temporal  and  eternal  good  of  the  inhabitants  of  these 
islands  than  by  rejecting  it.  The  good  may  not  be  so 
immediate,  nor  so  apparent,  but,  if  I  reason  correctly, 
more  extensive  and  enduring.  So  far  as  the  Protestant 
schools  are  concerned  there  will  be  no  obstacle  in  the 
way  of  exerting  all  the  Christian  influence  the  Minister 
of  Instruction  can  bring  to  bear  upon  them.  He  may 
preach  every  day,  he  may  scatter  books  and  tracts,  he 
may  labor  to  raise  up  evangelical  Christian  teachers  to 
the  full  extent  of  his  ability.  He  may,  and  should  labor 
to,  make  every  school  a  school  of  Christ,  and,  like  the 
Puritans,  to  educate  the  children  for  both  worlds.  In 
these  circumstances  the  system  of  common  schools  is  an 
engine  of  immense  good  if  rightly  managed. 

Reply  of  Mission  to  letter  of  Mr.  Armstrong,  May 
5,  1848: 

We  are  willing  to  leave  Mr.  Armstrong  to  act  upon 
his  own  responsibility  and  according  to  his  own  convic- 
tions of  duty,  having  the  fullest  confidence  in  the  integrity 
of  his  motives  and  in  his  ability  and  disposition  to  render 
efficient  aid  to  our  work  in  the  new  post  which  he  is 
called  to  occupy.  We  believe  that  his  engaging  in  this 
new  service  will  help  forward  the  completion  of  the  mis- 
sionary work  at  these  islands.  We  can  only  add  that  it 
is  our  earnest  prayer  that  the  blessing  of  God  may  be 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      235 

with  him  in  his  new  labors  and  render  him  a  blessing 
to  the  Hawaiian  people.  However  we  may  regret  that 
any  of  our  number  should  become  so  closely  connected 
with  the  affairs  of  state  we  have  great  reason  to  praise 
the  Author  of  all  good  for  disposing  this  government  to 
commit  the  control  of  education  to  one  so  well  qualified 
and  disposed  to  carry  forward  the  work,  which  the  Board 
and  this  Mission  has  commenced. 

From  Report  of  Rev.  R.  Armstrong,  of  the  Kawaia- 
hao  Church,  to  the  Mission  in  session  in  Honolulu, 
May,  18J^: 

Our  people  suffered  greatly,  and  many  died,  during  the 
distressing  epidemic  of  measles  which  prevailed  in  April 
and  May  of  last  year.  Brother  Rice  has  had  charge  of 
the  meeting  in  Manoa  Valley  and  I  hope  he  will  present 
an  account  of  his  labors  there  to  the  Mission.  A  substan- 
tial stone  meeting  house  has  been  erected  there  under 
the  direction  of  Brother  Eice,  intended  also  as  a  school 
house,  and  an  adobe  building  for  the  same  purpose  at 
Waikiki.  These  have  cost  a  great  deal  of  labor  and  care, 
but  we  feel  amply  repaid  for  it  all  in  seeing  the  work 
of  the  Lord  prospering  so  greatly  in  both  of  these  dis- 
tricts. While  erecting  the  houses  we  feared  they  would 
prove  too  large,  but  during  the  present  year  they  have 
been  filled  with  attentive  worshippers  on  Sabbath  after- 
noons and,  frequently,  during  the  week.  A  stone  meeting 
house  is  now  in  progress  at  Wailupe,  on  the  coast,  east 
of  Diamond  Head.  That  section  of  the  parish  is  under 
the  care  of  a  pious  native. 

From  Report  of  Kaluuahd  Station,  18^8,  hy  Mr. 
Hitchcock : 

On  Thursday  of  every  week  Mrs.  Hitchcock  has  what 
is  called  a  "Mother's  Meeting."     This  is  a  society  em- 


236  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

bracing  not  only  mothers  but  all  others  who  wish  to  join 
and  consent  to  the  terms  of  admission.  These  are  clean- 
liness of  person,  industry,  faithful  discharge  of  domestic 
duties,  neatness  in  the  house,  and  good  moral  character. 
Mrs.  Hitchcock  has  also  a  meeting  for  the  women  on 
Friday  to  which  all  come  who  please  and  it  is  usually 
well  attended.  Our  women  are,  as  a  usual  thing,  before 
the  men  in  every  good  word  and  work  and  show  more 
decided  attachment  to  the  Saviour.  And  what  of  self- 
denial  and  faithfulness  the  other  sex  possess  as  Christians 
is  in  no  small  degree  owing  to  the  good  influence  of  their 
wives.  In  conclusion  I  must  say  there  has  evidently  been 
an  upward  movement  among  our  people  the  two  years 
past. 

From  Report  of  the  Station  at  KoTiala,  Hawaii,  hy 
Rev.  E.  Bond,  for  ISJfB: 

Since  October  all  departments  of  enterprise  throughout 
the  district  have  been  utterly  prostrate.  Our  state  has 
been  that  of  being  and  suffering  rather  than  that  of 
doing.  Like  a  noble  ship  with  all  her  canvas  spread  to 
the  prosperous  gales  of  heaven,  suddenly  thrown  on  her 
beam  ends  and  left  an  unmanageable  wreck,  so  it  was 
with  this  district  and  our  labors  upon  the  introduction 
of  measles  in  October.  All  Kohala  was  a  hospital  and 
every  inhabitant  was  a  patient  therein.  The  discharge 
of  such  offices  as  were  indispensably  necessary  to  sustain 
life  were  not,  as  is  usual  in  seasons  of  sickness  thrown 
upon  the  well,  for  none  such  were  to  be  found,  but  upon 
those  who  were  so  highly  favored  as  to  have  sufficient 
strength  spared  to  drag  themselves  through  such  services 
for  a  brief  season  until  others  in  turn  could  relieve  them. 
In  houses  where  all  were  exhausted  and  helpless  extreme 
suffering  and  death  were  the  necessary  consequences.  But 
it  is  unnecessary  that  I  detail  the  history  of  the  period 
embraced  between  October  and  the  close  of  the  year.  It 
is  but  too  well  known  to  you  all,  written  as  it  has  been 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      287 

by  the  hands  of  the  destroyer  in  characters  too  vivid  and 
mournful  to  be  soon  effaced  or  forgotten  by  any  one  of 
us.  I  only  add  that  to  the  visiting  and  caring  for  the 
sick,  all  the  time  at  my  command  was  devoted,  until  the 
entrance  of  the  disease  into  our  family  forbade  my  leaving 
them,  to  administer  to  the  necessities  of  others. 

In  the  time  above  specified  death  has  made  extensive 
ravages  in  this  church.  One  hundred  and  thirty  have 
died  during  the  year,  chiefly  within  two  or  three  months. 
Some  of  these,  beyond  a  doubt,  are  now  in  Heaven.  They 
were  the  bright  and  shining  lights  of  our  church  and 
district,  adorning  the  Gospel  of  God  their  Saviour  by 
well  ordered  lives  and  a  godly  conversation.  We  feel  their 
departure  to  be  our  loss,  yet  we  cannot  regret  the  event 
which  has  brought  to  them  eternal  gain.  Of  the  ex- 
istence of  my  own  little  school  this  is  the  seventh  year. 
It  was  continued  as  usual  until  the  measles  broke  out, 
and  since  that  time  has  been  suspended,  though  several 
attempts  were  made  to  recommence  studies  in  vain.  New 
cases  of  the  measles  repeatedly  broke  upon  us  and  caused 
a  suspension  of  the  school.  The  number  of  pupils  con- 
nected with  the  school  during  the  year  has  been  twenty- 
seven.  Nine  "of  these  entered  the  High  School  in  Hilo 
in  September  last,  three  were  dismissed  on  account  of 
sickness  and  five  from  general  lack  of  promise. 

Some  progress  has  been  made  during  the  year  towards 
a  final  judgment  of  the  land  claims  held  by  the  people 
of  our  district.  The  evidence  thereon  was  taken  in  Sep- 
tember last.  At  the  special  request  of  the  Land  Commis- 
sioner I  consented  to  aid  in  that  service  with  the  hope 
that  the  speedy  settlement  of  these  claims  would  operate 
favorably  upon  the  industrial  interests  of  the  people.  It 
would  certainly  free  them  from  the  power  of  the  (Kono- 
hiki's)  Sub-Landlords  who  are  little  better  to  Hawaiians 
than  the  taskmasters  of  the  Israelites  were  to  them 
during  the  sojourn  in  Egypt.  The  possession  of  a  fee 
simple  title  would  likewise  secure  the  natives  from  much 
of  the  injustice  now  practiced  by  the  tax-gatherers. 


238  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  by  Titus  Coan,  Hilo,  'April  11,  1848: 

By  the  earnest  request  of  several  Ship  Masters  we  have 
been  encouraged  to  attempt  the  fitting  up  of  a  small 
chapel  for  seamen  at  Hilo.  Four  hundred  dollars  have 
already  been  contributed  for  this  object,  mostly  by  our 
friends  from  the  ocean.  Of  this,  ninety-four  dollars  by 
Captain  Du  Pont  with  the  officers  and  crews  of  the  United 
States  Ship  Cyane. 

From  Report  of  the  Station  at  WailuJcu,  by  E,  W. 
Clarh,  May,  18^6,  to  May,  18J^8: 

An  interesting  temperance  celebration  was  held  in  July 
last.  Between  five  hundred  and  six  hundred  children 
pledged  themselves  to  total  abstinence  from  all  that  in- 
toxicates. Property,  industry,  and  civilization  are  in- 
creasing. About  fifteen  ox  carts  are  owned  by  natives 
in  my  field,  with  two  or  three  yoke  of  cattle  to  each. 
Respectable  clothing  is  becoming  universal.  Improve- 
ment in  houses  is  small  except  in  a  few  cases.  There 
is  more  improvement  in  furniture,  cooking  utensils,  etc. 
Many  of  the  people  own  cattle  and  horses.  But  the  people 
are  still,  as  a  general  thing,  indolent  and  improvident. 
The  stimulus  of  a  fee  simple  title  to  land  and  other  en- 
couragements are  greatly  needed  to  arouse  them  to  con- 
tinued industry.  We  have  in  our  field  a  few  active 
carpenters  and  one  or  two  blacksmiths  and  shoemakers, 
who  apply  themselves  with  commendable  diligence  to  their 
occupations.  The  number  of  deaths  in  the  church  the 
last  year  exceeds  the  number  of  infants  born.  This  is 
a  pretty  sure  indication  that  the  people  are  diminishing. 
This  fact  seems  to  be  indicated  also  by  the  diminution 
in  the  number  of  marriages  from  year  to  year.  The  state 
of  schools  is  much  the  same  as  in  former  years.  The 
teachers,  however,  are  now  regularly  paid  and  there  is  a 
small  fund  on  hand  which  the  school  superintendent  is 
employing    in    building    and    repairing    school    houses. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      239 

Some  attempt  has  been  made  to  introduce  manual  labor, 
but  it  is  attended  with  difficulties. 

From  Report  of  the  Stcdion  in  Waialua,  hy  J.  S. 
Emerson,  May  11,  18^8,  upon  his  return  from  Lahaina- 
luna: 

The  Sabbath  soon  arrived  and  I  preached  in  the  morn- 
ing to  about  three  hundred  people,  a  congregation,  as 
Brother  Wilcox  informed  me,  about  twice  as  large  as 
usual.  The  afternoon  congregation  was  one  hundred 
Beventy-five.  Many  times,  after  this,  we  heard  this  re- 
mark: "God  has  heard  our  prayer  and  restored  to  us  our 
pastor."  This  feeling  we  have  since  been  fully  satisfied 
was  not  without  sincerity.  There  was,  in  many  hearts, 
a  deep  feeling  of  attachment  to  those  who  had  been  with 
them  from  the  beginning. 

From  a  General  Mission  letter,  Honolulu,  June  2, 
ISJiS: 

Our  children  have  been  blessed,  especially  the  children 
of  the  school  (Punahou  School),  as  you  will  learn  from 
the  report  of  that  institution.  Numbers  have  become 
hopefully  pious.  They  have  had  daily  opportunities  to 
receive  instruction  during  the  General  Meeting,  and  on 
the  twenty-eighth,  fourteen  were  received  to  the  Mission 
church.  On  the  twenty-ninth  Mr.  Johnson  was  ordained 
by  the  Clerical  Association,  having  been  previously  ex- 
amined and  approved  by  that  body.  The  services  were 
held  in  the  first  church,  and  were  all  in  the  native  lan- 
guage. At  the  close  of  the  ordination  the  Rev.  Mr.  Pogue 
and  Miss  Maria  Whitney  were  united  in  marriage.  This 
service  was  performed  in  English  by  the  Eev.  Wm.  P. 
Alexander,  and  a  prayer  in  English  closed  the  interesting 
services  of  the  occasion.  On  the  twenty-sixth  the  mis- 
sionaries and  their  children  visited  the  palace  by  previous 
invitation  and  were  received  with  great  cordiality  by  their 


240  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Majesties,  the  King  and  Queen.  The  visit  was  of  an 
interesting  character  and  may  not  be  without  benefit. 
His  Majesty  expressed  himself  gratified  with  the  visit  of 
the  missionaries,  especially  with  the  numbers  and  spright- 
liness  of  the  children,  and  expressed  his  most  cordial  wishes 
for  our  future  prosperity. 

From  letter  hy  D.  T.  Conde,  Haruij  Maui,  July, 
18Ji8: 

The  establishment  of  a  Missionary  Station  in  the  dis- 
trict of  Hana,  on  East  Maui,  was  assigned  to  us  at  the 
General  Meeting  of  May,  1837.  On  the  eighth  of  January 
following,  we  landed  on  the  ground,  took  up  our  abode 
in  a  thatched  house  and  the  next  day  (Sabbath)  I  preached 
my  first  sermon  in  Hawaiian  to  a  numerous  and  apparently 
interested  assembly.  We  have  now,  therefore,  occupied 
our  present  post  some  ten  years  or  more.  During  thi3 
time  we  have  had  no  less  than  four  different  families, 
one  after  another,  for  associates,  besides  living  alone  at 
various  times  from  a  month  to  two  years.  The  superin- 
tendence of  the  work  and  the  workmen  on  our  meeting 
house,  which  has  been  in  building  for  several  years  past, 
has  pressed  with  unusual  weight  on  my  shoulders. 
Without  enumerating  the  various  kinds  of  business  of 
this  nature  which  have  received  attention  I  would  say 
there  is  nothing  comprised  within  a  circle  of  the  mechani- 
cal arts  that  I  have  not  been  obliged  to  do  with  my  own 
hands.  Our  church  and  people  have  during  the  two  past 
years  contributed  about  one  hundred  and  ten  dollars  in 
cash  and  about  fifteen  dollars  in  native  produce,  besides 
performing  considerable  manual  labor  for  benevolent  pur- 
poses. Our  meeting  house  was  nearly  enclosed  when  we 
left  home  to  attend  the  Annual  Mission  Meeting.  There 
is  on  hand  lumber  of  various  kinds  sufficient  perhaps  to 
complete  the  house.  Materials  for  plastering  the  walls 
and  ceilings  are  for  the  most  part  wanting.  We  have 
already  expended  nine  hundred  and  eighty-two  dollars 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      241 

on  the  house  and  for  the  material  on  hand,  including 
our  bell  and  bell  house,  while  the  receipts  from  the  people, 
and  various  friends  in  the  island  amount  to  eight  hun- 
dred and  seventy-eight  dollars  and  eighty-nine  cents,  from 
which  it  is  seen  that  a  debt  of  one  hundred  and  four 
dollars  and  ten  cents  has  already  been  incurred. 

The  schools  in  my  field  are  sixteen  in  number.  The 
children  and  youths  connected  with  these  schools  re- 
spectively range  from  twenty  to  one  hundred  and  fifteen, 
total  six  hundred  and  fifty.  About  all  these  schools  have 
been  in  constant  operation  with  the  exception  of  the  or- 
dinary vacations.  In  some  of  the  schools  the  children 
are  taught  but  half  of  the  day,  the  other  part  being  de- 
voted to  manual  labor  in  which  the  teacher  unites  with 
the  scholars.  The  avails  of  their  labor  are  equally  divided 
among  themselves.  The  arrangement  is  doubtless  praise- 
worthy as  it  tends  to  promote  habits  of  industry  as  well  as 
intelligence.  The  schools  have  been  statedly  examined 
and  a  grand  celebration  for  the  purpose  of  awakening 
an  interest  in  behalf  of  education  has  been  held  in  two 
different  places  at  which  all  the  children  and  youths  of 
the  various  schools  subscribed  to  the  temperance  pledge, 
discarding  the  use  of  everything  that  intoxicate,  including 
tobacco.  By  the  minutes  of  our  last  General  Meeting 
you  will  learn  that  I  am  to  be  removed  to  Wailuku  to 
succeed  Mr.  Clark  who  takes  Mr.  Armstrong's  place  in 
the  first  church  in  Honolulu.  By  this  arrangement  Mr. 
Whittlesey  is  left  in  the  sole  charge  of  this  extensive  field. 
I  know  the  church  and  people  for  whose  spiritual  welfare 
we  have  wept,  prayed,  and  labored  these  ten  years  and 
more,  love  us  and  greatly  desire  us  to  continue  among 
them,  but  Providence  makes  it  our  duty  to  leave  them 
for  another  portion  of  God's  vineyard.  And  it  is  our 
earnest  prayer  that  the  Lord  will  go  with  us  and  impart 
unto  us  strength  and  vigor  both  in  the  inner  and  outer 
man  that  we  may  be  able  to  accomplish  great  good  and 
commend  ourselves  to  the  consciences  and  lasting  esteem 
of  all  the  people. 


242  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  Levi  Chamherlain,  Honoluluj  Novem- 
ber 6,  18J^: 

I  would  mention  that  the  measles  and  whooping  congh 
are  prevalent  at  this  time  in  the  families  of  the  mission- 
aries, and  also  very  extensively  among  the  natives.  About 
a  week  ago,  the  king  having  directed  that  the  houses  in 
the  settlement  of  Honolulu  should  be  visited  in  order  that 
the  extent  of  the  sickness  might  be  ascertained,  the  agents 
employed  called  at  a  house  which  was  found  closed.  On 
forcing  an  entrance,  the  sight  met  them  of  four  persons 
lying  dead.  As  they  lived  near  the  sea  it  is  supposed  that 
they  had  imprudently  bathed  in  the  most  dangerous  state 
of  the  measles  and  thus  lost  their  lives.  One  of  our  mis- 
sionaries was  sent  for  to  visit  a  sick  man.  His  friend 
had  bathed  him  profusely  in  cold  water  after  eruption 
had  taken  place;  the  effect  of  this  cold  bath  was  death 
in  about  an  hour.  Some  have  bathed  with  impunity  and 
the  caution  not  to  do  it  is  often  unheeded  to  the  fatal 
injury  of  the  patient. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  ClarJc,  Honolulu,  to  the  Board 
in  Boston,  October  20,  18J^: 

Your  general  letter  by  the  Ship  Tsar  has  been  re- 
ceived. We  are  pursuing,  I  think,  substantially  the  course 
you  recommend  by  gradually  committing  responsibilities 
to  native  helpers.  None  of  us  here  on  the  ground  imagine 
that  the  time  is  near  when  the  whole  work  can  be  com- 
mitted to  native  hands.  Shall  missionaries,  therefore,  be 
sustained  here  for  generations  to  come  by  the  American 
churches,  or  shall  they  gradually  obtain  their  support  at 
the  islands  and,  in  this  way,  the  churches  at  home  be 
relieved  of  the  burden?  The  last  course  is  the  one  which 
I  have  no  doubt  will  be  eventually  adopted.  Whether  the 
time  will  ever  come  when  the  work  can  be  safely  re- 
linquished is  more  than  I  can  say.  It  may,  in  time,  be 
relinquished    in    some   of   the   less   important   places   to 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1847-1848      243 

native  hands.  But  that  a  foreign  ministry,  or  a  ministry 
of  foreign  extraction  will  continue  to  exist  at  the  islands 
I  have  no  more  doubt  than  I  have  that  religion  will  con- 
tinue to  exist.  Mr.  Hunt  has  just  sailed  for  California. 
His  family  are  here.  He  commenced  preaching  to 
foreigners  in  Honolulu,  but  the  gold  fever,  as  it  is  here 
called,  is  taking  off  his  congregation  to  California  and 
he  concluded  to  follow  them.  He  expects  to  establish 
himself  at  San  Francisco  and  if  he  receives  encourage- 
ment he  will  send  for  his  family.  He  preached  faithful 
sermons  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  he  will  do  good  there.^ 

From  letter  hy  Titiis  Coan,  Hilo,  November  15, 
18^8: 

My  last  to  you  was  written  at  Kau,  September  first. 
On  our  return  from  that  little  excursion  we  found  our 
people  waiting  to  receive  us  with  warm  greetings.  We 
also  found  the  state  of  religion  very  interesting,  having 
suffered  no  decline  during  our  absence.  About  this  time 
the  measles  broke  out  among  the  natives,  supposed  to  have 
been  brought  here  by  the  United  States  Ship  Independence, 
and  spread  through  all  the  islands.  The  sweep  of  this 
epidemic  is  universal,  prostrating  all  without  discrimina- 
tion. The  distress  throughout  my  field  has  been  great. 
Hundreds,  yes  thousands,  were  prostrated  at  the  same 
time  and  there  were  not  enough  in  health  to  take  proper 
care  of  the  sick.  In  visiting  from  house  to  house  we 
would  find  from  two  to  twelve  sick  together  in  the  same 
habitation  and  often  not  one  who  was  able  to  minister 
to  the  wants  of  another.  Many,  yes,  many  of  our  dear 
people  have  shone  brightly  in  the  furnace  which  has  tried 
them.  Said  a  dying  native  to  me:  "I  am  willing  to  leave 
this  world  when  God  calls.  I  prefer  to  depart  and  be 
with  Jesus.  I  have  tried  this  world  and  it  is  vanity,  all 
vanity,  this  is  not  life,  it  is  death,  yonder  is  life,  in 

3  The  church  there  founded  by  Rev.  T.  D.  Hunt  is  now  known  as 
The  First  Congregational  Church  of  San  Francisco. 


244  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

heaven.  My  heart  is  there,  my  friends  are  there,  my 
home  is  there,  my  God  is  there.  I  feel  no  more  ties 
binding  me  to  earth."  This  was  a  vigorous  man  of  twenty- 
five. 

Many  of  our  people  give  with  great  cheerfulness  and 
some  of  them  certainly  give  liberally  when  we  take  into 
account  their  temporal  affairs.  Very  few  of  the  con- 
tributors are  worth  one  hundred  dollars,  and  many  of 
them  are  as  destitute  as  the  "Poor  Widow"  of  "Two 
Mites,"  and  yet  their  contribution  might  well  put  many 
wealthy  Christians  to  the  blush. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarh,  Honolulu,  December 
15,  18Jf8: 

Since  I  last  wrote  you  the  people  around  us  have  been 
prostrated  by  two  serious  epidemics,  the  measles  and 
whooping  cough.  These  diseases  and  other  complaints 
connected  with  them  have  carried  off  many  of  the  people. 
The  sickness  is  now  abating  on  this  island.  About  one 
thousand  deaths  are  reported  on  this  island  in  the  month 
of  November.  Probably  the  deaths  on  the  other  islands 
have  not  been  so  many  in  proportion  to  the  population. 
But  I  should  not  be  surprised  if  one-tenth  of  the  popula- 
tion is  removed  by  these  diseases.  The  death  of  no  one 
has  been  so  trying  to  me  as  the  death  of  Kaili,  whom 
I  have  before  mentioned  as  a  native  preacher  at  Honolulu. 
He  was  one  of  my  earliest  pupils  at  Lahainaluna  and 
afterwards  my  fellow  helper  at  Wailuku  and  Honolulu. 
He  was  uncommonly  mild  and  even  in  his  disposition. 
His  knowledge,  especially  of  the  Bible,  was  very  respectable 
and  he  was  apt  and  fluent  in  exhibiting  truth  to  others. 
He  was  one  of  the  first  and  most  promising  of  our 
licensed  preachers.  He  died  on  the  seventeenth  of  Novem- 
ber with  unwavering  confidence  in  the  Saviour.  Today  I 
have  been  called  to  bury  one  of  the  five  children  whom 
he  left  behind. 


XXI 

JOURNALS  A:N'D  letters  1848-1850 


f 


THE  following,  taken  from  Dr.  Rufus  Ander- 
son's History  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  Mission, 
pages  241-242,  gives  us  the  proposition  made 
by  the  American  Board  to  the  Mission  July  19,  1848, 
an  acquaintance  with  which  is  required  to  render  in- 
telligible the  action  of  the  Mission  as  recorded  on  sub- 
sequent pages. 

**What  the  Prudential  Committee  had  to  do,  was  to 
devise  a  method  for  retaining  those  families  in  the  field 
without  incurring  expenses  that  could  not  be  borne,  and 
at  the  same  time  in  view  of  the  vast  success  of  the  mission, 
prepare  the  way  for  its  early  close.  The  healthful 
oceanic  climate  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  along  with  the 
Christianized  state  of  the  people,  and  the  progress  of 
civilization,  suggested  a  solution  of  the  novel  problem, 
which  I  will  now  briefly  state: 

"1,  No  objection  was  made  to  the  brethren  becoming  Hawaiian 
citizens,  should  any  of  them  choose  to  do  so;  taking,  at  the  same 
time,  a  qualified  release  from  their  connection  with  the  Board. 

2.  Brethren,  with  the  approval  of  the  mission,  might '  purchase 
from  the  Board  the  houses  in  which  they  lived,  with  all  their  ap- 
purtenances, and  be  eubject  to  no  other  restrictions  in  the  invest- 
ment of  their  private  property  than  popular  sentiment  imposes  on 
pastors  at  home. 

3.  Brethren,  after  declaring  their  intention  to  remain  on  the 
Islands  in  the  continued  prosecution  of  Christian  labors  and  taking 
a  release  from  their  connection  with  the  Board,  might  receive  their 
proportional  part  of  property  held  by  the  Board  at  their  respective 
stations. 

MS 


246  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

4.  When  it  had  been  satisfactorily  shown  that  brethren,  thus  re- 
leased, could  not  obtain  a  full  and  proper  support  from  their 
churches,  from  their  glebe  lands,  from  the  avails  of  private  property 
and  other  sources,  the  Prudential  Committee  would  make  grants, 
for  a  time,  to  aid  in  their  support,  after  the  manner  of  the  Home 
Missionary  Society. 

5.  The  government  of  the  Islands  also  engaged  on  these  con- 
ditions to  confirm  to  the  brethren,  individually,  the  possession  of 
the  lands  thus  made  over  to  them. 

"This  was,  no  doubt,  a  somewhat  venturesome  step  on 
the  part  of  the  Prudential  Committee,  involving  the  risk 
of  not  a  few  evils,  but  it  was  the  only  apparent  method 
of  escape  from  greater  evils.  It  appeared  from  letters 
not  received  until  after  these  propositions  were  actually 
on  their  way  to  the  Islands,  that  the  mission  had  become 
in  some  measure  prepared  for  such  an  arrangement,  by 
considering  the  very  facts  that  had  operated  so  forcibly 
on  the  minds  of  the  Prudential  Committee.  The  letter 
of  the  Committee  was  dated  July  19,  1848.  The  mission 
assembled  in  the  following  April  and  assented  substan- 
tially to  the  proposal." 

From  letter  by  E.  W.  ClarTc  to  Rev.  R.  Anderson, 
Honolulu,  January  6,  18Jt.9: 

Your  letter  of  July  nineteenth  has  just  come  to  hand. 
It  is  indeed,  as  you  intimate,  the  most  important  letter 
you  have  ever  written  to  the  Mission.  How  the  proposals 
will  be  received  by  the  Mission,  as  a  body,  I  do  not  know. 
You  will  perceive  by  the  minutes  of  our  last  General 
Meeting  that  our  minds  have  been  coming  to  the  same 
results  to  which  yours  have  come.  Our  good  Brother 
Chamberlain,  from  his  peculiar  situation  in  the  mission 
and  his  remarkably  cautious  disposition,  may  fear  dis- 
aster to  the  cause.  I  have  not  talked  with  him  since  your 
letter  was  received.  He  is  just  now  very  low.  We  should 
not  be  surprised  if  he  should  drop  away  at  any  time.  But 
he  is  like  a  shock  of  corn  fully  ripe.  Some  may  object 
from  an  unwillingness  to  throw  themselves  so  much  upon 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1848-1850      247 

the  people,  others  from  a  strong  wish  to  have  their  chil- 
dren settle  in  the  land  of  their  fathers.  But  all  have  felt 
that  we  were  approaching  a  crisis  in  the  mission  and  will 
be  willing,  I  think,  to  look  at  the  subject  calmly  and 
prayerfully.  The  subject  has  pressed  with  great  weight 
upon  my  mind  for  two  or  three  years  past  and  my  mind, 
as  you  are  aware,  has  come  to  the  same  conclusion  to 
which  you  have  come.  With  the  kind  co-operation  which 
you  so  freely  offer,  I  think  measures  may  be  devised  for 
keeping  a  large  portion  of  our  children  at  the  islands. 
It  will  require  no  small  faith  in  parents,  but  if  the  success 
of  the  missionary  cause  depends  upon  our  taking  this 
course  we  can  cast  ourselves  upon  the  Lord  believing  that 
he  will  open  the  way  before  us. 

May  5,  18Jt^9.  A  great  advance  has  been  made  and  I 
feel  greatly  encouraged.  The  views  of  all  the  brethren 
of  the  Mission  have  been  freely  expressed  but  with  kind 
feelings.  All  agree  that  the  way  you  propose  to  finish 
up  the  work  of  the  American  Churches  here,  is  the  only 
way  in  which  it  can  be  done.  But  many  think  that  the 
time  has  not  yet  come  to  make  any  important  change  in 
our  policy. 

May  10,  18Ji^9.  The  following  are  some  of  the  reasons 
urged  for  accepting  the  proposals  in  the  resolutions  of 
the  Committee  in  Boston: 

1.  It  would  lead  families  to  take  root  at  the  Islands  and  thus 
tend  to  prevent  the  return  of  one  family  after  another  to  the 
United  States  for  the  education  of  their  children  and  support  in 
old  age.  AU,  I  believe,  admitted  that  it  would  be  likely  to 
diminish  the  number  of  returns  to  The  States. 

2.  For  Missionaries  to  retain  their  connection  in  full  with  the 
Board  and  employ  their  property  on  missionary  ground  for  private 
gain  with  a  view  to  benefit  their  rising  families,  would  be  liable 
to  bring  reproach  upon  the  Board  and  the  cause  of  missions; 
whereas,  reproach  from  this  source  would  not  adhere  to  the  Board, 
if  missionaries  withdraw  with  the  view  of  settling  their  families 
at  the  Islands.  Each  one  would  be  thrown  upon  his  own  responsi- 
bility, and  the  Board  would  not  be  involved  in  case  any  one  should 
pursue  a  disreputable  course. 


248  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

3.  Much  more  will  be  obtained  from  the  people  for  the  support 
of  the  Gospel  if  we  can  throw  ourselves  upon  them  as  their  pastors 
to  be  sustained  by  them.  The  people  at  Wailuku  were  desirous  I 
should  do  this  some  years  ago  and  they  renewed  the  request  last 
year  when  they  found  I  was  about  to  be  removed  to  Honolulu.  All 
admit  that  more  would  be  obtained  in  this  way  for  the  support  of 
the  Gospel. 

4.  The  fact  that  the  native  inhabitants  are  diminishing,  and  a 
new  race  coming  in,  affords  additional  reason  for  placing  ourselves 
upon  the  basis  of  Home  Missionaries. 

5.  This  is  the  way  in  which  the  work  of  the  Board  must  ulti- 
mately be  finished  up  at  the  Islands. 

6.  By  adopting  the  proposals  of  the  Board  we  shall  be  likely  to 
render  more  efficient  aid  to  the  government  in  building  up  an  in- 
dependent Christian  nation  at  the  Islands. 

All  these  points,  I  believe,  were  admitted,  but  many 
objections  were  raised,  such  as  the  risk  incurred  in  re- 
linquishing our  lien  (to  use  a  law  term)  on  the  Board  for 
our  families,  the  undesirableness  of  being  dependent  upon 
the  people  for  support  in  whole,  or  in  part,  the  poverty 
of  the  people,  the  danger  of  departing  from  missionary 
devotedness,  the  danger  of  reproach  to  the  cause  of  mis- 
sions, the  inequality  resulting  from  accepting  the  pro- 
posals, some  houses  are  worth  very  much  more  than 
others,  some  stations  have  more  herds  and  lands  than 
others  who  have  been  long  on  the  ground  and  have  large 
families.  Some  (our  secular  agents  for  example),  with 
common  prosperity,  would  be  likely  to  acquire  a  hand- 
some property,  while  others  might  be  brought  into 
straitened  circumstances.  It  will  require  no  little  faith 
in  us  to  let  go  our  hold  on  the  Board  but  no  great  ad- 
vance can  be  made  in  the  missionary  work  without  faith. 

August  6,  1849.  You  will  not  be  surprised  to  hear  that 
our  dear  Brother  Chamberlain  rests  from  his  labors.  He 
bade  adieu  to  his  weeping  friends  Sabbath  before  last, 
July  29,  and  joined  the  church  triumphant.  His  end 
was  peace.  More  than  twenty-one  years  of  intimate  fel- 
lowship with  our  dear  brother  has  only  increased   my 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1848-1850      249 

admiration  of  his  character  and  of  his  Christian  virtues. 
Such  men  are  few  and  far  between. 

About  two  hundred  now  stand  propounded  for  admis- 
sion to  this  Kawaiahao  Church.  This,  with  the  admission 
by  letter  since  the  General  Meeting,  will  increase  our 
church  members  to  more  than  eighteen  hundred,  a  great 
church  for  one  pastor  to  watch  over.  I  suggested  in  my 
last  that  it  would  probably  be  expedient  to  divide  this 
church  before  very  long.  More  labor  is  needed  here  as 
Honolulu  is  increasing  in  population,  while  other  parts 
of  the  islands  are  diminishing.  We  are  now  under  the 
necessity  of  having  two  communions,  admitting  part  of 
the  church  in  the  forenoon  and  a  part  in  the  afternoon. 
Even  our  great  house  will  not  accommodate  all  at  one 
time. 

August  28,  1S49.  The  documents  sent  herewith  will 
inform  you  of  a  new  French  outrage  just  perpetrated 
upon  this  weak  and  unoffending  nation.  We  are,  at  the 
present  moment,  at  the  mercy  of  French  soldiery.  What 
will  be  on  the  morrow  we  know  not.  If  we  look  to  the 
past  history  of  French  violence  and  bloodshed,  we  have 
not  much  to  hope  for.  But  our  trust  is  in  an  unseen 
hand.  That  Providence  which  has  so  long  watched  over 
his  cause  in  these  islands  will  not  now  forsake  us.  The 
French  Eoman  Catholics  as  Foreign  Missionaries,  owing 
no  allegiance  to  this  government  demand,  in  this  mani- 
festo, the  sole  control  of  government  school  funds.  It 
has  been  the  aim  of  the  government  to  place  the  Catholic 
and  Protestant  schools  on  the  same  basis.  Catholics  are 
allowed  to  nominate  teachers  and  a  committee  for  their 
schools  but  all  the  government  schools  are  under  the 
general  supervision  of  a  superintendent  of  schools,  who 
pays  all  teachers,  and  is  responsible  to  the  Minister  of 
Public  Instruction.  The  government  has  been  greatly 
annoyed  by  the  Catholics  adopting  and  carrying  forward 
a  school  system.  Nothing  will  satisfy  them  short  of  com- 
mitting the  schools  for  Catholic  children,  and  the  govern- 
ment fund  for  their  support,  entirely  into  their  hands. 


250  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

They  can  then  employ  them  in  their  own  way  and  for 
their  own  purposes.  They  are  allowed  now  to  control  the 
religious  instruction  of  Catholic  schools  without  inter- 
ference from  any  one.  The  other  main  point  in  these 
demands  relates  to  ardent  spirits.  The  government  has 
been  desirous  of  prohibiting  entirely  the  introduction  and 
sale  of  ardent  spirits,  but  to  this  the  foreign  powers 
acknowledging  the  independence  of  the  Islands  are  un- 
willing to  assent.  The  most  favorable  treaty  this  gov- 
ernment could  obtain  on  the  subject  with  France  and 
England  was,  that  spirituous  liquors  shall  be  liable  to  such 
reasonable  duty  as  the  Hawaiian  Government  may  think 
fit  to  lay  upon  them,  provided  always  that  the  amount 
of  duty  shall  not  be  so  high  as  absolutely  to  prohibit  the 
importation  of  said  articles.  The  government,  on  the 
strength  of  this  treaty,  has  exacted  a  high  duty  on  spirits, 
but  we  have  lamentable  proof  in  Honolulu,  that  the  duty 
is  not  so  high  as  to  exclude  the  nuisance.  And  it  is  rare 
that  any  spirits  are  introduced  without  paying  duty.  But 
in  direct  violation  of  this  treaty  the  French  now  come 
and  dictate  the  amount  of  this  duty  which  was  to  be  left 
to  the  discretion  of  the  Hawaiian  Government.  You  will 
see  from  the  above  that  the  great  sin  of  this  nation  is, 
that  she  has  not  given  sufficient  encouragement  to  Popery 
and  Brandy  and  for  this  she  must  be  visited  with  the 
vengeance  of  the  great  French  Eepublic.  Saturday,  the 
twenty-fifth  instant,  was  the  day  on  which  we  were  to  feel 
this  vengeance.  Two  vessels  were  at  hand,  a  frigate 
and  a  steamer.  In  the  morning,  orders  were  given  by  this 
government  to  the  people  of  Honolulu  to  remain  quiet 
in  their  houses  and  make  no  resistance,  which  order  was 
strictly  obeyed.  The  streets  were  almost  entirely  de- 
serted. In  the  afternoon  the  Admiral  with  a  company 
of  Marines,  came  ashore  and  took  possession  of  the  Fort, 
the  Government  offices,  Custom  House,  King's  yacht,  and 
other  vessels  sailing  under  the  Hawaiian  flag.  No  dis- 
turbance or  confusion  occurred.  The  following  day  we 
enjoyed  a  quiet  Sabbath;  I  preached  to  a  full  house,  the 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1848-1850      251 

king  and  most  of  the  chiefs  being  present,  from  the  text : 
"My  kingdom  is  not  of  this  world." 

September  3.  The  French  have  withdrawn  their  forces 
after  destroying  and  carrying  off  probably  thirty  thousand 
or  forty  thousand  dollars  worth  of  government  property, 
besides  private  property  to  some  amount.  The  vessels  have 
all  been  returned  except  the  King's  yacht,  which  cost 
the  government  nine  thousand  dollars. 

From  letter  hy  8.  N.  Castle,  Honolulu,  January  6, 
ISJfO: 

We  have  just  commenced  a  new  edition  of  the  New 
Testament  and  we  shall  need  a  grant  of  say  one  thousand 
dollars,  probably  more,  from  the  Bible  Society. 

Extract  from  Report  of  the  Mission,  April  27,  18Jf9: 

A  communication  having  been  received  from  the  Rev. 
William  P.  Alexander,  Rev.  C.  B.  Andrews,  and  S.  N. 
Castle  as  a  Committee  of  the  American  Mission  on  these 
Islands,  proposing  to  transfer  the  entire  property  of  the 
Seminary  at  Lahainaluna,  Island  of  Maui,  to  the  govern- 
ment of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  to  be  its  property  forever, 
on  certain  specified  conditions.  Therefore  it  is  resolved 
by  the  Mission  that  the  above  proposals  be  accepted  sub- 
ject to  the  ratification  of  the  Legislature,  provided,  that 
in  case  of  the  non-fulfillment  on  the  part  of  the  govern- 
ment of  the  conditions  specified  in  the  letter  of  the  above- 
named  gentlemen,  it  shall  be  optional  with  this  govern- 
ment to  allow  the  Institution  with  all  additions  and  im- 
provements which  may  have  been  made  upon  the  premises, 
and  all  rights  and  privileges  connected  therewith  to  re- 
vert to  the  associate  Minister  to  be  held  in  behalf  of  the 
A.  B.  C.  F.  M.  or  to  pay  the  sum  of  Fifteen  Thousand 
($15,000)  Dollars,  provided  also,  that  in  case  this  govern- 
ment shall  find  it  expedient  to  divert  this  establishment 
to  other  purposes  than  to  those  of  education,  it  shall  be 
at  liberty  to  do  so,  on  condition  that  it  sustain  an  In- 


252  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

stitution  of  like  character  and  on  similar  principles  in 
some  other  place  on  the  Islands,  or  pay  the  sum  of  Fif- 
teen Thousand  ($15,000)  Dollars  to  said  Mission  in  be- 
half of  the  Mission  Board  in  Boston/ 

From  Report  of  The  Royal  School,  hy  Mr,  Amos 
Cooke,  April,  18J/.9: 

For  some  two  or  three  General  Meetings  past  we  have 
seriously  considered  the  subject  of  asking  a  release  from 
our  present  position.  But  as  Providence  has  not  appeared 
to  favor  such  a  project,  by  opening  the  way  and  providing 
some  one  to  take  our  place,  we  have  held  on  year  after 
year  lest  in  seeking  for  a  release  we  might,  like  Jonah, 
be  running  away  from  the  Lord.  Of  late,  things  have 
changed  and  it  appears  to  us  that  a  door  is  opened  for 
us  to  leave  the  School  at  no  distant  period  and  without 
detriment  to  the  remaining  scholars.  There  is  now  a 
school  in  the  village  which  our  pupils  can  attend  with  a 
reasonable  prospect  that  the  change  will  not  prove  prej- 
udicial to  them  and  which  may  obviate  the  necessity  of 
our  continuing  much  longer  attached  to  this  institution. 

From  letter  hy  Titus  Coon,  Hilo,  August  J/.,  18Jt.9: 

Joshua  was  once  a  member  of  the  church  at  Puna. 
Some  fourteen  years  ago  he  removed  to  Hilo  where  he 
remained  until  his  death,  which  took  place  in  April  last. 
With  no  extraordinary  native  power  of  mind  he  became 
one  of  the  most  active  and  efficient  helpers,  merely  through 
the  power  of  his  piety,  or,  in  Scripture  language,  through 
the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost  resting  upon  him.  He  was 
already  an  old  man  but  his  strength  and  his  youth  were 
renewed  like  the  eagles.  He  became  my  almost  constant 
companion  in  travels,  patiently  toiling  by  my  side  over 

1  After  due  legal  process  this  amount  ($15,000)  was  paid  by  the 
Territorial  Government  of  Hawaii  to  the  American  Board  in  or 
about  1910,  and  the  money  distributed  to  the  several  Girls'  Board- 
ing Schools  conducted  under  the  auspices  of  the  Hawaiian  Board, 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1848-1850      253 

tiie  rough  lava  fields  of  Puna  and  through  the  rivers  and 
ravines  of  Hilo.  I  never  tired  in  travelling  with  him  and 
his  conversations  and  prayers  never  wearied.  When  my 
spirits  were  sad,  my  resort,  next  to  the  throne  of  grace, 
was  the  heart  of  good  old  Joshua.  He  was  truly  spiritual 
and  there  was  an  emotion  about  him  which  readily  at- 
tracted spiritual  minds.  The  wicked  venerated  and  feared 
him.  The  saints  loved  him.  As  age  and  infirmity  crept 
over  him  he  began  to  feel  it  more  and  more  difficult  to 
go  with  me  on  tours.  Several  times  when  invited  to  do 
so  he  has  excused  himself  saying:  "I  am  too  old  and  too 
feeble.  My  heart  goes  with  you,  but  this  old  body  can't 
drag  over  the  hills  and  rivers  any  more.  It  is  done." 
Then,  after  a  little  reflection,  all  his  old  recollections 
would  revive  and  his  desire  to  go  again  would  become  so 
strong  that  he  would  say:  "Well,  I  will  try  it  once  more. 
Perhaps  He  will  give  me  strength  to  go  through,  if  not 
let  him  leave  me  by  the  way.  All  will  be  well."  Such 
scenes  were  repeated  several  times  before  he  finally  yielded 
to  the  increasing  infirmities  of  age.  At  length  the  strong 
man  bowed  beneath  the  pressure  of  years  and  his  active 
labors  were  confined  to  the  circle  immediately  around  the 
station.  Upon  our  return  from  the  General  Meeting  it 
was  announced  that  the  Master  had  come  and  called  for 
Joshua.  My  soul  followed  him  in  his  celestial  chariot 
and  involuntarily  exclaimed:  "My  father!  My  father!" 

From  letter  by  W.  P.  Alexander,  Honolulu,  Novem- 
ber 17,  18  U9: 

The  government  is  laboring  to  dissolve  the  old  feudal 
system  and  to  give  the  people  allodial  titles  to  their  lands ; 
for  this  purpose  it  will  be  necessary  that  the  lands  be 
surveyed.  I  have  thought  that  the  work  of  surveying 
might  afford  the  very  exercise  I  needed  and  thus  allow 
me  to  recruit  my  health  in  performing  a  valuable  work 
for  the  nation  and,  meanwhile,  support  my  family  without 
any  expense  to  the  Board.    All  the  brethren  whom  I  have 


354  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

been  able  to  consult,  advise  me  to  adopt  this  course  so 
soon  as  the  Seminary  at  Lahainaluna  can  spare  me. 

From  letter  hy  S.  N.  Castle,  Honolulu,  November 
13,  1849: 

By  the  ship  Montreal  which  sails  soon,  Mrs.  Richards 
and  two  daughters,  Mr.  Paris  and  his  little  daughters, 
Mr.  C.  B.  Andrews,  Mr.  Clark's  oldest  son  and  daughter, 
Mr.  Hitchcock's  oldest  son,  Mr.  Alexander's  oldest  son, 
and  Mrs.  Chamberlain's  two  oldest  daughters  take  pas- 
sage. 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  November 
30,  1849: 

We  are  glad  to  welcome  back  to  their  native  land  the 
sons  and  daughters  of  the  first  missionaries.  A  few 
evenings  ago  I  had  great  pleasure  in  introducing  Samuel 
Ruggles  to  the  king  and  chiefs.  It  was  truly  gratifying 
to  see  with  what  warmth  they  received  him  and  inquired 
for  his  parents.  He  is  now  teaching  the  Charity  School, 
mostly  made  up  of  half  caste  children,  with  a  salary  of 
$800  a  year.  This  is  a  very  important  institution  and 
must  be  sustained.  Asa  Thurston,  Jr.,  I  trust  will  find 
some  good  situation  and  remain  on  the  islands. 

From  Report  of  KoJiala  Station,  by  Rev.  E.  Bond, 
1849: 

That  the  Christianization  of  the  Hawaiians  has  out- 
stripped their  civilization  is  a  matter  of  common  report 
and,  strangely  enough,  missionaries  have  been  held  ac- 
countable for  this  supposed  anomalous  and  false  state  of 
things,  and  stigmatized  by  some  as  narrow  and  bigoted  in 
their  views  and  teachings  because,  forsooth,  it  exists.  But 
it  may  safely  be  assumed  as  an  incontrovertible  fact  that 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1848-1850      ^55 

this  result  of  missionary  labor  which  is  here  witnessed  in- 
stead of  being  faulty  and  unnatural  is  the  only  order  in 
which  Providence  ever  develops  a  sound  and  healthful 
civilization.  The  Bible  comes  first  with  it  authoritative 
and  solemn  claims  upon  each  individual  man.  And  it  is 
one  of  the  most  blessed  characteristics  of  this  Holy  Book 
that  its  chief  behests,  weighty  though  they  are  as  eternity, 
and  involving  interests  vast  as  infinity,  can  yet  be  com- 
prehended by  the  mind  and  obeyed  by  the  heart  of  a 
savage,  albeit  he  might  be  months  or  years  even  mastering 
the  first  idea  of  civilized  life.  The  simplest  teachings 
of  the  Gospel  once  believingly  received  they  become  the 
corner  stones  of  civilization  upon  which  may  be  builded 
a  superstructure  symmetrical  and  enduring.  Connected 
with  our  history  for  1849  is  an  event  which  brought  sad- 
ness to  all  our  hearts.  On  the  morning  of  the  twenty- 
first  of  December  the  Sanctuary  of  God,  which  we  had 
occupied  but  four  short  years,  was  swept  from  us  by  a 
violent  gale  from  the  southwest.  The  stroke  fell  with  a 
desolating  power  upon  our  hearts.  We  were  totally  un- 
prepared for  the  afflicting  dispensation.  He  who  has 
brought  us  through  this  sixth  trouble  will  not  fail,  if  we 
are  His,  to  bring  us  out  of  the  seventh.  The  future  must 
reveal  what  the  present  cannot  tell  us  of  His  purposes. 
Just  one  week  after  the  fall  of  our  house  we  met  and 
cleared  away  the  floor,  the  broken  timbers,  and  rubbish. 
Then  we  sat  down  and  on  the  spot  where  we  had  been 
expecting,  the  next  Sabbath  but  one,  to  unite  in  com- 
memorating afresh  the  love  of  our  crucified  Saviour  we 
prayed,  and  wept,  remembering  Zion — Zion  desolate  and 
afflicted.  There  likewise,  we  consulted  together  and  re- 
solved, in  God's  name,  to  commence  the  preparation  of 
materials  for  a  new  house  without  delay. 

1851.  My  own  little  school  has  been  continued  through 
the  year.  At  the  station  a  thatched  house  of  worship, 
about  sixty  feet  in  length,  has  been  erected  to  answer  our 
necessities  until  better  accommodations  can  be  prepared. 


256  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  D.  Baldwin^  Ldhaina,  Ja/nuary  28, 
1850: 

Our  congregation  is  not  greatly  diminished  notwith- 
standing the  many  deaths  and  there  appears  to  be  a  liberal 
spirit  in  contributing  for  the  support  of  the  pastor,  for 
completing  their  house  of  worship,  and  other  objects.  Fif- 
teen of  our  church  members  have  gone,  the  last  year,  to 
California  to  dig  gold.  Most  of  them  have  given  a  share  of 
what  they  obtained  to  the  Lord.  One  Hebera  Upai  who 
found  he  had  cleared  four  hundred  dollars  gave  fifty 
dollars  to  the  American  Board,  which  I  reported  to  our 
Secular  Agent,  to  constitute  me  a  life  member  of  the 
Board.  Not  one  who  went  to  California  is  known  to  have 
dishonored  his  profession  there.  It  was  a  kind  of  first 
experiment  of  our  church  members  in  a  foreign  land 
and  Ave  were  not  a  little  gratified  at  numerous  testimonies 
that  they  had  stood  aloof  from  gambling,  drinking.  Sab- 
bath breaking,  and  other  evil  practices  that  would  meet 
them  in  every  part  of  California.  Our  schools  are  flourish- 
ing. We  have  lately  held  an  examination  of  them  and, 
connected  with  it,  a  Juvenile  Temperance  celebration  and 
feast  at  which  seven  hundred  children,  mostly  of  Lahaina, 
were  present. 

Honolulu  Novemher  20  1850.  We  are  about  sending  to 
the  United  States  our  two  oldest  children.  The  vessel 
is  now  at  anchor  here  and  is  bound  to  New  Bedford 
direct. 

From  letter  hy  A.  S.  CooTce,  Honolulu,  February  22, 
1850: 

Notwithstanding  all  discouragements  the  school  for  the 
young  chiefs  has  proved  a  great  blessing  to  the  nation. 
The  whole  school  has  probably  cost  the  nation  but  a  trifle 
more  than  any  one  of  the  scholars  would  have  done,  had 
they  been  at  large,  and  it  will,  we  hope,  ultimately  work 
the  salvation  of  a  few.  Miss  Bemice  Pauahi  during  the 
ten  years  she  has  been  with  us  has  cost  us  less  anxiety 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1848-1850      257 

than  almost  any  other  scholar  has  done  in  a  week.  She 
would  not  engage  herself  to  either  one  of  the  princes  be- 
fore they  left  for  Europe.  She  is  now  engaged  to  the 
most  respectable  young  man  in  Honolulu,  C.  R.  Bishop, 
Esq.,  "Collector  General  of  Customs." 

From  letter  by  B.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  April  18, 
1850: 

At  times  I  feel  as  though  I  must  break  away  from  so 
much  that  is  disgusting  and  vile.  But  when  I  look  at  the 
nation,  especially  the  young,  the  sixteen  thousand  children 
in  the  schools,  my  heart  grows  warm  and  I  feel  like  hold- 
ing on.  My  report  for  the  Legislature,  now  in  session,  is 
ready  and  I  hope  to  send  it  to  you  in  a  few  days.  Our 
educational  interests  are  advancing,  the  demand  for  Eng- 
lish education  increases  among  the  natives,  there  are  over 
three  hundred  children  now  on  the  islands  studying  the 
English  language.  A  year  ago  there  was  not  half  this 
number. 

June  30,  1850: 

I  am  obliged  to  write  you  in  haste  on  account  of  the 
smallpox  that  rages  fearfully  here  among  the  natives  and 
demands  our  whole  time  and  attention.  I  am  in  it  all  the 
day  long  and  such  spectacles  of  suffering  I  never  expected 
to  see  on  earth  as  I  now  behold  every  hour  of  the  day. 

From  letter  by  E.  Bond,  KoJiala,  October  3,  1850: 

The  letters  addressed  to  the  Prudential  Committee  by 
Rev.  Messrs.  Paris  and  C.  B.  Andrews  I  found  in  dupli- 
cate at  our  Depository  in  Honolulu.  The  proposition  or 
suggestion  made  by  them  of  a  Mission  to  the  Caroline  and 
Kingsmill  Group,  now  called  the  Gilbert  Islands,  struck 
me  as  excellent,  and  we  as  a  church  in  Kohala  would 
pledge  ourselves  to  supply  our  proportion  of  the  funds 
needed  for  the  enterprise  and  bless  God  thst  so  worthy 
an  enterprise  was  opened  for  us  at  our  very  door,  as  it  were. 


258  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

An  application  was  recently  made  me  to  take  an  oflBce 
under  the  government  with  a  salary  of  $3000,  but  neither 
duty  nor  inclination  led  me  in  that  direction,  though  the 
situation  would  have  suited  my  natural  tastes  precisely.^ 

2  Mr,  S.  N.  Castle 's  letters  of  1849  and  1850— not  given  here— 
show  most  clearly  the  difficulties  brought  to  the  Mission  families  by 
the  great  rise  in  the  price  of  food  and  provisions  in  general,  con- 
sequent upon  the  discovery  of  gold  in  California  in  1849,  and  the 
demand  in  California  for  provisions  before  the  agriculture  of  Cal- 
ifornia had  fairly  begun.  They  also  show  Mr.  Castle's  great  sym- 
pathy with  the  Mission  as  the  Secular  Agent  of  the  American 
Board. — Editor. 


CHAPTEK  XXII 

JOUKN"ALS  AND  LETTEES,  1851-1853 

Mj  ^BOM  letter  by  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  Fehru- 
At        arijl8,1851: 

Mr.  Luther  Severance,  United  States  Com- 
missioner, is  here  and  we  like  him  much.  He  is  a  plain, 
clear-headed  republican.  Mr.  Allen,  your  Consul,  is  also 
a  first-rate  man.  In  fact  they  are  both  well  adapted  to  the 
posts  they  occupy.  Mr.  Severance  is  just  the  man  for  the 
times  here,  cool,  able,  and  decided.  His  feelings,  too,  are 
deeply  enlisted  in  our  cause.  I  do  not  know  that  he  and 
I  differ  at  all  in  our  views  of  existing  political  events,  and 
he  is  doing  all  he  can  to  arouse  Hon.  Daniel  Webster. 

From  a  general  letter  of  the  Mission,  Honolulu, 
June  3,  1851  : 

After  a  separation  of  two  years  we  are,  in  the  good 
Providence  of  God,  again  assembled  in  General  Meeting. 
Shortly  after  our  last  General  Meeting,  in  1849,  the  French 
Consul,  M.  Dillon,  aided  by  the  fearful  parade  of  arms 
and  soldiery  from  the  Pursevant,  attempted  to  frighten 
this  feeble  nation  into  an  admission  of  intoxicating  drinks 
to  an  unlimited  extent  and  almost  duty  free,  but  we  re- 
joiced and  gave  thanks  to  God  that  there  was  moral  cour- 
age enough  in  this  kingdom  to  say  no  and  abide  the  con- 
sequences. During  the  past  winter  the  same  attempt  has 
been  renewed  by  the  French  Commissioner,  M.  Perrin,  but 
in  a  far  more  courteous  manner.  This  government  has 
been  greatly  vexed  and  perplexed  by  these  frequent  and 
protracted  obstacles,  thrown  in  the  way  of  all  attention  to 

259 


260  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

internal  improvements.  Schools,  roads,  and  prisons  have 
heen  almost  entirely  neglected  by  government  officers,  while 
each  have  been  engaged  in  vindicating  the  government 
from  any  infraction  of  treaties.  The  King  and  his  Privy 
Council  have  at  length  agreed  to  refer  the  question  to  the 
decision  of  the  Legislature,  which  is  now  in  session, 
whether  the  duty  on  spirituous  liquors  shall  or  shall  not 
be  reduced.  The  decision  of  this  question  we  think  we 
can  anticipate  with  a  good  degree  of  moral  certainty.  The 
Representatives  of  the  people  of  Kamehameha  III  are 
too  well  instructed  by  their  constituents  to  think  for  a  mo- 
ment of  facilitating  the  admission  of  this  fiery  demon 
among  them,  whatever  might  be  their  own  private  pref- 
erence in  the  matter.  We  are  of  the  opinion  that  now  is 
our  golden  opportunity  for  acting  directly  upon  the  foreign 
community  of  the  islands  and  if  we  shall  neglect  to  im- 
prove it  we  shall  lose  much  of  the  vantage  ground  on 
which  we  stand.  We,  therefore,  reluctantly  and  with  some 
misgivings  decided  to  open  our  school  at  Punahou  for 
pupils  from  other  than  the  mission  families,  so  far  as  the 
circumstance  of  the  case  will  allow.  A  Committee  of  our 
Mission  recommended  that  during  the  year  1852,  Provi- 
dence permitting,  an  expedition  be  fitted  out  for  the  pur- 
pose of  exploring  the  groups  of  Micronesia  and,  if  practi- 
cable, of  establishing  a  Mission  on  one  of  the  Caroline 
Islands  as  a  central  position  from  which  the  Gospel  may 
be  sent  to  the  other  Islands  of  that  and  other  groups. 
This  Committee  also  recommended  that  an  Auxiliary 
Missionary  Society  be  formed  at  the  Sandwich  Islands  to 
co-operate  with  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.  in  the  support  of  the 
Gospel  in  the  Hawaiian  and  other  Islands  of  the  Pacific, 
and  that  contributions  be  solicited  for  the  objects  of  the 
Society. 

From  tetter  by  E.  W,  ClarJc,  Honolulu^  August  16, 

1851 : 

Yesterday  a   deeply   interesting  discussion   took  place 
before  our  Hawaiian  Agricultural  Society.    This  Society 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      261 

embraces  nearly  all  Agriculturists  and  Merchants  and 
many  of  the  Mechanics  in  the  Islands.  There  has  been 
a  disposition  on  the  part  of  some  to  connect  distilleries 
with  the  sugar  making  business  in  order  to  convert  the 
skimmings,  refuse  sugar,  etc.,  into  an  article  of  commerce 
as  is  done  in  the  West  Indies.  At  the  present  time 
planters  are  embarrassed  by  a  depreciation  in  the  price 
of  sugar  and  molasses.  On  this  ground  a  resolution  was 
brought  forward  recommending  to  the  government  to 
allow  spirits  to  be  made  by  the  planters  under  certain 
restrictions.  It  came  up  yesterday  for  discussion  and  oc- 
cupied nearly  the  whole  day.  The  discussion  was  con- 
ducted with  much  courtesy  and  calmness  on  both  sides 
before  a  full  and  interested  house.  The  friends  of  tem- 
perance, as  you  may  well  suppose,  rallied  their  strength. 
On  this  side  of  the  question  the  American  Commissioner, 
Hon.  L.  Severance,  and  Chief  Justice  Lee,  not  to  name 
others,  rendered  essential  service.  The  subject  assured  a 
thoroughgoing  temperance  discussion  and  the  temperance 
side  came  off  quite  triumphant.  The  final  decision 
showed  only  three  or  four  votes  in  favor  of  the  resolution 
and,  to  the  honor  of  the  planters,  nearly  all  were  on  the 
temperance  side  of  the  question.  I  need  not  say  that  the 
friends  of  temperance  feel  greatly  cheered  by  this  result. 
An  important  advance  has  been  made. 

From  letter  hy  E,  W,  Clark,  Honolulu,  September 
12,  1851: 

Mr.  T.  E.  Taylor  is  quite  popular  here  and  is  a  good, 
faithful  preacher.  I  suggested  to  him,  when  he  was  mak- 
ing up  his  mind  to  come  from  the  coast  and  supply  Mr. 
Damon's  place  during  his  absence,  that  Providence  might 
open  the  way  for  his  remaining  here  as  pastor  for  the 
foreign  population  after  Brother  Damon  came  back.  We 
all  love  Mr.  Damon  and  hope  to  see  him  back  and  engaged 
in  his  useful  labors  for  seamen. 


262  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  to  Dr, 
Anderson,  January  30,  1852: 

A  child  does  not  more  naturally  look  to  his  parents, 
than  the  natives  to  their  missionary  for  direction  and  as- 
sistance in  obtaining  their  rights  to  their  lands,  fishing 
privileges,  freedom  from  oppression,  etc.  Without  such 
aid  many  of  them  would  never  obtain  their  rights.  I 
think,  too,  some  attention  to  these  secular  matters,  after 
the  example  of  Neff  and  Oberlin,  has  a  good  effect  upon 
the  health  and  spirits  of  the  missionary  and,  if  he  is  pru- 
dent, it  increases  his  influence  among  his  people.  I  love 
to  preach  and,  when  the  Master  calls,  I  shall  joyfully  step 
back  to  the  pulpit  and  there  stand  while  He  shall  honor 
me  with  a  place  in  His  earthly  vineyard. 

February  25.  You  will  be  gratified  to  learn  that  we 
have  now  a  fair  prospect  of  securing  the  services  of  Rev. 
T.  E.  Taylor  as  preacher  for  the  English  speaking  resi- 
dents. He  has  been  preaching  in  the  Seamen's  Chapel  for 
a  year  past  with  much  acceptance  to  a  large  proportion  of 
our  residents  while  Mr.  Damon  was  absent  in  the  States. 

June  8.  The  new  Constitution  for  the  nation  was 
adopted  yesterday  by  both  houses  of  the  Legislature.  It 
will  be  a  great  improvement,  I  think,  on  the  old.  The 
clause  excluding  clergymen  from  participation  in  politics 
was  stricken  out  after  a  discussion  of  about  four  days.  In 
this  discussion  I  took  a  prominent  part  for  I  considered 
such  a  clause  wrong  in  principle,  calculated  to  gratify  the 
opposers  of  missionaries  and  of  all  religions,  and  to  be  a 
stigma  on  ministers  of  the  Gospel.  The  discussion  de- 
veloped more  native  eloquence  than  I  ever  before  witnessed 
on  the  islands.  I  wish  you  could  have  heard  Hon.  John  li. 
His  bursts  of  Christian  feeling  moved  every  heart  and 
some  of  his  strokes  would  have  done  honor  to  Patrick 
Henry.  He  is  one  of  God's  noblemen,  meek  and  gentle  as 
a  lamb,  but  where  he  sees  the  religion  of  Christ  assailed 
he  is  a  lion.  I  do  believe  he  would  be  a  martyr,  if  called 
to  it. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      263 

From  letter  Inj  Titus  Coan,  Hilo,  January  SO,  1852: 

Our  contributions  are  a1  ys  taken  up  on  the  Sabbath, 
previous  to  the  first  Monday  of  each  month.  It  is  a  most 
exhilarating  and  delightful  picture  to  see  the  contribu- 
tions of  the  little  children  as  they  come  in  single  file  to 
the  altar  and  deposit  their  gifts.  No  class  gives  with 
such  apparent  cheerfulness.  Their  footsteps  are  light, 
their  spirits  buoyant,  and  their  faces  radiant  with  joy. 

March  3.  So  soon  as  the  second  eruption  on  Mauna 
Loa  broke  out  I  determined  D.  V.  to  visit  it.  Accordingly, 
arrangements  having  been  made  and  Dr.  Wetmore  having 
consented  to  go  with  me,  we  set  out  at  five  P.  M.  on  the 
twenty-third  of  February  and  went  up  to  a  little  village 
five  miles  distant  and  in  the  outskirts  of  the  great  forest 
which  separates  Hilo  from  the  mountains.  This  we  did 
in  order  to  take  an  early  start  on  the  next  morning.  At 
half  past  three  P.  M.  February  twenty-seventh  we  reached 
the  awful  crater  and  stood  above  in  the  light  of  its  fires. 
It  was  a  moment  of  unutterable  interest.  I  seemed  to  be 
standing  in  the  presence  and  before  the  burning  throne  of 
the  Eternal  God  and  while  every  other  sound  was  hushed 
He,  above,  spoke.  I  was  ten  thousand  feet  above  the  sea 
in  a  vast  solitude  untrodden  by  the  foot  of  man  or  beast 
and  amidst  silence  unbroken  by  the  voice  of  any  created 
being.  Here  I  stood,  almost  blinded  with  the  insufferable 
brightness,  almost  deafened  with  the  clamor  and  roar  of 
this  fearful  trumpet,  and  almost  terrified  with  the  awful 
and  terrible  scene.  The  heat  was  so  intense  that  the  crater 
could  not  be  approached  within  forty  or  fifty  yards  from 
the  windward  side  and  probably  not  within  two  miles 
from  the  leeward  side.  The  eruption,  as  before  stated, 
commenced  on  the  very  summit  of  the  mountain  Mauna 
Loa,  but  the  lateral  pressure  of  the  emboweled  fusion  be- 
came so  great  as  to  force  itself  through  a  depression  in  the 
side  of  the  mountain  all  the  way  from  the  summit  to  the 
plain   where  it   burst  forth   with  terrible   force.     Night 


264  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

coming  on  we  now  retired  about  a  mile  from  the  crater, 
but  where  we  had  the  most  perfect  command  of  the  whole 
scene,  and  here  we  took  our  station  for  the  night,  not 
indeed  to  sleep  for  this  was  impossible,  but  to  listen  to  the 
awful  roar  and  to  watch  the  wonderful  motions  of  this 
great  furnace  of  Jehovah.  During  the  night  the  scene 
surpassed  all  powers  of  description.  Vast  columns  of  this 
matter,  fused  to  white  heat,  were  being  continuously  shot 
up  in  the  form  of  billows,  pyramids,  cones,  towers,  turrets, 
spires,  etc.,  while  the  descending  showers  of  fusion  poured 
in  constant  cataract  of  fire  upon  the  rim  of  the  crater  and 
over  the  surrounding  area,  each  falling  shower  containing 
matter  enough  to  sink  the  proudest  ship  should  it  fall 
upon  her  deck.  A  large  fissure  opened  through  the  lower 
side  of  the  rim  of  the  crater  through  which  the  molten 
lava  flowed  constantly,  pouring  and  flowing  down  the 
mountain  in  a  deep,  broad  channel,  at  the  rate,  probably, 
of  sixteen  miles  an  hour.  This  fiery  stream  we  could  trace 
all  the  way  from  its  source  down  the  mountain  for  a  dis- 
tance of  twenty  or  thirty  miles  until  it  was  hidden  from 
the  eye  by  its  own  windings  in  the  woods  toward  Hilo. 
At  daybreak,  on  the  twenty-eighth,  we  retraced  our  steps 
down  the  mountain,  rejoined  the  two  men  we  had  left 
behind  and,  by  a  forced  march,  reached  the  confines  of 
the  forest  at  four  P.  M.  It  was  Saturday  and  we  here 
determined  to  rest  on  the  Sabbath  "according  to  the  com- 
mandment," there  being  an  abundance  of  wood  and  water 
in  this  place.  On  reaching  home  we  found  that  the  lava 
had  not  approached  the  shore,  but  was  still  spreading 
itself  in  the  interior  regions. 

March  6.  The  crater  is  still  in  violent  action.  No  de- 
crease. The  fire  has  not  yet  reached  the  shore.  Perhaps 
the  Lord  will  hold  it  back.  Out  atmosphere  is  full  of 
smoke  and  ashes,  and  charred  leaves  from  the  forest  are 
falling  thick  around  us.  The  light  is  seen  one  hundred 
and  twenty  miles  out  at  sea. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      265 

From  letter  ly  E.  Bond,  Kohala,  April  2,  1852: 

Mr.  Armstrong  finding  difficulty  in  the  management  of 
the  school  funds  requested  me  to  act  as  treasurer  of  the 
fund  for  the  common  schools  of  Kohala  as  the  only  ground 
of  hope  for  our  schools.  Should  I  have  refused?  The 
well-being  of  our  schools  was  regarded  as  a  vital  point 
in  our  work  and,  besides,  it  was  perfectly  clear  that  Mr. 
Armstrong's  services  as  Minister  of  Public  Instruction, 
however  energetically  directed,  could  not  be  rendered  ef- 
fective without  our  hearty  co-operation.  From  1848  I 
have  acted  therefore  as  treasurer  of  this  fund  at  no  small 
sacrifice  of  time  ard  strength  and  feeling.  I  have  hus- 
banded with  all  care  the  funds  received  so  that  the  teachers 
should  not  lack  their  pay  and  the  schools  no  more  be 
weighted  down  with  debts.  The  taxes  were  chiefly  paid 
in  goods  of  all  descriptions,  until  the  last  year,  all  of 
which  had  to  be  stored  and  cared  for  continually. 

From  general  letter  of  Mission  to  Rev.  R.  Ander- 
son, D.D.,  Honolulu,  June  1,  1852: 

Would  that  you  could  look  in  upon  our  assembly  and 
mingle  in  our  deliberations.  The  first  glance  of  your  eye 
upon  us  would  show  you  that  we  are  not  the  youth  and 
striplings  whom  you  sent  out  to  preach  the  Gospel  to  the 
heathen.  You  would  see  a  company  on  whom  time  has 
been  doing  its  corroding  work  for  ten,  fifteen,  twenty,  and 
more  than  thirty  years.  Many  a  cheek  is  becoming  fur- 
rowed. Some  heads  are  gray,  and  spectacles  are  multiply- 
ing on  our  faces.  You  would  see  our  assembly  inter- 
mingled with  our  beloved  offspring,  who  are  already  double 
the  number  of  their  parents.  Some  of  our  daughters 
overtop  the  height  of  their  mothers  and  sons  there  are, 
obedient  too,  who  no  longer  look  up  to  their  fathers. 
Time  is  indeed  making  war  on  the  persons  of  your  mis- 
sionaries and  bringing  forward  another  generation  to 
occupy  their  place  upon  earth.  The  Eoyal  School,  formerly 
taught  for  the  children  of  chiefs  only,  has  lately  assumed 


266  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

a  new  form.  A  new  and  elegant  building  has  been  erected 
for  it  in  a  pleasant  location  in  the  rear  of  Honolulu  at  an 
expense  of  eight  thousand  dollars  and  a  new  and  well 
qualified  teacher  has  been  procured  for  it  from  the  United 
States.  Assistant  teachers  are  also  employed.  The  feature 
which  now  gives  this  school  great  interest  to  this  place  and 
this  nation  is,  that  it  is  now  open  to  the  children  of  all 
foreign  residents.  Its  pupils  number  about  sixty.  During 
our  present  session  we  have  attended  an  examination  of 
this  school  and  could  not  but  notice,  with  pride  and 
pleasure,  how  large  and  valuable  a  portion  of  its  pupils 
were  from  families  which  once  belonged  to  this  mission, 
but  who  went  out  from  us  to  government  offices  and  to 
other  employments. 

In  1840,  under  the  instruction  of  Mr.  Eichards,  the 
chiefs  adopted  a  brief  constitution  for  the  nation  and,  in 
the  two  or  three  following  years,  a  new  code  of  laws  took 
the  place  of  the  first,  descending  to  more  particulars  and 
dispensing  justice  more  widely.  Until  that  time  every 
one  in  authority  throughout  the  islands  had  made  laws 
according  to  his  own  caprice  or  instructions  from  supe- 
riors. But  now,  for  the  first  time,  it  was  proclaimed  that 
nothing  would  henceforward  be  called  law  that  had  not 
been  printed  with  the  king's  signature.  This  was  as  great 
a  step  as  any  nation  could  well  take  at  once.  It  broke  up 
the  foundation  of  the  universal  tyranny  and  deception 
which  reigned  everywhere  and  rested  as  an  incubus  on  the 
people.  It  was  a  first  step  towards  establishing  some  rights 
of  the  people  who  henceforth  had  their  tongues  loosed  in 
every  quarter  to  plead  their  own  cause  against  arbitrary 
power.  There  is  one  other  sign  of  progress  in  the  nation 
more  important  than  all  which  have  been  mentioned.  We 
refer  to  the  work  of  the  Commission  appointed  by  the 
government  to  settle  land  titles.  They  have  already  inves- 
tigated the  claims  of  nearly  all  the  people  of  the  islands. 
The  titles  they  give  are  not  to  be  disturbed  or  questioned 
by  any  of  the  authorities  of  the  islands,  nor  can  they  be 
revoked  even  by  the  highest  courts  of  the  country.     Too 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      267 

much  praise  cannot  be  bestowed  on  the  high  chiefs  of 
this  nation  for  according  to  the  people  the  rights  enjoyed 
under  the  most  liberal  governments.  The  children  of  mis- 
sionaries and  ex-missionaries  have  formed  themselves  into 
a  society  for  mutual  improvement  and  for  benevolent 
purposes,  one  object  of  which  will  be  to  support  Dr. 
Luther  Halsey  Gulick,  one  of  their  own  number,  as  their 
missionary  to  Micronesia  and  we  have  no  doubt  they  will 
be  able  to  do  it,  if  they  possess  the  self-denying  spirit  of 
the  Gospel. 

From  letter  by  Rev.  E.  W.  ClarTc,  Honolulu,  June 
8,  1852: 

The  mission  to  Micronesia  has  called  our  thoughts  away 
from  ourselves  and  afforded  an  object  of  deep  and  stirring 
interest.  We  have  mingled  our  prayers  and  tears  together 
in  social  worship  and  around  the  table  of  our  Lord.  The 
call  to  go  up  with  these  new  brethren  to  their  untried  field 
of  labor,  after  having  borne  the  burden  and  heat  of  the 
day  in  these  islands,  has  come  home  to  some  of  us.  I 
little  thought  that  the  task  would  fall  to  me  so  far  worn 
out  in  the  service  as  I  am  to  accompany  these  young  mis- 
sionaries to  Micronesia,  but  I  did  not  feel  at  liberty  to  re- 
fuse if,  in  the  opinion  of  the  brethren,  no  better  arrange- 
ments could  be  made.  Few  persons  suffer  so  much  at  sea 
as  I  do,  but  I  shall  go  forward,  I  trust,  with  cheerfulness, 
trusting  in  an  everlasting  arm.  I  have  offered  to  relinquish 
the  pastorship  of  the  church  and  attend  to  other  labors 
demanded  at  this  post,  or  to  take  the  oversight  of  part  of 
the  church,  which  now  consists  of  more  than  two  thousand 
members  constantly  increasing  from  other  churches,  besides 
the  addition  on  profession.  To  give  you  some  idea  of  the 
work  to  be  done  here,  Brother  Coan  has  just  given  me  the 
names  of  one  hundred  and  seventy-seven  of  his  church 
members,  reported  to  be  in  Honolulu,  whom  he  wished  me 
to  look  up  and  report  to  him.  Church  members  from 
other  churches,  besides   Hilo,   are   flocking  to   Honolulu. 


268  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Some  of  them  remain  only  for  a  season,  others  per- 
manently. 

June  10,  1852.  I  now  write  you  for  the  first  time  as 
Secretary  of  the  Hawaiian  Missionary  Society  and  here- 
with send  you  the  first  report  of  our  Society.  We  hope 
to  have  materials  for  a  longer  report  another  year.  I 
cannot  but  regard  the  formation  of  the  Society  last  year 
as  exceedingly  opportune.  It  is  destined,  I  trust,  to  take 
an  important  part  in  carrying  forward  the  missionary 
work  in  this  part  of  the  world. 

June  15.  This  First  Church  in  Honolulu,  besides  sup- 
porting their  own  pastor,  building  their  own  meeting 
house,  etc.,  has  raised  within  a  few  months  nearly  a 
thousand  dollars  for  foreign  missions.^ 

July  12,  1852.  There  was  a  full  and  attentive  audience 
at  the  church  last  evening.  A  good  impression  I  think 
was  made.  He  hope  to  get  off  tomorrow,  in  the  schooner 
Caroline  for  Micronesia.  You  will  hear  from  me  again 
when  I  return,  if  the  Lord  will. 

From  letter  by  E.  W.  Clarh,  Honolulu,  January  20, 
1853: 

Letters  left  here  December  fourth  giving  you  a  full  ac- 
count of  the  missionary  expedition  to  Micronesia.  I  trust 
those  letters  will  soon  be  in  Boston.  I  can  only  say  here 
that  the  objects  of  the  voyage  were  successfully  accom- 
plished. 

From  letter  by  Titus  Coon,  Hilo,  April  30,  1853: 

In  all  parts  of  Hilo  and  Puna  the  people  are  rebuilding 
and  improving  their  houses  of  worship,  the  old  temporary 
grass  buildings  giving  place  to  framed  and  stone  houses. 
Of  these  seven  have  been  completed  during  the  past  year 
and  as  many  more  are  commenced  and  in  various  stages 

1  By  the  words,  ' '  Foreign  Missions, ' '  Mr.  Clark  means  the  mis- 
sions of  the  Hawaiian  Churches  to  Micronesia  and  The  Marquesas 
Islands. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      269 

of  progress.  Besides  these  quite  a  number  of  smaller 
houses  have  been  built  by  the  people  for  their  little  social 
meetings  for  prayer,  conference,  etc.  Eeckoning  all  the 
cash,  materials,  and  labor  devoted  to  meeting  houses  dur- 
ing the  past  year  it  will  be  a  moderate  computation  to  put 
the  sum  at  three  thousand  dollars,  more  than  one  thousand 
of  which  have  been  paid  in  cash.  All  this  has  been  spon- 
taneous on  the  part  of  the  people. 

From  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander,  Lahainaluna,  April 
16,  1853: 

God  has  raised  up  some  young  men  well  adapted  to  the 
work  of  the  ministry.  In  the  class  about  to  graduate  in 
the  Seminary  are  four,  viz. :  Nahinu,  Kuaea,  Kaukau,  and 
Josepa,  who,  I  think,  are  decided  Christians,  good  scholars 
for  Hawaiians,  well  furnished  with  Bible  knowledge,  as 
well  instructed  in  theology  as  any  of  our  Hawaiian  Minis- 
ters, and  ardently  desirous  of  engaging  in  the  good  work 
of  carrying  the  Gospel  to  the  darkened  pagans.  We  need 
these  young  men  in  our  Hawaiian  field,  but  I  think  they 
will  do  more  to  build  up  Christ's  Kingdom  here  by  carry- 
ing the  Gospel  to  Fatuhiwa  than  by  remaining  among  us. 

Native  Peeachees 

From  a  general  letter  of  the  Mission,  Honolulu,  June, 
1853: 

There  are  three  ordained  native  preachers  of  the  Gospel 
connected  with  this  Mission,  viz.:  Rev.  J.  Kekela,  at 
Kahuku;  Rev.  S.  Kauwealoha,  at  Kaanapali:  and  Eev. 
David  Malo,  at  Keokea,  on  East  Maui.  These  brethren 
have  thus  far  given  good  satisfaction  to  the  churches  and 
congregations  over  whom  they  have  been  placed  and  the 
blessing  of  God  has  attended  their  labors.  Four  promis- 
ing young  men  have  recently  graduated  at  Lahainaluna, 


270  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

who  are  looking  forward  to  the  Gospel  Ministry  and,  if 
the  way  shall  be  opened  for  them,  they  purpose  to  go  on 
foreign  missions.  We  have  many  valuable  native  helpers 
in  our  churches,  who  are  a  great  assistance  in  conducting 
district  meetings  and  who  are  ready  for  every  good  word 
and  work.  Since  the  return  of  Messrs.  Clark  and  Kekela 
from  Micronesia,  the  latter  has  visited  and  preached  to  all 
the  churches  on  Oahu,  Maui,  Molokai,  and  Hawaii,  and  has 
informed  them  of  the  moral  desolations  which  he  saw  in 
those  Islands  and  their  perishing  need  of  the  bread  of  life. 


A  Macedonian  in  the  Midst  of  TJs 

Some  time  in  the  month  of  March  a  Marquesian  Chief, 
by  the  name  of  Matunui,  and  a  son-in-law  of  his,  a  native 
of  Maui,  by  the  name  of  Pau,  arrived  at  Lahaina  on  board 
the  whaleship  Tamerlane.  The  object  of  said  Chief,  and 
his  son-in  law,  in  visiting  these  islands  at  this  time  is  to 
get  some  missionaries  to  go  and  live  with  him  and  his 
people  on  the  Island  of  Fatuhiwa,  of  the  Marquesas  Is- 
lands, and  teach  them  the  word  of  God.  Two  of  our  native 
ministers,  and  four  of  the  recent  graduates  of  Lahaina- 
luna,  together  with  several  school  teachers  and  deacons  in 
our  churches,  are  among  the  candidates  who  have  volun- 
teered to  go  on  this  mission.  Eev.  B.  W.  Parker,  one  of 
the  company  who  went  to  the  Marquesas  in  1833,  but 
was  unable  to  remain  there  has  been  appointed  to  accom- 
pany them  to  Fatuhiwa. 

The  Prudential  Committee  will  be  happy  to  learn  that 
the  second  foreign  church  in  Honolulu  is  in  a  flourishing 
state.  They  have  recently  given  the  Eev.  T.  E.  Taylor  a 
call  to  be  their  pastor  with  a  salary  of  $2000.  His  in- 
stallation took  place  Sabbath  evening,  June  5th,  at  which 
time  several  of  the  missionary  brethren  took  part  in  the 
consecrating  services.  Many  of  the  children  and  youths 
in  the  Hawaiian  Mission  Children's  Society  are  con- 
nected with  this  church  and  congregation. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      271 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarh,  Honolulu,  June  IJf, 
1853: 

You  will  rejoice  that  our  people  are  again  taking  hold 
of  the  missionary  work  with  a  truly  missionary  spirit.  In- 
structions in  the  Hawaiian  language  were  given  last  Sab- 
bath in  the  stone  church  in  presence  of  a  crowded  audience 
to  two  ordained  native  missionaries,  Kekela  and  Kau- 
wealoha,  and  to  two  teachers  who  are  to  sail  in  a  day  or 
two,  with  their  wives,  for  Fatuhiwa,  one  of  the  Marquesas 
Islands.  A  crowded  meeting  was  also  attended  on  Sabbath 
evening  in  the  Seamen's  Chapel  in  relation  to  their  em- 
barkation. Matunui,  a  chief  of  Fatuhiwa,  was  present  and 
expressed  his  thanks  to  the  audience  for  furnishing  him 
with  the  teachers  for  which  he  came.  Your  heart  would 
have  been  full  to  overflowing  if  you  could  have  been 
present  at  these  two  meetings,  especially  if  you  could  have 
understood  the  addresses  of  the  native  brethren  about  to 
leave  us.  I  could  not  but  exclaim,  what  has  God  wrought 
at  the  Sandwich  Islands !  The  congregation  under  my 
charge,  after  having  contributed  nearly  six  thousand  dol- 
lars last  year  to  different  objects,  has  responded  to  this  new 
call  and  I  have  received,  in  a  few  days,  between  four  and 
five  hundred  dollars  for  this  new  object.  The  foreign 
community  is  also  taking  hold  of  the  work. 

June  21,  1853.  The  company  of  missionaries  for  Fa- 
tuhiwa, Marquesas  Islands,  embarked  on  the  sixteenth. 
The  occasion  was  one  of  scarcely  less  interest  than  the 
embarkation  last  year  for  Micronesia.  Prayer  was  offered 
on  deck  by  Brother  Thurston  in  native  and  by  Brother 
Taylor  in  English.  The  vessel  was  larger  and  the  ac- 
commodations more  comfortable  than  in  the  Caroline  last 
year.  All  seemed  in  good  spirits.  Eev.  James  Kekela, 
my  companion  to  Micronesia  last  year  and  for  several 
years  a  pupil  under  my  instructions  at  Lahainaluna,  is  one 
of  the  company.  I  regard  him  as  a  very  dear  Christian 
brother.  In  no  Hawaiian  should  I  have  greater  confidence 
for  such  a  work;  and  his  wife,  for  many  years  a  pupil  in 


272  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

the  Female  Seminary  at  Wailuku,  is  one  of  our  very  best 
native  women.  They  are  of  kindred  spirits  and  have 
proved  themselves  worthy  of  our  confidence.  They  leave 
behind  a  very  promising  little  daughter,  about  two  years 
old,  in  charge  of  Miss  Ogden.  This  was  a  very  serious 
trial  to  them,  but  they  thought  it  for  the  good  of  the  child 
to  leave  her.  They  leave,  also,  a  church  and  people  who 
clung  to  them  to  the  last.  Few  missionaries  make  more 
serious  sacrifice  than  Kekela  and  Naomi  have  done.  Eev. 
Samuel  Kauwealoha,  another  of  the  company,  is  our  next 
best  native  preacher.  They  were  fellow  students  at  La- 
hainaluna  and  warm  friends.  Isaiah  Kaiwi  and  Lot 
Kuaihelani  go  out  with  them  as  school  teachers.  Brother 
Parker  (Rev.  B.  W.  Parker)  goes  with  them  to  return  in 
the  vessel.  He  has  once  been  at  the  Marquesas  and  has 
some  knowledge  of  the  language,  which  is  quite  similar  to 
the  Hawaiian.  Mr.  Bicknell,  a  pious  mechanic  and  a  mem- 
ber of  Eev.  Mr.  Taylor's  church,  goes  out  with  the  com- 
pany and  will  remain  if  circumstance  favor  it.  He  is  not 
under  the  direction  of  our  Society.  The  vessel  was  char- 
tered to  do  our  business  for  two  thousand  dollars.  The 
outfit  of  the  missionaries,  etc.,  will  cost  about  one  thousand 
dollars  more.  These  expenses  will  all  be  borne  by  our 
Hawaiian  Missionary  Society.^ 

June  28,  1853.  I  send  you  the  first  Annual  Report 
of  the  Mission  Children's  Society.  It  presents  our  chil- 
dren, you  will  see,  in  a  hopeful  aspect.  We  can  almost 
say,  'Tt  is  enough,  now  lettest  thou  thy  servants  depart 
in  peace."  You  will  not  blame  us  for  desiring  our  children 
to  be  well  educated.  Without  it  they  cannot  perform  the 
work  which  Providence  seems  to  be  laying  upon  them. 
I  will  send  you  the  second  Annual  Report  of  our  Mis- 
sionary Society  of  the  Hawaiian  Churches  as  soon  as 
printed. 

P.  8.    You  will  desire  to  be  kept  informed  about  the 

2  This  was  four  years  before  the  first  Morning  Star  was  built 
and  sent  out  to  the  Pacific  under  the  Rev.  Hiram  Bingham. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1851-1853      273 

smallpox.  The  yellow  flag  is  flying  all  about  us,  but  we 
remain  safe  as  yet.  Our  hearts  are  caused  to  bleed  for 
the  poor  people  suffering  about  us.  Vigorous  measures 
are  being  taken  to  arrest  the  progress  of  the  disease.  The 
people  are  very  generally  being  vaccinated.  We  have 
heard  of  only  a  few  cases  on  any  of  the  other  Islands,  but 
they  can  hardly  expect  to  escape.  They  will,  however, 
become  more  generally  protected  by  vaccination.  The 
disease  was  quite  fatal  when  it  first  commenced.  It  is 
becoming  less  so.  It  is  not  certainly  known  how  it 
reached  the  Islands,  but  in  some  way  from  California. 
We  have  been  apprehensive,  for  several  years,  that  it  would 
reach  the  Islands  in  consequence  of  our  proximity  to 
California. 

Novemler  5,  1853.  You  will  be  glad  to  hear  of  Mr. 
Parker's  safe  return  from  the  Marquesas  Islands.  He 
arrived  on  the  twenty-first,  after  an  absence  of  four  and 
a  half  months.  He  will  report  particulars  to  you.  They 
found  things  as  favorable,  on  the  whole,  as  they  expected. 


CHAPTER  XXIII 
JOUENALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859 


F 


BOM  letter  hy  E.  Bond,  Eohala,  Odoher  27, 
1853: 


At  the  first  meeting  with  my  people  which  I 
attended,  after  my  return  from  the  Mission  Meeting,  I 
noticed  very  unusual  indications  which  I  supposed  acci- 
dental. These  indications  were  a  greater  earnestness  in 
prayer  and  a  quiet  seriousness  of  deportment  in  all  adults 
and  youths,  and  attention  fixed  and  all-absorbing  to  the 
word  spoken.  At  the  next  station,  instead  of  being  obliged 
to  wait  the  gathering  of  the  people,  I  found  them  gathered 
and  wrestling  in  prayer.  To  my  unfeigned  surprise  I 
heard,  at  the  door,  fervent  petitions  for  the  Spirit  of  God 
to  go  with  the  pastor  in  his  tour  and  also  considerable 
portions  of  the  sermon  delivered  on  the  previous  Sabbath 
incorporated  into  the  prayer.  I  must  leave  older  brethren 
to  speak  of  former  times  and  for  those  who  may  have 
statistics  to  produce  and  I  will  confine  myself  to  my  own 
observations  regarding  licentiousness  during  the  thirteen 
past  years  in  this  single  district.  To  my  mind  nothing 
is  more  evident  in  the  past  history  of  the  people  than  a 
gradual  improvement  in  this  department  of  morals. 

January  13,  185Jf.  Mr.  Severance,  our  late  Commis- 
sioner, has  sailed  for  the  United  States  around  the  Cape. 
We  regretted  to  have  him  leave. 

From  letter  hy  J.  S.  Emerson,  Waialua,  January  2, 
1854: 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Rice  feel  it  their  duty  to  leave  Punahou 
for  another  post  of  labor.     Brother  Rice  has  been  the 

274 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      275 

mainspring  in  erecting  three  stone  meeting  houses  in 
Brother  Clark's  field,  all  of  which  are  covered  with 
shingle  roofs  and  are  among  the  best  houses  in  the  islands. 
These  things  would  never  have  been  done  except  by  a  man 
of  tact  like  Brother  Eice.  He  is  a  good  preacher  of  the 
Gospel  and  is  well  received  in  all  of  our  pulpits. 

From  letter  by  Titus  Coan,  Hilo,  January  17,  185 J^: 

Probably  you  have  ere  this  heard  of  the  burning  of  the 
Hilo  Boys'  Boarding  School  buildings.  This,  we  suppose, 
was  the  act  of  an  incendiary,  but  no  trace  has  yet  been 
found  of  the  wretch  who  did  it.  We  feel  a  strong  desire 
to  rebuild  and  to  raise  a  brighter  Phoenix  from  the  ashes. 
For  this  purpose  the  native  church  of  Hilo  has  given  two 
hundred  dollars  and  the  foreigners  three  hundred  dollars. 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  June  3, 
185Jf: 

Poor  dear  Brother  Taylor,  a  good  man  honored  of 
God,  and  greatly  beloved  by  his  people  here,  has  consump- 
tion, has  taken  a  dismission  from  his  church  and  gone  to 
Tahiti  to  try  the  effect  of  a  voyage.  What  a  mysterious 
Providence !  Everything  connected  with  the  church  and 
society  looked  bright  and  flourishing.  Suddenly  a  cloud 
has  come  over  it. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clarh,  Honolulu,  May  3,  185^. 

This  letter  mentions  the  first  contribution  ever  made  for 
missionary  work  in  Japan. 

At  a  meeting  of  the  Directors  of  the  Hawaiian  Home 
Missionary  Society,  held  last  evening,  the  following  reso- 
lution was  adopted : 

"Resolved,  In  view  of  a  benevolent  person  in  Honolulu 
having  given  the  sum  of  one  hundred  dollars  to  the  Home 
Missionary  Society  for  sending  a  missionary  to  Japan, 
we  now  devote  the  sum  of  one  thousand  dollars  to  this 
object  to  be  held  at  the  disposal  of  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M., 


276  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

and  the  secretary  is  hereby  directed  to  communicate  this 
Eesolution  to  the  Society  in  Boston." 

Our  Treasurer  will  credit  to  the  Board  the  above  sum 
to  be  disposed  of  at  the  discretion  of  the  Prudential  Com- 
mittee for  the  object  specified.  The  Society  has  been  led 
to  this  step  by  the  arrival  here  of  the  United  States 
Sloop  of  War  Saratoga,  from  Japan,  with  the  intelligence 
that  Commodore  Perry  has  concluded  a  Treaty  of  Amity 
and  Friendship  with  that  country,  thus  affording  the  hope 
that  the  way  is  preparing  for  the  spread  of  the  Gospel  in 
Japan.  ^ 

From  a  General  Mission  letter,  Honolulu,  June  1 , 
185  h: 

The  Mission,  at  its  meeting  on  the  twenty-second 
ultimo,  voted  to  dissolve  the  former  compact  which  pro- 
vided for  the  Annual  Meeting,  consisting  entirely  of  the 
missionaries  of  the  American  Board,  which  met  annually 
and  was  known  as  the  General  Meeting,  and  to  unite  with 
the  pastors  and  representatives  of  the  churches  under  the 
banner  of  the  Hawaiian  Evangelical  Association.  A  com- 
mittee was,  therefore,  appointed  to  revise  the  Constitu- 
tion and  the  following,  after  discussion  and  amendment, 
was  adopted,  viz. : 

"This  body  shall  be  called  the  Hawaiian  Evangelical 
Association,  and  shall  consist  of  those  who  have  subscribed 
to  the  original  article  of  compact,  and  of  others  who  here- 
after shall  subscribe  to  this  Constitution,  after  having 
become  elected  members  by  a  vote  of  not  less  than  two- 
thirds  of  the  members  resident  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands." 

David  Malo,  whose  name  has  long  been  familiar  to  you 
as  a  most  intelligent  co-worker  with  us,  departed  this  life 
in  October,  1853,  having  labored  acceptably  thirteen 
months  in  the  ministry.    We  mourn  his  loss,  and  his  field 

1  At  tbis  time  The  American  Board  had  not  commenced  their 
missionary  work  in  Japan,  so  this  money  was  devoted  to  the  erec- 
tion of  the  stone  church  edifice  in  Yokohama. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      277 

is  without  a  pastor.  The  churches  left  vacant  by  Rev. 
Samuel  Kauwealoha  and  Rev,  James  Kekela,  who  went 
to  Fatuhiwa,  were  each  supplied  by  young  licentiates 
from  Lahainaluna  Seminary,  who  have  acquitted  them- 
selves well.  On  the  twelfth  of  April  one  of  them,  Mr. 
A.  Kaukau,  was  ordained  and  installed  pastor  of  the 
church  at  Kaanapali. 

From  letter  hy  Titus  Coan,  Eilo,  September  20, 
185It: 

My  visit  to  Kohala  was  very  refreshing.  Brother  and 
Sister  Bond  have  toiled  patiently  and  nobly  there.  Iso- 
lated as  they  are  from  enlightened  society,  they  have  made 
themselves  contented  and  happy,  and  instead  of  indulging 
in  a  restless  and  complaining  spirit  or  in  roaming  after 
change  and  excitement,  they  have  addressed  themselves 
to  the  work  of  the  Lord  with  that  zeal  and  fidelity  which 
conquers  obstacles  and  secures  results.  For  five  years  that 
people  have  been  toiling  on  their  new  meeting  house,  the 
walls  are  up,  the  roof  is  on,  and  the  tower  is  erected. 
The  windows,  doors,  floor,  ceiling,  pulpit,  plastering, 
painting,  etc.,  remain  to  be  finished.  You  will  rejoice  to 
hear  that  this  government  gives  four  thousand  dollars  to 
replace  Brother  Lyman's  School  House  in  Hilo,  which  was 
burned  last  year.  If  your  Board  gives  one  thousand  dollars 
the  prospects  of  the  school  will  be  auspicious. 

From  letter  hy  B.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  September, 
185  J^: 

I  wrote  to  you  August  twenty-first  that  the  Trustees  of 
Oahu  College  had  given  a  call  to  E.  G.  Beckwith,  late 
Principal  of  the  Royal  School,  to  become  president  of  that 
Institution  and  that  he  had  the  subject  under  considera- 
tion. I  have  now  to  state  that  Mr.  Beckwith  has  accepted 
the  invitation  and  has  already  moved  into  the  Institution. 
He  will  commence  his  labors  next  week. 

December,  1854.    Our  late  King  Kamehameha  III  was 


278  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

greatly  and  justly  beloved  by  his  people  and  they,  as  is 
natural,  deeply  mourn  his  departure.  He  was  good  to  his 
people  and  to  foreigners,  especially  to  missionaries,  who 
ever  enjoyed  his  confidence  and  favor  and  received  many 
benefits  from  him.  When  he  came  to  the  throne  his 
people  were  mere  serfs,  without  property  and  without 
political  rights,  without  education  or  civilization.  He  has 
left  them  a  nation  of  freeholders,  nearly  all  possessing 
more  or  less  property  and  living  under  the  protection  of 
a  liberal  constitution  and  laws  they  themselves  have  sanc- 
tioned by  their  representatives.  In  fact,  from  an  absolute 
despotism  aggravated  by  all  the  evils  of  a  barbarous  state, 
Kamehameha  III  saw  his  people  raised  to  a  state  of  intel- 
ligence, order,  freedom  and  Christian  civilization  perhaps 
never  before  witnessed  in  the  same  number  of  years  among 
any  people.  Possessed  of  a  clear  and  vigorous  mind 
and  a  kind  heart,  he  was  quick  to  discern  and  ever  ready 
to  acquiesce  in  measures  for  the  good  of  his  people  and 
of  foreigners  in  his  dominion,  of  whom  he  never  seemed 
to  be  at  all  jealous. 

From  letter  by  E.  W,  Clark,  Horwlulu,  March  30, 
1855: 

I  have  received  a  letter  from  Mr,  McNeill,  one  of  the 
Secretaries  of  the  American  Bible  Society,  granting  our 
request  in  regard  to  the  printing  and  editing  of  the  New 
Testament  in  parallel  columns  of  English  and  Hawaiian, 
proposing  to  prepare  stereotype  plates  of  the  work,  that 
copies  may  be  printed  off  as  needed  instead  of  printing  an 
edition  of  ten  thousand  at  one  time.  This  is  a  good  sug- 
gestion, but  it  will  make  it  still  more  important  that  the 
Hawaiian  part  be  made  as  correct  as  possible. 

June  20.  Mr.  George  E.  Beckwith,  brother  of  the 
President,  has  been  invited  by  the  Trustees  to  become  a 
teacher  in  Oahu  College.  He,  as  well  as  his  brother,  has 
acquired  great  reputation  here  as  a  teacher,  especially 
as  a  teacher  of  the  languages. 


o 


u 


m 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      279 

June  22.  You  will  perhaps  hear  of  Dr.  Pierson's  em- 
barkation for  Micronesia  and  Mr.  Shipman's  decision  to 
remain  at  these  islands  before  this  reaches  you. 

My  mind  has  long  been  made  up  that  we  should  not 
attempt  a  mission  on  the  islands  of  Micronesia  without 
a  missionary  vessel  adapted  to  the  purpose.  If  we  put 
missionaries  on  any  of  those  low  islands,  provision  must 
be  made  for  visiting  them  once  or  twice  a  year  without 
fail.  I  should  think  it  unwise  to  send  even  native  mis- 
sionaries there  without  such  a  provision.  With  such  an 
arrangement  I  see  not  why  missionaries  may  not  reside 
on  some  of  those  islands  with  comparative  comfort.  It 
will  be,  however,  a  matter  of  experiment.  They  will  be 
lonely  and  will  need  a  large  share  of  natural  buoyancy  of 
spirits.  But  if  they  can  be  often  visited  and  furnit,hed 
with  regular  supplies  and  an  opportunity  of  visiting  other 
islands,  should  they  desire  it,  life  can  be  made  quite  toler- 
able, especially  if  their  work  should  prosper.  In  view 
of  this  subject  the  following  resolution  was  passed  at  a 
late  meeting  of  the  Directors  of  our  Society : 

"Resolved,  That  we  regard  it  essential  to  the  further 
extension  of  missionary  operations  in  the  North  Pacific 
that  a  Missionary  Vessel  be  procured  for  this  work.  We, 
therefore,  cordially  approve  the  request,  which  has  been 
forwarded  to  the  A.  B.  C.  P.  M.,  for  such  a  vessel,  by  the 
Hawaiian  Evangelical  Association,  and  recommend  that 
the  vessel  be  owned  by  the  American  Board  and  under  the 
direction  of  the  Home  Missionary  Society  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands." 

At  a  late  missionary  meeting  in  my  congregation  the 
subject  of  a  vessel  was  taken  up  and  about  one  thousand 
dollars  pledged  for  the  object.  Most  of  it  will  be  paid 
if  a  vessel  should  be  forthcoming.  Will  not  the  children 
of  America,  as  well  as  of  England,  take  hold  of  this  sub- 
ject? If  a  vessel  is  sent  we  shall  want  some  more  men 
for  Micronesia. 

October  1.  You  will  probably  hear  before  this  reaches 
you  of  the  death  of  our  Brother  Hitchcock.    His  stay  with 


280  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAH 

us  was  short  after  his  return  from  the  United  States. 
He  died  much  lamented  by  his  former  people. 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  January 
2, 1856: 

During  the  year  1855,  just  closed,  I  visited  all  the 
islands  and  every  missionary  station  in  the  course  of  my 
official  duty,  and  had  good  opportunities  for  seeing  how 
the  brethren  conducted  the  affairs  of  their  respective  sta- 
tions and  the  success  that  has  crowned  their  labors.  I 
found  them  all  at  their  posts,  hard  at  work  watching 
for  souls  and  promoting  the  welfare  of  the  people  in  vari- 
ous ways.  As  a  class  they  are  very  laborious  and  self- 
denying,  and  the  advancement  of  their  people  in  knowl- 
edge, industry,  civilization,  and  religion,  is  the  best 
evidence  of  their  success.  I  have  lived  for  weeks  and 
weeks  among  the  natives,  lodging  with  them  in  their  huts, 
partaking  of  their  homely  fare,  and  sleeping  on  their 
mats,  and  the  more  I  see  of  them  the  more  I  bless  God 
for  what  he  has  done  for  them.  I  do  not  believe  there 
is  a  community  on  earth,  of  the  same  number,  more 
entirely  pervaded  by  the  blessed  Gospel.  In  the  remotest 
corner  of  the  land  I  find  a  Bible  and  a  hymn  book  in 
every  house,  if  there  is  nothing  else.  I  visited  nearly 
every  school  in  the  land  during  the  year  and  feel  en- 
couraged on  the  whole  with  the  progress  of  education. 
It  was  never  more  encouraging  than  now.  "We  have  nine- 
teen English  schools  for  native  children,  exclusively,  in 
successful  operation. 

From  letter  hy  Titus  Coan,  Hilo,  February  1,  1856: 

A  volcanic  eruption  was  first  noticed  at  Hilo  on  the 
evening  of  the  eleventh  of  August,  1855,  and  from  that 
day  to  the  present  the  discharge  has  been  ceaseless  and 
mighty.  For  nearly  half  a  year  this  awful  engine  of  the 
Lord  has  been  pumping  out  the  molten  lava  and  still  the 
supply  seems  as  inexhaustible  as  ever. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      281 

From  letted  hy  Rev.  L.  Smith,  on  his  return  from 
a  visit  to  the  missionaries  in  the  Marquesas  Islands, 
May,  1856: 

I  found  the  missionaries  all  well  and  exceedingly  glad 
to  see  me.  Let  me  say  at  the  outset  that  I  have  been 
exceedingly  gratified  with  what  I  saw  on  my  visit.  The 
native  missionaries  appeared  admirably  well  in  all  their 
relations.  They  have  lived  and  labored  together  harmo- 
niously, consequently  the  Lord  has  blessed  them  and  is 
still  blessing  them  in  their  self-denying  labors.  I  assisted 
in  organizing  them  into  a  church  and  in  receiving  Abera- 
hama  Natua,  their  first  convert.  He  appears  well.  On 
my  return  I  touched  first  at  Hilo.  Brother  Coan  sent 
out  a  crier  and  announced  a  special  meeting  to  hear  the 
Nu  Hou  (news)  from  Fatuhiwa,  to  meet  at  three  o'clock 
P.  M.  And,  to  my  surprise,  that  large  building  was  well 
filled.  Several  foreigners  came  in  to  hear.  They  all  re- 
sponded, "good  news  and  glad  tidings." 

From  letter  hy  D.  Baldiuin,  September  29,  1856: 

One  of  the  most  efficient  helpers  we  have  had  in  the 
church  at  Lahaina  was  a  cripple  by  the  name  of  Kahilu- 
peau.  He  had  no  use  of  his  right  leg  and  but  a  partial 
use  of  his  left.  But,  with  one  shoe  on  his  left  foot  and 
the  other  on  his  right  hand,  which  he  used  as  a  foot, 
he  might  always  be  seen  at  the  hour  of  worship  on  the 
Sabbath,  or  on  a  week  day,  making  his  way  for  half  a 
mile  through  the  dusty  street,  to  the  house  of  God.  He 
was  greatly  attached  to  the  services  of  the  sanctuary  and 
profited  as  much  as  any  one  by  what  he  heard.  He  was 
modest  and  very  reserved,  but  might  well  be  called  an 
enlightened  Christian.  Having  learned  to  braid  palm 
leaf  hats,  such  as  are  much  used  by  sailors  on  board  the 
whaling  fleet,  he  kept  the  market  supplied  with  them 
during  the   shipping   seasons,   and   as   his   religion  had 


282  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

made  him  intelligent  and  enterprising,  he  traded  also  in 
other  articles  and  was  often  better  supplied  with  means 
than  many  others.  He  was  a  pattern  of  industry,  a 
straightforward  and  consistent  Christian.  We  love  to 
remember  his  instructive  example,  but  his  work  is  done, 
his  day  of  toil  is  over.  He  is  no  longer  called  to  drag 
about  a  disabled  body  through  the  dust  under  a  burning 
sun.  He  has  gone  to  his  rest,  which  will  be  all  the  more 
welcome  and  glorious  for  the  humble  and  painful  condi- 
tion which  he  occupied  on  earth. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  Clark,  Honolulu,  February  7, 
1857: 

Our  brethren  will  hail  with  joy  the  arrival  of  the  Morn- 
ing Star  and  will  enter  heartily  into  the  plan  of  extending 
their  operations  to  other  islands.  Mr.  Alexander  has  been 
installed  as  pastor  at  Wailuku,  We  are  glad  to  have  him 
back  in  the  missionary  work.  Mr.  Beckwith,  I  find,  has 
made  his  arrangements,  with  the  approval  of  the  Trustees, 
to  visit  the  ^  States.  You  will  be  happy  to  become  ac- 
quainted with  him.  He  has  lately  been  ordained,  and  we 
regard  him  as  a  good  preacher  as  well  as  a  good  president. 
You  will  find  him  warmly  enlisted  in  behalf  of  the  Col- 
lege, and  will  be  happy  to  afford  him  every  aid  in  your 
power  in  accomplishing  the  object  of  his  agency.  He 
regards  the  college  as  intimately  connected  with  the  mis- 
sionary operations  in  this  part  of  the  world,  and  will  be 
able  to  present  the  subject  in  a  way  to  interest  all  mis- 
sionary people  in  its  behalf.  They  want  more  help  as  well 
as  more  money. 

April  1.  We  shall  begin  to  look  for  the  Morning  Star 
soon.  There  has  been  considerable  waking  up  in  my 
church  and  congregation  since  my  return  from  my  visit 
to  the  States.  We  had  a  crowded  house  yesterday  at  our 
quarterly  communion.  There  is  also  quite  a  reviving  in 
the  foreign  congregations  here. 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      283 

From  letter  hy  D.  Baldwin,  Bristol,  Wisconsin, 
March  23, 1857: 

What  is  Mr.  Armstrong's  position?  He  has  been  re- 
moved from  the  Privy  Council  by  a  change  in  his  office, 
through  the  persuasion  of  enemies  who  would  make  the 
young  king  believe  that  his  government  would  be  more 
popular  with  the  Gospel  a  little  farther  off.  Mr.  Arm- 
strong is  now  president  of  the  Board  of  Education  and 
has  to  superintend  all  the  interests  of  the  schools  in  the 
islands,  all  supported  by  the  government.  He  must  attend 
to  the  sources  of  school  revenue,  to  the  supply  of  teachers, 
new  laws  needed,  etc.  Besides  all  this  he  is  always  at 
liberty  to  preach  on  the  Sabbath  and  does  half  the  preach- 
ing at  the  large  stone  church,  whose  services  could  not  be 
sustained  without  his  aid. 

From  letter  hy  R.  Armstrong,  Honolulu,  April  3, 
1857: 

The  Morning  Star  is  daily  expected.  The  interest  felt 
in  her  by  our  children  of  all  classes  and  colors  is  wonder- 
ful. In  my  Sabbath  School  of  native  children  about 
three  hundred  shares  have  been  taken. 

From  letter  by  E.  Bond,  Eohala,  May  Jf,  1857 : 

I  had  spent  the  day,  April  twenty-third,  in  my  berth 
on  a  schooner  with  a  bursting  headache,  induced  by  the 
fierce  heat.  It  was  just  about  four  P.  M.  when  our  cap- 
tain, who  is  a  missionary's  son,  a  brother  of  Dr.  Gulick 
of  Micronesia,  called  me  to  look  with  him  at  a  brig  very 
gradually  nearing  us,  which  he  expected  was  the  long 
looked  for  missionary  ship,  the  Morning  Star.  Feeling 
too  unwell  to  leave  the  berth,  I  inquired  her  appearance 
and,  receiving  his  reply,  there  could  be  no  doubt.  "It 
is  she !"  I  instantly  exclaimed,  "there  is  nothing  like  that 
in  these  waters!"  My  berth  lost  its  attraction  and  I 
found  myself  instantly  on  deck.     One  look  told  me  all. 


284  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

The  thing  of  life  and  beauty,  adorned  with  nearly  her 
full  complement  of  snow-white  sails  and  sitting  so  daintily 
upon  the  water,  could  be  no  other.  "Beautiful,"  we  ex- 
claimed. "iSTani,"  said  our  ninety  native  passengers, 
"nani  loa," — "very  beautiful!"  and  so  she  was.  With 
unmingled  admiration  we  scanned  her  elegant  proportions, 
her  neatly  turned  stem,  her  graceful  prow,  her  modest  but 
significant  figurehead,  her  perfect  lines,  her  tall  and  beau- 
tiful tapering  masts,  and  were  filled  with  delight,  when 
suddenly,  as  she  approached,  a  magnificent  flag  was 
thrown  to  the  gentle  breeze,  which  appeared  to  come  along 
with  her,  and  from  her  main  topmast  head  these  magic 
words,  "Morning  Star"  were  unfolded  to  our  excited 
gaze!  Assurance  was  made  doubly  sure  and  we  poured 
from  ninety  throats  three  as  hearty  cheers  of  welcome  as 
were  ever  uttered!  Captain  Moore  was  soon  alongside 
in  his  boat,  and  as  he  stepped  upon  our  deck  it  was  my 
privilege  to  extend  to  him  the  first  missionary  welcome 
to  Hawaii.  At  his  invitation  Captain  Gulick  and  I  ac- 
companied him  on  board  the  Morning  Star,  and  on  her 
quarterdeck  we  found  and  greeted  with  a  no  less  cordial 
welcome  to  Hawaii,  and  to  a  missionary  life  in  the  Pacific, 
our  Brother  Bingham  and  his  smiling  wife.  We  were 
gratified  with  a  cursory  view  of  the  vessel  and  then,  by 
Captain  Moore's  kindness,  restored  to  the  deck  of  our 
own  little  schooner.  The  latter  was  then  rounded  to  and, 
with  great  Aloha,  we  gave  our  new  friends  three  parting 
cheers,  which  they,  with  less  volume  of  lungs,  immedi- 
ately returned,  and  so  we  parted,  they  for  Honolulu  and 
we  for  our  homes  on  Hawaii  greatly  delighted  with  the 
unexpected  interview. 

From  letter  hy  E.  W.  ClarJc,  Honolulu,  May  5, 
1857: 

You  will  be  glad  to  hear  of  the  safe  arrival  of  the 
Morning  Star.  On  the  evening  of  April  twenty-third  we 
first  descried  her  flag  as  she  rounded  the  headland  of 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      285 

Diamond  Point.  The  next  morning  the  steamer  took  her 
in  tow  and  she  was  soon  alongside  of  the  wharf.  She 
had  hardly  reached  the  wharf  before  she  was  thronged 
with  people  eager  to  examine  the  moTcu  missionary  (mis- 
sionary ship).  ^'He  mohu  mailcai"  (a  fine  vessel),  was 
the  universal  exclamation.  All  were  delighted  with  the 
vessel.  Several  thousand  shares  had  been  taken  by  the 
children  here  and  in  other  parts  of  the  islands.  Prepara- 
tions had  been  made,  even  before  my  return  to  the  islands, 
to  present  the  vessel  with  a  flag  on  her  arrival.  This 
was  a  movement  of  some  of  the  good  ladies  of  Honolulu. 
This  ceremony  came  off  on  Wednesday  last.  The  children 
of  the  Sabbath  Schools  with  the  native  and  foreign  share- 
holders in  the  vessel,  assembled  at  their  respective 
churches,  and  marched  two  and  two  to  the  wharf.  The 
number  assembled,  children  and  adults,  could  not  be  less 
than  three  or  four  thousand;  a  novel  spectacle  for  Hono- 
lulu. Chiefs  and  people,  rich  and  poor  were  there.  The 
vessel  remained  in  port  just  one  week.  We  made  all 
dispatch  to  get  her  off  to  the  Marquesas,  as  we  wish  to 
have  her  on  her  way  to  Micronesia  as  soon  as  possible. 
Rev.  A.  Kaukau  and  wife  were  ready  to  embark  as  a 
reinforcement  to  the  Marquesas  Mission.  The  ceremonies 
connected  with  his  embarkation  were  attended  by  a  full 
house  in  the  stone  church  April  twenty-nine.  Mr.  Emer- 
son goes  in  the  vessel  as  a  delegate  from  our  Society  to 
the  Marquesas  Mission.  A  high  chief  by  the  name  of 
Namakeha  has  received,  also,  an  appointment  as  delegate 
from  our  Society  to  the  same  Mission.  ^  Mr.  Bingham 
will  remain  here  and  visit  his  native  land  until  the  return 
of  the  Morning  Star.  He  is  most  cordially  welcomed 
by  the  old  friends  of  his  honored  father. 

June  18,  1857.  The  unexampled  progress  of  the  mis- 
sionary work  at  the  Sandwich  Islands  is  a  fact  now  well 

2  Mr.  Asa  Thurston,  son  of  the  Pioneer  Missionary  of  Kailua, 
Hawaii,  went  as  first  mate  of  the  Morning  Star  on  this  her  first 
trip  to  the  Marquesas  Islands. 


286  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

known  and  generally  admitted.  But  the  work  is  not  com- 
pleted. The  Hawaiian  people  have  not  arrived  at  full 
manhood.  They  are  yet  in  their  teens.  They  are  just 
beginning  to  make  provision  for  their  own  wants.  And 
shall  they  be  left  to  struggle  on  to  maturity  without  the 
fostering  care  of  the  hand  which  has  so  long  sustained 
them?  If  so,  like  the  child  abandoned  just  as  the  pit- 
falls of  vice  and  temptation  begin  to  gather  round  him, 
they  will  stumble  and  fall  and  their  last  state  willl  be 
worse  than  the  first.  No,  they  must  not  be  abandoned 
until  they  arrive  at  mature  years.  The  American  churches 
must  still  lend  a  fostering  hand.  Foreign  pastors  must 
still  be  maintained  at  all  the  important  posts.  This  can- 
not be  done  without  foreign  help.  The  native  churches 
will  aid  in  supporting  their  pastors,  but  they  are  poor 
and  have  their  own  houses  of  worship  to  build  and  keep 
in  repair  and  many  other  calls  upon  their  charity.  They 
can  aid  only  in  part  in  supporting  their  foreign  pastors. 
We  have  spoken  above  only  in  relation  to  these  islands. 
A  wide  field  is  opening  in  Micronesia.  There  are  now 
in  that  field  five  American  missionaries  and  their  wives 
and  seven  Hawaiian  missionary  helpers,  male  and  female. 
One  more  American  missionary  and  his  companion  and 
from  four  to  eight  couples  from  these  islands  are  about 
to  embark  for  that  field.  These  must  all  be  supplied  with 
houses,  food  and  clothing,  and  the  various  means  for 
carrying  on  their  work.  This  will  require,  for  1858,  from 
seven  thousand  to  ten  thousand  dollars,  besides  the  ex- 
penses of  the  Morning  Star.  The  printing  press  is  be- 
ginning to  be  a  desideratum  in  that  field  and  the  brethren 
are  calling  for  this  important  auxiliary  in  their  work. 
This  will  require  men  and  money.  They  are  reducing  the 
language  to  writing  and  hope  ere  long  to  give  the  people 
books  in  their  own  tongue.  The  brethren  in  that  field 
are  calling,  also,  for  more  missionaries.  They  are  anxious 
to  break  forth  on  the  right  hand  and  the  left,  to  the 
numerous  islands  studding  that  ocean,  filled  with  im- 
mortal beings  bound  to  the  judgment,  but  now  in  the 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      287 

lowest  depths  of  heathenism.  To  meet  these  calls  a  much 
larger  appropriation  of  funds  will  be  needed  for  that 
mission.  In  the  absence  of  estimates  from  the  brethren 
of  the  field  we  cannot  go  into  particulars.  The  above 
is  a  brief  statement  of  facts  in  relation  to  the  wants  of 
this  field  and  of  Micronesia  for  1858.  If  our  resources 
are  cut  off,  even  in  part,  the  work  must  retrogade,  im- 
portant advantages  gained  will  be  lost  and  islands,  now 
waiting  for  the  law  of  the  Lord,  must  still  wait  until 
other  generations  go  down  to  death. 

In  behalf  of  the  Directors  of  the  Hawaiian  Missionary 
Society. 

E.  W.  Clark^  Committee. 

From  letter  by  E.  W.  Clark,  Honolulu,  July  20, 
1857: 

My  son-in-law,  0.  H,  Gulick,  has  consented  to  go  as 
second  mate  on  the  Morning  Star  to  Micronesia.  I  s^ip- 
pose  you  would  have  no  objection  to  the  vessel  being  com- 
manded and  manned  by  missionary  children,  if  they  are 
well  qualified  for  the  work  and  disposed  to  engage  in  it. 
Eev.  P.  J.  Gulick  goes  as  a  delegate  from  our  Society. 
We  send,  also,  a  native  printer  and  three  or  four  other 
native  helpers  with  their  wives. 

From  letter  of  Tiius  Coan,  July,  1857 : 

The  Morning  Star  arrived  at  Hilo  upon  her  return  from 
her  first  trip  to  the  Marquesas,  July  seventh,  anchoring 
in  Hilo  Bay  at  noon.  The  children  ran  and  shouted  and 
others  "caught  the  flying  joy."  The  joyful  event  was 
celebrated  by  a  grand  meeting  in  the  church,  the  for- 
eigners of  Hilo  joining  with  the  natives  in  the  celebra- 
tion. Mr.  J.  S.  Emerson,  the  delegate,  brought  a  cheer- 
ing report  of  the  beginning  of  the  missionary  work  by 
the  Hawaiian  missionaries  in  the  Marquesas  Islands. 

In  my  last  letter  I  mentioned  the  illness  of  Chief  Jus- 
tice Lee  and  his  baptism.    On  the  morning  of  the  twenty- 


288  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

seventh  of  May  he  departed  in  peace.  Dear,  precious 
man !  One  must  have  known  him  to  appreciate  his  worth. 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bingham  have  spent  a  month  in  our  family 
at  Hilo  and  we  have  become  greatly  attached  to  them. 
They  seem  to  have  the  true  missionary  spirit.  He  trav- 
elled with  me  on  a  tour  through  Puna,  and  addressed  the 
native  congregations  with  great  acceptance. 

From  letter  hy  Titus  Coan,  Hilo,  March  5,  1858: 

I  have  lately  returned  from  a  sixteen  days  tour  in 
Puna.  The  people  everywhere  came  out  in  masses  and 
the  season  was  most  interesting.  The  local  branches  of 
the  church  were  peaceful  and  active,  and  there  was  hardly 
a  case  of  discipline  to  be  attended  to  in  the  whole  district. 
Several  were  received  to  the  church  on  profession  and 
some  fallen  members,  who  had  long  remained  in  a  hard- 
ened state,  were  restored.  The  contributions  in  cash 
amounted  to  four  hundred  dollars.  This  was  noble  for 
a  poor  scattered  people  without  a  harbor,  a  vessel,  a 
market,  a  store,  or  a  white  resident,  living  upon  rocks  and 
earning  their  pennies  by  the  sweat  of  the  whole  body. 
This  people  have  also  made  nearly  a  hundred  miles  of 
the  best  road  on  the  island.  We  are  building  a  new  church 
edifice  in  Hilo.  The  building  is  up  and  being  enclosed. 
The  contractors  are  competent  and  faithful  and  the  house, 
when  completed,  will  be  a  substantial,  a  convenient,  and 
a  beautiful  one.  We  have  raised  more  than  seven  thou- 
sand dollars  in  cash  and  we  are  devoting  our  energies 
to  obtain  five  thousand  more.  The  native  women  are  de- 
termined to  raise  five  hundred  dollars  for  a  bell,  and  we 
think  they  will  do  it.  We  have  many  whole-souled 
Hawaiian  ladies  here.  No  special  disease  has  visited  our 
people  and  yet  two  hundred  and  twenty-seven  members 
of  this  church  have  gone  the  way  of  all  the  earth.  This 
list  is  greatly  swelled  by  the  sudden  and  mysterious  dis- 
appearance of  the  packet  Victoria,  bound  from  Honolulu 
to  Hilo.     That  mournful  event  coffined  fifty-eight  mem- 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      289 

bers  of  the  Hilo  church,  besides  many  children  and  others 
not  belonging  to  our  communion.  Though  the  disaster 
occurred  in  March,  1857,  yet  the  hope  lingered  long  that 
that  ill-fated  vessel  would  again  appear.  We,  therefore, 
delayed  our  report  of  members  lost  in  her  until  the  pain- 
ful reality  was  forced  upon  us.  While  the  sinking  of  that 
vessel  remained  uncertain  hope  and  fear  held  alternate 
sway  in  the  hearts  of  our  people.  A  dubious  waiting 
and  great  anxiety  prevailed  in  the  minds  of  hundreds. 
Time  rolled  heavily  on  bringing  no  relief.  No  voice  from 
the  deep,  no  floating  spar,  no  plank,  cask,  bucket,  or  chest, 
no  women  to  tell  the  tale  of  that  mysterious  exit.  At 
length  deferred  hope  died  in  our  hearts  and  the  requiem 
commenced  among  the  surviving  friends  of  the  lost.  The 
solemn  death  dirge  rolled  over  all  our  field,  for  there  was 
hardly  a  hamlet  in  all  Hilo  and  Puna  which  had  not 
furnished  its  victim  to  this  human  hecatomb. 

Four  large  sugar  plantations  are  in  progress  in  the  dis- 
trict of  Hilo.  The  call  for  many  laborers  has  greatly 
increased  the  population  of  the  district.  Besides  sugar, 
of  which  Hilo  will  probably  soon  furnish  annually  from 
five  hundred  to  one  thousand  tons,  our  district  ships 
coastwise  considerable  quantities  of  onions,  lumber,  hides, 
goatskins,  calves,  hogs,  etc.  Pulu,  or  fern  down,  is  also 
an  important  and  staple  article  of  export.  This  soft, 
yellow,  silken  down,  gathered  from  the  exhaustless  fern 
fields  of  Hilo  and  Puna,  is  much  used  in  California  for 
upholstery  as  a  substitute  for  feathers,  wool  and  hair. 
More  than  two  hundred  thousand  pounds  of  this  article 
has  been  shipped  from  Hilo  during  the  past  year.  Men, 
women,  and  children  engage  in  collecting  it,  and  many 
of  our  usual  villages  are  deserted  for  months  at  a  time 
while  the  people  are  collecting  pulu  in  the  Jungle.  You 
are  aware  that  my  parish  stretches  more  than  one  hundred 
miles  along  the  eastern  and  southeastern  shores  of  Hawaii. 
To  the  south  my  flock  is  scattered  over  eighty  miles  of 
lava  fields  sprinkled  here  and  there  with  soil  and  verdure, 
but  without  a  single  stream  of  running  water.    For  thirty 


290  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

miles  to  the  northward  from  Hilo  a  most  enchanting 
landscape  meets  the  eye.  Valleys,  hills,  and  plains  are 
clothed  in  living  green,  the  whole  broken  by  numerous 
ravines  and  chiming  with  the  voice  of  many  waters.  Over 
all  this  field  I  have  passed  three  times  during  the  year, 
making  six  long  tours  in  all.  My  last  tour  in  Puna  is 
memorable  from  the  fact  that  for  the  first  time  I  was 
able  to  ride  on  horseback  the  whole  distance  of  one  hun- 
dred and  thirty  miles,  a  good  road  having  been  just  com- 
pleted over  a  wide  lava  field  of  fifteen  miles  and  up  a 
precipice  of  two  thousand  "feet  and  an  angle  of  some 
thirty  degrees.  The  contrast  between  the  present  and 
the  former  comfort  and  safety  of  travelling  in  Puna  and 
Hilo  is  great  and  encouraging. 

In  a  recent  tour  through  the  more  remote  villages  of 
Hilo,  over  seven  hundred  dollars  were  contributed,  and 
all  this  with  a  zeal  and  cheerfulness  which  I  have  never 
seen  equaled  in  any  other  people.  In  one  small  congre- 
gation, at  an  outstation,  two  hundred  and  sixty-six  dol- 
lars were  thrown  joyfully  into  the  Lord's  treasury  in  one 
day.  Surely  we  are  encouraged  by  this  fruit  of  the 
Gospel.  A  convention  of  females  met  at  Hilo  on  the 
twenty-first  of  February  to  contribute  money  for  a  bell  for 
our  new  church  building.  A  large  company  assembled 
on  the  occasion,  the  meeting  was  opened  with  prayer  and 
brief  remarks,  when  the  contributions  were  brought  for- 
ward. The  dollars  rattled  like  hail  until  we  numbered 
eight  hundred  and  fifty-two.  We  had  fixed  on  five  hun- 
dred dollars  as  the  sum  to  be  raised  for  a  bell  and  all 
were  surprised  at  the  amount  paid  in. 

From  general  letter  of  the  Mission,  Honolulu,  June 
J^,  185S: 

Three  of  our  beloved  sisters  have  been  called  away  by 
death. 

Mrs.  Elizabeth  Rogers,  widow  of  Edmund  H.  Eogers, 
died  August  2,  1857.    She  had  been  an  invalid  for  many 


JOUENALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      291 

years  and  unable,  perhaps  most  of  the  time,  to  extend 
her  labors  beyond  the  demands  of  her  own  family.  The 
whole  tenor  of  her  life  gave  abundant  evidence  that  her 
name  was  written  in  the  Lamb's  book  of  life. 

Mrs.  Mary  E.  Clark,  wife  of  Eev.  E.  W.  Clark,  died 
August  8,  1857.  She  was  a  devoted  and  faithful  wife 
and  mother,  and  her  death  was  an  irreparable  loss  to  the 
bereaved  family.  None  could  doubt  her  love  to  the  people 
of  these  Islands,  nor  her  devotion  to  the  missionary  work. 
She  loved  to  meet  with  the  women  and  children  of  Hawaii, 
and  point  them  to  the  Saviour,  while  strength  and  voice 
remained  to  her. 

Mrs.  Pitman,  who  came  to  these  Islands  as  the  wife  of 
Eev.  Mr.  Kinney,  died  on  the  sixth  of  March,  1858.  Being 
left  a  widow  with  two  small  children,  she  was  placed  at 
Punahou,  three  years  since,  in  charge  of  the  Primary 
Department  of  the  Institution,  and  was  highly  valued  as 
a  teacher.  A  year  and  a  half  later  she  was  married  to 
Mr.  Pitman,  a  merchant  of  Hilo.  For  her  to  die  was 
gain;  but  it  left  a  blank  which  no  stranger  could  fill. 

From  letter  by  E.  TF.  Clark,  Honolulu,  June  1, 
1858: 

Ten  years  ago  our  large  stone  church  was  without  a 
steeple  or  tower  clock.  It  is  now  furnished  with  both. 
It  had  then  but  few  permanent  seats.  It  is  now  well 
seated.  Our  large  stone  church  grounds  were  then  in  a 
wretched  condition.  They  are  now  enclosed  with  a  sub- 
stantial wall  of  stone  and  mortar  and  leveled  off  and 
planted  with  trees.  We  had  then  at  our  outposts,  seven 
in  number,  only  thatched  houses  of  worship,  without  floors 
or  seats.  These  outstations  are  now  all  furnished  with 
good  frame  or  stone  houses,  with  shingle  roofs,  and  five 
of  these  houses  are  furnished  with  floors,  seats,  and  pul- 
pits, and  four  of  them  with  small  church  bells.  All  this 
by  their  own  money.  When  we  consider  that  similar  if 
not  equal  progress  has  been  made  in  other  parts  of  the 
islands  we  have  reason  to  thank  God  and  take  courage. 


292  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

This  advance  in  externals  indicates  that  the  Gospel  has 
taken  strong  hold  of  the  people. 

From  letter  by  D.  Baldwin,  Lahaina,  July  2,  1858: 

We  reached  Lahaina,  on  return  from  a  visit  to  the 
States,  January  thirteenth  of  this  year.  The  people  of 
Lahaina  were  delighted  to  see  us  back  and  manifested 
their  joy  for  several  weeks  by  bringing  every  day  not  only 
presents  of  food,  but  also  little  presents  of  money,  and 
by  relating  to  us  all  that  had  happened  to  them  during 
our  absence.  On  the  twentieth  of  February  a  terrible 
whirlwind  from  the  sea  passed  through  Lahaina.  Our 
church  stood  exactly  in  its  track.  It  took  the  whole  of 
the  steeeple  and  half  of  the  roof  at  the  opposite  end  of 
the  church,  and  made  of  them  one  common  pile  of  ruin 
on  the  east  side  of  the  building,  scattering  shingles  and 
fragments  of  the  boards  all  the  way  for  a  mile.  This  un- 
expected event  threw  sadness  over  our  whole  congrega- 
tion, for  they  had  just  finished  rebuilding  the  church  at 
an  expense  of  seven  or  eight  thousand  dollars,  besides 
all  the  labor  of  the  people  for  about  eight  years.  The 
toil  and  expense  seemed  laid  out  in  vain.  It  seemed  as 
if  the  Lord  frowned  on  His  own  cause.  But  this  sadness 
was  but  momentary  when  I  saw  that  the  spirit  of  our 
good  people  rose  equal  to  the  occasion.  They  resolved 
to  raise,  as  quick  as  the  Lord  would  enable  them  to  do 
it,  three  thousand  dollars,  which  would  rebuild  the  edi- 
fice. But  though  our  house  of  worship  is  in  ruins,  the 
Lord's  cause  is  not  in  ruins.  We  found  that  our  praying 
people  had  not  ceased  to  pray  and  we  found  evident  tokens 
of  the  presence  of  God's  Spirit  among  them.  It  would 
seem  that  at  the  same  time  that  the  great  work  began 
which  is  spreading  over  the  country  and  to  other  lands, 
God  began  to  pour  out  His  spirit  on  this  village  in  drops 
of  mercy  only  at  iirst. 

The  first  evidence  we  saw  of  it  was  in  a  young  man  of 
thirty  or  more,  named  Obed  Kuakini,  the  only  son  of 
our  governor.     He  had  spent  his  youtli  in  dissipation, 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      293 

was  in  all  kinds  of  iniquity  for  nearly  all  the  time  we 
were  absent  and,  taken  altogether,  seemed  as  hopeless  a 
case  as  could  be  found  in  the  place.  But  in  December, 
1857,  he  was  awakened  and  converted  and  abandoned  all 
his  evil  habits.  From  being  one  of  the  most  deceptive, 
he  began  at  once  to  deal  only  in  truth,  and  he  seemed 
to  have  no  faculty  at  concealing  his  own  sins  or  those 
of  his  associates.  He  went  to  all  the  meetings  in  the 
village,  confessing  more  transgressions  than  any  one  had 
suspected  of  him,  warning  the  old  and  the  young,  but, 
especially,  his  associates  in  sin.  To  me  he  appeared  like 
an  old  experienced  Christian.  God  was  rapidly  prepar- 
ing him  for  a  higher  sphere.  On  the  twentieth  of  March, 
just  two  and  a  half  months  from  his  conversion,  he  died 
suddenly,  supposed  to  be  from  apoplexy.  He  is  gone, 
but  those  short  months  of  his  faithfulness  have  left  a 
deep  impression  on  our  village  and  especially  on  those 
deep  in  sin.  There  were  some  other  cases  of  evident 
conversion  and,  I  think,  the  feeling  in  the  church  and 
among  the  impenitent  has  gone  on  increasing  to  the 
present  time.  There  is  something  wonderful  in  the  way 
God  is  moving  among  us.  We  have  seen  nothing  like  it 
in  this  part  of  the  world.  The  greatest  transgressors  are 
the  ones  who  seem  most  affected  and  are  the  first  to  come 
and  declare  their  purpose  of  serving  God.  Two  weeks 
ago  I  spent  the  Sabbath  at  Oluwalu,  a  village  seven  miles 
south  of  here.  The  awakening  there  seemed  even  more 
universal  than  in  Lahaina.  I  gave  opportunity  for  any 
to  speak  who  wished  the  prayers  of  the  church.  Old  and 
young  were  rising  on  all  sides,  the  most  hardened  sinners 
were  the  foremost  to  speak.  They  gave  us,  unvarnished, 
the  black  history  of  their  lives.  In  Lahaina  nearly  all 
our  oldest  and  most  hardened  backsliders  from  the  church 
have  come  of  their  own  accord  into  our  meetings  and  as 
soon  as  any  liberty  is  given  they  are  on  their  feet,  talk- 
ing out  what  they  have  labored  all  their  lives  to  conceal, 
asking  the  prayers  of  Christians,  and  they  sometimes 
break  out  and  pray  for  themselves.    It  is  just  the  same 


294  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

with  the  greatest  sinners  out  of  the  church,  they  seem 
to  be  pressing  for  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven,  and  our 
prayer  is  that  they  may  not  stop  short  of  it. 

Last  evening,  from  four  to  seven,  I  was  in  as  large  a 
prayer  meeting  as  I  ever  attended  in  Lahaina.  I  called 
on  the  women  who  wished  to  be  prayed  for  to  let  it  be 
known.  Eight  or  ten  spoke,  some  of  them  notoriously 
abandoned  in  time  past,  but  the  press  of  men,  especially 
youths,  who  wished  to  make  known  their  feelings  was 
so  great  that  they  took  the  work  out  of  the  women's 
hands.  I  could  not  check  them,  for  they  were  our  most 
flagrant  sinners.  We  stayed  till  dark,  but  not  one-tenth 
could  speak  who  wished.  I  cannot  follow  this  history 
any  further  for  want  of  time.  I  will  only  say,  that  such 
a  state  of  things  is  so  new  among  us  that  we  cannot 
calculate  results  only  as  time  develops  them.  How  far 
there  may  be  like  tokens  of  God's  presence  in  other  parts 
of  the  islands,  we  have  not  had  time  to  hear.  We  hope 
God  is  now  on  His  way  to  show  the  riches  of  His  grace  in 
all  nations.  May  Christians  in  America  not  cease  to  pray 
for  the  Islands  of  the  Pacific  at  this  time. 

From  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander  Wailuku,  October 
25,  1858: 

A  few  weeks  ago  I  accompanied  our  young  Brother 
A.  0.  Forbes  to  Molokai  to  introduce  him  to  the  people 
of  his  charge.  They  received  him  with  a  good  deal  of 
enthusiasm.  He  has  already  a  pretty  good  command  of 
the  Hawaiian  tongue.  He  made  an  address  of  ten  min- 
utes on  the  Sal)bath  to  the  great  congregation  that  was 
perfectly  intelligible,  and  the  low  enthusiastic  murmur 
of  gratulation  that  rolled  over  the  assembly  was  very  in- 
teresting. 

All  hearts  throughout  the  Islands  throbbed  with  one 
great  emotion  at  the  news  of  the  Atlantic  Telegraph. 
Even  the  natives  join  in  the  enthusiasm  when  they  hear 
that  the  wild  lightning  of  the  skies  has  been  caught  and 
turned  and  pressed  into  the  service  of  men  as  a  swift 


JOURNALS  AND  LETTERS,  1853-1859      295 

bearer  of  dispatches.  This  event  was  celehrated  by  a 
magnificent  comet  that  has  been  blazing  in  out  western 
horizon  after  sunset  during  the  past  month,  moving  from 
north  to  south. 

From  letter  by  Titus  Coan,  Hilo,  M-ay  16,  1859: 

The  new  church  edifice  at  Hilo  is  completed.  The  cost 
of  the  house  and  appurtenances  has  been  nearly  thirteen 
thousand  dollars  in  cash,  besides  a  great  amount  of  gra- 
tuitous labor  on  the  part  of  the  natives  in  collecting 
stones,  lime,  fuel,  and  other  materials,  in  carrying  lum- 
ber, in  digging,  leveling,  grading,  etc.,  and  in  assisting 
the  workmen  in  a  great  variety  of  ways.  Of  the  value 
of  this  labor  it  would  be  impossible  tP  make  an  estimate. 
Several  ship  masters  and  their  ladies  have  also  assisted 
in  contributing  to  a  special  fund  for  the  pulpit.  Among 
our  distinguished  patrons  we  received  a  donation  from  the 
King  and  the  Queen  and  their  suite  on  their  last  visit 
to  Hilo.  Many  of  the  natives  have  done  nobly  in  tliis 
work.  Some  have  given  three  hundred  dollars,  some  two 
hundred,  and  others  one  hundred  dollars,  fifty  dollars, 
thirty  dollars,  twenty  dollars,  etc.,  besides  special  offerings 
at  festivals  and  at  dedication.  Not  a  few  have  exhibited 
a  most  praiseworthy  liberality  in  the  enterprise. 

From  letter  by  S.  C.  Damouj  Honolulu,  July  SO, 
1859: 

I  have  taken  my  pen  to  express  a  thought  about  the 
Morning  Star,  in  the  affair  of  salvage.  It  has  been  so 
ordered  that  she  has  rendered  important  service  to  com- 
merce in  the  affair  of  the  whaleship  Twilight,  wrecked 
on  the  Marquesas.  Three  of  our  principal  merchants 
have  awarded  the  Morning  Star  thirty  per  cent.  Some 
think  this  not  enough.  Such  I  believe  is  Captain  Hath- 
away's  opinion,  who  commanded  the  Twilight.  If  the 
Board  should  frankly  say  to  the  owners  and  insurers  of 
the  Twilight:  "We  leave  the  matter  of  salvage  entirely 
to  your  generosity,"  it  is  my  impression  that  the  Board 


296  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

would  eventually  get  more  than  thirty  per  cent.  To  take 
money  for  doing  an  act  of  humanity  has  the  appearance  of 
selfishness.  It  has  proved  a  most  noble  deed  on  the  part 
of  Brother  Bicknell,  Captain  Brown,  and  the  Morning 
Star.  It  is  my  candid  impression  that  if  it  had  not  been 
for  Brother  Bicknell  all  the  crew  would  have  been  robbed, 
if  not  murdered  and  eaten.  So  thinks  Captain  Hathaway 
and  the  officers.  Brother  Bicknell  has  acquired  an  almost 
fabulous  influence  among  the  wild  and  savage  cannibals 
of  Marquesas.  He  is  one  of  the  most  humble  and  modest 
men  I  ever  knew. 

Frojn  letter  hy  W.  P.  Alexander,  Boston^  Massachu- 
setts, August  15,  1859: 

The  ordaining  of  native  pastors  has  not  been  a  failure. 
Far  otherwise,  I  consider  it  the  clearest  proof  of  our  suc^ 
cess  as  a  Mission.  No  part  of  our  field  has  exhibited 
more  substantial  prosperity  than  was  exhibited  in  Keokea 
during  the  period  that  David  Malo  lived  to  be  their  pastor, 
or  Kaanapali  while  Kauwealoha  and  his  successor  Kaukau 
were  successive  pastors  there ;  both  of  whom  are  now  noble 
and  worthy  missionaries  in  the  Marquesas  Islands.  There, 
too,  is  Kekela,  a  burning  and  shining  light,  taken  from 
the  church  at  Kahuku,  on  the  Island  of  Oahu,  over  which 
he  had  been  ordained  pastor.  I  might  also  mention 
Mahoe,  taken  from  the  church  of  Ewa,  of  which  Brother 
Bishop  was  paetor,  to  aid  H.  Bingham  in  the  Kingsmill 
Group,  now  called  the  Gilbert  Islands.  There  are  others 
holding  up  the  light  in  the  foreign  field  whom  I  might 
mention.  And  is  not  the  fact  that  they  have  been  found 
worthy  to  go  forth  as  messengers  of  the  churches  to  the 
heathen  proof  that  we  have  not  failed  in  our  efforts  to  raise 
up  a  native  ministry? 


PART  III 
RESULTS 


CHAPTER  XXIV  ^ 
RETROSPECT 

FORTY  years  had  passed  since  the  first  company 
of  missionaries  landed  (from  the  brig  Thad- 
deus)  on  the  heathen,  though  hospitable  shores 
of  the  Sandwich  Islands.  What  had  been  done?  We 
quote  from  an  address  delivered  in  1857  by  Hiram 
Bingham  II,  then  passing  through  Honolulu  for  the 
first  time  since  childhood,  being  on  his  way  to  establish 
another  mission  in  Micronesia.    He  said : 

It  is  scarce  two  generations  since  the  first  European 
vessel  dropped  its  anchor  among  the  snow-white  corals 
of  the  Hawaiian  Islands.  These  fair  gardens  of  the 
Pacific  were  then  inliabited  by  thousands  of  degraded 
barbarians,  who  were  subjected  to  the  most  revolting 
cruelties.  Their  government,  if  such  it  might  be  called, 
was  the  most  oppressive  tyranny;  their  religion,  worse 
than  none  at  all;  their  language  unwritten.  Although 
while  the  missionaries  were  on  their  voyage  thither,  a 
few  islanders,  including  the  king,  had  given  up  their  idols, 

1  We  are  greatly  indebted  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Eobert  Andrews  of 
Honolulu,  for  their  valuable  assistance  in  the  composition  of  this 
portion  of  the  book. 

297 


298  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

discarded  their  tabus,  priests  and  public  sacrifices,  thou- 
sands still  clung  to  their  gods.  The  horrors  of  civil  war 
then  laid  waste  these  Islands.  Passion,  intemperance, 
infanticide,  crime  of  every  form  knew  no  bounds.  To 
such  a  people  did  the  brig  Thaddeus  first  bring  the  offer 
of  Christian  civilization.  The  method  of  its  introduction 
marks  the  first  period  in  their  progress.  Their  language 
was  speedily  reduced  to  writing,  their  prejudices  were 
sagaciously  and  successfully  removed,  and  schools  estab- 
lished. The  printing  press  scattered  its  healing  leaves 
into  every  village,  by  every  stream  and  through  every 
valley.  Their  progress  soon  advanced  another  step.  Not 
only  individual  plebeians,  but  proud  and  cruel  chiefs 
yielded  to  the  power  of  the  Gospel,  encouraged  their 
people  to  substitute  for  their  heathen  temples  the  churches 
of  the  living  God,  and  for  their  Christian  rites  and  amuse- 
ments the  arts  of  civilized  life.  The  masses  listened;  and 
so  imperative  were  their  demands  for  Christian  teachers 
that  the  benevolence  of  the  American  people,  prompt  and 
commendable  as  it  was,  for  years  was  unable  to  furnish 
the  needed  supply.  Their  third  period  presents  itself  in 
their  speedy  growth  in  civilization.  Eapidly  did  they 
adopt  civilized  institutions — the  Christian  marriage,  the 
observance  of  the  Sabbath,  the  establishment  of  written 
law  based  on  inspired  legislation.  Scarce  fifteen  years 
had  passed  after  the  introduction  of  Christianity,  ere 
thousands  of  pagans  were  converted,  and  tens  of  thou- 
sands more  had  received  the  advantages  of  a  common 
school  education.  Thus  were  the  people  prepared  for  the 
fourth  great  step  in  their  progress:  for  appreciating, 
adopting,  enjoying  and  perpetuating  a  government,  the 
form  and  desirableness  of  which  are  equaled  only  by  those 
of  England  and  America. 

A   year  later,  in  view  of  this  great  advancement. 
General  ,S.  C.  Armstrong  said-' 

The  most  interesting  feature  of  the  times  is,  perhaps, 
the  wonderfull  spread  of  truth.     Around  us  we  have  wit- 


RETROSPECT  299 

nessed  its  signal  triumphs,  and  beyond  us  the  lowest  of 
our  race  are  welcoming  the  glad  tidings  which  it  brings. 
This  progress  is  principally  influenced  by  two  agencies, 
commercial  intercourse,  and  the  missionary  cause.  The 
spirit  of  enterprise  and  the  spirit  of  philanthropy. 

In  1857,  Prof.  W.  D.  Alexander,  in  an  article  on 
"Science  and  Missions,"  remarks: 

Christianity  civilizes  in  the  broadest  sense.  Commerce, 
industry,  science  and  literature  all  accompany  her  ma- 
jestic march  to  universal  dominion.  Thus,  while  it  denies 
the  sufficiency  of  commerce  alone  to  transform  the  savage, 
it  encourages  a  legitimate  commerce  and  even  courts  its 
alliance  as  one  of  its  most  important  instrumentalities. 

Chief  Justice  A.  F.  Judd  in  the  year  1860  made 
this  undisputed  statement: 

The  Hawaiians  are  generally  considered  a  Christian- 
ized people.  They  furnish  to  the  world  the  most  complete 
illustration  of  successful  missionary  enterprise.  We  have 
among  us  many  living  witnesses  of  the  manner  in  which 
the  dark,  iron  age  of  paganism  was  succeeded  by  the 
bright  golden  age,  when  the  glorious  beams  of  the  gospel 
burst  upon  them,  revealing  to  them  the  darkness  and  de- 
pravity which  forty  years  of  commerce  had  failed  to 
dispel. 

Rev.  A.  0.  Forbes,  three  years  later,  said: 
Were  it  not  for  the  light  of  the  blessed  Bible  shining 
upon  these  shores,  merchants,  mechanics,  planters,  farm- 
ers, tradesmen,  lawyers,  physicians,  judges,  artizans  and 
citizens  of  foreign  lands  would  not  this  evening  be  scat- 
tered throughout  these  islands  in  the  peaceful  pursuit 
of  their  various  avocations.  It  is  the  wondrous  influences 
accompanying  the  story  of  the  cross  which  has  here  dis- 
pelled the  darloiess  of  heathenism  and  transformed  a 
pagan  nation  into  a  Christian  community.  The  Lord 
of  the  vineyard  planted  a  goodly  vine  in  these  isles  of  the 
sea. 


CHAPTEE  XXV 
LATER  HISTORY 

THE  "Pilgrims  of  Hawaii"  were  moved  by  one 
propelling,  all-absorbing  purpose,  the  conver- 
sion of  the  heathen,  and  to  this  they  steadfastly 
adhered.  This  object,  in  1860,  had  to  a  degree  been 
attained.  This  nation,  as  a  nation,  had  been  meas- 
urably Christianized,  and  had  its  place  side  by  side 
with  other  countries  as  a  civilized  land. 

The  American  Board  felt  that  they  could  no  longer 
send  out  new  missionaries,  but  how  to  bring  the  mis- 
sion to  a  close  was  a  serious  problem.  It  was  a  unique 
problem  in  the  history  of  missions,  and  to  help  wind 
up  the  work  of  the  A.  B.  C.  E.  M.,  their  secretary, 
Dr.  Rufus  Anderson,  was  sent  to  the  "Sandwich  Isl- 
ands," arriving  at  Honolulu  February  22,  1863.  He 
assisted  the  Hawaiian  Evangelical  Association  in  ad- 
justing the  many  delicate  relations  between  foreign  and 
native  pastors,  and  in  dividing  up  congregations  in 
such  a  way  as  to  gradually  throw  responsibility  upon 
native  churches  and  make  the  people  efficient  in  self 
government. 

This  change  gave  the  native  pastors  authority  and 
responsibility  without  the  experience  and  strength  of 
character  that  comes  from  generations  of  civilization. 
So  long  as  they  had  the  old  gray-headed  Fathers — 
their  beloved  teachers — to  lean  upon,  they  did  faithful 

300 


LATER  HISTORY  301 

and  efficient  work.  But  one  by  one  these  Fathers 
finished  their  pilgrimage  and  went  to  their  reward, 
leaving  these  untried  Christian  leaders  to  face  such  a 
multiplicity  of  trials  as  only  those  strong  in  the  faith, 
and  leaning  on  the  Everlasting  Arm,  could  endure.  It 
is  oiir  privilege  to  follow  them  down  the  years. 

After  four  or  five  years  of  experience  in  the  working 
of  the  new  system  a  member  of  the  Association  wrote: 
"Our  attention  was  drawn  mainly  to  the  fifty  or  sixty 
Hawaiian  members,  ministers  and  delegates  of  the 
churches,  who  constitute  the  bulk  of  the  Assembly. 
They  are  an  earnest  and  wide-awake  body  of  men. 
.  .  .  The  Hawaiian  ministers  are  constant  and  intel- 
ligent readers  of  the  weekly  and  monthly  papers  pub- 
lished in  their  language.  They  are  leaders  in  every 
educational  movement  and  have  been  the  main  agents 
in  the  establishment  of  perhaps  twenty  independent 
schools  in  various  parishes.  They  are  the  conservative 
element — the  guides  of  the  people." 

A  year  later,  one  of  the  older  missionaries  who  had 
been  rather  skeptical  concerning  the  success  of  the 
native  ministry,  wrote:  "Our  meetings  of  the  Asso- 
ciation have  been  full  and  earnest.  For  the  first  time 
we  elected  a  Hawaiian  moderator.  We  wish  to  induct 
our  native  pastors  into  all  the  duties  to  which  they 
may  be  hereafter  called." 

In  1867,  Rev.  Franklin  Rising,  an  Episcopalian 
clergyman  and  a  member  of  the  American  Church  Mis- 
sionary Society,  who  spent  some  months  on  the  Islands 
for  the  benefit  of  his  health,  reported :  "I  visited  nearly 
every  mission  station  on  the  whole  group,  with  the 
religious,    educational    and    social    institutions.      The 


302  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAH 

deeper  I  pushed  my  investigations  the  stronger  became 
my  conviction  that  what  had  been  on  the  part  of  Amer- 
ican Christians  necessarily  an  experiment  work  in  mis- 
sions had,  under  God,  proved  an  eminent  success." 
"Every  sun  setting  gave  me  fresh  cause  to  bless  the 
Lord  for  that  infinite  love  which  enables  us  to  bring 
our  fellow  men  such  rich  blessings  as  your  missionaries 
have  bestowed  upon  the  Hawaiian  race."  "To  me  it 
seems  marvellous  that  in  so  comparatively  few  years, 
the  social,  political,  and  religious  life  of  the  nation 
should  have  undergone  so  radical  and  blessed  a  change 
as  it  has." 

The  Jubilee,  held  in  June  of  1870,  was  a  grand  cele- 
bration of  the  Fiftieth  Anniversary  of  the  arrival  of 
the  mission.  Dr.  N.  G.  Clark,  foreign  secretary  of 
the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  was  here  to  honor  the  occasion. 
The  King  proclaimed  Jime  15th  a  holiday  and  was 
present  in  person  with  his  cabinet. 

Exercises  began  on  Sabbath  morning,  June  12,  when 
the  congregations  of  the  two  native  churches  united  in 
the  great  stone  church  at  Kawaiahao,  where  Rev.  Mr. 
Kuaea  preached  a  fine  jubilee  sermon,  an  hour  in 
length,  from  the  text :  "A  jubilee  shall  the  fiftieth  year 
be  to  you."  Every  seat  was  filled  and  the  aisles 
crowded,  2500  being  seated.  A  voluntary  was  played 
on  the  great  organ  by  Mrs.  Gov.  Dominis,  afterward 
"Queen  Liliuokalani,"  and  a  short  prayer  offered  by 
Rev.  B.  W.  Parker,  father  of  H.  H.  Parker,  who  has 
been  pastor  for  fifty-three  years  in  that  same  church. 

In  the  evening  Rev.  Dr.  Damon  preached  in  the  Fort 
Street  Church  from  the  same  text  to  an  English-speak- 
ing audience. 


LATER  HISTORY  303 

On  Monday  and  Tuesday  evenings  Fort  Street 
Church  was  filled  to  hear  the  reminiscences  of  Mother 
Thurston  and  Mother  Whitney,  the  surviving  members 
of  the  first  company,  and  Rev.  A.  Bishop  of  the  second 
company.  Mother  Thurston  stood  on  the  pulpit  steps 
and  made  a  powerful  address.  She  was,  doubtless,  the 
first  woman  who  ever  addressed  a  mixed  audience  in 
Hawaii. 

Wednesday,  June  15,  was  the  Jubilee.  A  procession 
of  native  soldiers,  two  companies  of  infantry  and  one 
of  artillery,  honored  the  day.  The  Legislature  ad- 
journed and  the  members  in  carriages  joined  the  older 
missionaries  in  the  procession.  The  younger  ministers, 
native  preachers  and  delegates,  the  faculty  of  Oahu 
College,  the  Alumi  of  Lahainaluna  Seminary  and  the 
Mission  Children's  Society,  with  800  or  more  children 
from  the  Sunday  Schools,  formed  in  procession  and  all 
marched  to  Kawaiahao  Church.  The  decorations  were 
beautiful.  The  inscription  in  evergreen,  "1820-Jubilee- 
1870,"  was  in  front  of  the  gallery,  and  beneath,  the 
nation's  motto:  "Ua  mau  ka  ea  o  ka  aina  i  ka  pono." 
(The  life  of  the  land  is  established  in  righteousness.) 
King  Kamehameha  V  entered  with  Queen  Dowager 
Emma,  his  cabinet,  and  diplomatic  representatives  of 
foreign  nations,  and  was  received  by  all  the  people 
standing,  who  sang  "God  Save  the  King."  They  were 
then  seated  on  the  right,  while  on  the  left  sat  the  mis- 
sionaries, and  a  great  mass  of  3000  or  more  natives 
filled  the  church.  Prayer  was  offered  by  Eev.  Lowell 
Smith.  Addresses  were  delivered  in  English  by  Dr. 
N".  G.  Clark,  of  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  Hon.  C.  C.  Harris, 
and  Hon.   H.   A.   Pierce,   and  in  native  by  Rev.   A. 


304  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAH 

Bishop,  eldest  living  missionary,  by  D.  Kalakaua 
(afterward  king),  by  Hon.  Aholo  of  the  Legislature, 
and  by  Rev.  Kaiiwealoha,  for  seventeen  years  a  mission- 
ary at  the  Marquesas  Islands.  "My  country,  'tis  of 
thee,"  was  sung  in  Hawaiian,  and  a  Jubilee  hymn, 
composed  for  the  occasion,  by  Father  Lyons. 

Dr.  N.  G.  Clark  of  the  American  Board,  then  on  a 
visit  to  Hawaii,  said: 

What  may  be  the  future  of.  this  nation  we  presume 
not  to  foretell.  He  who  reads  the  signs  of  the  times  need 
be  at  no  loss  in  judging  of  its  import.  For  us,  the  past 
at  least  is  secure.  The  story  of  the  gospel  on  these  Islands 
has  gone  forth  to  all  lands  and  stirred  the  hearts  and 
quickened  the  hopes  of  the  Christian  world. 

Such  was  the  tenor  of  all  the  addresses,  and  such 
was  the  condition  of  the  church  and  of  the  country  in 
1870. 

EameJiameJia  III:,  called  "Kamehameha  the  Good," 
died  December  15,  1854.  He  had  always  had  in  his 
cabinet  men  of  ability  and  integrity,  and  his  memory 
will  ever  be  cherished  with  love  and  gratitude  for  the 
liberal  constitution  he  gave  his  people,  and  for  the  right 
to  hold  property  in  fee  simple.  He  was  true  to  his 
country  and  to  his  people,  and  by  them  was  greatly 
beloved. 

On  Dec.  15,  1854,  at  the  age  of  twenty  years,  Alex- 
ander Liholiho,  as  Kamehameha  IV,  became  king.  He 
was  a  brilliant  young  man  of  pleasing  address,  and 
when  two  years  later  he  married  the  accomplished 
Emma  Rooke,  he  had  the  homage  of  all  the  people. 

During  his  reign  the  Queens  Hospital  was  founded. 
This  last  was,  perhaps.  King  Kamehameha's  greatest 


a 

O 


c  a 
:3   c 

W    bo 

S 


o 


O     <u 
C/3 


0     c/l 


u 


LATER  HISTORY  305 

achievement — the  blessing  he  left  to  his  people.  So 
greatly  was  Queen  Emma  interested  in  this  project 
that  she  herself  solicited  subscriptions  for  it.  A  branch 
of  the  Church  of  England  was  established  in  Honolulu 
in  1862,  and  the  lolani  College  for  boys  and  St.  An- 
drews Priory  for  girls  were  commenced.  The  king 
himself  made  an  excellent  translation  of  the  English 
Book  of  Common  Prayer.  Kamehameha  IV  died  Nov. 
30,  1863,  and  his  brother  Lot  became  king  as  Kame- 
hameha V. 

Kamehameha  Y  reigned  nine  years.  He  was  a  man 
of  strong  will  and  practical  shrewdness.  He  placed  in 
his  cabinet  able  men  who  were  in  sympathy  with  his 
views. 

Prince  William  C.  Lunalilo  was  almost  unanimously 
elected  on  January  8,  1873,  as 

King  Lunalilo.  During  his  reign  bitter  feeling  was 
created  by  the  enforcement  of  the  law  for  the  segre- 
gation of  lepers.  There  was  disaffection,  also,  among 
the  household  troops,  which  resulted  in  mutiny.  The 
king  was  taken  ill  in  August  and  spent  some  months 
at  Kailua,  Hawaii,  but  finding  no  relief  he  returned, 
and  died  in  Honolulu  on  Feb.  3,  1874,  after  a  short 
reign  of  one  year  and  twenty-five  days.  He  left  his 
estate  to  found  the  Lunalilo  Home  for  aged  Hawaiians, 
a  gift  that  will  create  about  his  memory  a  halo  of  love 
and  gratitude  as  long  as  there  are  homeless  Hawaiians 
in  this  their  native  land.  As  Lunalilo  had  failed  to 
nominate  a  successor  there  was  great  excitement  over 
the  election  of  a  new  ruler.  ^ 

David  KalaJcav/i  being  elected  over  his  rival,  Dowa- 
ger Queen  Emma,  a  riot  occurred,  to  quell  which  the 


306  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Government  was  obliged  to  apply  to  the  marines  on 
board  the  war  ships  of  the  United  States  and  Great 
Britain.  Kalakaua  was  proclaimed  king  on  Feb.  13, 
1874. 

The  Reciprocity  Treaty,  in  1876,  was  perhaps  the 
greatest  event  of  his  reign,  for  following  it  came  a 
series  of  remarkable  developments  and  improvements 
in  the  land.  It  presented  such  inducements  to  sugar 
culture  that  vast  tracts  of  land  were  bought  or  leased 
for  cane  production,  and  wonderful  exploits  in  engi- 
neering were  accomplished.  Mountains  were  tunnelled 
and  rivers  of  water  were  carried  across  seemingly  im- 
possible gulches  and  made  to  flow  uphill  on  their  way 
to  make  the  waste  lands  yield  their  quota  of  sweets 
to  enrich  the  people.  More  laborers  were  needed,  and 
within  a  few  years  10,000  Portuguese  had  arrived  from 
the  Azores  and  Madeira  Islands,  Chinese  were  imported 
by  hundreds  until  1886,  and  Japanese  came  by 
thousands.  There  were  Scandinavians  also,  and  about 
2000  men,  women  and  children  from  the  South  Seas. 

Liquor  licenses  were  granted  by  the  Legislature  in 
1885  for  all  principal  places  on  the  Islands,  and  in 
1887  opium  licenses  were  granted.  Adventurers  from 
the  Coast  arrived,  who  ingratiated  themselves  in  favor 
with  the  King,  for  personal  advantage,  stirred  up  race 
hatred,  and  encouraged  extravagant  expenditures  of 
public  money. 

The  country,  under  the  sway  of  these  unscrupulous 
favorites,  seemed  fast  going  to  ruin  when,  in  1887,  a 
change  was  made  in  the  constitution  limiting  the  power 
of  the  king  and  giving  more  power  to  the  Legislature 
and  to  the  people.     In  Alexander's  "History  of  the 


LATER  HISTORY  SOT 

Later  Years  of  tlie  Monarchy,"  we  read:  "During  the 
next  three  years,  in  spite  of  the  bitter  hostility  and  in- 
trigues of  the  King,  the  continual  agitation  by  dema- 
gogues and  repeated  conspiracies,  the  country  pros- 
pered under  the  most  efficient  administration  that  it 
had  ever  known. 

In  1889  King  Kalakaua's  health  began  to  decline, 
and  in  1890  he  visited  California,  but  failing  to  re- 
ceive the  desired  benefit,  he  passed  away  on  Jan.  20, 
1891,  in  the  city  of  San  Francisco. 

On  Jan.  29,  1891,  Queen  LiliuoJcalani  ascended  the 
throne.  Her  short  reign  of  two  years  was  a  stormy  one. 
The  Legislature  of  1892  passed  the  dreaded  lottery  bill 
and  a  bill  to  license  the  sale  of  opium.  Other  objec- 
tionable bills  were  barely  defeated,  and  on  Jan.   14, 

1893,  an  attempt  was  made  to  abrogate  the  constitution 
of  1887  and  to  establish  an  Absolute  Monarchy.  This 
move  was  declared  revolutionary,  and  on  Jan.  17,  1893, 

A  Provisional  Government  was  established,  with  S. 
B.  Dole  as  its  president.  The  first  act  of  the  Govern- 
ment was  to  repeal  the  lottery  bill,  and  the  latest 
opium  bill.  A  special  committee  was  appointed  who 
sailed  on  Jan.  19,  to  negotiate  terms  of  annexation  with 
the  United  States.  The  commissioners  were  well  re- 
ceived in  Washington,  but  in  the  rush  of  the  closing 
session,  action  was  deferred,  and  the  new  Cleveland 
Administration  failed  to  ratify  the  treaty. 

A  constitution  was  then  drawn  up  for  a  Republican 
form  of  government — a  constitution  that  has  been 
favorably  spoken  of  by  many  writers — and  on  July  4, 

1894,  S.  B.  Dole  became  President  of  The  Bepuhlic  of 
Hawaii. 


308  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

In  ITov.,  1894,  an  uprising  was  planned;  arms  and 
ammunition,  bought  in  San  Francisco,  were  landed  on 
the  island  ready  for  a  midnight  attack  upon  the  Gov- 
ernment buildings,  the  telephone  and  electric  lighting 
plants,  and  the  homes  of  the  chief  men  of  the  Republic. 
But  an  efficient  police  reported  the  gathering,  the  Citi- 
zens Guard  and  the  militia  were  called  out,  and  the 
rebels  were  scattered,  but  not  without  a  little  bloodshed. 
Some  of  the  conspirators  were  imprisoned  and  some 
were  banished,  but  in  time  all  were  pardoned  and 
became  friends  of  the  Republic. 


XXVI 
ANNEXATION 

ON  Sept.  8,  1897,  a  special  session  of  the  Senate 
of  Hawaii  was  called  to  ratify  the  Treaty 
of  Annexation,  which  was  carried  unani- 
mously on  Sept.  9.  This  was  brought  before  the 
United  States  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives 
the  following  June,  signed  in  July  by  President 
McKinley,  and,  on  Aug.  12,  1898,  President  Dole 
formally  ceded  the  jurisdiction  and  property  of  the 
Hawaiian  government  to  the  United  States  of  America 
and  the  Islands  became  the  Territory  of  Hawaii.  It 
was  an  occasion  of  great  solemnity,  opened  with 
prayer.  There  was  made  formal  presentation  of  the 
Islands  by  President  Dole,  followed  by  acceptance  by 
United  States  Minister  Sewell.  The  guns  on  the 
grounds  and  on  the  naval  ships  in  port  belched  forth 
the  farewell  salute  to  the  Hawaiian  flag,  the  band 
played  "Hawaii  Ponoi,"  and,  in  the  midst  of  profound 
silence,  the  flag  was  slowly  lowered  from  the  central 
mast  of  the  Executive  Building,  while  tears  of  sorrow 
rolled  down  the  faces  of  "kamaainas,"  or  old  residents, 
to  whom  the  flag  had  meant  so  much.  Then,  as  the 
clock  struck  twelve,  amid  the  strains  of  the  "Star 
Spangled  Banner"  and  the  firing  of  the  national  salute, 
the  American  flag  was  flung  out  to  the  trade-wind  over 

S09 


310  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

the  Executive  Building.  It  was  truly  an  impressive 
scene. 

The  Spanish  War  and  the  occupation  of  the  Philip- 
pines in  1898  brought  troops  of  soldiers  to  Honolulu, 
where  they  were  given  rest  and  cheer  by  the  way,  all 
vieing  to  do  honor  to  the  "boys  in  blue."  The  Red 
Cross  Society  was  established  in  Honolulu  at  that  time. 

Great  hopes  were  entertained  for  better  things 
within  the  Territory,  but  the  Legislature  granted  more 
licenses  for  the  sale  of  wine,  and  wine  clubs  were 
formed  which  added  to  the  long  list  of  crime,  disease 
and  death.  The  minds  of  the  people  had  been  so 
poisoned  that  their  best  friends  were  not  trusted. 

Meanwhile  the  brave  old  Hawaiian  pastors  were  left 
to  battle  almost  alone.  Rev.  O.  P.  Emerson,  in  1895, 
said  that  the  Hawaiian  character  had  been  tried  over- 
much. 

At  the  time  of  the  launching  of  the  church  in  charge 
of  native  pastors,  there  were : 


American 

Hawaiian 

Year 

Churches 

Pastors 

Pastors 

Members 

1863 

25 

16 

4 

19,725 

1868 

50 

12 

35 

17,377 

1888 

57 

1 

32 

5,235 

1895 

56 

1      . 

35 

4,784 

Thus  there  was  in  thirty  years  a  falling  off  in  mem- 
bership of  nearly  3007o.  Part  was  due  to  decrease  in 
population,  but  Mr.  Emerson  gives  "other  reasons,  also. 
The  Hawaiians  were  not  strong  enough  to  keep  up, 
alone,  the  high  standard  to  which  they  had  attained.  As 
one  by  one  their  old  missionaries  departed  their  restrain- 
ing power  was  lost  to  the  people.    The  Christian  chiefs 


o 

O 


ra 


a. 


ANNEXATION  311 

and  men  of  authority  had  passed  with  their  influence  for 
good,  while  the  representatives  of  good  government  had 
been  replaced  by  others,  and  political  methods  were 
corrupt. 

The  Hawaiian  pastors  were  poorly  supported.  Their 
salaries  were  not  paid  promptly  and  they  were  obliged 
to  engage  in  other  work  to  provide  for  their  families. 
Of  course,  some  fell  away,  but  on  the  whole  they  were 
worthy,  faithful  men,  true  to  the  cause  of  righteous- 
ness. Surely  honor  and  praise  is  due  them  as  strong, 
noble  men  who  stand  firm  at  such  a  time  as  this. 

In  1898  Mr.  F.  W.  Damon  said:  ''The  old  mission- 
aries were  not  reinforced,  and  on  the  shoulders  of  a 
native  ministry  was  laid  a  burden  too  heavy  to  bear. 
There  should  be  a  foreign  missionary  on  every  island." 
This  was  accomplished  in  1912. 

W.  B.  Oleson,  with  his  natural  optimism  and  pro- 
phetic vision,  said  in  1889 :  "Protestantism  made  tri- 
umphs in  Hawaii  that  thrill  the  world,  and  it  is  not 
going  to  flicker  out  like  an  exhausted  candle.  We  must 
hold  for  Christ  what  has  been  won.  It  is  a  great 
inheritance  of  responsibility." 

Thus  ended  the  19th  century  which  had  brought  to 
Hawaii  the  Pilgrims  with  their  life-giving  message  of 
civilization  and  religious  liberty. 

Mauna  Loa  celebrated  July  4,  1899,  by  an  eruption 
of  lava  from  the  slopes.  In  the  latter  part  of  the  year, 
Honolulu  was  saddened  by  a  visitation  of  Bubonic 
Plague  with  its  attendant  establishment  of  martial  law 
and  house  to  house  visitation;  and  with  this  evil  came 
the  great  fire  which  practically  wiped  out  the  whole  of 
the  congested  district  of  Chinatown. 


XXVII 
EELIGIOUS  WORK 

RELIGIOUS  work  in  Hawaii  for  forty  years, 
from  1820  to  1860,  was  under  the  care  of  the 
Pilgrim  fathers  and  mothers.  It  was  left  by 
them  to  the  Hawaiian  Evangelical  Association  and  to 
the  Theological  Schools  which  they  founded  and,  also, 
to  their  children. 

The  Hawaiian  Mission  Children's  Society  supported 
one  of  their  number,  Dr.  Luther  Halsey  Gulick,  and 
his  wife  in  Micronesia,  and  several  Hawaiian  Mission- 
aries in  Micronesia  and  the  Marquesas  Islands,  and 
also  educated  their  children  in  our  Hawaiian  schools. 
In  all  more  than  $17,000  were  spent  on  missions  to 
other  island  groups  during  the  first  fifty  years,  and  the 
help  given  to  Kawaiahao  and  other  home  schools  was 
more  than  $50,000. 

The  "Cousins"  not  only  gave  money  and  cheer  to 
foreign  missions,  they  also  gave  themselves.  Hiram 
Bingham,  D.D.,  and  his  noble  wife,  devoted  their  lives 
to  the  Gilbert  Island  mission  from  1851  to  1865;  and, 
when  health  was  impaired,  they  spent  the  rest  of  their 
lives  in  translating  the  New  Testament,  finished  in 
1873,  the  Old  Testament,  finished  in  1890,  and  in  mak- 
ing a  dictionary.  The  first  missionary,  L.  H.  Gulick, 
when  after  nine  years  failing  health  drove  him  from  the 
tropics,  spent  seven  years  in  Honolulu  as  Secretary  of 

312 


RELIGIOUS  WORK  313 

the  Hawaiian  Board,  while  his  wife  gathered  the 
nucleus  of  Kawaiahao  Seminary.  Afterward  their 
greater  work  was  done  in  Spain,  Japan  and  China. 
Other  foreign  missionaries  among  the  Cousins  were: 
Rev.  John  T.  Gulick  in  China  and  Japan,  Rev.  O.  H. 
Gulick,  with  his  wife,  Mrs.  Ann  E.  Clark  Gulick  and 
sister,  Miss  Julia  A.  Gulick,  in  Japan,  Rev.  Theo. 
Gulick  among  the  Jews,  Rev.  W.  H.  Gulick  and  Rev. 
Thomas  L.  Gulick  in  Spain.  Misses  Cyrene  and  Mary 
Van  Duzee  were  for  thirty  and  more  years  in  Persia 
as  Missionaries,  and  Mrs.  Fanny  Andrews  Shepard 
and  Mrs.  Florence  Andrews  ISTiell  went  to  Turkey. 

Besides  these,  seven  or  more  Cousins  preached  the 
gospel  on  the  mainland,  and  at  least  five.  Revs.  S.  E. 
Bishop,  A.  O.  Forbes,  K  H.  Parker,  J.  P.  Green, 
and  O.  P.  Emerson  followed  in  their  fathers'  footsteps 
here  on  Hawaii,  as  gospel  ministers.  Who  can  esti- 
mate the  religious  influence  of  Frank  W.  Damon  and 
wife,  whose  lives  were  devoted  to  Chinese  mission  work 
in  these  Islands,  or  that  of  General  S.  C.  Armstrong, 
who  served  in  the  Civil  War,  with  other  Cousins,  and 
then  founded  the  Hampton  School  for  ISTegroes  and 
Indians,  which  nurtured  such  men  as  Booker  T. 
Washington.  ISTot  only  has  the  pulpit  of  Kawaiahao 
church  been  filled  for  fifty  years  by  the  son  of  a  mis- 
sionary, but  a  well-equipped  Sunday  School,  quite  up 
to  date,  is  conducted  by  missionary  descendants.  The 
other  large  native  church  and  Sunday  School,  named 
Kaumakapili,  has  been  helped  financially  and  by  per- 
sonal presence  and  assistance  by  the  daughter  of  the 
first  pastor.  Rev.  Lowell  Smith,  and  by  her  husband. 
The  Kohala  church,  also,  and  others,  could  not  have 


314  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

continued  their  good  work  but  for  the  children  of  the 
missionaries.  They  have  done  and  continue  to  do  much 
good  work  through  the  Fort  Street  Church — now  the 
Central  Union — and  through  the  Woman's  Board  of 
Missions  of  the  Pacific.  Scores  of  Cousins  became 
teachers  in  mission  schools  and  in  Sunday  Schools,  and 
there  were  many  whose  varied  talents  helped  them  to 
do  their  religious  work  by  proxy,  and  supply  men  and 
means  for  advancing  the  work  of  the  Fathers  while 
they  in  politics  or  business  have  been  promoters  of 
peace,  good  order,  good  will  and  good  government. 

THE    HAWAIIAN    EVANGELICAL    ASSOCIATIOTST 

The  Hawaiian  Board  of  the  Evangelical  Association 
was  formed  on  June  23,  1863,  and  through  the  Board 
the  work  of  the  Association  is  done,  one  paid  Secretary 
spending  his  whole  time  in  the  service  of  the  Board 
and  having  oversight  of  all  the  churches. 

The  Secretaries  have  been: 

Rev.  L.  H.  Gulick,  from  1863  to  1870. 
Eev.  J.  F.  Pogue,  from  1870  to  1877. 
Rev.  H.  Bingham,  from  1877  to  1880. 
Rev.  A.  0.  Forbes,  from  1880  to  1889. 
Rev.  0.  P.  Emerson,  from  1889  to  1904. 
Rev.  D.  Scudder,  from  1904  to  1907. 
Rev.  W.  B.  Oleson,  from  1908  to  1915. 
Rev.  H.  P.  Judd,  from  1910  to . 

There  have  been  but  five  Presidents  and  three  Treas- 
urers. 

For  twenty  years  the  work  of  the  Board  was  done 
among  the  Hawaiian  people,   and  the  records  of  the 


RELIGIOUS  WORK  315 

Association  Meetings  are  kept  in  the  Hawaiian  lan- 
guage. 

During  the  latter  part  of  this  time  there  was  a  great 
decrease  in  the  population.  There  was  great  unrest 
also.  Hawaiians  were  selling  their  homes,  deserting 
the  churches  and  crowding  into  the  towns  to  make  roam 
for  sugar,  and  Asiatics  were  filling  their  places.  As 
Providence  opened  the  way  the  Hawaiian  Board  began 
to  reach  out  to  other  nationalities. 

The  first  evangelistic  work  among  the  Chinese  was 
in  1868,  when  through  the  great  interest  Dr.  S.  C. 
Damon  felt  for  them,  a  Sunday  School  was  started  in  the 
Fort  Street  Church.  In  1878  Rev.  Dr.  Hyde,  in  con- 
nection with  Dr.  S.  C.  Damon,  organized  a  Chinese 
church.  The  Chinese,  with  the  help  of  foreign  friends, 
raised  money  and  put  up  a  church  building  themselves 
in  1880.  Four  years  later  Mr.  F.  W.  Damon  returned 
from  China  with  his  bride,  formerly  Miss  Mary  Hop- 
per, born  of  missionary  parents  in  China,  and  they  two, 
with  wonderful  zeal  and  good  judgment  carried  on  the 
Chinese  work  in  Honolulu. 

A  large  immigration  of  Japanese  arrived  in  1886 
with  their  Consul-General.  Dr.  Hyde  established  for 
them  a  regular  preaching  service  in  Queen  Emma  Hall, 
speaking  through  an  interpreter.  In  1887  Mr.  Miyama, 
from  the  Methodist  church  of  San  Francisco,  came  to 
Honolulu  and  services  were  conducted  in  the  Japanese 
language.  In  1888  the  first  Japanese  church  was  or- 
ganized in  the  Fort  Street  Church,  and  Mrs.  C.  M. 
Hyde  tells  us  that  "at  the  time  of  the  baptism  of  the 
first  converts  it  was  a  striking  spectacle  that  was  pre- 
sented with  Consul  Ando  at  one  end  of  the  kneeling 


316  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

penitents  and  his  yard  man  at  the  other,  some  thirty  or 
forty  bearing  testimony." 

In  1894  Rev.  and  Mrs.  O.  H.  Gulick  were  trans- 
ferred from  mission  work  in  Japan  to  Hawaii,  and  took 
charge  of  the  Japanese  work  under  the  Hawaiian  Board. 
During  the  next  few  years  ten  preachers  and  evangelists 
were  procured  from  Japan  at  a  cost  of  $4,080,  the 
Lyceum  on  JSTuuanu  Street  was  purchased,  night  schools 
were  held  for  instruction  in  English,  and  day  schools 
for  Japanese  lessons. 

A  Portuguese  Protestant  Sunday  School  was  begun 
by  the  Woman's  Board  of  Missions  of  the  Central  Union 
Church  in  1887,  and  in  1892  a  church  was  organized 
with  Rev.  A.  V.  Soares  as  pastor.  In  1893  a  kinder- 
garten and  schools  were  organized,  and  later  a  beautiful 
little  church  was  built  on  Miller  Street.  Churches  have 
since  been  established  at  Hilo,  Hawaii,  and  at  Paia, 
Maui. 

The  present  publicatiorrs  of  the  Hawaiian  Board  are 
"The  Eriend,"  which  was  founded  in  1843  as  a  tem- 
perance paper  by  Rev.  S.  C.  Damon,  and  has  reflected 
the  religious  life  of  Hawaii  for  over  seventy  years ;  the 
"Ka  Hoaloha,"  a  religious  paper  printed  in  Hawaiian, 
containing  the  International  Sunday  School  Lessons, 
with  a  recently  added  English  department,  and  having 
a  circulation  of  1400;  the  "Kekahunaao,"  a  paper 
for  Hawaiian  ministers  and  Christian  workers;  and 
"The  Tomo"  a  Japanese  evangelistic  paper;  also  "The 
Yan  Bo,"  a  Chinese  paper,  and  "The  Ang  Abyan,"  a 
Tagalog  Eilipino  paper. 

With  the  one  exception  of  Kekahunaao,  the  titles  of 
these  six  gapers  mean,  the  friend. 


XXVIII 

educatio:n' 

The  Teainhstg  of  Hawaiiaist  Youths  foe  the 

MiNISTKY 

THE  earlier  Hawaiian  Ministers  were  prepared 
for  their  work  in  the  Lahainaluna  Seminary, 
and,  also,  by  the  personal  teaching  of  individual 
missionaries. 

In  1863  Eev.  W.  P.  Alexander  entered,  in  Wailuku, 
Maui,  upon  the  instruction  of  some  of  the  graduates  of 
Lahainaluna  Seminary  with  the  view  of  their  prepara- 
tion for  the  gospel  ministry.  This  most  valuable  train- 
ing school  fitted  several  of  the  leading  men  in  the  pas- 
torate for  the  work  that  they  have  accomplished.  Later 
Rev.  D.  D.  Baldwin  carried  on  the  same  line  of  in- 
struction of  a  few  promising  young  men  in  Honolulu. 
In  1877  Kev.  Dr.  C.  M.  Hyde  established  a  school  for 
the  education  of  Hawaiian  youths  for  the  Gospel  Minis- 
try, and  carried  it  on  ably  and  successfully  for  twenty- 
two  years.  Death  brought  his  labors  to  a  close  in  1899, 
at  which  time  it  was  said  that  four-fifths  of  the  pulpits 
of  the  native  Hawaiian  people  were  filled  by  those  whom 
he  had  trained.  Rev.  John  Leadingham,  who  had  been 
for  a  few  years  associated  with  Dr.  Hyde,  carried  on 
the  school  till  1905.    Upon  the  departure  of  Mr.  Lead- 

317 


318  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

ingham  in  1905  there  was  an  interval  without  any 
special  training  of  ministers  £or  the  Hawaiian  people, 
but  for  the  past  three  years  there  has  been  established 
a  permanent  training  school  for  ministers  under  the 
leadership  of  Rev.  Messrs.  Erdman  and  Frank  Scudder. 
The  instruction  imparted  by  Messrs.  Alexander,  Bald- 
win and  Hyde  was  entirely  in  the  Hawaiian  language, 
while  the  later  instruction,  since  the  time  of  Dr.  Hyde 
to  the  present,  has  been  in  English. 

As  a  result  of  these  schools  there  are  today  forty-five 
native  Hawaiian  ministers,  and  these  all  are  united  in 
the  one  Hawaiian  Evangelical  Association  of  Congrega- 
tional churches. 

At  the  present  time  the  younger  members  of  the 
Hawaiian  churches  are  beginning  to  demand  ministers 
who  shall  be  able  to  conduct  their  services  in  the  Eng- 
lish language. 

Schools  and  Seminaries 

Maunaolu  (The  Beautiful  Mountain)  School  was 
opened  on  East  Maui  as  a  family  boarding  school  for 
girls  in  1861,  by  Rev.  and  Mrs.  C.  B.  Andrews. 

In  1864  it  passed  into  the  hands  of  Rev.  and  Mrs.  J. 
Porter  Green,  Miss  Mary  Green  and  Miss  Mary  Parker. 
But  in  1869  the  building  was  destroyed  by  fire  and  the 
school  disbanded. 

In  1871  the  school  was  reopened  and  Miss  Helen  E. 
Carpenter  was  for  twenty  years  its  faithful,  devoted 
Principal. 

In  1898  a  fire  again  destroyed  the  Maunaolu  build- 
ing. 


EDUCATION  319 

Through  the  generosity  of  Mr.  H.  P.  Baldwin  a  more 
modern  building  was  erected  at  Sunny  Side  Paia,  into 
which  the  school  moved  in  October,  1900,  with  a  full 
corps  of  teachers  and  modern  appliances.  They  have 
a  beautiful  home  life,  and  continue  to  send  out  well- 
equipped  graduates. 

The  Kawaiahao  Seminary  for  girls  was  opened  in 
1864  by  Mrs.  L.  H.  Gulick  in  the  old  printing  house, 
which  stood  where  the  Mission  Memorial  Building  now 
stands.  It  began  with  eight  pupils,  but  the  numbers 
increased  until  in  1867  it  blossomed  out  into  Kawaiahao 
Seminary  with  Miss  Lydia  Bingham  as  Principal.  In 
1877  the  school  came  under  the  care  of  the  Hawaiian 
Board.  At  first  Hawaiians  and  Micronesians  were  re- 
ceived, but  year  by  year  Chinese,  Japanese,  Koreans, 
Germans,  and  Portuguese  were  welcomed,  all  blended 
into  one  happy  family.  In  1908  a  large  stone  building 
was  erected  in  Manoa  Valley  by  generous  friends,  and 
the  school  removed  from  the  city  to  the  beautiful 
suburbs.  In  its  new  home,  and  under  an  efficient  prin- 
cipal it  has  grown  in  numbers,  including  among  its 
pupils  girls  of  many  nationalities.  It  is  now  the  Girls' 
Department  of  The  Mid-Pacific  Institute. 

The  Boys'  Department  of  The  Mid-Pacific  Institute 
began  as  Mills  School  for  boys,  founded  by  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Frank  Damon  in  1890  for  Chinese  youth,  and  continued 
under  their  efficient  loving  care  until  1910,  when  it 
was  transferred  to  a  fine  stone  building  in  Manoa  Val- 
ley, a  short  distance  from  the  Girls'  School.  It  now 
educates  other  nationalities  besides  Chinese  and  has  a 
large  corps  of  teachers. 

The  Haleiwa  Seminary  was  begun  in  August  7,  1865, 


320  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

when  Bev.  and  Mrs.  0.  H.  Gulick  brought  their  family 
school  from  Ka-ii,  Hawaii,  to  Waialua,  Oahu.  The 
dej^arture  of  the  Gulicks  as  missionaries  to  Japan  in 
1870,  left  the  school  in  charge  of  Miss  Mary  E.  Green, 
who  for  over  ten  years  labored  energetically  and  success- 
fully until  failing  health  caused  her  resignation,  and 
the  abandonment  of  the  school. 

The  Kohala  Girls'  School  was  founded  by  the  Rev. 
Elias  Bond,  who  devoted  his  energies  from  early  dawn 
till  darkening  hours  to  the  speedy  accomplishment  of 
the  work.  It  was  opened  Dec.  1,  1874,  with  Miss  Eliza- 
beth Lyons  as  Principal.  With  heroism  and  zeal  she  led 
her  band  of  truth  seekers  till  1882.  The  school  was  then 
closed  till  1889  when  Mr.  Bond  made  over  the  property 
to  the  Hawaiian  Board.  It  still  exists,  and  has  a 
regular  course  of  study  with  industrial  training. 

The  Kameliameha  Schools  sprang  up  full  fledged  and 
equipped  for  work  through  the  magnificent  gift  of  the 
founder,  Mrs.  Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop, 

The  Boys'  Department  was  opened  in  1886  with  Rev. 
W.  B.  Oleson  as  Principal,  and  the  Department  for 
Girls  about  ten  years  later.  ISTo  expense  has  been 
spared  to  make  these  model  industrial  schools,  the 
standard  being  high  and  the  teachers  excellent. 

These  and  some  other  boarding  schools,  which  con- 
tinued for  a  short  time,  have  been  of  inestimable  benefit 
to  these  Islands,  in  raising  up  educated  Christian  men 
and  women  to  carry  on  the  work  and  be  the  intelligent 
parents  of  the  next  generation. 

Mention  may  here  be  made  of  Saint  Louis  College  for 
Boys,  and  the  Roman  Catholic  Convent  for  Girls,  and, 
also,  of  The  lolani  College  and  the  Priory  for  Girls  of 


EDUCATION  321 

the  Episcopal  Church.  These  and  other  Christian 
schools  and  homes  for  Japanese  and  Koreans,  all  are 
contributing  to  the  enlightenment  of  the  several  races 
upon  our  island  shores. 

The  Common  Schools,  which  extend  to  every  part  of 
the  islands,  are  under  the  care  of  the  Government.  They 
are  all  taught  in  English  and  many  of  the  teachers  are 
well  educated  ladies  from  the  mainland.  There  is  a 
Normal  School  and  a  High  School  in  Honolulu,  and 
High  Schools  on  Hawaii,  Maui,  and  Kaui.  Kinder- 
gartens, for  the  little  children,  have  been  established 
by  benevolent  societies. 


XXIX 

LANGUAGE 

THE  "Missionary  Herald"  of  September,  1911, 
speaking  of  the  many  languages  used  in  Eastern 
Turkey,  said  regarding  the  ordination  of  a 
minister:  "The  Scripture  was  read  in  Turkish,  the  or- 
daining prayer  offered  in  Arabic,  the  charge  to  the 
pastor  spoken  in  Armenian,  while  the  red-hot  charge 
to  the  people  was  in  the  terse  and  incisive  Kurdish." 
Thus,  four  out  of  the  five  languages  employed  every 
Sabbath  in  preaching  the  gospel  in  the  Mardin  field, 
were  used  in  this  service  with  one  congregation. 

In  the  Hawaii  of  today  we  have  the  following  lan- 
guages in  daily  use  by  different  sections  of  the  people: 
The  Hawaiian,  English,  Japanese,  Punti  Chinese, 
Hakka  Chinese,  Portuguese,  Korean,  Filipino,  and  the 
Porto  Rican.  Of  these  many  languages,  the  English 
may  be  said  to  be  the  conquering  tongue,  as  it  is  taught 
in  all  the  schools  and  is  a  medium  of  communication 
amongst  all  the  children  and  young  people,  both  in  the 
street  and  on  the  playground. 

The  gospel  is  preached  by  pastors  and  evangelists 
from  week  to  week  to  each  of  the  assemblies  of  these  peo- 
ple in  their  several  native  languages.  The  hope  for 
future  unity  and  development  is  in  the  thorough  com- 
mand of  the  English  by  all  these  races.     The  process, 

322 


LANGUAGE  323 

which  calls  for  great  patience,  will  require  some  time. 
The  eagerness  of  all  to  acquire  the  English  language, 
furnishes  the  great  hope  for  future  unity. 

The  young -people  of  the  Hawaiian  race  now  living, 
and  under  twenty  years  of  age,  many  of  them,  care  very 
little  and  know  still  less  of  the  distinguished  names  of 
Hawaiian  history.  Their  school  days  of  the  past  fifteen 
or  twenty  years  have  been  largely  under  the  guidance 
of  American  school  teachers,  whose  utmost  effort  in  the 
earlier  stages  was  to  educate  the  youthful  ear  and  tongue 
to  discern  the.  difference  between  pokeko  and  potato, 
and  to  whom  the  famous  names  of  Kamehameha,  Kaa- 
humanu,  and  Kapiolani,  signify  but  little.  Their 
schoolmates  and  playfellows  have  largely  been  of  the 
Chinese,  Japanese,  and  Portuguese  nationalities  whose 
common  language  has  been  the  conquering  English. 

You  address  a  youth  with  the  liquid  and  lovely  Aloha, 
and  he  will  reply  Good  Moiming!  Of  pride  or  love  for 
his  mother  tongue  he  has  but  little.  It  must  be  so.  The 
English  is  the  common  language  of  the  present  and  com- 
ing inhabitants ;  the  language  of  literature,  the  language 
of  business,  the  language  which  all  wish  to  know  and 
seek  to  learn. 

The  Hawaiian  speech  no  longer  guides  the  people  or 
their  rulers.  It  is  sought  by  none  except  the  antiqua- 
rian. So  soon  may  a  small  race  and  its  language  pass 
from  the  earth ! 

Virtually  all  the  schools  for  native  Hawaiians  were  at 
first  taught  in  the  Hawaiian  language,  whether  private 
schools  or  public  common  schools.  Change  was  made  in 
the  public  schools,  and  in  nearly  all  other  schools,  from 
the  Hawaiian  language  to  the  English  language  between 


324  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

1880  and  1890.  The  change  was  fuUj  accomplished  in 
1892. 

The  American  Board's  Mission  to  Hawaii  has  been 
an  example  and  inspiration  to  all  modern  missions  and 
missionaries  through  the  transformation  of  these  Island 
people.  It  is  an  object  lesson  to  the  world,  of  the  suc- 
cess of  gospel  missions. 

The  exercises  of  the  Annual  Meetings  of  the  mission 
for  the  first  forty  years  were  conducted  entirely  in  Eng- 
lish, the  assembly  being  composed  of  the  English  speak- 
ing missionaries. 

In  1863  the  scope  of  the  organization  was  enlarged, 
and  from  that  time  onward  the  Annual  Assembly  has 
consisted  of  the  pastors,  mostly  Hawaiian,  and  of  dele- 
gates from  the  several  churches,  and  all  conducted  in  the 
Hawaiian  language. 

The  meetings  of  the  Annual  Association  of  the 
churches  and  also  of  the  Local  Island  Associations,  are 
still  conducted  in  the  Hawaiian  language,  as  is  natural. 
In  these  later  years  the  several  English-speaking  Con- 
gregational Churches,  as  also  the  Japanese,  Chinese,  and 
Portuguese,  of  the  Congregational  order,  have  represen- 
tation in  both  the  several  Island  Associations  and  in  the 
Annual  Association,  which  latter  combines  all  the  Con- 
gregational Churches  of  the  group. 

Ere  long  all  the  business  and  services  of  these  Asso- 
ciations must  be  conducted  in  the  only  language  com- 
mon to  all,  namely,  the  English. 

As  in  Turkey,  so  in  Hawaii,  the  language  question  is 
the  gravest  and  most  difficult  problem  to  meet  in  the 
program  of  progress. 


o 

s 

o 

M-l 

13 


XXX 
AGRICULTURE 

AMONG  the  pioneer  missionaries  was  a  farmer, 
Daniel  Chamberlain,  who  came  to  instruct  the 
natives  in  agriculture  and  the  rudiments  of 
mechanical  arts,  but  he  found  little  opportunity  for 
his  services  and  remained  only  three  years. 

The  primitive  Hawaiians  had  a  system  of  agricul- 
ture unique  in  form  and  efficient  in  operation,  furnish- 
ing, in  favorable  years,  abundant  food  for  the  150,000 
people  who  filled  the  land.  Indeed,  they  had  one  sub- 
stantial vegetable,  almost  unknown  in  civilized  lands, 
the  taro  or  halo.  This  tuber,  raised  in  flooded  patches, 
wherever  in  low  land  perpetual  running  water  could 
be  led,  constituted  the  staff  of  life  for  fully  four-fifths 
of  the  population. 

In  1835  the  mission  decided  that  "Little  can  be 
done  (in  agriculture)  at  present.  Nevertheless  we  re- 
gard the  subject  as  of  suflScient  importance  to  warrant 
us  in  encouraging  the  grovTth  of  cotton,  coffee,  sugar 
cane,  etc.,  that  the  people  may  have  more  business  on 
their  hands  and  increase  their  temporal  comforts."  To 
this  end,  every  mission  station  became  an  oasis  from 
which  seeds  and  cuttings  of  flowers,  vegetables  and 
fruit  trees  were  distributed  throughout  the  country  dis- 
tricts.    We  read  especially  of  the  success  along  these 

325 


326  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

lines  of  Mr.  Locke,  of  Waialua,  Oahii,  Mr.  Ruggles,  of 
Kona,  Hawaii,  and  Mr.  Goodrich,  of  Hilo  and,  later, 
of  the  cultivation  of  wheat  under  Mr.  Green,  of  Maui, 
and  Mr.  Shipman,  of  Ka-u,  Hawaii. 

Cotton  culture  was  given  a  trial  in  the  'thirties  and 
Miss  Lydia  Brown  was  sent  by  the  American  Board  to 
teach  spinning  and  weaving.  A  second  attempt  was 
made  in  1863,  promoted  by  H.  M.  Whitney  through  the 
Advertiser  and  Kuohoa.  Choice  seeds  were  distributed 
and  machines  for  cleaning  and  preparing  for  market 
introduced,  and  the  quantity  and  quality  increased  till 
1866,  when  twenty-two  thousand  pounds  were  exported. 
After  the  Southern  States  recovered  from  the  Civil  War 
Hawaiian  cotton  ceased  to  be  exported. 

Coffee  was  grown  in  small  quantities  in  early  times 
by  missionaries  and  others,  and  Kona,  Hawaii,  has 
given  its  name  to  the  delicious  Kona  Coffee  of  com- 
merce, the  export  of  which  the  past  year  amounted  in 
value  to  nearly  a  milUion  dollars. 

Bice  was  one  of  the  products  that  appeared  soon  after 
the  organization  of  ''The  Royal  Agricultural  Society" 
in  1850,  which  did  for  the  country  what  the  "Bureau 
of  Agriculture  and  Forestry"  did  in  the  'nineties.  Great 
excitement  prevailed  after  its  introduction  and  large 
tracts  of  taro  land  were  planted  to  rice,  the  quality  fully 
equalling  that  of  South  Carolina  rice.  There  were,  in 
all,  about  ten  thousand  acres  planted  to  rice,  producing 
usually  three  crops  in  two  years.  The  cultivation  of 
rice  has  been  prosecuted  largely  by  the  Chinese  immi- 
grants who  were  brought  to  Hawaii,  in  the  middle  of  the 
nineteenth  century,  in  the  interest  of  sugar  planting. 
For  fifty  years  rice  held  second  place  in  agricultural 


AGRICULTURE  327 

products,  but  other  crops  now  far  outrank  it  in  value. 

Pineapples  reached  second  rank  in  exports  in  1912, 
though  the  first  shipment  of  eighty  cases  was  only  made 
in  1890.  So  rapid  has  been  the  advance  in  the  culture 
of  the  fruit  and  the  growth  of  the  trade,  that  in  1913 
there  were  exported  360,000  cases,  and  the  record  next 
year  was  1,000,000  cases  of  canned  fruit  and  100,000 
cases  of  juice,  valued  at  $3,500,000.  The  fresh  fruit, 
also,  is  being  placed  upon  the  market. 

Sugar  cane  was  indigenous  and  sugar,  though  of  in- 
ferior quality,  was  exported  as  early  as  1837.  Later 
improvements  were  made  in  grinding,  boiling,  draining, 
and  packing.  Steam  was  introduced,  vacuum  pans  in- 
stalled, and  new  machinery  set  up,  till  choicest  grades 
were  turned  out  in  great  quantity. 

Then  the  Reciprocity  Treaty,  passed  in  1876,  brought 
marvellous  changes  and  financial  prosperity.  Within 
the  next  fifteen  months  eighteen  new  plantations  were 
started;  land  was  bought  and  leased  at  exorbitant 
prices;  heavy  machinery  was  imported  and  immense 
schemes  for  irrigation  were  carried  through.  The 
artesian  water-supply  and  other  irrigation  projects 
brought  under  cultivation  thousands  of  acres  of  once 
barren  land.  Within  one  year  the  Haiku  Ditch,  through 
the  energy,  skill  and  faithful  work  of  its  promoters, 
engineers  and  a  great  gang  of  men,  blasting,  tunneling, 
piping,  and  flume-making  had  carried  the  water  from 
windward  Haleakala  to  Haiku  plantation,  seventeen 
miles  away.  That  was  the  first,  followed  by  many 
others,  through  mountain  fastnesses,  impassable  gulches, 
and  a  wonderful  tangle  of  tropical  vegetation.  The 
last,   finished   in   December,    1915,   was,   perhaps,   the 


S28  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

greatest,  when  a  tunnel  three  miles  long  pierced  the 
Koolau  mountains — the  backbone  of  Oahu — ^to  carry 
waste  water  from  the  windward  to  the  other  side  of  the 
island,  and  estimated  to  carry  125,000,000  gallons 
daily.  Sugar  has  been  "king"  in  leveling  the  hills, 
building  railways,  making  roadways,  and  starting 
steam  lines  across  the  Pacific.  The  sons  of  the  Pil- 
grims of  Hawaii  have,  some  of  them,  devoted  their 
talents  and  energy  to  its  interests.  Engineers  and 
financiers  of  note  have  given  of  their  skill,  and 
thousands  and  thousands  of  laborers  have  been  brought 
from  many  nations  to  do  it  service.  The  total  sugar 
crop  of  Hawaii  in  1914  amounted  to  617,038  tons,  the 
value  of  which  was  between  forty  and  fifty  millions  of 
dollars.  Sugar  has  brought  to  this  country  business 
and  commercial  prosperity.  It  has,  also,  brought  a 
multitude  of  heathen,  and  some  evil  customs  to  our 
shores.  It  has,  also,  afforded  an  opportunity  to  extend 
the  influence  of  the  pilgrims  of  Hawaii  to  all  the  shores 
of  the  Pacific. 


XXXI 

COMMERCE,  EARLY  SHIPS 

THE  commerce  of  the  Pacific,  which  inevitably 
includes  the  commerce  of  Hawaii,  was  at  first 
prosecuted  in  American  and  English  sailing 
ships  from  Atlantic  ports  around  Cape  Horn,  creeping 
up  the  western  American  coast.  The  vessels  brought 
the  products  of  more  advanced  countries,  and  took 
wheat,  ores,  guano,  timber,  hides,  tallow  and  furs. 
When  they  reached  across  to  Siberia,  China  and  the 
West  Indies,  they  met  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  current 
which  had  already  brought  the  Dutch,  Portuguese,  and 
Spanish  traders.  In  its  western  progress,  commerce 
swept  away  the  sandal  wood  of  Hawaii — which  was  all 
it  had  to  sell;  which  was  immediately  converted  into 
gold  for  the  merchants,  but  returned  little  to  the  is- 
lands. This  sandal  wood  was  taken  to  China  where 
it  was  used  for  fragrant  burnt-incense,  and,  also,  for 
furniture.  This  trade  began  in  1810,  and  ceased  about 
twenty  years  later  when  the  sandal  wood  of  the  islands 
was  exhausted. 

But  commerce  was  preceded  by  National  vessels  of 
discovery,  whose  first  object  was  to  impress  the  people 
of  new  lands  with  the  power  and  dignity  of  the  rulers 
whom  they  represented.  On  such  service  was  Captain 
James  Cook,  R.  N.,  in  his  visits  of  1778,  and  1779;  but 

329 


330  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

though  a  commander  of  tried  ability,  he  allowed  himself 
to  be  caught  in  a  trivial  quarrel  with  the  natives  and 
lost  his  life.  On  such  service  came  Captain  George 
Vancouver,  R.  N.,  and  added  his  own  high-minded 
philanthropy  to  the  prestige  of  his  government.  On 
such  service  came  the  United  States  exploring  squad- 
ron in  1840,  and  1841,  and  added  greatly  to  the 
world's  fund  of  exact  information. 

Every  nation  on  earth,  that  has  a  navy  to  exhibit, 
has  sent  its  naval  ships  here,  at  one  time  or  another, 
with  expressions  of  good  will  which  have  been  as  courte- 
ously returned.  Some  notable  exceptions  to  this  rule, 
occuring  in  the  first  half  of  last  century,  arose  from 
the  inability  of  the  commanders  to  allow  that  the 
Hawaiians  had  any  right  to  make  laws  which  they  were 
bound  to  respect.  Such  was  the  visit  of  the  United 
States  Schooner  Dolphin,  in  1826;  and  such  were  the 
visits  of  the  British  frigate  Carysfort,  in  1843 ;  and  of 
the  French  ship-of-war,  L' Artemise,  Captain  Laplace, 
in  1839 ;  and  Poursuivante,  Admiral  Tromelin,  in 
1849 ;  which  were  all  attended  by  high-handed  attacks 
on  the  dignity  and  peace  of  the  Hawaiian  Goverum-^nt. 

Home  Fleet 

I^aturally,  the  king  was  the  first  ship  owner  of  the 
islands  and  many  were  the  glittering  baits,  in  the 
shape  of  small  sea  craft,  which  he  eagerly  snapped  up 
and  for  which  he  paid  exorbitant  prices.  They  were 
generally  short  lived.  In  1837  the  king's  fleet  con- 
sisted of  the  Kai,  a  full  rigged  brig,  (formerly  called 
the  Don  Quixote),  and  ten  smaller  vessels  as  attendants. 
When   not    on    special    duty   these   plied,    irregularly, 


< 


COMMERCE,  EARLY  SHIPS  331 

among  the  islands.  ibTatives  were  all  loyal  subjects  to 
the  king  and  were  free  passengers,  the  number  being 
limited  by  the  seating  capacity  of  deck  and  cabin.  The 
passengers  provisioned  themselves  and,  while  food  held 
out,  they  did  not  mind  how  many  days  they  were  afloat. 
About  1840  it  became  the  practice,  at  Dr.  Judd's  sug- 
gestion, to  make  a  charge  for  exclusive  use  of  the  cabin. 

The  queen  of  her  time  was  the  new  and  beautiful 
royal  yacht,  Kamehameha  III,  acquired  in.  1846.  She 
had  high  bulkwarks,  a  flush  deck,  a  spacious  cabin 
below,  and  six  brass  guns  mounted  in  man-o'-war  style. 
She  was  carried  off  by  the  French  in  1849,  without  rea- 
son or  recompense. 

As  the  foreign  population  and  its  business  needs  in- 
creased, the  inter-island  schooners  were  greatly  in- 
creased in  number  and  sea-going  ejfficiency.  In  1848 
there  were  sixty-seven  vessels  having  Hawaiian  registry. 
To  mention  only  one  out  of  a  number  of  those  which 
were  favorites  of  the  travelling  public,  the  Nettie  Mer- 
rill combined  beauty,  speed,  and  carrying  capacity. 
She  made  M'^eekly  trips  to  and  from  Lahaina,  also  load- 
ing up  with  sugar  at  Makena,  and  her  going  rate  was 
called  steamer  time. 

Whalees 

The  recurrent  visits  of  a  fleet  of  whaleships  in  our  is- 
land ports  was  a  great  factor  in  shaping  the  history  of 
this  people,  and  the  results  were  mixed — great  pecuni- 
ary gain  and  great  moral  loss. 

The  ships'  principal  Sieeds  were  watef  and  fresh 
provisions;  and  the  favorite  ports  of  call  were  Hono- 
lulu, Lahaina,  Hilo,  and  Waimea,  Kauai,  with  a  grow- 


332  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

ing   preponderance   for   the   first   named  for   obvious 
reasons. 

Steam 

The  first  steam  vessel  to  enter  Honolulu  harbor  was 
H.  B.  M.  S.  Cormoraiit,  and  this  was  in  the  year  1846. 

The  Kilwuea,  which  arrived  here  in  1860,  was  the 
pioneer  of  a  fleet  of  schooner-rigged  screw  steamers, 
which  has  continued  to  this  day.  In  the  'Seventies  the 
enterprise  of  steamship  building  resulted  in  the  forma- 
tion of  the  Wider  Steamship  Company,  which  absorbed 
the  greater  part  of  the  freighting  and  passenger  busi- 
ness of  the  islands.  This  company,  later,  was  merged 
with  the  Inter-Island  Steam  Navigation  Company, 
which  now  covers  the  group  having  control  of  an  ef- 
ficiently managed  fleet  of  steamers  with  regular  sailing 
days  and  mail  carrying  contracts,  ensuring  weekly  com- 
munication with  all  parts  of  the  islands  and  semi-weekly 
with  the  more  important  points. 


XXXII 
THE  TWENTIETH  CENTUKY 

THE  Twentieth  Century  brought  to  Hawaii  a 
brighter  outlook.  The  great  fire  in  Honohilu 
on  January  20,  1900,  with  its  terror,  destruc- 
tion, and  despair,  proved  a  blessing  in  disguise,  wiping 
out  the  plague  that  had  lain  as  a  pall  upon  the  city  for 
months,  and  waking  up  the  people  to  the  need  of  a 
cleaner  city  and  better  building  laws.  So  the  great  up- 
heaval through  which  the  country  had  passed,  left  it 
more  stable  and  there  began  to  rise  from  out  the  ashes 
of  discord  and  distrust  a  kindlier  feeling  and  a  gradual 
return  to  civic  righteousness  through  a  strength  born  of 
conflict  and  peril. 

The  Political  Condition:  Hawaii  has  been  blessed 
with  wise  and  conscientious  Governors.  Governor  Dole 
steered  the  "Ship  of  State"  through  the  troublous  waters 
of  Annexation,  and  readjusted  the  laws  to  conform  to 
the  new  environment.  Governors  Carter  and  Frear 
were  worthy  successors  of  Governor  Dole. 

The  Legislature  made  excellent  laws  on  the  whole, 
but  continued  to  license  saloons,  and  the  police  failed  to 
execute  such  restrictive  laws  as  were  passed  and,  conse- 
quently, with  the  incoming  of  all  classes  of  foreigners, 
crime  and  poverty  increased.  The  "Strangers  Friend 
Society,"  organized  in  1852,  and  church  benevolent  so- 

333 


S34  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

cieties  looked  after  the  poor  until  in  1899  the  "Asso- 
ciated Charities"  was  organized  and  took  over  the 
problem. 

Improvements :  In  Honolulu  and  on  Oahu  the  Rapid 
Transit  opened  up  five  miles  of  road  in  1902;  dredging 
of  Pearl  Harbor  was  begun  and  wireless  telegraphy 
made  rapid  strides;  in  1903  the  Aquarium  was  opened. 
The  McKinley  High  School  Building  and  the  Children's 
Hospital  were  erected  in  1910  (The  Leahi  Home  for  In- 
curables had  been  built  at  Kaimuki  in  1900).  The  Col- 
lege of  Hawaii,  established  in  1909,  completed  its  new 
building  and  graduated  its  first  class  in  1913.  The  new 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  Building  was  erected  and  occupied  in  1911, 
and  The  Mid-Pacific  Institute  was  completed  in  1912, 
and  in  that  year  volcanic  observations  were  inaugurated 
at  Kilauea.  On  October  21,  1911,  the  "Territorial 
Library"  superseded  the  "Honolulu  Library,"  estab- 
lished in  1879,  but  on  February  1,  1913,  the  beautiful 
new  "Library  of  Hawaii,"  the  gift  of  Carnegie,  was 
open  to  the  public,  absorbing  the  Territorial  Library  and 
housing,  also,  the  "Historical  Society's  Library"  on  its 
fireproof  shelves. 

The  King's  Daughters  Home,  at  Kaimuki,  for  the 
aged,  was  completed  in  1916. 

The  Young  Hotel,  stretching  from  street  to  street  in 
the  heart  of  the  city,  and  the  Moana  Hotel,  almost  over- 
hanging the  sea  at  Waikiki,  are  filled  with  tourists. 

New  wharfs  at  Honolulu,  Hilo,  and  Mahukona  have 
been  built. 

The  great  floating  Drydock  at  Pearl  Harbor  and  the 
villages  that  have  sprung  up  as  if  by  magic  at  Forts 
Schofield,  Shafter,  De  Russy,  and  Ruger,  to  house  our 


THE  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  335 

country's  defenders,  show  our  relation  to  the  United 
States  Government. 

At  Hilo  the  new  breakwater  begun  in  1910  has  ren- 
dered possible  new  wharves,  and  the  Hilo-Hamakua 
Railroad  has  dpened  up  plantations  and  homesteads  sit- 
uated in  the  most  picturesque  lands  of  Hawaii. 

The  Educational  Advance:  Educational  advance  dur- 
ing the  sixteen  years  of  the  twentieth  century  has  been 
great.  Many  open-air  bungalow  school  rooms  have  been 
built. 

Hawaiian  Mission  Children's  Society :  This  body  find- 
ing that  as  a  benevolent  society  their  gifts  were  dupli- 
cated by  themselves  in  the  Hawaiian  Board,  resolved  to 
change  the  constitution,  making  this  a  memorial  society. 
To  this  end  a  Charter  of  Incorporation  was  obtained 
on  August  14,  1907,  "for  the  purpose  of  perpetuating 
the  memory  of  the  missionary  Fathers  and  Mothers  who 
brought  Christianity  to  these  Islands,  also  of  promoting 
union  among  its  members,  of  cultivating  an  active  mis- 
sionary spirit,  stirring  them  up  to  good  deeds,  and  as- 
sisting in  the  support  of  good  works." 

The  Society  took  possession  of  the  "Old  Mission 
Home"  on  April  4,  1908,  and  in  1909  the  Chamber- 
lain House  was  added  to  their  equipment  and  to  these 
headquarters  have  been  gravitating  all  records,  letters, 
journals,  and  literary  productions  of  the  Fathers,  also 
photographs,  daguerreotypes  and  paintings,  with  old 
furniture  used  by  them  in  olden  times,  together  with 
the  photographs  of  their  descendants.  In  this  place  has 
been  prepared  by  the  Recorder,  R.  W.  Andrews,  a  book 
of  genealogies  of  the  missionaries  to  Hawaii  and  their 
descendants  to  the  fourth  generation;  and  from  these 


336  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII  ' 

headquarters  goes  yearly  a  report,  giving  name  and  resi- 
dence of  its  1004  members,  with  a  list  of  marriages, 
births  and  deaths  and  such  other  items  as  may  be  se- 
cured. From  a  special  fund  gifts  have  been  sent  yearly 
to  Micronesia,  Turkey,  and  Hawaiian  students  (in  our 
schools)  have  been  educated. 

The  direct  work  of  the  missionaries  continues  through 
the  Hawaiian  Board.  The  original  plant  is  still  thrifty, 
never  having  ceased  to  bear  fruit,  although  some  of  the 
time  its  growth  has  been  greatly  retarded  and  its  fruit- 
age small.  When  this  young  life  could  not  push  out 
through  the  Hawaiian  churches,  it  came  to  the  surface 
among  other  nationalities — the  Chinese,  the  Portuguese, 
and  a  strong  thrifty  branch  among  the  Japanese  race. 
The  kindergartens  and  social  settlements  are  charming 
spots  of  fresh  verdure.  Three  young  sprouts  appear 
among  the  14,000  Filipinos  and  a  small  growth  among 
the  Porto  Eicans  of  Hilo.  Notwithstanding  wars  and 
rumors  of  wars,  and  calls  for  help  from  poor  war-worn 
Europe  and  Asia,  there  were  ninety-seven  churches 
that  poured  gifts  into  the  treasury  of  the  Hawaiian 
Board  in  1915.  There  are  strong  plants  now  reaching 
away  out  from  the  churches  through  the  Men's  League 
and  attacking  health  problems,  social  evil  and  even  legis- 
lation, and  through  the  Anti-Saloon  League  closing 
saloons  and  lessening  the  curse  of  intemperance.  Some 
vigorous  growths  rooted  in  the  churches  are  emanating 
from  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.  and  the  Y.  W.  C.  A.  and  beauti- 
fying the  land,  and  through  the  Christian  Endeavor  ne  ^ 
shoots  from  old  roots  are  covering  with  life  many  de- 
serted churches,  paying  off  old  debts  and  keeping  alive 
the  faith  of  the  Fathers.    The  Boy  Scouts  and  Lincoln- 


THE  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  337 

Lee-Legions  are  offshoots,  also,  which  gladden  waste 
places  with  their  refreshing  vitality.  The  Hawaiians 
are  coming  to  their  own  and  the  gospel  vine  is  blossom- 
ing among  their  churches.  What  is  still  better,  the 
Bible  school  for  preparing  young  ministers  was  never 
more  promising,  and  this  in  itself  is  a  prophesy  of 
better  things  to  come,  ''When  the  whole  earth  shall  be 
covered  with  the  glory  of  God." 

Conclusion 

Let  us  close  with  a  moving  picture  of  the  history  con- 
tained in  this  book,  taking  our  stand  on  King  Street 
near  the  Kawaiahao  Church  of  Honolulu: 

The  time  is  1820.  You  face  the  ocean.  You  see  the 
busy  missionary,  training  his  ear  to  catch  new  sounds, 
record  new  words  and  struggle  with  the  translation  of 
the  Bible  into  a  new  language.  His  young  wife  in  a 
grass  hut  on  a  mat-covered  earth  floor  is  cooking  and 
washing  with  inadequate  appliances,  worn,  weary,  and 
sick  with  no  doctor  on  the  whole  islands.  She  holds 
meetings  with  the  mothers  who  tell  of  babes  they  have 
murdered. 

A  year  later :  The  missionaries  are  erecting  a  frame 
building  with  board  floors  and  glass  windows.  There  is 
a  large  cellar  where  stores  may  be  housed  in  safety,  a 
common  dining-room  for  the  four  families,  three  dis- 
tinguished guests,  five  children  besides  two  infants  and 
a  few  natives,  all  trying  hard  not  to  knock  elbows  or  be 
in  others  way.  The  preacher  stands  at  the  side  entrance 
with  the  lower  half  door  closed  for  a  pulpit,  trying  to 
preach  in  a  new  tongue  to  a  crowd  of  listening  natives. 
A  mother  is  in  a  grass  school  room  with  her  foot  on  the 


338  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

rocker  of  her  infant's  cradle  while  she  teaches  a  class  of 
native  boys  and  girls  to  read  and  write  their  own  lan- 
guage. Another  is  struggling  to  make  good  bread  from 
mouldy  flour,  or  preparing  an  evening  tea  for  friendly 
captains,  caring  for  a  sick  and  dying  sailor,  entertaining 
the  king  and  his  retinue,  making  dresses  for  the  queen 
and  ruffled  shirts  for  the  king  and  teaching  unskilled 
fingers  to  do  the  same. 

The  film  moves  on:  Ten  years  have  passed.  Soft 
blocks  of  coral,  cut  under  water,  have  been  carried  by 
men,  set  in  lime  mortar,  made  from  burnt  coral,  and 
there  is  the  Depository  where  all  the  business  of  the 
mission  is  done,  goods  from  Boston  received,  stored  in 
the  attic  and  cellar  and  sent  by  little  schooners  to  the 
various  stations.  Here  guests  were  received,  for  they 
practiced  the  precept  to  "welcome  the  coming  and  speed 
the  parting  guest." 

Five  years  more :  The  printing  press  is  taken  from  the 
grass  hut  and  housed  in  the  little  coral  printing  office, 
from  which  the  Bible,  fully  translated,  printed  and 
bound,  went  out  to  a  nation  already  taught  to  read  and 
love  the  Word  of  God. 

One  more  turn  of  the  film  brings  you  to  1840  and  the 
great  stone  church  that  takes  the  place  of  the  grass 
Chapel,  the  scene  of  so  many  conversions  and  triumphs 
of  the  gospel. 

Now  cherish  this  picture  of  devotion  and  self-sacrifice 
and  slowly  turn  to  the  hills,  and  while  you  turn  the 
years  are  reeled  off.  Near  a  century  has  passed  since 
the  beginning  and  1916  places  before  you  the  massive 
Mission  Memorial  Building  situated  in  the  center  of  a 
lovely  park  on  old  historic  ground  where  in  the  past 


THE  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  339 

successively  stood  the  doctor's  office,  the  pastor's  homCj 
and  a  Boarding  School  for  Hawaiian  Girls.  With  its 
wide  welcoming  approach  it  stretches  almost  from  street 
to  street. 

The  great  massive  pillars  and  arched  doorway  seem 
strong  and  dignified  as  the  Fathers  themselves.  The 
rock  foundation  is  symbolic  of  the  "Rock  of  Ages"  upon 
which  the  spiritual  structure  of  the  Fathers  was  built. 
The  bright  red  bricks  in  the  building,  pointed  off  in 
white  cement,  seem  to  indicate  the  individuals,  men, 
women,  and  children  who  have  helped  and  are  helping 
to  erect  the  "house  not  made  with  hands." 

From  the  Auditorium  comes  a  volume  of  praise,  in 
English  from  an  assembly  of  young  Hawaiians,  led  by  a 
dignified  Hawaiian  pastor.  The  Book  Rooms  and  the 
Publishing  Rooms  send  out  their  messages  in  print, 
and  from  these  headquarters  the  Chinese,  Japanese, 
Portuguese,  and  Filipino  Christian  workers  extend  liv- 
ing branches  throughout  the  islands,  Bible  schools 
flourish  and  churches  bear  fruit  that  will  be  enjoyed 
throughout  the  world.  As  the  electric  lights  streaming 
from  the  many  windows  have  eclipsed  the  whale-oil 
lamps  of  the  Fathers  so  shall  the  full  splendor  of  the 
Sun  of  Righteousness  banish  all  darkness  from  the  land. 


i 


APPENDIX 

FIRST  COMPANY 

Brig  Thaddeus,  arrived  at  Kailua,  Hawaii,  April  4, 1820. 

Eev.  Hiram  Bingham 
Mrs.  Sybil  Mosely  Bingham 

Eev.  Asa  Thurston 

Mrs.  Lucy  Goodale  Thurston 

Mr.  Samuel  Whitney 

Mrs.  Mercy  Partridge  Whitney 

Thomas  Holman,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Lucia  Euggles  Holman 

Mr.  Daniel  Chamberlain 
Mrs.  Chamberlain 

Mr.  Samuel  Ruggles 
Mrs.  Mary  Wells  Euggles 

Mr.  Elisha  Loomis,  Printer 

Mrs.  Maria  Theresa  Sartwell  Loomis 

SECOND  COMPANY 

Ship  Thames,  arrived  at  Honolulu,  April  27,  1823. 

Eev.  Artemas  Bishop 

Mrs.  Elizabeth  Edwards  Bishop 

Mrs.  Delia  Stone  Bishop ....  Ship  Parthian 

Eev.  William  Eichards 

Mrs.  Clarissa  Lyman  Eichards 

Eev.  Charles  Samuel  Stewart 
Mrs.  Harriet  B.  Tiffany  Stewart 

341 


S42  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Mr.  James  Ely- 
Mrs.  Louisa  Everst  Ely 

Mr.  Joseph  Goodrich 
Mrs.  Goodrich 

Abraham  Blatchley,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Jemima  Marvin  Blatchley 

Mr.  Levi  Chamberlain 

Mrs.  Maria  Patten  Chamberlain ....  Ship  Parthian 

THIRD   COMPANY 

Ship  Parthian,  arrived  at  Honolulu,  March  29,  1828. 

Eev.  Lorrin  Andrews 

Mrs.  Mary  Wilson  Andrews 

Eev.  Ephraim  Weston  Clark 
Mrs.  Mary  Kittredge  Clark 
Mrs.  Sarah  H.  Clark 

Eev.  Jonathan  Smith  Green 
Mrs.  Theodosia  Arnold  Green 
Mrs.  Asenath  Cargil  Green 

Eev.  Peter  Johnson  Gulick 

Mrs.  Fanny  Hinckley  Thomas  Gulick 

Gerritt  Parmlee  Judd,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Laura  Fish  Judd 

Mr.  Stephen  Shepard,  Printer 

Mrs.  Margaret  Caroline  Stow  Shepard 

Miss  Maria  C.  Ogden,  Teacher  . 

1 

FOURTH   COMPANY  \ 

Ship  New  England,  arrived  June  7,  1831. 

Eev.  Dwight  Baldwin,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Charlotte  Fowler  Baldwin 

Eev.  Sheldon  Dibble 

Mrs.  Maria  Tomlinson  Dibble 

2nd  Mrs.  Antoinette  Tomlinson  Dibble 


APPENDIX  S4S 

Eev.  Eeuben  Tinker 

Mrs.  Mary  Throop  Tinker 

Mr.  Andrew  Johnstone 
Mrs.  Johnstone 

FIFTH  COMPANY 

Ship  AvericJc,  arrived  April,  1833. 

Eev.  William  Patterson  Alexander 
Mrs.  Mary  Ann  McKinney  Alexander 

Eev.  Eichard  Armstrong 

Mrs.   Clarissa   Chapman  Armstrong 

Eev.  John  S.  Emerson 

Mrs.  Ursula  Sophia  Emerson 

Eev.  Cochran  Forbes 

Mrs.  Eebecca  Duncan  Forbes 

Eev.  Harvey  Eexford  Hitchcock 
Mrs.  Eebecca  Howard  Hitchcock 

Eev.  Lorenzo  Lyons 

Mrs.  Betsey  Curtis  Lyons 

Mrs.  Lucia  G.  Smith  Lyons ....  Bark  Mary  Frazier 

Eev.  David  Beldon  Lyman 
Mrs.  Sarah  Joiner  Lyman 

Eev.  Ephraim  Spalding 
Mrs.  Julia  Brooks  Spalding 

Alonzo  Chapin,  M.D. 

Mrs.  Mary  Ann  Tenney  Chapin 

Mr.  Edmund  H.  Eogers,  Printer 

Mrs.  Mary  Ward  Eogers ....  Ship  Parthian 

Mrs.  Elizabeth  Hitchcock  Eogers . .  Ship  Hellespont 

Mr.  Lemuel  Fuller,  Printer 

SIXTH  COMPANY 

Ship  Mentor,  arrived  April,  1833. 

Eev.  Benjamin  Wyman  Parker 

Mrs.  Mary  Elizabeth  Barker  Parker 


344  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

Eev.  Lowell  Smith 

Mrs.  Abba  W.  Tenney  Smith 

SEVENTH  COMPANY 

Ship  Hellespont,  arrived  May,  1835. 

Eev.  Titus  Coan 

Mrs.  Fidelia  Church  Coan 

2iid  Mrs.  Lydia  Bingham  Coan 

Mr.   Henry  Dimond,   Bookbinder 
Mrs.  Ann  Maria  Anner  Dimond 

Mr.  Edwin  Oscar  Hall,  Printer  and  Assistant  Cir- 
cular Agent 
Mrs.  Sarah  Lynn  Williams  Hall 
2nd  Mrs.  M.  L.  D.  Hall 

Miss  Lydia  Brown,  Teacher 

EIGHTH   COMPANY 

Bark  Mary  Frazier,  arrived  June,  1837. 

Eev.  Isaac  Bliss 

Mrs.  Emily  Curtis  Bliss 

Rev.  Daniel  Toll  Conde 
Mrs.  Andelusia  Lee  Conde 

Rev.  Mark  Ives 

Mrs.  Mary  Anna  Brainerd  Ives 

Rev.  Thomas  Lafon,  M.D. 

Mrs.  Sophia  Louisa  Parker  Lafon 

Mr.  Edward  Johnson 
Mrs.  Lois  S.  Hoyt  Johnson 
Seth  Lathrop  Andrews,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Parmelly  Pierce  Andrews 

Mr.  Edward  Bailey,  Teacher 
Mrs.  Caroline  Hubbard  Bailey 


APPENDIX  345 

Mr.  Samuel  Northrup  Castle,  Secretary  Agent  of 

the  Mission  many  years 
Mrs.  Angeline  Loraine  Tenney  Castle 
2nd  Mrs.  Mary  Tenney  Castle 

Mr.  Amos  Starr  Cooke 

Mrs.  Juliette  Montague  Cooke 

Mr.  Horton  Owen  Knapp,  Teacher 
Mrs.  Charlotte  Close  Knapp 

Mr.  Edwin  Locke 

Mrs.  Martha  Laurens  Eowell  Locke 

Eev.  Charles  McDonald 

Mrs.  Harriet  Treadwell  Halstead  McDonald 

Mr.  Bethuel  Munn,  Teacher 
Mrs.  Louisa  Clark  Munn 

Mr.  William  Sanford  Van  Duzee,  Teacher 
Mrs.  Oral  Hobart  Van  Duzee 

Mr.  Abner  Wilcox 

Mrs.  Lucy  Eliza  Hart  Wilcox 

Miss  Marcia  Maria  Smith,  Teacher 

NINTH  COMPANY 

Ship  Gloucester,  arrived  May  22,  1841. 

Eev.  Daniel  Dole 

Mrs.  Emily  H.  Ballard  Dole 

2nd  Mrs.  Charlotte  Knapp  Dole 

Eev.  Elias  Bond 

Mrs.  Ellen  Mariner  Howell  Bond 

Eev.  John  D.  Paris 

Mrs.  Mary  Grant  Paris 

2nd  Mrs.  Mary  Carpenter  Paris 

Mr.  WiUiam  Harrison  Eice,  Teacher 

Mrs.  Mary  Sophia  Hyde  Eice 


S46  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

TENTH  COMPANY 

Arrived  about  1842. 

James  W.  Smith,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Millicent  K.  Smith 

Eev.  George  Berkley  Eowell 
Mrs.  Malvina  J.  Chapin  Eowell 

ELEVENTH  COMPANY 

Arrived  about  1843. 

Rev.  Asa  Bowen  Smith 

Mrs.  Sarah  Gilbert  White  Smith 

TWELFTH  COMPANY 

Brig  Globe,  arrived  about  May,  1844. 

Rev.  Eliphalet  Whittlesey 

Mrs.  Elizabeth  Keene  Whittlesey 

Rev.  Timothy  Dwight  Hunt 
Mrs.  Mary  Hodge  Hunt 

Rev.  John  Fawcett  Pogue 
Mrs.  Maria  K.  Whitney  Pogue 

Rev.  Claudius  Buchanan  Andrews 
Mrs.  Anna  Seward  Gilson  Andrews 
2nd  Mrs.  Samantha  G.  Andrews 

THIRTEENTH  COMPANY 

Ship  Samoset,  arrived  about  February  26,  1848. 

Rev.  Samuel  Gelston  Dwight 

Rev.  Henry  Kinney  J 

Mrs.  Maria  Louisa  Walworth  Kinney  " 

FOURTEENTH  COMPANY 

Ship  Chaica,  arrived  about  December,  1854. 

Rev.  William  Cornelius  Shipman 
Mrs.  Jane  Stobie  Shipman 


APPENDIX  347 

FIFTEENTH  COMPANY 

Arrived  about  1855. 

Eev.  William  Otis  Baldwin 
Mrs.  Mary  Proctor  Baldwin 

INDIVIDUAL  ARRIVALS 

Arrived  about  September,  1860. 

Eev.  Cyrus  Taggart  Mills 
Mrs.  Susan  Lincoln  Mills 

Arrived  about  March,  1849. 

Charles  Hinckley  Wetmore,  M.D. 
Mrs.  Lucy  Sheldon  Taylor  Wetmore 

Arrived  about  September,  1855. 

Mr.  William  Avery  Spooner 
Mrs.  Eliza  Ann  Boynton  Spooner 

BORN  IN  HAWAII 

Eev.  Anderson  Oliver  Forbes 

Mrs.  Maria  Pattern  Chamberlain  Forbes 

Eev.  Luther  Halsey  Gulick 

Mrs.  Louisa  Lewis  Gulick  (Born  in  New  York  City) 

Eev.  Orramel  Hinckley  Gulick 
Mrs.  Ann  Eliza  Clark  Gulick 

Prof.  William  De  Witt  Alexander 
Mrs.  Abbie  Baldwin  Alexander 

Eev.  Sereno  Edwards  Bishop 
Mrs.  Cornelia  A.  Sessions  Bishop 

Missionaries  of  the  American  Board  to  Micronesia,  whose 
base  of  supplies  was  Honolulu,  and  whose  principal  avenue 
of  connection  with  the  world  was  the  missionary  vessel, 
Morning  Star: 


348  THE  PILGRIMS  OF  HAWAII 

MISSION  TO  MICEONESIA 

Missionaries 

Arrived  at  Kusaie,  August,  1852. 

Eev.  Benjamin  Galen  Snow 
Mrs.  Lydia  Vose  Buck  Snow 

Eev.  Luther  Halsey  Gulick,  M.D.  f  Also  mentioned  aa 
Mrs.  Louisa  Lewis  Gulick  |     iiwaT"""  ^ 

Eev.  Albert  A.  Sturges 
Mrs.  Susan  Mary  Thompson  Sturges 

Arrived  at  Ponape  February,  1855. 

Eev.  Edward  Toppin  Doane 
Mrs.  Sarah  Wells  Wilbur  Doane 
2nd  Mrs.  Clara  Hale  Strong  Doane 

Arrived  at  Ponape  October,  1855. 

Eev.  George  Pierson,  M.D. 

Mrs.  Nancy  Annette  Shaw  Pierson 

Arrived  at  Ponape  September,  1857. 

Eev.  Hiram  Bingham,  2nd 

Mrs.  Minerva  Clarissa  Brewster  Bingham 

Arrived  at  Ponape  September,  1858. 

Eev.  Ephraim  Peter  Eoberts 

Mrs.  Myra  Holman  Farrington  Eoberts 


i 


INDEX 


This  Index  limits  itself  largely  to  such  Hawaiian  names  and  places 
as  are  referred  to  in  the  preceding  pages.  As  a  rule,  the  names  of 
the  Missionaries  have  not  been  presented  here  because  they  appear 
in  full  in  the  Appendix,  and  because  they  receive  such  frequent 
mention  in  the  extended  quotations  which  form  the  body  of  the  book. 


Adams,    (Governor),    111   ,130, 

132,  145,  178 
Allen,  259 

Armstrong,  S.  C,  56,  298 
Auhea,  (Kekauluohi),  185,  186 
Auna,  95 

Babcock,  (Capt.),  83 
Bartemeus,  155,  163,  183,  220, 

221,  222 
Barton,  J.  L.,  6 
Bennet,  91,  95,  98 
Bicknell,  59,  272 
Bishop,  C.  R.,  257 
Blanchard,  (Capt.),  72,  75,  80 
Blonde,  (Ship),  106 
Boki,  (Governor),  81, 84,  89, 105, 

127 
Buckle,  (Capt.)  114 
Butler,  B.  F.,  174 
Byron,  Lord,  104,  106 
Byron's  Bay,  182 

California,  179,  243,  256,  273 
Carohne  Islands,  257,  260 
Carrysfort,  H.  B.  M.  S.,  216 
Charlton,  98,  106 
Clark,  N.  G.,  302,  303,  304 
Constellation,  U.  S.  S.,  217,  218 


Cook,  (Capt.),  18,  40,  84 
Cyane,  U.  S.  S.,  238 

Damon,  S.  C,  295,  315,  316 

DieU,  John,  148 

Dillon,  259 

Dole,  S.  B.,  307,  309 

Dublin,  H.  B.  M.  S.,  216,  218 

Du  Pont,  U.  S.  S.,  238 

EUis,  Wm.,  17,  33,  36,  48,  91,  95, 

96,  98,  99 
Evarts,  J.,  110 

Fatuhiwa,  (Marquesas),  271 

Geddie,  231 
George  IV,  (King),  107 
Gilbert  Islands,  257 
Grimes,  (Capt.),  98 
Guhek,  L.  H.,  54,  312,  319 

Haahlio,  208 

Haiku,  183 

Hawahewa,  77 

Hawaiian  Evangehcal  Associa- 
tion, 37,  276,  279,  312,  314 

Hawaiian  Mission  Children's 
Society,  312,  335 


349 


350 


INDEX 


Hewahewa,  77 

Hill,  Henry,  232 

Hilo  Boarding   School,    55,    56, 

154,  181, 190,  275,  277 
HoapiU,  111,  114,  156,  169,  184, 

189 
Holmes,  84 

Honolii,  John,  25,  29,  30,  92,  131 
Hopu,  Thomas,  25,  29,  30,  71,  74, 

76,  79,  80,  97 
Hunnewell,  James,  74,  91 

li,  John,  186,  205,  262 
li,  Sarah,  229 
Independence,  U.  S.  S.,  243 

Jones,  (Consul),  89 
Jubilee,  (Fiftieth  Year),  302 

Kaahumanu,  34,  43,  44,  48,  95, 

96,  97,  104,  105,  106,  111,  113, 

122,  128,  134,  146 
Kaikioewa,  101,  185 
KaiU,  244 
Kalakaua,    David,    (King),    57, 

185,  304,  305,  306,  307 
Kalama,  S.  P.,  193 
Kalanimoku,  75,   99,    104,    106, 

107,  108 
Kamakau,  102 
Kamamalu,  43,   104 
Kamehameha,  I.,  21,  82 
Kamehameha  II.,  (Liholiho),  41, 

42,  43,  48,  49,  76,  78,  83,  89, 

90,  91,  107,  176 
Kamehameha    III.,     (Kauikea- 

ouh),  43,  44,  46,  49,  107,  184, 

205,  304 
Kamehameha    IV.,    (Alexander 

LihoUho),  57,  185,  304 
Kamehameha  V.,  (Lot),  57,  305 
Kamehameha  Schools,  51,  320 


Kaniau,  107 

Kapa,  (Tapa),  228 

Kapiolani,  49,  50,  96,  102,  103, 

108,  129,  130,  192 
Kapule,  108 
Kaulia,  62 

Kaumualii,  25,  30,  82,  89,  95,  97 
Kauwealoha,    Samuel,   58,   231, 

269,  271,  272,  304 
Kawaiahao  Church,  156, 249, 303 
Kawaiahao    Female    Seminary, 

319 
Kealakekua  Church,  197 
Kearney,  (Commodore),  217,218 
Keawe,  65,  66 
Keeaumoku,  79 
Kekauluohi,  50,  108,  186 
Kekela,  James,  58,  59,  60,  232, 

269,  271,  296 
Kekuanaoa,  (Governor),  43,  50 
Keopuolani,  48 
Kilauea,  49 

Kinau,  50,  139,  146,  185 
Kohala  Boys  School,  212,  224, 

320 
Konohiki,  40 
Kuaea,  Moses,  19,  302 
Kuakini,  123,  127 
Kuhio,  96 

Laanui,  108,  139 

Lahainalima,  55,   56,   149,   153, 

175,  181,  182,  231,  317 
Lama  Hawaii,  (first  newspaper), 

153 
Laplace,  (Capt.),  174 
L'Artemise,  (Frigate),  174 
Liliuokalani,  (Queen),  51,  57,  307 
Locke,  E.,  190,  206,  210 
Lunalilo,  (King),  57,  185,  305 

Malo,  David,  205,  269,  276 


INDEX 


351 


Marin,  81 

Marquesas,  39,  58,  59,  91,  144, 

232,  270,  271,  273,  285,  312 
Matunui,  270,  271 
Mauna  Kea,  16,  73 
Mauna  Loa,  196,  253,  311 
Measles,  242 
Meek,  (Capt.),  83 
Micronesia,   54,   267,  268,  270, 

279,  286,  287,  297 
MUls  School,  319 
Montreal,  (Ship),  254 
Morning  Star,  282,  283,  284,  286, 

287,  295,  296 

Naihe,  96,  111 
Naomi,  232 
New  Treaty,  209 

Obookiah,  24 
Oleson,  W.  B.,  311,  320 
Opiia,  107 
Oregon,  178,  198 

Pauahi,  Bernice,  51,  185,  256 
Paulet,  Lord  George,  213 
Perrin,  259 

Perry,  (Commodore),  276 
Pigot,  (Capt.),  82 
Prohibition,  205,  213,  218 


Punahou  School,  53,  56, 191, 192, 

206,  213,  239,  260 
Pursevant,  (Ship),  259 

Revival,  The,  225 
Rooke,  Emma,  51,  304 
Royal  School,  56,  180,  185,  187, 
205,  265 

Sandalwood,  126,  329 
Scriptures,  219 
Severance,  259,  261 
Simpson,  Sir  George,  210 
Stockton,  Betsey,  99 

Taylor,  T.  E.,  261,  262,  270 
Tenui,  William,  25,  29,  30 
Thaddeus,  (Brig),  71,  147,  297 
Theological  Training  School,  317 
Thomas,  Admiral,  216.  218 
Tyerman,  91,  95,  98 

Victoria,  186     . 
Victoria,  (Packet),  288 

Wailuku  Girls  School,  56,  156, 

181,  231 
Wilkes,  Commodore,  200 
Winship,  81 
WylUe,  R.  C,  232 

Young,  John,  42,  129,  135,  205 


Printed  in  tht  United  States  of  America 


Date  Due 

HnllilllilUliiiMlTTiif  < 

m 

PRINTED 

IN  U.  S.  A. 

